Multilin f650

g GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin
F650
Digital Bay Controller
Instruction manual
GEK-106310N
Firmware version: 2.20

EnerVista F650 Setup version: 2.20
Copyright © 2005 GE Multilin
GE Multilin GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue Avda. Pinoa, 10
L6E 1B3 Markham, ON -CANADA 48170 Zamudio SPAIN
T (905) 294 6222 F (905) 294 8512 T +34 94 485 88 00 F +34 94 485 88 45
E [email protected] E [email protected]
Internet: www.GEMultilin.com
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-4
1.1.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................. 1-6
1.2 OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO 650 FAMILY OF RELAYS ............................................... 1-7
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-7
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-8
1.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE ............................................................ 1-8
1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 1-10
1.3.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 1-10
1.3.3 CONNECTING WITH THE UNIT ..................................................................... 1-15
1.3.4 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-16
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW

2.1.1 F650 OVERVIEW............................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 SUMMARY
2.2.1 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS ................................................... 2-2
2.3 ORDERING CODE
2.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.1 PROTECTION UNITS........................................................................................ 2-6
2.4.2 CONTROL........................................................................................................ 2-16
2.4.3 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-17
2.4.4 USER –PROGRAMABLE ELEMENTS ............................................................ 2-19
2.4.5 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-20
2.4.6 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-21
2.4.7 REAL TIME CLOCK......................................................................................... 2-23
2.4.8 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-23
2.4.9 CONTROL POWER SUPPLY .......................................................................... 2-24
2.4.10 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-24
2.4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................... 2-25
2.4.12 PACKAGING AND WEIGHT............................................................................ 2-26
2.4.13 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-26
2.4.14 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-26
2.5 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
3. HARDWARE 3.1 MODULE DESCRIPTION

3.2 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
3.2.1 MOUNTING........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 REAR DESCRIPTION........................................................................................ 3-5
3.3 WIRING
3.3.1 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS............................................................................. 3-9
3.3.2 DIGITAL INPUTS WITH TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION .................................. 3-9
3.3.3 CABLE/FIBER ETHERNET BOARD.................................................................. 3-9
3.4 OPTIC FEATURES
3.5 TRANSCEIVER OPTICAL POWER BUDGET VERSUS LINK LENGTH
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. HUMAN INTERFACES, 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

SETTINGS & ACTUAL 4.1.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 MAIN SCREEN ...................................................................................................4-2
VALUES
4.1.3 STARTING COMMUNICATION..........................................................................4-3
4.1.4 FILE MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................4-7
4.1.5 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP MENUS STRUCTURE ............................................4-12
4.1.6 FILE MENU OVERVIEW ..................................................................................4-13
4.1.7 SETTINGS MENU OVERVIEW ........................................................................4-17
4.1.8 ACTUAL VALUES MENU OVERVIEW.............................................................4-26
4.1.9 OPERATIONS MENU OVERVIEW ..................................................................4-31
4.1.10 COMMUNICATION MENU OVERVIEW...........................................................4-31
4.1.11 SECURITY MENU OVERVIEW........................................................................4-32
4.1.12 VIEW MENU OVERVIEW.................................................................................4-32
4.1.13 HELP MENU OVERVIEW ................................................................................4-32
4.2 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)
4.2.1 DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-33
4.2.2 FRONT LED INDICATORS ..............................................................................4-34
4.2.3 PUSHBUTTONS..............................................................................................4-34
4.2.4 FRONT PORT AND COVER SEALING SYSTEM............................................4-35
4.2.5 TEXT MENUS...................................................................................................4-36
4.2.6 GRAPHIC DISPLAY .........................................................................................4-55
4.3 WEB SERVER
4.3.1 HOME ...............................................................................................................4-64
4.3.2 SNAPSHOT EVENTS......................................................................................4-65
4.3.3 CONTROL EVENTS ........................................................................................4-66
4.3.4 ALARMS ..........................................................................................................4-67
4.3.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY ..........................................................................................4-68
4.3.6 FAULT REPORT .............................................................................................4-69
4.3.7 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................4-70
4.3.8 METERING .......................................................................................................4-71
5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETTING MAIN MENU.......................................................................................5-1
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 COMMUNICATION SETTINGS..........................................................................5-3
5.2.2 MODBUS USER MAP ........................................................................................5-6
5.2.3 FAULT REPORT ................................................................................................5-6
5.2.4 OSCILLOGRAPHY .............................................................................................5-9
5.2.5 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-12
5.2.6 DEMAND .........................................................................................................5-14
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 GENERAL SETTINGS......................................................................................5-20
5.3.2 FLEX CURVES .................................................................................................5-20
5.3.3 BREAKER.........................................................................................................5-22
5.3.4 SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................................5-24
5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
5.4.1 CHANGE OF SETTING TABLES IN F650 ELEMENTS ...................................5-25
5.4.2 INVERSE TIME CURVES CHARACTERISTICS..............................................5-29
5.4.3 PHASE CURRENT ...........................................................................................5-39
5.4.4 NEUTRAL CURRENT ......................................................................................5-50
5.4.5 GROUND CURRENT .......................................................................................5-56
5.4.6 SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT....................................................................5-59
5.4.7 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ................................................................5-64
5.4.8 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ....................................................................................5-65
5.4.9 POWER ............................................................................................................5-70
5.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.5.1 SETTING GROUP ............................................................................................5-77
5.5.2 UNDERFREQUENCY ELEMENT (81U)...........................................................5-78
5.5.3 OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENT (81O) .............................................................5-78
5.5.4 SYNCHRONISM CHECK ELEMENT - SYNCHROCHECK (25) ......................5-79
2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5.5 AUTORECLOSE (79)....................................................................................... 5-87

5.5.6 BREAKER FAILURE ELEMENT (50BF).......................................................... 5-94
5.5.7 VT FUSE FAILURE ELEMENT (VTFF) ........................................................... 5-97
5.5.8 BROKEN CONDUCTOR.................................................................................. 5-98
5.5.9 LOCKED ROTOR ............................................................................................ 5-99
5.6 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.6.1 INPUT/OUTPUT PLACEMENT...................................................................... 5-101
5.6.2 CONTROL SETTINGS FOR INPUTS/OUTPUTS.......................................... 5-102
5.6.3 INPUTS .......................................................................................................... 5-104
5.6.4 OUTPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-106
5.6.5 CIRCUIT SUPERVISION AND CONTACT SEAL-IN CIRCUITS ................... 5-108
5.6.6 ANALOG BOARDS SPECIFIC SETTINGS ................................................... 5-118
5.6.7 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-119
5.6.8 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-119
5.7 TESTINGS
5.7.1 FORCE IO –INPUT TESTING ....................................................................... 5-120
5.7.2 FORCE IO –OUTPUT TESTING ................................................................... 5-120
5.8 RELAY CONFIGURATION
5.8.1 OUTPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-121
5.8.2 LEDS.............................................................................................................. 5-122
5.8.3 OPERATIONS................................................................................................ 5-123
5.8.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-127
5.8.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY ........................................................................................ 5-128
5.8.6 CONTROL EVENTS ...................................................................................... 5-129
5.8.7 SWITCHGEAR .............................................................................................. 5-131
5.8.8 HMI (HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE)......................................................... 5-132
5.9 LOGIC CONFIGURATION (PLC EDITOR)
5.9.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................ 5-135
5.9.2 THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................................................ 5-136
5.9.3 MAIN MENU................................................................................................... 5-139
5.9.4 CONFIGURATION GENERATION ................................................................ 5-140
5.9.5 GENERATION OF LIBRARIES ..................................................................... 5-141
5.9.6 EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION ....................................................................... 5-143
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 FRONT PANEL

6.1.1 LEDS.................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 OPERATION BITS ............................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.2 BREAKER .......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 PROTECTION.................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.4 CONTROL ELEMENTS ..................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.5 PROTECTION SUMMARY .............................................................................. 6-13
6.2.6 SNAPSHOT EVENTS SUMMARY................................................................... 6-14
6.2.7 MODBUS USER MAP...................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.8 SWITCHGEAR STATUS.................................................................................. 6-16
6.2.9 CALIBRATION ................................................................................................. 6-17
6.2.10 FLEX CURVES ................................................................................................ 6-18
6.2.11 SYSTEM INFO................................................................................................. 6-18
6.2.12 RECORD STATUS .......................................................................................... 6-18
6.3 METERING
6.3.1 PRIMARY VALUES.......................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.2 SECONDARY VALUES ................................................................................... 6-25
6.3.3 PHASOR DIAGRAM ........................................................................................ 6-27
6.3.4 FREQUENCY................................................................................................... 6-27
6.3.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 6-28
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1 EVENT RECORDER........................................................................................ 6-34
6.4.2 WAVEFORM CAPTURE .................................................................................. 6-36
6.4.3 FAULT REPORT.............................................................................................. 6-37
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER ............................................................................................... 6-39

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.1 IEC61850 GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (GSSE)
7.1.1 REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 REMOTE OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................7-4
7.2 IEC 61850 PROFILE FOR F650
7.2.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................7-6
7.2.2 ACSI CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ...............................................................7-6
7.2.3 LOGICAL NODES ............................................................................................7-11
7.2.4 COMMON DATA CLASS..................................................................................7-29
7.2.5 DATASETS .......................................................................................................7-44
7.2.6 MAPPINGS BETWEEN TOC CURVES IN IEC 61850 AND F650 RELAY
IMPLEMENTATION. 7-46
7.2.7 UNIDADES Y ESCALAS DE LOS DATOS ANALÓGICOS .............................7-47
8. SECURITY 8.1 ADDING USERS

8.1.1 USER RIGHTS ...................................................................................................8-1
8.2 CHANGING PASSWORDS
8.3 ENABLING SECURITY
8.4 LOGING INTO ENERVISTA 650 SETUP
9. BOOTCODE AND 9.1 INTRODUCTION

FIRMWARE UPGRADE 9.1.1 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS ...................................................................9-2
9.2 BOOT CODE UPGRADE
9.3 FIRMWARE VERSION UPGRADE
9.3.1 FIRMWARE UPGRADE .....................................................................................9-9
9.4 STEP LIST SUMMARY FOR VERSIONS 1.70 AND LATER
9.4.1 BOOT CODE UPGRADE (*).............................................................................9-12
9.4.2 FIRMWARE UPGRADE (*)...............................................................................9-12
10. COMMISSIONING 10.1 VISUAL INSPECTION

10.2 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ON THE POWER SUPPLY NETWORK
10.3 ISOLATION TESTS
10.4 INDICATORS
10.5 POWER SUPLY TESTING
10.6 COMMUNICATIONS
10.7 VERIFICATION OF MEASURE
10.7.1 VOLTAGES ......................................................................................................10-7
10.7.2 PHASE CURRENTS.........................................................................................10-7
10.7.3 ACTIVE, REACTIVE POWER, AND COSJ METERING ..................................10-8
10.7.4 FREQUENCY ...................................................................................................10-8
10.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
10.8.1 DIGITAL INPUTS..............................................................................................10-9
10.8.2 CONTACT OUTPUTS ....................................................................................10-10
10.8.3 CIRCUIT CONTINUITY SUPERVISION INPUTS ..........................................10-10
10.8.4 LATCHING CIRCUITS....................................................................................10-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
10.9 CONNECTIONS FOR TESTING PROTECTION ELEMENTS

10.10 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH, 50PL, 50N, 50G Y 50SG)
10.11 INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G Y 46)
10.12 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG)
10.12.1 67P ELEMENT............................................................................................... 10-14
10.12.2 67N ELEMENT............................................................................................... 10-14
10.12.3 67G ELEMENT .............................................................................................. 10-15
10.12.4 67SG ELEMENT ............................................................................................ 10-16
10.13 UNDERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (27P, 27X)
10.13.1 27P ELEMENT............................................................................................... 10-17
10.13.2 27X ELEMENT............................................................................................... 10-17
10.14 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47)
10.14.1 59P ELEMENT............................................................................................... 10-18
10.14.2 59X ELEMENT............................................................................................... 10-18
10.14.3 59NH AND 59NL ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 10-19
10.14.4 47 ELEMENT - NEG SEQ OV ....................................................................... 10-20
10.15 FREQUENCY ELEMENTS (81O/81U)
10.16 RECLOSER (79)
10.16.1 RECLOSING CYCLE ..................................................................................... 10-22
10.16.2 RECLOSER STATUSES ............................................................................... 10-23
10.16.3 EXTERNAL RECLOSE INITIATION .............................................................. 10-23
10.17 THERMAL IMAGE ELEMENT (49)
11. APPLICATION EXAMPLES 11.1 EXAMPLE1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS

PROCEDURE
11.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EXERCISE ............................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 PROCEDURE TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE RELAY ................................. 11-1
11.1.3 PROCEDURE TO SET THE PROTECTION FUNCTION ................................ 11-3
11.1.4 TEST ................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.2 EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION + RECLOSING SETTINGS
PROCEDURE
11.2.2 PROCEDURE TO COMMUNICATE THE RELAY ........................................... 11-5
11.2.3 PROCEDURE TO SET THE PROTECTION FUNCTION ................................ 11-5
11.2.4 PROCEDURE TO SET THE RECLOSER ....................................................... 11-6
11.2.5 PROCEDURE TO SET THE SYNCHRO CHECK ........................................... 11-6
11.3 EXAMPLE Nº 3 – PROCEDURE TO SET AN OPERATION
11.3.2 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.3 TEST .............................................................................................................. 11-10
12. FREQUENTLY ASKED 12.1 COMMUNICATIONS

QUESTIONS 12.2 PROTECTION
12.3 CONTROL AND HMI
12.4 RELAY CONFIGURATION
13. TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. LOGIC OPERANDS
B. MODBUS PROTOCOL B.1 ACCESS TO F650 DATA

B.2 MODBUS F650
B.2.1 FUNCTIONS USED ........................................................................................... B-2
B.2.2 PHYSICAL LAYER ............................................................................................ B-3
B.2.3 DATA LINK LAYER ........................................................................................... B-4
B.2.4 GENERIC READING ......................................................................................... B-5
B.2.5 GENERIC WRITING .......................................................................................... B-6
B.2.6 FUNCTION CODES ......................................................................................... B-7
B.2.7 EXCEPTIONS AND ERROR RESPONDS ........................................................ B-8
B.3 DATA TYPE
B.4 MODBUS APPENDIX
B.4.1 DATA MANAGEMENT .................................................................................... B-10
B.4.2 WRITING SETTINGS ...................................................................................... B-11
B.4.3 SNAP-SHOT EVENTS .................................................................................... B-12
B.4.4 OPERATIONS ................................................................................................. B-15
B.5 OUTPUT WRITING
B.5.1 CONTROL EVENTS ........................................................................................ B-17
B.5.2 EVENT STRUCTURE...................................................................................... B-18
B.6 EVENTS STATUS REQUEST (ALARMS)
B.6.1 CONTROL EVENTS RETRIEVAL FROM THE COMMAND LINE ................. B-21
B.6.2 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ............................................................................ B-22
B.6.3 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION ..................................................................... B-23
B.6.4 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF EVENTS (ALARMS)........................................... B-24
B.6.5 VIRTUAL INPUTS WRITING ........................................................................... B-25
B.6.6 USER MAP ...................................................................................................... B-26
B.6.7 RETRIEVING OSCILOGRAPHY ..................................................................... B-27
B.6.8 TIME SYNCHRONIZATION ............................................................................ B-28
B.6.9 ENQUEUEING MESSAGES .......................................................................... B-29
B.6.10 TRACES AND TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................. B-30
B.6.11 MODBUS CHECK FUNCTION ........................................................................ B-31
B.7 MEMORY MAP
C. DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL FOR C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL SETTINGS

F650 C.2 DNP 3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
C.3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
C.4 BINARY INPUT POINTS
C.5 DNP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES
C.5.1 CONFIGURING DNP USER MAP ................................................................... C-11
C.5.2 EXAMPLE OF CUSTOM BINARY INPUT POINTS MAP ................................ C-13
C.5.3 MULTIPLE DNP 3.0 MASTERS COMMUNICATION WITH F650................... C-15
C.6 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
C.7 BINARY COUNTERS
C.8 ANALOG INPUTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
D. IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1 INTRODUCTION

D.2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
D.3 BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
D.4 IEC 104 SETTINGS
D.5 IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST
E. FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC E.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

E.1.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS.....................................................................E-1
F. FACTORY DEFAULT F.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

CONFIGURATION F.2 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
G. MISCELLANEOUS G.1 F650 FIRMWARE REVISION HISTORY

G.2 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES 1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
1
To help ensure years of trouble free operation, please read through the following chapter for informa-
tion to help guide you through the initial installation procedures of your new relay.
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL OR USE THE RELAY, IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT ALL WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE REVIEWED TO HELP PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY,
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, AND/OR DOWNTIME.
CAUTION: THE OPERATOR OF THIS INSTRUMENT IS ADVISED THAT IF THE EQUIPMENT IS USED IN
A MANNER NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL, THE PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT
MAY BE IMPAIRED
Figure 1–1: FRONT VIEW OF F650 UNITS
a) COMMUNICATION BOARDS WITHDRAWAL / INSERTION
WARNING: MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION SHALL ONLY BE PERFORMED BY DULY QUAL-
IFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. FOR PERSONAL SECURITY PURPOSES, BEFORE ACCOMPLISHING
ANY WITHDRAWAL OR INSERTION OPERATION, THE RELAY MUST BE POWERED OFF AND ALL
THE REAR TERMINALS MUST BE POTENTIAL FREE. THE RELAY MUST BE GROUNDED USING THE
REAR GROUNDING SCREW.
The modular design of the relay allows withdrawal and insertion of the communication module.
Figure 1–2:: MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION shows the location of communication modules on the rear part of the
relay. Skilled personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of communication boards only after interrupting the relay
auxiliary voltage and ensuring that all the rear terminals are potential free.
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 1-1

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES 1 GETTING STARTED
Communication boards are installed on the rear of the unit, the upper port being reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN, and the lower port for the ETHERNET board in any of its configurations.
1
Figure 1–2: MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION
Before performing any of these actions, control power must be removed from the relay and all the relay rear terminals
must be potential free. A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid
electrostatic discharges that may cause damage to the electronic components.
WITHDRAWAL: Loose the small screws that keep the faceplate in place and extract the module.
INSERTION: Insert the module and press it firmly in the case, until it is completely fixed. After this, bolt the faceplate
screws and replace the control power. Check that the relay is fully operative.
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage in the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever this safety
rules are not followed.
1-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

b) MAGNETIC MODULE TERMINALS
1
Magnetic Module for AC
Currents and Voltage Inputs
Figure 1–3: REAR VIEW OF F650 UNIT
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage in the relay, connected equipment or personnel
whenever this safety rules are not followed.

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
1 Open the relay packaging and inspect the relay for physical damage.
Refer to the label on the side of the relay verifies that the model number is the correct model ordered.
Figure 1–4: IDENTIFICATION LABEL (A4455P6)
- Please ensure that you receive the following items with your relay:
• Mounting screws for rear terminals and for fixing the relay to a cabinet
• CD containing EnerVista F650 Setup software
• Wiring diagram
• Certificate of Compliance
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE
Multilin Home Page www.geindustrial.com/multilin.

Note: If there is any physical damage detected on the relay, or any of the contents listed are missing, please
contact GE Multilin immediately at:
1
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA:
GE MULTILIN
Av. Pinoa, 10
48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya (SPAIN)
Tel.: (34) 94-485 88 54, Fax: (34) 94-485 88 38
E-mail: [email protected]
AMERICA, ASIA AND AUSTRALIA:

GE MULTILIN
215, Anderson Avenue
L6E 1B3 Markham, ON (CANADA)
Tel.: +1 905 294 6222, Fax: +1 905 201 2098
E-mail: [email protected]
The information provided herein does not intend to cover all details of variations of the equipment nor does it take
into account the circumstances that may be present in your installation, operating or maintenance activities.
Should you wish to receive additional information, or for any particular problem that cannot be solved by referring
to the information contained herein, please contact GENERAL ELECTRIC MULTILIN.

1.1.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1 The F650 ground screw shown in Figure 1–5:: LOCATION OF GROUNDING SCREW must be correctly
grounded.
Figure 1–5: LOCATION OF GROUNDING SCREW

Before establishing the communication with a F650 unit through the front serial port, please ensure that the computer is
grounded.
In case of using a laptop, it is recommended not to have it connected to its power supply. The reason for this is that in many
cases it might not be correctly grounded either due to the power supply or to the connector cables used.
This is required not only for personal protection, but also for avoiding a voltage difference between the relay serial
port and the computer port, which could produce permanent damage either to the computer or the relay.
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage in the relay or connected equipment whenever this elemental
safety rule is not followed.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 OVERVIEW
1.2OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO 650 FAMILY OF RELAYS
This platform of relays has been designed to meet the goals that are appearing nowadays in the environment of new
1
substations.
Historically, protection, control and metering functions have been performed by electromechanical elements at the
beginning, then static devices, and finally by digital equipment able to integrate all these functions in a single device, called
IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
These IEDs not only must be able to perform all functions related to system protection and control, but also, using high
speed communications, they must share information among them and send this information to control dispatch centers,
thus reducing the quantity of auxiliary elements and wiring up to 70%.
The F650 relay belongs to this new generation of devices, and can be easily incorporated in substation automation
schemes.
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
F650 units incorporate a series of interconnected modules to perform protection and control functions. Firstly, it includes a
group of AC transformers for retrieving current and voltage. These magnitudes, once digitized, are sent to a digital signal
processor (DSP), which performs metering functions and communicates with the main processor via a wide band bus. This
architecture liberates the main processor from performing real time metering, allowing a high sampling rate, of up to 64
samples per cycle, without interfering with global performance.
F650 relays are digital devices that include a CPU that can control multiple types of input and output signals.
INPUTS CPU OUTPUTS
Virtual Inputs Virtual Outputs

Protection Elements
BUS CAN BUS CAN
Contact Inputs
Contact Outputs
Analog inputs
Voltage & Current PLC
(logic) Remote CAN Bus
Remote CAN Bus
Inputs Outputs
LAN
Figure 1–6: F650 CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM
Contact Inputs/Outputs are signals associated to physical input/output contacts in the relay
Analog Inputs are signals coming from the inputs of current and voltage transformers, used for monitoring the
power system signals.
Remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs: are signals associated to physical input/output contacts from independent
modules connected to the 650 unit via a fiber optic CAN Bus.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. Control module that enables the unit configuration (assignment of
inputs/outputs) and the implementation of logic circuits.
Protection Elements: Relay protection elements, for example: Overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.

1.2 OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
1 The firmware (software embedded in the relay) has been designed using object oriented programming
techniques (OOP). These techniques are based on the use of objects and classes, and provide the software
architecture with the same characteristics as the hardware architecture, i.e., modularity, scalability and
flexibility.
1.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE
The main processor performs protection, control, and communication functions, incorporating two internal pro-
cessors, one for generic use and a second one dedicated for communications.
A dedicated serial port is used for communication between the main processor and the human-machine inter-
face. Serial connection provides great immunity against electromagnetic disturbances, thus increasing system
safety.
All F650 units incorporate an RS232 serial port on the front of the relay. There is also a possibility to incorpo-
rate up to two additional communication modules on the rear.
One of the modules provides asynchronous serial communications, using different physical media (RS485,
plastic or glass fiber optic) depending on the selected model. The module incorporates two identical ports,
COM1 and COM2. COM2 port is multiplexed with the front port. Additionally, this module may incorporate a
glass fiber optic port for CAN BUS communications, used for the connection to the Remote CAN BUS I/O mod-
ule. This feature allows increasing up to 100% the I/O capability, when the maximum number of I/Os available
inside the relay (up to 32 inputs and 16 outputs) is not enough for a specific application.
Available options are:
Table 1–1: TABLE 1-1 REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1
Board Code Functionality
F Without additional communication ports
A Two RS485 ports
P Two Plastic F.O. ports
G Two Glass F.O. ports
X Two RS485 ports and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs
Y Two Plastic F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs
Z Two Glass F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs
The other module provides Ethernet communications (COM3 port), using 10/100BaseTX (self-negotiable speed) or
100BaseFX connectors, depending on the selected model. Most complete models include a double redundant 100BaseFX
fiber optic port. Redundancy is provided at a physical media level; the unit incorporates internally duplicated and
independent controllers for extended system reliability and accessibility.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 OVERVIEW
Available Options are:

Table 1–2: REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2 1
Board Functionality
Code
B One 10/100BaseTX port (self-negotiable speed)
C One 10/100BaseTX port and one 100BaseFX port.
D One 10/100BaseTX port and two 100BaseFX ports
For options C and D it is required to select the active physical media, by means of an internal selector inside the module.
The factory configuration for this selection is the 10/100BaseTX port.
Finally, internal communication with input and output modules is performed via an internal CAN bus, independent from the
one used for remote CAN BUS I/Os. This fact provides increased communication speed, as well as the possibility of
acknowledgement of modules, abnormalities, etc. As this is a serial port supporting a communications protocol, it provides
extraordinary immunity against external or internal disturbances.
Figure 1–7: COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE (B6816F1)

1.3 ENERVISTA F650 SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.3ENERVISTA F650 SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1 The EnerVista F650 Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values
because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista F650 Setup software to properly operate
on a PC:
• Pentium® class or higher processor (Pentium® II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
• Windows® NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or higher), Windows® 2000, Windows® XP
• Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher
• 64 MB of RAM (128 MB recommended)
• 40 MB of available space on system drive and 40 MB of available space on installation drive
• RS232C serial and Ethernet port for communications to the relay
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista F650 Setup are met (see previous section), use
the following procedure to install the EnerVista F650 Setup from the GE EnerVista CD.
1. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.

2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
Figure 1–8: LAUNCHPAD WINDOW
5. In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the “F650 Bay Controller” relay from the
Install Software window as shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or select
“CD” if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the F650.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA F650 SETUP SOFTWARE
Figure 1–9: ADD PRODUCT WINDOW
6. If “Web” option is selected, chose the F650 software program and release notes (if desired) from the list and click the
Download Now button to obtain the installation program.
Figure 1–10: WEB UPGRADE WINDOW
7. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-
click the installation program to install the EnerVista F650 Setup software.
8. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista F650 Setup will be installed.

9. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add EnerVista F650 Setup to the Windows start menu.
1 10. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the EnerVista F650 Setup software. When the Welcome window appears,
click on Next to continue with the installation procedure.
Figure 1–11: ENERVISTA F650 SETUP INSTALLATION
11. When the Choose Destination Location window appears, and if the software is not to be located in the default
directory, click Change… and type in the complete path name including the new directory name and click Next to
continue with the installation procedure.
Figure 1–12: ENERVISTA F650 SETUP INSTALLATION CONT.

12. The default program group where the application will be added to is shown in the Selected Program Folder window.
Click Next to begin the installation process, and all the necessary program files will be copied into the chosen directory.
1
Figure 1–13: SELECT PROGRAM FOLDER
13. To finish with the installation process, select the desired language for startup.
Figure 1–14: LANGUAGE WINDOW
14. Click Finish to end the installation. The F650 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.

Figure 1–15: ENERVISTA LAUNCHPAD
1.3.3 CONNECTING WITH THE UNIT
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the EnerVista F650 Setup software. Please refer to sec-
tion 4.1 in this manual for more information about the EnerVista F650 Setup software interface.
a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of
the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista F650 Setup software (available from the GE
EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for instal-
lation instructions).
2. Go to “Communication>Computer” and enter the following data referred to communications:
3. Select Control Type as MODBUS TCP/IP from the drop-down list. This option will display a num-
ber of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet communications.
4. Enter the relay IP address (from “Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Settings>Net-
work>IP ADDRESS”) in the IP Address field in MODBUS TCP/IP SETUP.
5. Enter the relay ModBus address (from “Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Set-
tings>ModBus Protocol>ModBus Address COM1/COM2 setting”) in the Unit Identifier (Slave
Address) field.
6. Enter the ModBus port address (from “Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Set-
tings>ModBus Protocol>ModBus Port Number” setting) in the ModBus Port field.
7. The Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to press the ON but-
ton to begin communicating.

b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION
Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of 1
the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista F650 Setup software (available from the GE
EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for instal-
lation instructions).
2. Go to “Communication>Computer” and enter the following data referred to communications:
3. Select Control Type as No Control Type from the drop-down list. This option will display a number
of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications.
4. Enter the relay Slave Address (“Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Settings>ModBus
Protocol” menu) in the Slave Address field.
5. Enter the physical communications parameters (Baudrate and parity settings) from “Set-
point>Product Setup >Communication Settings>Serial Ports” menu, in their respective fields.
6. The Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to press the ON but-
ton to begin communicating.
1.3.4 COMMUNICATIONS
To communicate with the relay via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight through” serial cable is used. The DB9
male end is connected to the relay and the DB9 or DB25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as
described in the figure below.
Direct connection to the Ethernet port will be carried out using a crossover cable. If this connection is performed through a
hub or switch, we will use direct Ethernet cable.
To communicate with the relay rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, an RS232/RS485 converter box is needed.
We recommend using the F485 converter, manufactured by GE. This converter box is connected to the computer using a
straight through serial cable. A shielded twisted pair (20, 22 or 24 AWG according to the American standards; 0.25, 0.34 or
0.5 mm2 according to the European standards) cable is used to connect the converter box to the relay rear communications
terminals. In order to minimize communication errors that could be caused by external noise, it is recommended to use a
shielded twist pair. In order to avoid loops where external currents could flow, the cable shield must be grounded only at
one end.
The converter box (-, +, GND) terminals are connected to the relay (SDA, SDB, GND) terminals respectively. For long
communications cables (longer than 1 km), the RS485 circuit must be terminated in a RC network (i.e. 120 ohm, 1 nF). This
circuit is shown on Figure 1–17:: RS485 CONNECTION FOR F650 UNITS, associated to text Zt(*).

Figure 1–16: RELAY- PC CONNECTION FOR RS232 FRONT PORT

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. For a correct operation, polarity must
be respected, although if it is not so, there is no danger to damage the unit. For instance, the relays must be connected with
all RS485 SDA terminals connected together, and all SDB terminals connected together. This may result confusing
sometimes, as the RS485 standard refers only to terminals named “A” and “B”, although many devices use terminals
named “+” and “-“.
As a general rule, terminals “A” should be connected to terminals “-“, and terminals “B” to “+”. The GND terminal should be
connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. Otherwise, it should be connected to the shield. Each
relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner
without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use
commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Do not use other
connection configuration different than the recommended.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.

Figure 1–17: RS485 CONNECTION FOR F650 UNITS


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1OVERVIEW 2.1.1 F650 OVERVIEW
The F650 is a protection, control, monitoring, metering and registering unit, suitable for many different applications, such as
main protection for distribution feeders and transmission lines, as well as backup protection for transformers, busbars,
capacitor banks, etc. The main features of F650 devices include:
• Directional overcurrent protection for phases, neutral, ground and sensitive ground
• Under and overvoltage protection
2
• Under and overfrequency protection
• Autorecloser
• Synchronism
• Metering
• Oscillography registers, fault reports, data logger
• Bay control (open/close commands, etc.)
• Bay mimic.
• Communications (RS232/RS485/fibre optic/Ethernet)
• Fully programmable front buttons, 15 LED’s and input/output contacts
Figure 2–1: FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

2.2 SUMMARY 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2SUMMARY
2.2.1 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE FUNCTION DEVICE FUNCTION

NUMBER NUMBER
2 25 Synchronism 51PV Phase Time Overcurrent with Voltage
Restraint (two elements, High and Low)
27P Phase Undervoltage 51SG Ground Time Overcurrent for sensitive
ground systems (measured from 5th
current transformer)
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage 59N Neutral Overvoltage (two elements, High
and Low)
32 Sensitive Directional Power 59P Phase Overvoltage
32FP Forward Power 59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
46 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 67P Phase Directional
47 Negative Sequence Overvoltage 67N Neutral directional
48 Locked Rotor 67G Ground Directional
49 Protection against Overload by thermal model 67SG Sensitive Ground Directional
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (measured 79 Automatic Recloser (Four shot recloser)
from 4th current transformer)
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (calculated 810 Overfrequency
from the phase currents)
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (two 81U Underfrequency
elements, High and Low)
50SG Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent for I2/I1 Broken Conductor
sensitive ground systems (measured from 5th
50ISG Isolated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 50BF Breaker Failure
(measured from 5th current transformer)
51G Ground Time Overcurrent (measured from 4th VTFF VT Fuse Failure
51N Neutral Time Overcurrent (calculated from the
phase currents)
Table 2–1: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS METERING COMMUNICATIONS

9 Analog Inputs: 5 current inputs (3 for Metering Current for phases, ground Front RS232 port, Two rear
phases, 1 for ground, 1 for sensitive and sensitive ground inputs RS485/fibre optic ports, 10/100 TX
ground), 4 voltage inputs (3 for phases, 1 and 100 FX Mbps Ethernet port
for busbar or auxiliary voltage)
Digital Programmable Contact Inputs (up Voltages phase to phase and phase ModBus Communications RTU
to 32) to ground and over TCP/IP
Digital Programmable Contact Outputs Real, Reactive and Apparent Power DNP Multimaster (3.0 Level 2)
(up to 16) and Power Factor
32 Latched Virtual Inputs Three Phase Energy IEC 870-5-104
32 Self-Reset Virtual Inputs
Virtual Outputs (up to 512) Frequency ModBus User Map
Tripping and closing circuit supervision Sequence components of currents
and voltages

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 SUMMARY
USER INTERFACE RECORDS OTHERS

Alphanumerical display (4x20) Data Logger Breaking Arcing Current (I2t)
Graphic display (16 x 40) Demand Breaker Control
User Programmable LEDs (15) Event Recorder (up to 128 IRIG-B synchronization
configurable events)
User Programmable Keys (up to 5) Fault Locator and Fault report (up Logic Equations (PLC Editor) 2
to 10 records)
Easy menu management thanks to Oscillography (up to 20 records) Settings Groups (up to 3)
shuttle key
Configurable One-Line Diagram (Graphic Snapshot Events (up to 479) Operations (up to 24)
model only)
Phasor Diagram (available in EnerVista Web Server Application
F650 Setup)

2.3 ORDERING CODE 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.3ORDERING CODE
F650 units are supplied as ½ 19” rack, 6 units high devices, containing the following modules: power supply, CPU, I/O
modules, communication modules. Each of these modules can be supplied in different versions that must be specified
when ordering. The required information to completely define an F650 model is shown on TABLE 2-1.
Table 2–2: ORDERING CODE
2 F650 -
B
- - F - G - - DESCRIPTION
Basic display (4x20 characters)
M Graphic display (240x128 pixels)
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1
F None
A Redundant RS485
P Redundant plastic fiber optic
G Redundant glass fiber optic
X Redundant RS485 + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Y Redundant plastic fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Z Redundant glass fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
C Cable remote CAN Bus I/O
M RS485 + cable remote CAN Bus I/O
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
B 10/100 Base TX
C 10/100 Base TX + 100 Base FX
D 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base FX
E Redundant 10/100 Base TX
I/O BOARD IN SLOT F
1 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs - 8 Outputs + 2 trip/close circuit supervision
circuits
I/O BOARD IN SLOT G
0 None
1 16 Inputs + 8 Outputs
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
HI 110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
LOR Redundant LO
HIR Redundant HI
LANGUAGE
English/English
F French/English
P Russian/English (*)
S Spanish/English
SPECIAL MODELS: MOD001: 6A output contacts instead of 16A.

(*) Note: Russian language available only for basic display models.
For those applications requiring a high number of inputs and outputs, F650 units can be connected to a CIO module
(Remote CAN Bus I/O module) for using up to 2 additional boards.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.3 ORDERING CODE
F650 units allow monitoring and configuring these I/O boards as if they were internal boards, located on slots F and G. In
this case, slots are labeled as H y J.
The required information to completely define a CIO Module is shown on TABLE 2-2.
Table 2–3: ORDERING CODE FOR CIO MODULE
CIO H - J - - DESCRIPTION
I/O BOARD IN SLOT H
2
1 16 inputs + 8 outputs
2 8 inputs + 4 circuit supervision circuits + 6 outputs + 2 outputs with
tripping current supervision (latching)
I/O BOARD IN SLOT J
0 None
1 16 inputs + 8 outputs
2 8 inputs + 4 circuit supervision circuits + 6 outputs + 2 outputs with
tripping current supervision (latching)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
HI 110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)

2.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.4TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.4.1 PROTECTION UNITS
Phase and ground units use as operation magnitude the current value received by the unit in current inputs, while the
neutral unit uses the calculated current value from the three phase currents.
2 The isolated ground unit will be used only for those applications where the neutral is completely isolated, and it uses the
fifth CT of the unit. This CT has a sensitivity that is 10 times higher than the universal model (connected to 1A or 5A
transformers). Therefore, it does not admit such a high permanent overload.
a) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT WITH VOLTAGE RESTRAINT (51PH/51PL)
Current Input Phasor (without harmonics) or RMS

Rated current For connection to 1 or 5 A CTs.
Pickup level 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Reset level 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values.
Curve Shapes IEEE extremely / very / moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely / very / normally / moderately inverse
ANSI extremely / very / normally / moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurve™ A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial) 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset type Instantaneous or time delayed according to IEEE
Timing accuracy Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3.5% of operate time or
30 ms. (whichever is greater)
Voltage restraint Selectable by setting
Saturation Level 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events Selectable by setting
b) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51G)


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
2
Timing accuracy Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3.5% of operate time or
30 ms. (whichever is greater)
c) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (51N)
Current Input Fundamental Phasor (without harmonics)

I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
Timing accuracy Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3.5% of operate
time or 30 ms. (whichever is greater)
d) SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51SG)



I2t
Definite time
2 Rectifier curve
e) PHASE AND GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH/50PL/50G)

±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Overreach < 2%
Trip delay 0.00 to 900.00 s. in steps of 0.01 s.
Reset delay 0.00 to 900.00 s. in steps of 0.01 s.
Operate time 20 ms at 3 x Pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing accuracy ±3% of operate time or 30 ms. (whichever is greater)
f) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)

Overreach < 2%

g) SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)

Level Accuracy ±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16 A 2
Overreach < 2%
Operate time 20 ms at 3 x Pickup at 50 Hz
h) ISOLATED GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50IG)

Voltage Input Fundamental Phasor (without harmonics)
Current Pickup level 0.005 to 0.400 A in steps of 0.001 A
Voltage Pickup level 2 to 70 V in steps of 1 V
Reset level 97-98% of the pickup level
Time to instantaneous 0.00 to 900.00 s. in steps of 0.01 s.
i) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE (46)

I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve


j) PHASE DIRECTIONAL (67P)
2 Directionality Forward and reverse selectable by setting

Polarizing Quadrature Voltage:
ABC seq: Phase A (VBC), Phase B (VCA), Phase C
(VAB)
ACB seq: Phase A (VCB), Phase B (VAC), Phase C
(VBA)
Polarizing voltage threshold 0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V
Characteristic angle -90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic Permission or Block selectable by setting
Angle accuracy ±2º for I>0.1 A and V>5 Vac
Operate time <30ms, typically
k) GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67G)
Directionality Forward and reverse selectable by setting

Polarizing Voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Voltage VN (measured or calculated, selected by setting)
Polarizing Current Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current Ig (measured from 4th current transformer)
Polarizing Voltage threshold 0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V
Polarizing Current threshold 0.005 A
l) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL (67N)
Directionality Forward and reverse selectable by setting

Polarizing Voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Current Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current IN
Polarizing Current threshold 0.005 A


m) SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67SG)
Directionality Forward and reverse selectable by setting 2

Polarizing Voltage
Operating Current Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
n) THERMAL MODEL (49)

Timing accuracy ±3.5% of operate time or 30 ms. (whichever is greater)
Heating constant Between 3 and 600 minutes
Cooling constant 1 to 6 times the heating constant
o) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)
Voltage Input Fundamental Phasor (without harmonics) of phase-to-phase

voltages
Pickup level 3 to 300 in steps of 1 V
Level Accuracy ±1% reading ±0.1% Full Scale from 10 to 275 V
Logic Any/Two/All phases logic selectable by setting

p) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)
Voltage Input Fundamental Phasor of phase-to-ground or phase-to-

phase voltages (selectable by setting)
2 Level accuracy ±1% reading ±0.1% Full Scale from 10 to 275 V
Curve Shapes Fixed time or inverse curve
Reset type Instantaneous
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial) 0.00 to 900.00 s. in steps of 0.01 s.
Minimum Voltage Threshold 0 to 300 in steps of 1 V
Logic Any/Two/All phases logic selectable by setting
Supervised by Breaker Selectable by setting
q) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59NH/59NL)
Voltage Input Fundamental Phasor of the neutral voltage

Level accuracy ±1% reading ±0.1% Full Scale from 10 to 275 V
Trip delay 0.00 to 900.00 s. in steps of 0.01 s
Reset delay 0.00 to 900.00 s. in steps of 0.01 s
r) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (47)
Voltage Input Fundamental Phasor

s) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)



2
t) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)

Pickup level 3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Curve Shapes Fixed time or inverse curve
Reset type Instantaneous
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial) 0.00 to 900.00 s. in steps of 0.01 s
u) UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
Pickup level 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz

Reset level Pickup + 0.03 Hz
Level accuracy ±0.01 Hz of the reading
Minimum voltage threshold 30 to 300V in steps of 1 V
v) OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
Pickup level 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz

Reset level Pickup - 0.03 Hz
Level accuracy ±0.01 Hz of the reading
Minimum voltage threshold 30 to 300V in steps of 1 V

w) FORWARD POWER (32FP)
Current, Voltage Fundamental Phasor (primary values)

Number of stages 2
Pickup level (two stages) 0.00-10000.00 MW in steps of 0.01 MW
2 Level accuracy for primary magnitudes ±3% complete range.
Trip delay (two stages) 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Block Time after close 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
x) SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
Current, Voltage Fundamental Phasor (primary values)

Number of stages 2
Pickup level (two stages) -10000.00 to 10000.00 MW (primary values) in steps of
0.01 MW
Characteristic Angle (two stages) 0.00 to 359.99 in steps of 0.01
Accuracy for primary magnitudes ±3% complete range
Trip delay (two stages) 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Block Time after close 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
y) BROKEN CONDUCTOR (I2/I1)
Pickup level 20.0-100.0% (I2/I1 ratio) in steps of 0.1%

Trip delay 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Minimum Phase Current Threshold 0.05 A
Operation Threshold 0.000 to 1.000 A in steps of 0.001 A
Note: The I2/I1 current inhibition level for the different

firmware versions is as follows
Firmware Version Current Inhibition Level
1.50 or Lower 10 mA
1.60 or Higher 50 mA
1.80 or Higher Selectable by setting from 0.000 to 1.000 in steps of 0.001 A

z) LOCKED ROTOR (48)

Full Load Current 0.10 to 10.00 KA in steps of 0.01 KA
Pickup level 1.01 to 109.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset level 97% of the pickup level 2
Level accuracy for primary magnitudes ±3% complete range.
2.4.2 CONTROL
a) AUTORECLOSE (79)
Schemes Three-pole tripping schemes

Number of shots Up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout
Dead time Independent dead time setting before each shot adjust-
able between 0 and 900 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reclaim time 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Condition permission Selectable by setting
Hold time 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset time 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Possibility to modify protection settings after each shot programmable through PLC (block signals available after each
shot)
b) SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Dead/live levels for line and bus 0.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum voltage difference 2.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum angle difference 2.0º to 80.0º in steps of 0.1º
Maximum frequency slip 10 to 5000 mHz in steps of 10 mHz
Synchronism time 0.01 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Angle accuracy 2º
Dead Source function None
(DL-DB) Dead Line - Dead Bus
(LL-DB) Live Line-Dead Bus
(DL-LB) Dead Line – Live Bus

c) FUSE FAILURE
Algorithm based on positive sequence of voltage and current

Activation by V2/V1 ratio
2 d) BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)

Pickup level for supervision 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup level for high level 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup level for low level 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup level for internal arcing 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
e) BREAKER SETTINGS
Number of Switchgear 1 to16 (selection of switchgear for breaker control)

2t
Maximum KI 0.00 to 9999.99 in steps of 0.01 (kA)2 s
KI2t integration Time 0.03 to 0.25 s in steps of 0.01 s
Maximum openings 0 to 9999 in steps of 1
Maximum Openings in one hour 1 to 60 in steps of 1
f) BREAKER MAINTENANCE
KI2t Breaker Counters for Phases A, B, C 0.00 to 9999.99 in steps of 0.01 (kA)2 s
Breaker Openings Counter 0 to 9999 in steps of 1
Breaker Closings Counter 0 to 9999 in steps of 1
g) SWITCHGEAR
Switchgear 1 to16 (configurable in “relay configuration” screen).

Snapshot Events Selectable by setting (for each switchgear in “system
setup”)

2.4.3 MONITORING
a) OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum Records: Up to 20 Oscillography records.

Sampling rate: Programmable to 4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 samples per power cycle
Capacity per record: 27592 samples
No of Oscillos * No of samples/cycle
2
Trigger position: 5% to 95% of total length
Trigger: Programmable via PLC
Data: 5 current channels and 4 voltage channels
Up to 16 digital channels programmable through PLC
Data Storage: In non volatile memory (flash) without battery
Format: International Standard COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999.
Automatic Overwrite: Selectable by setting. (Oscillography records can be concatenated)
Snapshot Events: Selectable by setting
b) FAULT LOCATOR
Method: Single-ended
Positive Sequence Module: 0.01 to 250.00 Ohm in steps of 0.01 Ohms
Positive Sequence Angle: 25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Zero Sequence Module: 0.01 to 750.00 Ohms in steps of 0.01 Ohm
Zero Sequence Angle: 25 a 90º in steps of 1º
Line Length: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 (miles or km)
Accuracy: 5% (typical)
Display Fault on HMI: Selectable by setting
Maximum Records: Up to 10 fault report records.

Data: Fault date and time, pre-fault currents and voltages, fault currents and voltages,
fault type, distance to the fault (fault location), line parameters, recloser and
breaker status information.
Data Storage: In non volatile memory (flash) without battery available through communications
In volatile memory (ram) available through HMI (if selectable by setting)
Format: Text in ASCII format

c) SNAPSHOT EVENTS
Capacity: 479 scrolling events

Time-tag 1 ms using an internal clock of 100 μs
Timing Accuracy: 1 ms (using the IRIG-B synchronization input)
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout
2 Digital input /output change of state
By virtual inputs and control events
Data Storage In non volatile memory (flash) without battery
The snapshot event recording procedure can be enabled or disabled by setting for each protection function
d) CONTROL EVENTS
Capacity: 128 events programmable through PLC

Time-tag: 1 ms using an internal clock of 100 μs
Timing Accuracy: 1 ms (using the IRIG-B synchronization input)
Triggers: By any digital signal programmable through PLC
Alarm Possibility to display the event as an alarm on the alarms panel.
Information available always through Communications for all models and also in
HMI for models with graphical display (M in ordering code).
Data Storage: In non volatile memory (flash) without battery
Control events are also displayed in the snapshot events recording
e) DEMAND
Channels: 9
Parameters: Ia (kA RMS), Ib (kA RMS), Ic (kA RMS), Ig (kA RMS), Isg (kA RMS), I2 (kA), P
(MW), Q (MVAr) and S (MVA)
Current and Power Method Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling Demand
Measurements: Each channel shows the present and maximum measured value, with date and
time for the maximum recorded value.
Samples: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes.
Accuracy: ±1%
Trigger Input Selectable by setting (operation mode selection for the Block Interval calculation
method)
f) DATA LOGGER
Number of Channels: 1 to 16
Parameters Any available analog actual value
Samples 1 sec., 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
Storage Capacity Fixed, 32768 measures

2.4.4 USER –PROGRAMABLE ELEMENTS
a) PLC LOGIC
Programming language: The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the
IEC 61131-3 standard. 2
Lines of code: 512
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 8 inputs), AND (2 to 8 inputs), NOR (2 to 8 inputs),
NAND (2 to 8 inputs), Latch (Reset Dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers.
2 inputs default gates, from 3 to 8 inputs provided in library format.
Libraries: Logical gates fully programmable by user. To create user-programmable logic to
be distributed as a single object.
Inputs: Any logical variable, contact or virtual input
Number of timers: 8 maximum in each logic scheme (provided in library format)
b) FLEXCURVES
Number: 4 (A through D)
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
c) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: 15 configurable LEDs plus a ready non configurable LED

Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset mode: Self-reset or Latched.
The first 5 LED’s are latched by hardware (red color ones), usually configured for
trip signals.
The following 10 ones (yellow and green) are self-reset but can be latched
through PLC configuration.
Reset Signal: The LED’s can be reset by hardware, pressing the front “esc” key during more
than 3 seconds or using the LED reset signal through PLC configuration.
d) USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of configurable displays: 1 (one line diagram fully configurable). In graphical displays only
Number of fixed displays: 6, Metering (in primary values), Snapshot events (all and new), Alarms, Inputs
and outputs screen with test functionality for inputs and outputs. In graphical dis-
plays only
Number of selectable displays: Logotype, metering or both in scrolling mode, can be selectable as default
screen in text display for all models (basic and mimic). The metering screen con-
tains current and voltages for phases and ground in primary values.

e) USER-PROGRAMMABLE FRONT KEYS
Number of configurable Keys: 5

Operation: drive PLC operands
2 2.4.5 METERING
a) CURRENT
Accuracy: ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10 A (for phases and ground)
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5 A (for sensitive ground)
b) VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±1% reading ±0.1% Full Scale from 10 to 275 V
c) REAL POWER (WATTS)
Accuracy: ±1% of the reading at-0.8 < PF = -1 and 0.8 <PF=1
d) REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy: ±1% of the reading at-0.2 = PF = 0.2
e) APPARENT POWER (VA)
Accuracy: ±1% of the reading
f) WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Range: ±0 to 2147 MWh
Parameters: 3-phase only
Update rate: 100 ms
g) WAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Range: ±0 to 2147 MVArh
Parameters: 3-phase only
Update rate: 100 ms
h) POWER FACTOR
Accuracy: 0.02
Parameters: 3-Phase and single phase

i) FREQUENCY
Accuracy: ±10 mHz at 50 Hz

±12 mHz at 60 Hz
j) ANGLE
2
Accuracy: 2º
2.4.6 INPUTS
a) AC CURRENT INPUTS
CT Ratio: 1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1

Rated currents: Appropriate for 1 or 5 A. F650 has universal range for CT (valid for 1 or 5 A to
only one terminal).
Relay Burden: < 0.04 Ohm
Current Withstand Continuous at 20 A
1 second at 500 A for phases and ground
1 second at 50 A for sensitive ground
b) AC VOLTAGE INPUTS
VT Ratio 1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1

Rated Voltages 275 Vac
Metering range: From 2 to 275 Vac
Relay Burden: 0.05 VA at 120 Vac (50 or 60 Hz)
Voltage Withstand: Continuous at 260 V to neutral
1 min/hr at 420 to neutral
VAC inputs do not need varistors, as the impulse test is applied to 100% of the transformers
c) DIGITAL INPUTS
Input Activation Voltage Threshold: 1 to 255 Vdc in steps of 1 V (selectable by setting)

Impedance: > 100 kOhm
Maximum error: ±10% setting ± 2.5 V
Load for voltage supervision inputs: 2 mA + V/100 kOhm
Voltage threshold for voltage supervi- < 10 V (fixed)
sion inputs
Debounce Time: 1 to 50 in steps of 1 ms
Recognition time: < 1ms
Timing resolution: 1 ms
For Input Activation Voltage Threshold and Debounce Time there is a single setting for all inputs in the same
group (inputs sharing the same common). In mixed and supervision boards there are two groups of inputs,
called A and B.
Input Type and Delay Input Time are not grouped; there is a different setting for each input.

Input Type Positive-Edge / Negative-Edge / Positive/ Negative

Delay Input Time 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (Input signal time delay)
d) IRIG-B INPUT
2 Amplitude modulation: DC SHIFT = Demodulated input (no carrier)

Input Voltage: TTL
Input Burden: 1.5 mA
Input Impedance: 3.3 kOhm
Minimum Input Voltage: 2.4 V
Maximum Input Voltage: +/- 24 V
Formats: B000 (*) B001, B002 and B003 (*)
(*) Signal combinations recognized in accordance with IRIG Standard 200-95
Isolation: 2 kV
2.4.7 REAL TIME CLOCK
Accuracy: Typical ±20 ppm

Backup energy: More than 1 week
2.4.8 OUTPUTS
Carry continuous: 16 A
Make and Carry for 1 sec 60 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.3 A DC max. at 125 Vdc
0.25 A DC max. at 250 Vdc
Operate Time: < 8 ms
Contact material: Silver Alloy
Output Logic Type, Output Type and Pulse Output Time are selectable by setting for each output
Output Logic Type Positive / Negative
Output Type Normal / Pulse / Latch (Selectable by setting for each output)
Pulse Output Time 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (applicable only to signals set as pulse type)
Separate operate and reset signal can be configured by any digital signal programmable through PLC
Contact Outputs (F31-F33, F34- The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit dur-
F36) for board type 2 (supervi- ing the time that the tripping contact remains closed. If the current in the tripping
sion) in slot F: circuit is maintained over 100 mA, the function is sealed independently of the sta-
tus of the function that caused the trip.

2.4.9 CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
LOW RANGE (LO)

Nominal DC Voltage: 24 to 48 V
Min/Max DC Voltage 19.2 / 57.6 V
Note: Low range is DC only 2
HIGH RANGE (HI)
Nominal DC Voltage: 110 to 250 V
Min/Max DC Voltage 88 / 300 V
Nominal AC Voltage: 120 to 230 V
Min/Max AC Voltage 102 / 250 V
ALL RANGES
Voltage Loss hold-up time 200 ms typical, worst case 100 ms without unit reset
Power consumption Typical =25 VA, Maximum =45 VA
Display backlight auto power-off mode after 15 minutes without touching any key, in order to ensure long life and minimum
consumption.
2.4.10 COMMUNICATIONS
FRONT PORT:
Front port: COM2
Type RS232
Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 y 115200 bauds
Default Baud Rate 19200
Protocols available: ModBus® RTU / DNP 3.0
Typical distance: 1200 m
Isolation: 2 kV
ASYNCHRONOUS REAR PORTS:
None or two rear ports (depending on COM1, COM2
model): (rear COM2 multiplexed with front port)
Type (depending on model):
Model F None
Model A Two RS485 ports
Model X Two RS485 ports with CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model P Two 1mm-plastic F.O. ports
Model Y Two 1mm-plastic F.O. ports with CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model G Two multimode glass F.O. ports with ST connectors
Model Z Two multimode glass F.O. ports with ST connectors with CAN for inputs/outputs
module
Optic Features for ST connectors Wave length: 1300nm
devices:
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 y 115200 bauds
Default Baud Rate 19200

Protocols available: ModBus® RTU / DNP 3.0

Typical distance: 1200 m
Isolation: 2 kV
CAN PORT:
Rear port: CAN port in models X, Y, Z for asynchronous rear ports
Type: Multimode glass F.O. port with ST connectors
2 Wave length: 1300 nm
Isolation: 2 kV
ETHERNET PORT:
Rear port: COM3
Type (depending on model):
Model B: 10/100BaseTX self-negotiable
Model C: 10/100BaseTX + 100Base FX
Model D: 10/100BaseTX + Double 100BaseFX (Physical media redundancy)
10/100BaseTX RJ45 connector
100BaseFX ST connectors
Wave length: 1300 nm
Protocols available: ModBus® TCP/IP
DNP over TCP/IP and UDP/IP
IEC 870-5-104
Http, ftp, tftp (allow the use of a standard Internet browser)
Typical distance: 1.65 km
Response time to ModBus commands: 10 ms Typical
Isolation: 2 kV
In Models C and D, the 10/100BaseTX port is selected by an internal switch (see 3.3.3)
Two witness LED’s for transmission and reception are included
2.4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating temperature: - 10°C to + 60°C

Storage temperature: - 40°C to + 80°C
Humidity (non condensing): 95%
Altitude Up to 2000 m
Installation category II
2.4.12 PACKAGING AND WEIGHT
Net weight: 5 kg
Packaged: 6 kg
Package dimensions: 30x40x40 cm (DxWxH)

2.4.13 TYPE TESTS
Category Standard Class Test

EMC IEC 61000-4-1 IEC 60255-22-1 III Oscillatory waves immunity
IEC 61000-4-2 IEC 60255-22-2 IV Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 IEC 60255-22-3 III Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 2
test
IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60255-22-4 IV Electrical fast transient
IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-22-5 IV Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6 IEC 60255-22-6 III Conducted electromagnetic field distur-
bance test
IEC 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-8 IV Power frequency magnetic field immunity
ENV50204 III Radiated electromagnetic field
disturbance test – 1890 MHz.
EMC Emisivity IEC 60255-25 EN 61000-6-4 A Conducted and radiated emissions
Product IEC 60255-5 2 kV Insulation resistance – dielectric test
IEC 60255-5 6kV .5J Impulse test
IEC 60255-11 100 ms Power supply Voltage dips/interruptions/vari-
ations:
Mechanical IEC 60255-21-1 I Vibration test (sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-2 I Shock and bump
IEC 60255-21-3 II Seismic
Type test report available upon request.

F650 has been designed to comply with the highest existing requirements. More specifically, UNIPEDE recommendations
for high voltage substations are followed, even if for most applications such high classes are not required.
The relay complies with ANSI C37.90 standards, and has been designed to comply with international standards.
2.4.14 APPROVALS
ISO9001 Registered system.

CE marking: Meets the CE standards relevant for protections.

2.5 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.5EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
F650 units can hold two different options for F module:
Option 1:Board with 16 inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision outputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two current sensing outputs
Each model has a different wiring diagram, as follows:
Figure 2–2: WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODELS WITH OPTION 1 (189C4216H3)

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
The option 2 wiring diagram is shown below:
Figure 2–3: WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODELS WITH OPTION 2 (189C4216H2)

2.5 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

3 HARDWARE 3.1 MODULE DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1MODULE DESCRIPTION
Figure 3–1: BLOCK DIAGRAM

F650 units incorporate the following modules:
• Power supply, which can be simple or redundant, depending on the selected model
• Front module with alphanumerical (4 x 20) or optional graphical (16 x 40 characters) display. It includes the bus
on its rear, which communicates with the rest of modules via a high speed CAN bus.
• Transformers module with 5 current transformers and 4 voltage transformers
• CPU including a powerful DSP for measure processing as well as synchronous and asynchronous communication
accessories.

3.1 MODULE DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
• Input/Output module included in basic unit

• Optionally, a second I/O module can be added.
The F650 can incorporate a simple or redundant power supply.
The power supply module is fixed to the base plate using 4 screws, and the main and backup modules are
identical.
These modules work in parallel continuously, distributing the 50% of the load for each of them, thus ensuring
greater reliability, and an instantaneous load transfer from the failed power supply to the other one, without
loss of time or module reset.
A relay connected to the low voltage side of the power supply monitors this voltage. The three contact
terminals, normally open, common, and normally closed, are available at the external connector terminals.
This relay monitors only the power supply integrity and it is not controlled by the main microprocessor. This
3 way, if we want a relay to monitor whether the unit is ready to protect (READY), we should program one of the
auxiliary relays in the unit.
This is a “fly-back” type power supply, providing high efficiency, stability and reliability thanks to the maturity of
this technology. There are two available ranges, Hi and Low, in order to optimize efficiency and general
performance, including the capability to tolerate auxiliary voltage interruptions (dips).
Oversized components highly resistant to temperature are used. For example, all capacitors are specified to
stand up to 105ºC, transformer components are specially designed to stand up to 180ºC, the used MOSFET
transistor is of very low resistance, supports high voltage and is refrigerated by an oversized heat sink. This
allows to support temperatures over the 60ºC shown in the Technical Characteristics section, and prolonged
overloads such as the ones occurring at batteries in deep charge mode (much higher than +15% voltage
shown in the Technical Characteristics section).
High capacitance capacitors are also used, providing high tolerance to prolonged dips, 100ms, even in the
most unfavorable consumption conditions. This allows the relay to continue with normal operation without
undesired resets, which would cause a long time of protection unavailability
Figure 3–2:: COMMUNICATIONS MODULE shows the location of communications modules over the CPU.
These modules have been designed in accordance with the “plug and play” philosophy, so that units can be
easily updated after their purchase, allowing for a simple and economical migration of the application.
Skilled personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of communication boards, only after interrupting the
relay auxiliary voltage, and making sure that all rear terminals are potential free.
Figure 3–2: COMMUNICATIONS MODULE

3 HARDWARE 3.2 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
3.2MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
The model number and electrical characteristics of the unit are indicated on the label located on the right side
of the relay case.
The metallic case of the unit is highly resistant to corrosion. It is made of stainless steel (AISI 304), coated with
an epoxy layer, and the rest of the metallic pieces are covered with a high quality resistive coating that has
successfully passed at least 96 hours in the salt spray chamber (S/N ASTM B-117).
The front of the relay is made of a conductor thermoplastic, flame retardant (V0), highly resistive material,
which guarantees the unit’s immunity to all kinds of EMI/RFI/ESD interferences. As well, an IP51 (IEC 529)
protection degree against dust and water through the front and with the relay mounted in the panel.
In order to guarantee safety and preventing access to the unit by unauthorized personnel, the front part of the
relay has a sealable cover to protect the RS 232 front port and the operation mode key.
3
3.2.1 MOUNTING
The unit is designed for semi-flush mounting. The relay is secured to the panel with the 4 M6 screws provided
with the unit. The user has access to the front keypad, display and communication port. The wiring is at the
rear of the unit. The drilling dimensions are shown on Figure 3–4:: DRILLING DIMENSIONS DIAGRAM.
Figure 3–3: PANEL MOUNTING

The relay width allows the mounting of two units on a standard 19’’ panel, 6 units high.

3.2 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
Figure 3–4: DRILLING DIMENSIONS DIAGRAM

Figure 3–5: DIMENSIONS OF THE 19” RACKS 6U HIGH FOR TWO RELAYS
3.2.2 REAR DESCRIPTION
The relay is wired through the terminal blocks located at the rear of the unit. Terminal blocks vary depending
on their functionality. The magnetic module, which receives the CT secondary currents and the metering
voltages, incorporates a very robust terminal board (columns A and B). In this terminal board, current terminals
are shorted two-by-two when the transformer module is extracted, so that the CT secondary never remains
open. For safety reasons it is not allowed to change or swift the magnetic module terminals. The
maximum recommended cable section for this terminal board, with the appropriate terminal, is 6 mm2 (AWG
10).
The rest of the terminal blocks (columns F, G, and H), for power supply, inputs/outputs and IRIG-B, incorporate
high quality connectors with the capacity to withstand a rated current of 15 A at 300 V. These terminal blocks
admit a cable section of up to 2.54 mm2 (AWG 12).
The communication boards have a different type of connector depending on the selected media: RS485, glass
or plastic fiber optic.

COM 1 (RS 485)

GND
A(-)
B(+)
COM 2 (RS485)
GND
A(-)
B(+)
CAN
Tx
3 Rx
Eth1
10/100
UTP
Tx
100FX
Rx
Eth2
Tx
100FX
Rx
Figure 3–6: CONNECTORS LOCATION

TYPE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTOR
Plug-in, 3 poles.
RS485
IRIG B Plug-in, 2 poles.
Plastic fiber optic Versatile Link

3
Ethernet 10/100 UTP (10/ RJ45, Class 5.
100BaseTX)
Glass fiber optic (100BaseFX) ST
Ethernet 100 FX (100BaseFX) ST
CAN Distributed I/O ST
Figure 3–7: COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA SELECTOR GUIDE
Communication boards are installed at the rear part of the unit, the upper port being reserved for the
asynchronous communications board and CAN, and the lower port for the ETHERNET board in any of its
configurations.
Skilled personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of communication boards only after interrupting the
relay auxiliary voltage.

Figure 3–8: DETAIL OF INSERTION/EXTRACTION OF COMMUNICATION MODULES

The number of screws and fixtures has been minimized to guarantee an easy maintenance operation, and to
protect the application from severe vibrations such as those experienced during long distance transportation.
The transformers module with the VTs and CTs is already connected to a female connector screwed to
the case that incorporates shorting bars in the current inputs, so that it can be extracted without the
need to short-circuit the currents externally. It is very important, for safety reasons not to change or
swift the terminals for CTs and VTs.
A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid electrostatic
discharges that may cause damage to the electronic components.

Figure 3–9: REAR TERMINALS LOCATION

3.3 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.3WIRING 3.3.1 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
F650 units can hold two different options for F module:

Option 1: Board with 16 inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision outputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two cur-
rent sensing outputs
Each model has a different wiring diagram, both wiring diagrams can be seen in chapter 2 in this manual.
The wiring diagram for models with option 1 has the internal code (189C4216H3)
The wiring diagram for models with option 2 has the internal code (189C4216H2).
3
3.3.2 DIGITAL INPUTS WITH TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
The Option 2 I/O board includes two groups of 4 inputs with one common, in terminals F9 to F10. It also
includes 6 auxiliary outputs, in terminals F19 to F30 with normally open contacts and two current sensing
(latching) outputs (F31-F33 and F34-F36).
Besides, there are 2 groups of inputs for trip circuit supervision. The first group includes two isolated digital
inputs, terminals F1-F2 and F3-F4. The second group, symmetrical and identical to the first, is formed by
isolated voltage inputs F15-F16 and F17-F18.
Using voltage detectors and current sensing, it is possible to implement several trip or close circuit supervision
schemes, as well as protection of the unit output contact.
In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to perform any setting in the unit. Internal
functions are always operative. The detailed description of trip circuit supervision is included in chap-
ter 5 in this manual.

3 HARDWARE 3.3 WIRING
3.3.3 CABLE/FIBER ETHERNET BOARD
The Ethernet board is the communication board 2 (COM3) shown in Figure 3–2:: COMMUNICATIONS
MODULE. It is located in the bottom at the rear part of the relay.
In Models C and D, the 10/100BaseTX port is selected by an internal switch. To select between fiber and cable
it is necessary to extract the board, switch the jumper to the selected position, as indicated on Figure 3–10::
FIBER/CABLE SELECTION and insert the board again. As with any other relay manipulation, the relay power
supply must be removed and the operation must be performed only by skilled personnel.
The default port selected by switch is 10/100 TX in factory configuration. The switch selects between cable
(10/100 TX) and the first fiber port (100 FX). In Ethernet board type D (double fiber port) the backup channel is
always fiber.
Figure 3–10: FIBER/CABLE SELECTION

3.4 OPTIC FEATURES 3 HARDWARE
3.4OPTIC FEATURES
Wave length: 1300nm
Connector types: ST package style
Transmitter characteristics
Parameter Min Typ Ma Unit Referenc

. . x. e
Output Optical Power BOL -19 -14 dBm Note 1

3 62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber -20
avg.
EOL
Output Optical Power BOL - -14 dBm Note 1

22. avg.
50/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber
5
EOL
-
23.
5
Output Optical Power at -45 dBm Note 2

avg.
Logic “0” State
Receiver characteristics
Parameter Min Typ Ma Unit Referenc

. . x. e
Input Optical Power - -31 dBm Note 3

33. avg.
Minimum at Window Edge
9
Input Optical Power - - dBm Note 4

35. 31. avg.
Minimum at Eye Center
2 8
Input Optical Power Maximum -14 dBm Note 3

avg.
Notes:
1. These optical power values are measured with the following conditions:
The Beginning of Live (BOL) to the End of Life (EOL) optical power degradation is typically 1.5 dB per industry
convention for long wavelength LEDs. The actual degration observed in Agilent’s 1300nm LED products is <1 dB, as
specified in this data sheet.
Over the specified operating voltage and temperature ranges.
With HALT Line State, (12.5 MHz square-wave), input signal.
At the end of one meter of noted optical fiber with cladding modes removed.
The average power value can be converted to a peak power value by adding 3 dB. Higher output optical power
transmitters are available on special request.

3 HARDWARE 3.4 OPTIC FEATURES
2. The transmitter provides compliance with the need for Transmit_Disable commands from the FDDI SMT layer by
providing an Output Optical Power level of <-45 dBm average in response to a logic “0” input. This specification applies
to either 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm fiber cables.
3. This specification is intended to indicate the performance of the receiver section of the transceiver when Input Optical
Power signal characteristics are present per the following definitions. The Input Optical Power dynamic range from the
minimum level (with a window time-width) to the maximum level is the range over which the receiver is guaranteed to
provide output data with a Bit Error Ratio (BER) better than or equal to 2.5e-10.
At the Beginning of Life (BOL).
Over the specified operating temperature and voltage ranges.
4. All conditions for Note 3 apply except that the measurement is made at the center of the symbol with no window time-
width.

3.5 TRANSCEIVER OPTICAL POWER BUDGET VERSUS LINK LENGTH 3 HARDWARE
3.5TRANSCEIVER OPTICAL POWER BUDGET VERSUS LINK LENGTH

Optical Power Budget (OPB) is the available optical power for a fiber optic link to accommodate fiber cable
losses plus losses due to in-line connectors, splices, optical switches, and to provide margin for link aging and
unplanned losses due to cable plant reconfiguration and repair.
OPB (dB) Fiber optic

Cable
length
(km)
50/125 μm
3 62.5/125 μm
11.4 8 0
10.9 7.4 0.3
10.5 7.1 0.5
9.6 6.2 1.0
8.5 5.3 1.5
7.3 4.3 2.0
6 3.3 2.5

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 OVERVIEW
This software package uses ModBus protocol, and it is designed to communicate with a single relay at a time. GE offers
different communication software packages, such as GE-POWER, which can be used to communicate simultaneously with
several relays.
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides an easy way to configure, monitor and manage all F650 features.
a )Setting files
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides two ways of working with setting files:
1.OFF LINE Mode: Creating or editing setting files not connected to the relay, to be stored later in the proper unit.
2. ON LINE Mode: Connecting to the relay. This on line mode allows settings modifications, reading metering
values, internal status, oscillography records, event records, etc.
b) Configuration
The relay allows to fully program all the inputs, outputs, LEDs, control events, operations, block signals in
protection elements, switchgear, one line diagram in HMI, and create internal logic.
For simple relay configurations a direct configuration can be used (Relay configuration screen), and for more
complex configurations a PLC Editor tool is provided (Logic Configuration screen).
4
c) Monitoring of all metering values, internal states, inputs and outputs provided by F650 device.
d) Performing the previously configured operations
e) Updating of operating system, firmware version and web server utility.
f) One line diagrams configuration (bay mimics) for its use in models with graphical display only.
g) Registering data info for control events, snapshot events, alarms, fault reports, oscillography files, data logger, etc.

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1.2 MAIN SCREEN
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides the following areas:

• Title
• Main menu bar
• Main icon bar
• Working area
• Status bar
Title
M
ainm
en
uba
r
4 M
ain
ic
onb
ar
W
ork
in
gar
ea
Figure 4–1: ENERVISTA 650 SETUP MAIN SCREEN

4.1.3 STARTING COMMUNICATION
To start communicating with the relay go to “Communication>Computer>Computer settings” section in the main
EnerVista 650 Setup menu.
Safety instructions must be followed before connecting the computer to the relay. Safety instructions are detailed in section
1.1.3 falta hacer referencia cruzada. Connect the relay ground terminal and the communicating computer to a good
grounding. Otherwise, communication may not be viable, or even, in worst cases, the relay and/or the computer could
result damaged by overvoltages.
For on-line working, previously ensure that all relay communication parameters, such as baudrate, slave ModBus address,
etc, match the computer settings.
Figure 4–2: COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS MENU

The “Communication > computer” screen is divided in several subsections:
Computer settings: Main communication parameters for serial communication and control type selection.
ModBus/TCP Setup (if ModBus /TCP is selected as control type): Communication parameters for ModBus TCP
communication.
Communication control: Device communication status (communicating or not communicating).
Communication optimization: allows optimizing the communication time outs and failure establishing.

COMPUTER SETTINGS:
Shows the communication parameters necessary in order to establish communication with the unit. Such as slave address,
communication port, baud rate, parity, control type and startup mode.
Baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits and ModBus slave address for com2 (RS232 front port and second serial port in the
rear communication board) are displayed in the default text logotype main screen.
ModBus Slave Address: ModBus addresses used for serial and Ethernet communication. These parameters can be
accessed through the relay HMI and EnerVista 650 Setup software. In Relay HMI: go to “Main screen>View or Change
Settings menu >Product Setup>Communication> ModBus Protocol”.
To move through the HMI, press intro (press in shuttle key) to enter in the internal menus and “esc” to exit.
In EnerVista 650 Setup go to “Setpoint>Product Setup>Communication Settings>ModBus Protocol”
Communication ports: port used in the computer for serial communication.
Baud Rate: Baud rate for serial communication (from 1200 up to 115200 bauds in EnerVista 650 Setup, from 300 to
4 115200 in relay).
Parity: parity for serial communication. None, odd or even can be selected.
Baud rate and parity are serial communication parameters located both in serial ports menu. In relay HMI: go to “Main
screen>View or Change Settings menu >Product Setup>Communication> Serial Ports”. In EnerVista 650 Setup, go
to “Setpoint>Product Setup>Communication Settings>Serial Ports”.
Control Type: The available control modes are:

• No Control Type, this option selects the serial communication mode, for use with serial communication ports (front
port, RS485, or plastic or glass fiber optic).
• MODBUS/TCP, this option selects ModBus TCP/IP communication mode, for communication through the Ethernet
port. In this case, the top right window will show the typical parameters to be programmed; IP address, port address
and unit identifier in the MODBUS TCP SETUP section.
To access the relay IP address in relay HMI, go to “Main screen>View or Change Settings menu >Product
Setup>Communication> Ethernet>Ethernet 1 or 2”. In EnerVista 650 Setup, go to “Setpoint>Product
Setup>Communication Settings>Network (Ethernet)>Ethernet 1 or 2”.
For port address and unit identifier, in relay HMI go to “Main screen>View or Change Settings menu >Product
Setup>Communication>ModBus Protocol”. In EnerVista 650 Setup, go to “Setpoint>Product
Setup>Communication Settings>ModBus Protocol”.
• MODEM, this option displays the parameter to set in case of using a modem for the communication, such as Phone
number, Time out (sec), init. command, type of dialing (tones or pulses).
COMMUNICATION CONTROL:
The Communication Control subsection is located on the bottom left communication window and shows the communication
status in the relay. There are two legends, “Status” in which the communication text status will be displayed and
“Communication” which includes two buttons to start (ON) and stop (OFF) the communication with the relay.
Relay NOT communicating: In status, a message will be displayed with the communication status, e.g. 650 Setup is not
talking to an F650. The ON button will be available to press and the OFF button will be disabled (in grey color). In this stage
the relay is not communicating to the computer and the communication parameters can be modified to establish the
communication lately by pressing in the ON communication button.

Relay communicating: In status, a message will be displayed with the communication status, e.g. 650 Setup is now talking
to an F650. The ON button will be disabled (in grey color) and the OFF button will be available to press. In this stage the
relay communicating to the computer and the communication parameters cannot be modified. In the example on Figure 4–
2: COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS MENU , communication has not been established yet.

COMMUNICATION OPTIMIZATION:
The parameters shown on the bottom right window (Communication optimization) can improve communication, although it
is recommended to leave the default values indicated by the EnerVista 650 Setup. These parameters are the maximum
time to wait for a response in the relay (in ms) and the maximum attempts to perform before assuming communications
failure.
The rest of options available in the Communication menu in EnerVista 650 Setup are:
• Modem: Allows configuring the unit for remote communications via modem, using telephonic line. It is only available if
the relay is not communicating and if modem has been select on Communication>computer control type selection. Go
to “Communication>Modem”
• Troubleshooting (Serial or Ethernet connection): Lets the user to perform reading or writing in ModBus addresses, for
verifying communications and access to different positions in the ModBus memory map. Only available if the
communication has already been established. Go to “Communication>Troubleshooting”. An example is provided in
Figure 4–3:
Figure 4–3: COMMUNICATION TROUBLESHOOTING SCREEN

• Calibration (Serial or Ethernet connection): Allows retrieving the unit calibration settings and storing them in a file (with
extension *.cal). For reading or storing the calibration settings in the relay go to “Communications>Calibration>Get
or Set calibration settings” and select the intended calibration file. The calibration retrieval process is necessary to
be performed before updating the unit boot code, when the operating system is updated all the data in the relay is
deleted, including the factory calibration settings. When only the firmware is updated (for versions higher than 1.50),
the calibration settings are automatically saved in the relay.
• Upgrade firmware version (Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications>Upgrade firmware version”, this menu
allows the user to update the firmware version of the relay through Ethernet communication. Firmware is related to the
relay internal program, designed by GE Multilin, which performs the protection and control functions, and which is run
by the relay main microprocessor.
• Upgrade operating system (Serial and Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications>Upgrade operating system”.
This option allows the user to update the relay boot code. This is the program that supports the firmware and provides
auxiliary services for access to electronic devices included in the relay.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
READ CAREFULLY THE FLASH MEMORY UPDATE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN

SECTION AND CLOSE ALL THE RUNNING APPLICATIONS BEFORE
PERFORMING FIRMWARE AND boot code UPDATING PROCCESS
Before updating firmware check that the firmware version that is going to be updated
match the boot code version of the relay. Otherwise it is necessary to update the boot
code before proceeding to update the firmware. Other combinations of firmware and
boot code different from the listed below will not be operative
The boot code version is available in the logotype main screen in HMI; it is the number
between brackets in the first line, e.g. F6501.70 (2.35). The boot code version is 2.35
Firmware version up to 1.5X must be used with Boot Code 2.30 (or 2.20 and 2.35)
Firmware version from 1.6X up to 1.7X must be used with Boot Code 2.35
Thanks to the use of a double flash memory, one with the Bootcode startup program and the boot code, and a second one
with the application program (firmware), a high reliability is guaranteed when updating the unit firmware, as even in the
case of a communication breakdown during the firmware upgrade process, we can retry the process for an unlimited
number of times. 4
• Upgrade 650 web server (Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications> Upgrade 650 web server”. The relay web
server application can be updated to further versions (if available) using this menu without modifying the relay boot
code.
• Upload info files to relay (Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications>Upload info files to relay”. This
functionality is used to store setting files (*.650) inside the relay, as well as auxiliary files used by the programmable
logic graphical editor (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
• Download info files from relay (Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications>Download info files from relay”.
This functionality is used for retrieving the files (*.650 and *.pep, *.aut, *.lib) that have been previously stored in the
relay flash memory.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
*.650 files contain protection, control settings, relay configuration and compiled logic
equations. This file can be retrieved from the relay, using the “File>Get info from
relay” option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through serial or Ethernet communication).
“File>Send info to relay” option stores this *.650 file in the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the
logic (virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the
“Communication>Upload info files to relay” option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through
Ethernet communication). They can be retrieved using “Communication>Download
info files to relay” option in EnerVista 650 Setup program (Ethernet communication).
Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are necessary to modify the PLC
logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can be modified but
not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the
“Communication>Upload info files to relay” option to store these logic configuration
files into the relay.
It is important to distinguish between “Send / Get info to relay” and “Upload /

Download info files to/from relay”. “File>Send/Get info to relay” sends/gets
settings and configuration and compiled logic equation to/from the relay (*.650 format),
and the relay automatically starts working with the new settings once they are stored.
“Communications>Upload/Download info files to relay“, stores/retrieves in the
relay flash memory: settings, configuration and compiled logic equations (*.650) besides
the PLC files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib). This is only a physical storage (file backup).

4.1.4 FILE MANAGEMENT
File management with EnerVista 650 Setup software:
4.1.4.1 OFF LINE MODE WITHOUT CONNECTION TO THE RELAY
R u n E n e r V is t a F 6 5 0 S e t u p
O p e n a * . 6 5 0 f ile
(“F ile > O p e n ” m e n u )
M o d if y p r o t e c t io n S e t t i n g s
a n d r e la y c o n f ig u r a t io n
4 I s it n e c e s s a r y t o
YES
p ro g ra m
a d d it io n a l lo g ic ?
L a u n c h t h e L o g ic C o n f i g u r a t io n t o o l in E n e r V is t a
F 6 5 0 S e tu p ( “ S e t p o in t> L o g ic C o n f ig u r a t io n ” )
C r e a t e n e w o r m o d if y t h e e x is t i n g lo g ic :
(“F ile > O p e n P r o je c t”)
NO NO
C o m p il e a n d s a v e lo g ic f ile ( * . p e p ) a n d d r a w in g
d e s ig n ( * . a u t ) in L o g ic C o n f ig u r a t io n t o o l
E x i t P L C G r a p h ic E d i t o r a n d s a v e t h e * . 6 5 0 f il e
f r o m t h e m a i n a p p l ic a t io n m e n u
I s t h e r e la y
c o m p le t e ly
c o n f ig u r e d ?
YES
S a v e * . 6 5 0 s e t t i n g s & c o n f ig u r a t i o n f ile
S t o r e in t h e c o m p u t e r t h e L o g ic c o n f ig u r a t io n f i le s ( * . p e p , * . a u t , * . lib ) a s
w e ll a s t h e * . 6 5 0 f o r f u r t h e r lo g i c c h a n g e s .
Figure 4–4: OFF-LINE MODE FILE MANAGEMENT

NOTE 1: Depending on the type of Inputs/Outputs incorporated in relay slots F and G, configuration options will be different.
There are 2 template files available for working off-line with any F650 available model:
F650_F1G0_V200.650: Board 1 in slot F and without any board in slot G.

F650_F1G1_V200.650: Board 1 in slot F and board 1 in slot G.
F650_F2G0_V200.650: Board 2 in slot F and without any board in slot G.

Table 4–1: TYPES OF FILES GENERATED BY ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE OPERATION MODE OFF-LINE:
LOGIC CONFIGURATION FILES (*.PEP, *AUT, *.LIB) 4

FILE TYPE SETTINGS & CONFIGURATION FILE *.650
*.PEP *.AUT *.LIB
Graphical edition
Relevant
sections inside Protection Settings and Compiled logic equations Header for container. Logic User programmable
Configuration Section section Logic project equations in FDB logic objects
the file format.
Logic
Logic configuration Logic configuration
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup Logic configuration graphic configuration graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC
editor (PLC Editor) graphic editor
(PLC Editor) Editor) Editor)
PLC project file
containing the
Relay configuration file necessary PLC Project file Library file to be
containing all information containing all the included as an object
protection elements Equations corresponding to relative to the drawings used by the in a PLC project.
Definition and Settings, input/output relay model, logic, required by F650 Logic packages that
contents and LEDs the logic created and compiled logic libraries relay based on IEC can be stored into
in the PLC Editor
configuration, graphic included in the 61131-3 standard. libraries and be
display configuration, project (*.lib), Functional block distributed in different
etc. graphic file diagram (FDB). PLC projects.
name (*.aut),
etc.
EnerVista 650 Setup:
“File>Save *”
PLC Editor:
File storage in EnerVista 650 Setup: It is necessary to store the “File>Save PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
the PC “File>Save *” logic configuration files used to “File>Save Project” “File>Save Library”
create the PLC project for Project”
further logic modifications.
File Retrieval EnerVista 650 Setup:
“File>Open *” PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
of previously EnerVista 650 Setup: It is necessary to have the “File>Open PLC Editor: “File>Library>New
stored files in “File>Open *” “File>Open Project”
PC logic configuration files used to Project” Library”
create the PLC project
Connect with the relay (“Communications>Computer”)

Connect with the relay
(“Communications>Computer”) Launch F650 PLC Editor (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)
Basic Open the created PLC project (“File>Open Project”)
information Open the created file (“File>Open *”) Compile the project (“Run>Compile”)
Send to relay from the menu: “File>Send info to relay”
transfer mode Note that texts used in the configuration of inputs, Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay
to the relay (“Run>Send Equations to Relay”). Texts of virtual outputs are
outputs, etc. are not sent to the relay. The only texts not stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to be
sent to relay are operations, events, and LEDs.
edited.

In case of using element libraries (either existing (“File Library>Open Library”) or created by the user (“File Library>New
Library”)), the program will create and manage the corresponding files (*.lib) in a folder named FDB (Functional Block
Diagram). These files are used for the PLC project compilation. It is necessary to store them with the other logic
configuration files that built the PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Besides sending basic information to the relay (Settings + configuration) in *.650 format, it is recommended to store *.650,
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files inside the relay (“Communication>Upload info files to relay”), to ensure that logic configuration
files will be available in the future for further logic modifications; either if these files are not used by the relay, they are
required for connecting to a relay and analyzing its configuration. The program manages the logic configuration files
globally, so that when the user selects to save file *.pep in the relay, the associated *.aut and *.lib files are also stored.
File storage inside the relay

(RECOMMENDED) “Communication > Upload info files to relay” through Ethernet
Retrieval of files stored in the relay

“Communication > Download info files from relay” through Ethernet
(RECOMMENDED)

4.1.4.2 ON LINE MODE CONNECTED TO THE RELAY
R u n E n e r V is ta F 6 5 0 S e tu p
C o n n e c t to th e re la y
(“C o m m u n ic a tio n > C o m p u te r > O N ”)
NO
M o d ify a n d s e n d to th e
r e la y p r o t e c t i o n S e t t in g s
a n d r e la y c o n fig u r a tio n
YES
Is it n e c e s s a r y to
p ro g ra m
a d d it i o n a l lo g ic ? 4
L a u n c h t h e L o g ic C o n f ig u r a t io n t o o l i n E n e r V is t a
F 6 5 0 S e tu p (“S e tp o in t> L o g ic C o n fig u r a tio n ”)
C r e a t e n e w o r m o d if y t h e e x i s t in g lo g ic
(“F ile > O p e n P r o je c t”)
NO C o m p il e ( “ R u n > C o m p i l e ” )
a n d s a v e l o g i c f i le ( * . p e p ) a n d d r a w i n g d e s i g n
( * . a u t ) in 6 5 0 P L C E d i t o r l ( “ F i l e > S a v e P r o j e c t ” )
S e n d lo g ic t o r e l a y ( “ R u n > S e n d E q u a t i o n s t o
R e l a y ” ) a n d E x i t P L C G r a p h ic E d i t o r
I s t h e r e la y
c o m p le t e l y
c o n fig u r e d ?
YES
S a v e a ll s e t t i n g s & c o n f ig u r a t io n ( “ F i l e > G e t i n f o f r o m r e l a y ” )
S t o r e in t h e r e l a y t h e L o g ic c o n f ig u r a t io n f il e s ( * . p e p , * . a u t , * . li b ) a s w e l l a s t h e
* . 6 5 0 f o r f u r t h e r lo g ic c h a n g e s . ( “ C o m m u n i c a t i o n > U p l o a d i n f o f i l e s t o r e l a y ” )
Figure 4–5: ON LINE MODE FILE MANAGEMENT

Table 4–2: TYPES OF FILES CREATED BY ENERVISTA 650 SETUP– ONLINE OPERATION MODE
LOGIC CONFIGURATION FILES (*.PEP, *.AUT, *.LIB)

FILE TYPE SETTINGS & CONFIGURATION FILE *.650
*.PEP *.AUT *.LIB
Graphical edition
Relevant Compiled logic equations container. Logic
Protection Settings and Header for Logic User programmable
sections Configuration Section section (relay configuration project equations (Virtual logic objects
inside the file and logic configuration) Outputs) in FDB
format.
Logic configuration graphic Logic configuration Logic configuration Logic configuration
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup editor (PLC Editor) and relay graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC
configuration screen Editor) Editor) Editor)
PLC project file
containing the PLC Project file Library file to be
containing all the
Relay configuration file necessary drawings used by included as an object
containing all protection information relative in a PLC project.
Definition and elements, settings, input/ Equations corresponding to to the relay model, the logic, required Logic packages that
the logic created and by F650 relay
contents output and LEDs compiled in the PLC Editor logic libraries based on IEC can be stored into
configuration, graphic included in the libraries and be
display configuration, etc. project (*.lib), 61131-3 standard. distributed in different
Functional block
graphic file name diagram (FDB). PLC projects.
(*.aut), etc.
Connect with the relay (“Communications>Computer”) Connect with the relay (“Communications>Computer”)
4 Send settings and configuration from file: Launch 650 PLC Editor (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)
Send configuration and logic Open the created PLC project (“File>Open Project”)
compiled equation to relay: Compile the project (“Run>Compile”)
“File>Send info to relay”,
Send protection and
control settings to relay: select *.650 file, choose
“Relay and Logic
“File>Send info to Configuration” option in
relay”, select *.650 file,
choose Protection and screen and press send.
When the message
Control settings option in “Configuration stored”
screen and press send
appear in the relay HMI the
configuration has been
stored.
Basic Modify settings and configuration directly in the relay:
information
transfer mode Go to “Settings>Relay
to the relay Configuration> Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay
>>Outputs (“Run>Send Equations to Relay”). Texts of virtual outputs are
>>LEDs not stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to be
Go to “Setpoint> >>Operations edited.
>>Product Setup >>Protection Elements
>>System Setup >>Oscillography
>>Protection Elements >>Operations
>>Control Elements >>Control Events
>>Inputs/Outputs” in >>Switchgear
EnerVista 650 Setup and >>Inputs
modify the selected >>Virtual Inputs
settings and press store >>Operations
to send them to the relay. >>MMI (HMI)”
in EnerVista 650 Setup,
modify the selected values
and press store to send them
to the relay.
PLC Editor:
EnerVista 650 Setup:
The relay provides this “File>Save Project” “File>Save Library”
EnerVista 650 Setup: information in a basic format
“File>Get info from (compiled equations). It is The relay will not The relay will not The relay will not
File storage in relay”. User definable necessary to have the logic provide this provide this provide this
PC texts retrieved are configuration files used for information unless information unless information unless
operations, events, and creating the PLC project to the *.pep file is the *.pep file is the *.pep file is stored
LEDs. view the logic in a graphical stored in the relay stored in the relay. in the relay.
way (FDB) and be able to
modify it (virtual outputs). To store the logic configuration files in the relay use the
“Communication>Upload info files to relay” option
File storage inside the relay in a flash memory (RECOMMENDED): “Communication>Upload info files to relay” through Ethernet
“Communication/Download info files from relay” through
File Retrieval of relay hard disk stored files (RECOMMENDED):
Ethernet

REMINDER:
Logic programming support files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) CANNOT be retrieved directly from the relay.
It is necessary
* Either to have stored these files in the PC
* Or to have uploaded previously the files into the relay (“Communication>Upload info files to relay”)
4.1.5 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP MENUS STRUCTURE
The EnerVista 650 Setup menus structure is shown in EnerVista 650 SETUP MENUS STRUCTURE.
Unless specified, options are available in both On-line and Off-line mode.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*)
Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
The “View > Language” submenu allows the user to change the default language for the EnerVista 650 Setup program and 4
it is only enabled when the relay is not communicating and no file has been opened.
Table 4–3: ENERVISTA 650 SETUP MENUS STRUCTURE

OPERATIONS
FILE SETPOINT ACTUAL COMMUNICATION SECURITY VIEW HELP
(*)
Open (**) Product Setup Front Panel NA Computer Login user Traces Instruction
Manual
ModBus About
Save As System Setup Status NA Modem (*) Change Memory EnerVista
(**) Password
Map 650 Setup
Close (**) Protection Metering NA Troubleshooting (*) User Languages

Elements Management (**)
Config File Control
Inputs/Outputs NA Calibration (*)
Converter Elements
Properties Upgrade firmware
(**) Inputs/Outputs Records (*) NA version (*)
Get info
Relay Upgrade operating
from relay Configuration NA system (*)
(*)
Send info Logic Upgrade F650 Web
to relay (*) Configuration NA Server
Print Setup Upload info files to
Clock (*) NA
(**) relay
Print Download info files
Preview NA
(**) from relay
Print (**) NA
Print to file
(**) NA
Exit NA

4.1.6 FILE MENU OVERVIEW
Table 4–4: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF FILE MENU:

FILE
Open (**) Open a settings and configuration file for off-line working.
Save As (**) Save *.650 settings and configuration file.
Close (**) Close the opened *.650 file in EnerVista 650 Setup.
Config File (*.650)
Tool to convert the *.650 files from one version to another
Converter
Properties (**) File properties for *.650.
Retrieve the *.650 settings and relay configuration compiled equations
Get info from relay (*)
from the relay.
Send info to relay (*) Send and write the *.650 settings and configuration to the relay.
Print Setup (**) To configure printer settings.
Print Preview (**) Preview of settings and configuration file printing format.
Print (**) Launch the *.650 file to be printed.
4 Print to file (*.xls) (**) *.650 printed to file in excel format.
Exit Quit the application closing all the open windows.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)

4.1.6.1 OPEN, SAVE AS AND CLOSE

In these options, the program opens a dialog box (with default path to Files>Config program folder) where the setting and
configuration files can be selected for their “off-line” edition. For enabling access to this menu, there must be no
communication between the PC program and the relay. (Mode off-line: “Communication>Computer>OFF”).
Figure 4–6: OPEN FILE MENU
Once the *.650 file with the appropriated relay model (FXGX) is selected, the program will enable the off-line options to fully
program the unit. The enabled menus in the EnerVista 650 Setup program are: File, Settings, Actual, Communication, View
and Help.
The off-line mode displays the File, Settings, Actual, Communication, View and Help submenus to program the unit.
The Actual values submenus are for structure purposes only Values are not refreshed while the relay is not communicating.
The “Save as” and ”Close” submenus are used to save the *.650 file into the computer and to close the current file. To work
in off line mode for settings and configuration edition it is not necessary to use the ”Close” option, a new *.650 can be
opened without closing the previous one. The ”Close file” option is used to clear all data in EnerVista 650 Setup program,
enabling “Language”, ”Upload firmware” and “boot code” options.

4.1.6.2 CONFIG FILE (*650) CONVERTER
4 Figure 4–7: CONFIG FILE (*650) CONVERTER MENU

This tool provides automatic conversion of configuration files from a firmware version to a previous or later version.
Open the source *.650 file and select the version and model to be converted to.
It is possible to change the model type (FXGX) using the conversion tool. It must be taken into account that part of the logic
can be readjusted to fit the new input and output boards selection. Notice also that the external wiring of inputs and outputs
board are different for type 1, 2, 4 and 5.
4.1.6.3 PROPERTIES
When this option is selected, the program will show a screen including the relay model information, firmware version, etc. of
the file being edited, as shown on Figure 4–8:
Figure 4–8: FILE PROPERTIES MENU
4.1.6.4 PRINTING OPTIONS (PRINT SETUP/PRINT PREVIEW/PRINT/PRINT TO FILE)

The printing options are active only in off-line mode, in “File edition”, and not in on-line mode, connected with the relay.

4.1.6.5 PRINT SETUP

Option to configure the printing options and settings for the printing device.
4.1.6.6 PRINT PREVIEW

Option to preview the whole settings and configuration file (*.650) in paper format to be printed as shown in Figure 4–9:.
Figure 4–9: PRINT PREVIEW OF SETTINGS FILE
4.1.6.7 PRINT
In this option, the program will print the relay configuration using the PC default (active) printer on port COMx or LPT. This
option is active only in off-line mode, in file edition, and not in on-line mode, connected with the relay.
4.1.6.8 PRINT TO FILE (*XLS)

Possibility to export the configuration file to an Excel file using the “Print to file (*.xls)” option.

4.1.7 SETTINGS MENU OVERVIEW
Table 4–5: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF SETPOINT MENU IN ENERVISTA 650 SETUP:
SETPOINT
Communications settings for all protocols and physical mediums.
Product Setup ModBus user map definition, fault report, oscillography, data logger and
demand settings.
System Setup General Settings, Flex Curves Definition, Breaker settings and
maintenance, and switchgear snapshot events management.
Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative Sequence
Protection Elements Current Settings. Voltage Elements settings and Power Settings
management.
Setting groups, under and overfrequency settings, synchrocheck,
Control Elements autoreclose, breaker failure, VT fuse failure, broken conductor and
locked rotor settings management.
Inputs/Outputs Contact I/O settings for all boards available in device, Remote Comms.
Configuration of Outputs, LEDs, Operations, Protection Elements,
Oscillography, Operations, Control Events, Switchgear, Inputs, Virtual
Relay Configuration Inputs, Operations and HMI. Whole relay configuration with internal relay
signals or user-definable ones as logic (virtual outputs).
4 Logic Configuration
Logic configuration graphic editor (PLC Editor). It is a PLC Project file
editor that contains all the internal drawings used to make the logic
(virtual outputs) based on IEC 61131-3 standard. Functional block
diagram (FDB).
Relay synchronization to computer clock or to user-definable date and
Clock (*) time. On-line mode only.
4.1.7.1 PRODUCT SETUP
Table 4–6: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF PRODUCT SETUP MENU:

PRODUCT
SETUP
Communication Serial Ports, Network (Ethernet), ModBus Protocol, DNP Slave and IEC
Settings 870-5-104 settings.
ModBus user map definition. The ModBus user map is formed by 256
ModBus User Map
records, selectable from the complete relay ModBus map.
Fault Report Fault report settings. Possibility to show fault reports on HMI screen.
Oscillography settings (trigger position, samples per cycle, etc). The
Oscillography trigger and digital channels (up to 16) must be configured in
“Settings>Relay configuration”.
Data Logger Data logger configuration
Demand settings. The demand trigger and demand reset signals must be
Demand
configured in “Settings>Relay configuration”

e) COMMUNICATION SETTINGS
This section details the settings related to communication parameters for the different protocols available in the F650.
Table 4–7: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF COMMUNICATION SETTINGS MENU:

COMMUNICATI
ON SETTINGS
Serial Ports Baud rate and parity for COM1 and COM2 serial communication ports.
Ethernet communication parameters for COM3 (IP Address, Netmask,
Gateway IP, etc.)
NOTE: The ModBus Slave address used by Ethernet ports is the one set
Network (Ethernet) for COM2.EnerVista 650 Setup software allows programming two
different Ethernet addresses, but the first IP has always to be set as the
second IP Address is an Alias.
ModBus Slave Addresses for serial and Ethernet communication and the
ModBus Protocol ModBus port number used for ModBus TCP/IP
Physical port, Slave Address for DNP, IP Addresses for Masters, TCP/
DNP3 Slave UDP Port, Unsolicited Response parameters, Analog scale factors and
deadbands, message fragment size, Binary input block.
TCP Port, Common Addr of ASDU, Cyclic Meter Period and,
IEC 870-5-104, Synchronization Event settings.
SNTP (*) Sinchronization over Ethernet settings
4
4.1.7.2 SYSTEM SETUP

This section shows the settings related to the system setup definition such as shown in the following table.
Table 4–8: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM SETUP MENU:

SYSTEM
SETUP
This screen describes and enables the settings of the power system
where the relay will operate. Some of these settings will be used only for
metering values presentation purposes; however, some of them apply
General Settings directly to the sampling and analog-digital conversion process (rated
frequency setting). Therefore, these settings need to be adjusted so that
they fit the system settings.
Flex Curves – Programmable user curves: The relay incorporates 4 user
curves called Flex Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are
Flex Curves defined by the user in “Settings>System Setup>Flex Curves>Edit
Curve” menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex curves can be
selected as an operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the
relay.
Breaker settings, maintenance and switchgear selection of the device
configured as breaker in the F650. The selected switchgear will be used
Breaker settings in recloser, breaker failure and synchronism functions. The settings are
Number of Switchgear, Maximum KI2t, KI2t Integ. Time, Maximum
Openings, Max.Openings 1 hour.
These settings correspond to the initialization of (KI)2t counters, and the
counting of number of openings and closings of the switchgear
configured as breaker. These Counters allow the breaker Maintenance.
Breaker maintenance They are used to cumulate the breaker ageing produced by a trip or a
breaker opening. In order to incorporate the breaker historic, in case of
existing breakers, the system allows assigning an initial value to
accumulated amperes, and to the number of opening and closing
operations.
Switchgear Configuration of snapshot events for each switchgear (enable or disable)

4.1.7.3 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

This option shows all the protection-grouped elements available in the relay as shown in Table 1–9:. Each of these groups
includes the specific protection units of the same type. For example phase currents group includes TOC, IOC, directional
units, etc. There are three groups available, so there are three protection units of each function that can work in grouped
mode or ungrouped (altogether).
Table 4–9: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS MENU:

PROTECTION
ELEMENTS
Phase Current All overcurrent grouped functions for phase current.
All overcurrent grouped functions for neutral current. (Calculated from
Neutral Current
phases, not measured)
Ground Current All overcurrent grouped functions for ground current. (Measured from 4th
current input)
Sensitive Ground All overcurrent grouped functions for sensitive ground current.
Current (Measured from 5th current input)
Negative Sequence
Negative sequence time overcurrent function
Current
4 Voltage Elements All under and overvoltage grouped functions for phases, neutral,
auxiliary voltage and negative sequence.
Power Forward and directional power grouped protection functions.

Table 4–10: DIFFERENT PROTECTION ELEMENTS INCLUDED

PHASE
CURRENT
Phase TOC High Phase time overcurrent, high level (51PH)
Phase TOC Low Phase time overcurrent, low level (51PL)
Phase IOC High Phase instantaneous overcurrent, high level (50PH)
Phase IOC Low Phase instantaneous overcurrent, low level (50PL)
Phase Directional Phase directional unit (67P). Quadrature Voltage for polarization
Thermal Model Thermal model or Thermal image unit for phases (49)
NEUTRAL
CURRENT
Neutral TOC Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
Neutral IOC Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
Neutral Directional Neutral directional unit (67N). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
GROUND
CURRENT
Ground TOC Ground time overcurrent (51G) 4
Ground IOC Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G)
Ground Directional Ground directional unit (67G). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
SENSITIVE
GROUND
CURRENT
Sensitive Ground TOC Sensitive ground time overcurrent (51SG)
Sensitive Ground IOC Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (50SG)
Isolated Ground IOC Isolated ground overcurrent (50IG)
Sensitive Ground Sensitive ground directional unit (67SG)
Directional
NEGATIVE
SEQUENCE
CURRENT
Negative Sequence Negative sequence time overcurrent (46P)
TOC
VOLTAGE
ELEMENTS
Phase UV Phase undervoltage (27P)
Phase OV Phase overvoltage (59P)
Neutral OV High Neutral overvoltage, high level (59NH)
Neutral OV Low Neutral overvoltage, low level (59NL)
Negative Sequence Negative sequence overvoltage (47)
OV
Auxiliary OV Auxiliary overvoltage (59X)
Auxiliary UV Auxiliary undervoltage (27X)
POWER
Forward Power Forward power (32FP), in primary values.
Directional Power Directional power (32), in primary values.

4.1.7.4 CONTROL ELEMENTS

This option shows all the control elements available in the relay as shown in Table 4–11:. Some of the elements are
grouped ones such as underfrequency, overfrequency and broken conductor.
Table 4–11: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF CONTROL ELEMENTS MENU:

CONTROL
ELEMENTS
F650 units incorporate a flexible grouping capability for protection units.
This means that protection units can be used in either single setting
group (default mode-all units can operate simultaneously) or three
setting groups (in this mode, protection units are grouped in three
Setting Group independent tables, with only one of them active at a given time).
Protection element grouping involves only Protection elements together
with broken conductor detection and over and under frequency, which
are usually considered as control elements. The rest of control elements
such as recloser, fuse failure, breaker failure, synchronism, and breaker
settings are not involved in the tabled groups concept.
Underfrequency Underfrequency unit (81U). Grouped element
Overfrequency Overfrequency unit (81O). Grouped element
Synchrocheck Synchronism check unit (25). Not grouped, a single unit provided
4 Autoreclose Recloser (79). Not grouped, a single unit provided

Breaker Failure Breaker failure (50BF). Not grouped, a single unit provided
VT Fuse Failure Fuse Failure (VTFF). Not grouped, a single unit provided
Broken or fallen conductor detection function (I2/I1). Grouped element.
Ratio between the negative sequence current, I2, and the positive
Broken Conductor sequence current I1. In normal and balanced load situations, this ratio is
zero, while in severe load fault conditions, an unbalance is produced and
this ratio is increased.
Locked Rotor Locked rotor detection function (48). Grouped element.

4.1.7.5 INPUT/OUTPUTS
Section that contains the settings for all input and output boards and the Force Outputs and Virtual inputs activation tools.
Table 4–12: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF “INPUTS/OUTPUTS” SETTINGS MENU.

INPUTS/
OUTPUTS
Inputs and outputs settings for all boards in F650. The I/O settings
Contact I/O configuration can only be performed through EnerVista 650 Setup, not
HMI available.
Force Outputs (*) This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate
maintenance testing. On line mode only.
This menu allows operating virtual inputs. These variables are used as
inputs to logic schemes configured in the relay. Virtual inputs can be
Virtual Inputs (*)
operated in a latched mode (32 latched virtual inputs) or in Self-reset
mode (32 self reset virtual inputs).
This menu allows configuring remote inputs coming from other devices
Remote Comms. through GSSE messages.
This section shows the settings related to inputs and outputs for the different boards available in F650 (F, G, H, J).
Table 4–13: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF “INPUTS/OUTPUTS>CONTACT I/O” SETTINGS MENU.

4
CONTACT I/O
Board F Board located in first slot, always connected, either type 1 or 2.
Board G Board located in second slot, depends on model definition. If model is

type G0 there is no board in second slot.
Board H Board located in first slot of CIO Module (external inputs/outputs module)
Board located in second slot of CIO Module (external inputs/outputs
Board J
module)

4.1.7.6 RELAY CONFIGURATION

This is the relay configuration section in which the relay can be configured using internal states or already compiled
equation on PLC Editor.
Table 4–14: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF RELAY CONFIGURATION MENU:
RELAY CONFIG
Outputs Configuration of contact output operate and reset signals for all boards.
15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual
LEDs input. First 5 LEDs are latched by hardware, the rest are self-reset but
can be latched through PLC configuration. From the LED configuration
screen, it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay
Configurable operations up to 24. Operation texts, interlocks, final states,
Operations
frontal keys, time outs and masters.
This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different
Protection Elements protection elements. To block, reset, initiate the different protection
elements inputs.
Trigger and up to 16 digital channels to be included in oscillography
records, are programmable from any logical variable, contact or virtual
4 Oscillography
input. Text configuration is only for off-line mode.
NOTE: This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and
oscillography trigger. The rest of parameters, such as function enabling/
disabling, sampling rate, number of oscillography files, etc. must be set
on the Settings>Product Setup>Oscillography menu.
Up to 128 user programmable events from any logical variable, contact
or virtual input. Possibility to display the event as an alarm on the alarms
panel. Control events are also displayed in the snapshot events
Control Events recording. 1 ms time tagging.
A control event is a logic signal associated to an operand or combination
of operands, that allows following the status of that signal.
Up to 16 configurable switchgear elements. A switchgear element can be
a breaker, a line selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar
selector switch, etc. This screen allows configuration of type of contacts,
Switchgear opening and closing time, contact assignation and text for events related
to switchgear. There are 64 pre-established events for switchgear, which
correspond to opening, closing, Error01 and Error11 of the 16
programmable switchgear elements.
Up to 32 DNA bits and 6?????? bits to be transmitted to remote devices
Remote outputs over CAN using GSSE messages
Text configuration for off-line mode file management for all the contact
Inputs
inputs available in device.
Virtual Inputs Text configuration for off-line mode file management. 32 latched and 32
self reset virtual inputs.
Screen for one line diagram configuration. This menu shows a scenario
MMI (HMI-Human to draw a simplified one-line diagram of a bay in a feeder, line,
Machine Interface) transformer, etc. The menu includes a library for power elements,
metering elements, text and drawings. See an example in Figure 4–11:

The following figures show an example of the default factory configuration for F650.
Figure 4–10: RELAY CONFIGURATION
Figure 4–11: HMI CONFIGURATION

4.1.7.7 LOGIC CONFIGURATION

This logic configuration allows creating more complex configurations, using the graphical PLC, than using the tables from
Relay Configuration. For file management detailed information go to section 4.1.4.
Table 4–15: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF LOGIC CONFIGURATION MENU:
LOGIC CONFIG
Header for Logic project: PLC project file containing the necessary
*.pep information relative to the relay model, logic libraries included in the
project (*.lib), graphic file name (*.aut), etc.
PLC Project file containing all the drawings used by the logic, required by
*.aut F650 relay based on IEC 61131-3 standard. Functional block diagram
(FDB).
User programmable logic objects: Library file to be included as an object
*.lib in a PLC project. Logic packages that can be stored into libraries and be
distributed in different PLC projects.

4.1.7.8 CLOCK
This menu allows to update the date and time of the relay, either synchronizing them with the PC clock, or entering the
information manually.
Figure 4–12: CLOCK
4.1.8 ACTUAL VALUES MENU OVERVIEW
The menu bar in the main screen of EnerVista 650 Setup software shows the ACTUAL menu option. This option
concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering, counters information, oscillography,
events, fault locator, etc. This section shows only the structure of menus in EnerVista 650 Setup.
Table 4–16: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU:
ACTUAL
Front Panel>LEDs The relay front LEDs status is shown on this menu.
Status Protection and control status signals for all available protection functions
in device.
All metering values available in device. Primary and secondary values,
Metering frequency and phasor diagram provided.
All input and output status provided. For contact inputs and contact
Inputs/Outputs
outputs as well as virtual input and virtual output signals.
Records Only enabled in on line mode, retrieval of all the available records in
device. Snapshot events, control events, oscillography and fault reports.
4.1.8.1 FRONT PANEL

The front panel menu shows only the LEDs submenu where all the front LEDs can be monitored.
4.1.8.2 STATUS
The following menu includes all the available protection status in the device.

Table 4–17: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF STATUS MENU:
STATUS
Up to 24 elements. OPERATION BIT XX is (0) when the configured time
Operation bits out for the operation XX expires or when success conditions are met.
And it is (1) if operation XX is executed and interlocks are fulfilled.
Breaker status (open, closed or undefined). The rest of the status signals
Breaker corresponding to the switchgear XX configured as breaker are in the
“Status>Switchgear Status>Switchgear XX” menu.
Protection Status of all the protection units in the device.
Control Elements Status of all the control units available in the device.
This screen shows a complete list of all protection and control elements
Protection Summary
in the relay, showing their status (enabled or not).
Snapshots events Summary of the snapshot events status (enabled or disabled) for
summary protection, control, inputs and outputs boards and switchgear.
Up to 256 elements. Value in SIGNED INT 16 BIT format of the reading
ModBus User Map for the selected address configured in “Settings>Product
Setup>ModBus User Map”
Up to 16 blocks of switchgear status signals for the 16 configurable
devices. Status signals such as inputs for A and B contacts, status for A
Switchgear Status and B, open and close status, error 00 and error 11, open init and close
4 init, fail to open and fail to close signals.
Internal states for calibration. Factory calibration and calibration error
Calibration
signals.
Flex curve status for A, B, C and D user curves. (0) if it is not configured,
Flex Curves (1) if it is configured. To configure a flex curve go to “Settings>System
Setup>Flex Curves” menu.
System Info This screen can monitor the system parameters and the internal status of
the Relay boot code. Not enabled by default, password required
Information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as:
Records Status Fault reports, control events, oscillography, data logger, demand, energy,
and breaker maintenance.
SNTP-IRIG-B Information related to synchronization via IRIG_B or SNTP
Table 4–18: DIFFERENT CONTROL ACTUAL VALUES INCLUDED IN THE CONTROL ELEMENTS MENU
CONTROL
Frequency Status signals (pickups and operations) for under and overfrequency
units.
Synchrocheck Status signals for synchrocheck function (25).
Autoreclose Status signals for autoreclose function (79). Close signal, recloser status
(ready, lockout, etc), block signals after each shot.
Breaker Failure Status signals for breaker failure function (50BF).
VT Fuse Failure Fuse failure detection signal.
Broken Conductor Status signals (pickups and operations) for broken conductor (I2/I1).
Setting Groups Status signals (activations and blocks) for the relay setting group change.
By default the “setting group” setting is disabled and all the grouped
elements can be enabled at the same time.
Locked Rotor Status signals (pickups and operations) for locked rotor units.

Table 4–19: DIFFERENT PROTECTION ACTUAL VALUES INCLUDED IN THE PROTECTION MENU
PROTECTION
Protection Blocks This screen shows all the protection element blocks available. Protection
elements block signals can be configured at “Settings>Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements”.
Phase Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
instantaneous overcurrent and directional protection functions for phase
current.
Neutral Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
instantaneous overcurrent and directional protection functions for neutral
current (calculated from phases).
Ground Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
instantaneous overcurrent and directional protection functions for ground
current (measured from 4th current input).
Sensitive Ground Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
Current instantaneous overcurrent, isolated and directional protection functions
for ground current (measured from 4th current input).
Negative Sequence Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for negative sequence
Current time overcurrent function.
Thermal Model Protection status signals for thermal model. Reset, alarm and operation
signals for phases and for unit, besides the thermal image values in
Voltage
percentage for all phases and units.
Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for all voltage
4
functions, undervoltage, overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, negative
sequence overvoltage and auxiliary under and over voltage.
Power Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for forward and
directional power units.
Table 4–20: SHOWS THE ACTUAL VALUES RELATED TO RECORDING FUNCTIONS IN THE RECORDS STATUS
MENU:
RECORD
STATUS
Fault Reports This menu shows the fault report status signals, as fault report trigger,
fault date, fault type and location, besides the fault report number.
Control Events Status of the control events (if the signal configured to launch the control
event is active or not).
Oscillography Status of signals related to oscillography recording, such as status or
digital channels, oscillography trigger, number of records available, etc.
Data Logger Data logger information about oldest and newest sample time stamp,
and number of channels and days configured in data logger settings.
Demand Demand trigger and reset inputs status.
Energy Freeze, unfreeze and reset input signals for energy counters.
Breaker Maintenance All signals related to breaker maintenance, such as number of openings,
closings, (KI)2t counters, alarm signal for (KI)2t, etc.

4.1.8.3 METERING
The Metering menu includes all the measurements available in the device. Primary and secondary values, and also the
data related to the recording functions in the relay.
Table 4–21: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF METERING MENU:
METERING
Primary Values Primary values measurements for currents, voltages, power, energy and
demand
Secondary Values Secondary values measurements for currents, voltages and power.
Phasor Diagram Current, voltage and sequence components.
Frequency Line and Bus frequencies.
4.1.8.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The Inputs/Outputs menu includes all the inputs and outputs signals available in the device. Contact and virtual type.
Table 4–22: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF INPUTS/OUTPUTS MENU:

INPUTS/
4 OUTPUTS
Contact Inputs Status of digital inputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay
model.
Contact Output Status Status of digital outputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay
model.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to operate a contact
Operates output. To configure these signals go to “Settings>Relay
Configuration>Outputs” menu.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to reset a contact output.
Resets To configure these signals go to “Settings>Relay Configuration>Outputs”
menu. This output reset Command will only be effective if the “latch”
option has been Selected for the “Output Type” setting on the I/O board,
thus when the contact output has been configured to emulate function 86
(latching relay).
IO Board Status Status of I/O boards. This status provides if the hardware it is OK (boards
matching relay model, correctly inserted in their tracks, in good state and
communicating through the internal CAN Bus).
Virtual Inputs Status of Virtual inputs latched (32) and self-reset (32).
Virtual Outputs Status of virtual outputs (configured in PLC Editor). Up to 512.
Remote Outputs States of remote outputs
Remote Inputs Status of remote device and remote inputs
Analog Inputs (*) Measurements coming from analog inputs (DCMA)
4.1.8.5 RECORDS
The Records menu is only available in on line mode and includes the possibility to retrieve all the records available in the
device. By serial or Ethernet.
Table 4–23: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF RECORDS MENU:
RECORDS (*)
Event recorder (*) Retrieval and visualization of snapshot event (all and new), control
events and alarm panel. By serial or Ethernet (ModBus RTU or TCP/IP)
Waveform capture (*) Retrieval of oscillography files, by serial or Ethernet.
Fault Report (*) Retrieval and visualization of fault report files, by serial or Ethernet.
Data logger (*) Retrieval and visualization of data logger files. Only by Ethernet.

4.1.9 OPERATIONS MENU OVERVIEW
Option only available in on line mode, showing all the operations previously configured in the relay with their corresponding
texts.
Table 4–24: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONS MENU:
OPERATIONS
Operation 1 (*) Entry to first operation (with its corresponding text)
... ...
Operation 24 (*) Entry to 24th operation (with its corresponding text)
4.1.10 COMMUNICATION MENU OVERVIEW
The communication menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update
procedures available in device: firmware, boot code, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download
info files to/from relay).
4
For more detail information go to section starting communication for communication menus description and to section for
flash memory update procedures.
Table 4–25: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF COMMUNICATION MENU:

COMMUNICATION
Computer Menu to start communication with the relay.

Modem (**) Menu to set modem communication parameters (only available if control
type is set to modem in computer menu).
Troubleshooting (*) Menu that Lets the user to perform reading or writing in ModBus
addresses, for verifying communications and access to different
positions in the ModBus memory map.
Calibration (*) Retrieval and store calibration settings from/to relay.
Upgrade firmware Menu to update the relay firmware version through Ethernet
version (**)
Upgrade boot code (**) Menu to update the relay boot code (front RS323 and Ethernet
connection)
Upgrade F650 web Menu to update the web server application (if available)
server
Upload info files to Hard disk storage of settings and configuration files on the relay.
relay
Download info files Retrieval of settings and configuration files that had been previously
from relay stored in the relay hard disk.

4.1.11 SECURITY MENU OVERVIEW
The security menu includes all the menus related to security control in EnerVista 650 Setup. EnerVista 650 Setup security
users and passwords are not related to passwords in HMI. Each security level has its own access for HMI management
and EnerVista 650 Setup management.
Table 4–26: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF SECURITY MENU:
SECURITY
Login User (*) Log on menu for EnerVista 650 Setup. Enabled after security control has
been enabled in user management menu.
Change Password (*) Menu to change passwords and establish password recovering
questions.
User Management (*) User management dialog box.
4.1.12 VIEW MENU OVERVIEW
4 The view menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update procedures
available in device: firmware, boot code, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download info files to/
from relay).
The ModBus memory map is detailed in the complete instruction manual (English only) and can be obtained from EnerVista
650 Setup program.
Table 4–27: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF VIEW MENU:
VIEW
Traces (*) To inspect ModBus communication traces between the EnerVista 650
Setup and the relay.
ModBus Memory map Complete ModBus memory map description.
Languages (**) Option to change the EnerVista 650 Setup default language. Only
available if the relay is not communicating and no file (*650) is open.
4.1.13 HELP MENU OVERVIEW
Complete instructions manual and data about EnerVista 650 Setup release.
Table 4–28: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF HELP MENU:
HELP
Instructions Manual Instructions manual in the language selected in “View>Languages”
menu.
About EnerVista 650 Release version and date of EnerVista 650 Setup program.
Setup

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)
4.2 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)T

The HMI interface consists of several functional panels. The faceplate can be unscrewed to allow easy access to the
removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the display and other cover that protects the front
RS232 Communications port and the commands buttons that can be sealed. The following figure shows the HMI in F650.
HMI Interface
DISPLAY&LEDS
Graphic 16x40 or text 4x20 LCDdisplay

Fluorescent backlight to improve visibility
Multicolor programmable LEDs with label panel
KEYPAD&SHUTTLE
Ergonomic programmable keys

Shuttle control for easy navigation
ESCkey, built-in ENTERfunction and audio feedbac
4
Local / Remote / Off pushbutton with LEDs
FRONTPORT
Electrically isolated front RS232 communication port

Transparent cover can be sealed for security
Figure 4–13: HMI INTERFACE
4.2.1 DISPLAY
F650 units are available with two different options for the front display. The first option is an alphanumerical display of 4
lines with 20 characters each, and the second option is a graphical display of 16 lines with 40 characters each (128x240
pixels), being B the ordering code option for the text display model (basic), and M the code for the mimic display
(graphical).
The boot code and firmware versions can be seen in the relay text main screen, this screen is the default screen in the text
menu for all models: After the text “F650”, appears the relay firmware version (2.00 in the example), and between brackets
the boot program version (3.0 in the example), followed by “ General Electric”, the relay model and the default front RS232
port (COM2) communication parameters.
F6502.00(3 .0)
G eneralElectric
F 650MZD F2G1 H IR
19200N81:M OD BU S :254
Figure 4–14: TEXT MAIN SCREEN

4.2 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2.2 FRONT LED INDICATORS
The relay provides 16 LED indicators, 15 user programmable plus one non-configurable LED (READY) that shows if the
relay is in service.
Programmable LEDs are divided into groups of 5 LEDs, each of the groups having a different color. The first group of LED
indicators is latched by hardware (red color ones), usually configured for trip signals. The second group (yellow color) and
third group (green color) of LED indicators are self-reset type and will be reset once the condition has been cleared, but can
be latched using logic through PLC configuration.
The ESC key is used to reset any latched led indicator, once the condition has been cleared. Keep the ESC button pressed
for more than 3 seconds; all LEDs will light up, verifying their correct operation. When releasing the ESC key, all indicators
programmed with memory, such as tripping LEDs, will be reset.
The latched conditions can also be reset via communications using the LED reset input (to configure this signal go to
“Settings>Relay Configuration>Protection elements>LED RESET INPUT”). By default this LED reset input signal is set
to LEDS RESET operation.
4.2.3 PUSHBUTTONS
The front panel provides:

4 Push buttons: keypad (5 user programmable plus ESC non configurable), shuttle key or shuttle key for easy navigation,
command pushbutton to select operations mode.
RS232 port: intended for connection to a portable PC.
4.2.3.1 KEYPAD AND SHUTTLE KEY
This button can be used for closing the user programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
This button can be used for closing the user programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
User programmable
User programmable
User programmable
(ESC) Escape key. When pressed during more than 3 seconds, it will test all LEDs and
reset the trip LEDs.
shuttle key or Shuttle Key (it can be both rotated and pressed): Used for selecting
menus, submenus, settings and for confirmation. Press or rotate the shuttle key to enter
the text main menu from the text standby screen.
Figure 4–15: KEYPAD AND SHUTTLE KEY DESCRIPTION

4.2.3.2 COMMAND PUSH BUTTON

The unit incorporates a command pushbutton located at the bottom right side of the faceplate, with three options: local,
remote, and off. The first option (LOCAL) allows executing operations in local mode (HMI, front RS232 port, and rear
COM2 port). The second option (REMOTE) allows operation execution only through remote communications (COM1 and
COM3 - Ethernet). The third option (OFF) blocks the execution of operations. Each position is identified with an LED
indicator, as follows:
LOCAL operations (green)

REMOTE operations (green)
OFF (red )
Press the command button to switch from local to remote operations mode and vice versa. OFF status (operation inhibited
for maintenance and safety) can be reach pressing the commands pushbutton during several seconds (local-remote-off
sequence).
4.2.4 FRONT PORT AND COVER SEALING SYSTEM
Figure 4–16: shows the detail of the front RS232 communication port and local/remote button access cover
4
sealing system. The sealing system is similar to the one used in energy meters, using wire and plumb seal.
High quality plastic have been used in the design to withstand extreme environmental conditions, both mechanical and
electrical, sun radiation, humidity, etc. in order to guarantee a long life for the unit.
Cover sealing system
Screen contrast regulator
Electrically isolated RS232 port
Local/remote Operations access
Figure 4–16: DETAIL OF FRONT PORT AND COVER SEALING SYSTEM

4.2.5 TEXT MENUS
4.2.5.1 NAVIGATION IN TEXT MENU

Text menu is available for all models, this is the main menu for visualizing actual values, metering, changing settings, etc.
through the HMI. In models with graphical display (M in ordering code) besides this text main menu there are several
screens providing more performance for control purposes.
Press (or rotate left or right) the shuttle key to enter the main menu, starting from the standby screen (default main screen).
The default main screen can be accessed pressing ESC key till it appears. In all the navigation Press the shuttle key to
select the desired header display (top-level menu). Each press of the shuttle key advances through the main heading
pages as illustrated below. To return to previous menus press the ESC key. To move inside the top-level menu without
changing to other low levels, rotate the shuttle key left to move up and right to move down.
When rotating the shuttle key the selected menu is marked by a single scroll bar character. The mark (>) in the right part of
any menu means that contains more than one level.
S
ymb
ol A
ctio
n p
erfo
rme
d N
avig
atio
n inme
nu
ENT
ER P
res
sShuttleKey E
nternextlevel
4 E
L
–
S
R
C P
r
R
o
es
sE
ta
s
teS
h
cK
u
ey
ttleKe
y
E
xittopr
e
m
vio
o
u
v
sle
eu
v
p
e
a
l
n
d d
owninth
e
s
amele
vel
L R
ota
teL
e ftSh
uttleK e
y m
oveu
p inthesamele
vel
R R
ota
teRightSh
u ttleKey m
oved
ow n inth
esamele
v e
l
? M
enuse
lec
tio
n M
enuse
lec
tio
n
> M
or
em enu
stodis
pla
y M
or
em enu
stodis
pla
y
Figure 4–17:shows an example of main menu navigation:
F6502.00(3.0) Actual Values * Front Panel >

G eneral Electric ENTER Snapshot event Status >
F650M ZDF2G 1HIR ESC Fault report M etering >
19200N81: M O DBUS: 254 Viewsettings Inputs/O utputs
ChangeSettings >
Date&Tim e
Com m ands
Passw ords * Product Setup >
Select M ainScreen ENTER SystemSetup >
Select Language ESC
ProtectionElem ent >
<− return Control Elements >
L–R
* Logotype >
M etering >
All >
<− return
Figure 4–17: NAVIGATION IN MAIN TEXT MENU

4.2.5.2 TEXT MENU HIERARCHY

The structure of HMI text menu is similar to the EnerVista 650 Setup in the actual values and settings (view and change)
menus.
The main menu shows the following options:
Table 4–29: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF MAIN TEXT MENU:
NAME DESCRIPTION NAVIGATION IN MENU
Actual Values Actual values of all the signals available in device. Press shuttle key to enter next level. Press ESC to
Status of protection and control elements, return to default main screen.
measurements, inputs and outputs, etc.
Snapshot events Visualization of all snapshot events in text mode (two Press shuttle key to visualize snapshot events in text
screens for each snapshot event). In graphical displays menu. Press ESC to return to default main screen.
there can be seen in a dedicated screen.
Fault Report Fault reports information available in HMI (two screens Press shuttle key to enter next level. Move L-R to see
for each fault report) all the available fault reports in device. Press shuttle
key to enter particular information for fault report
selected.
View Settings Visualization of all protection and control settings Press shuttle key to enter next level. Move L-R to
available in device. select submenu. Press ESC to return to previous
level.
Change Settings Menu that allows changing all protection and control Press shuttle key to enter next level. Move L-R to
settings available in device. Inputs and outputs settings, select submenu. Press esc to return to previous level.
relay configuration and logic configuration are not
4
available in HMI, only via EnerVista 650 Setup
software.
Date & Time Date and time visualization and modification by user First mode is visualization. Press again shuttle key to
start modification in date and time. Press ESC to
return to previous level.
Commands Operations execution in local mode. Move L-R to pre select operation. Press shuttle key to
select and confirm. Press ESC to return to previous
level.
Password Password menu for settings and commands Move L-R to select submenu. Press shuttle key to
enter next level. Press ESC to return to previous
level.
Select Main Screen Selection of default main screen in text menu. Move L-R to select the default main screen type.
Press shuttle key to confirm.
Select Language Language selection. Between default language (see Move L-R to select the default language. Press
ordering code) and English. shuttle key to confirm selection. Switch the relay off
and on.
< - return Return to previous level Press shuttle key to return to previous level.

a) ACTUAL VALUES
The Actual Values menu option in HMI concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering,
counters information, oscillography, events, fault locator, etc.
Table 4–30: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU:
Front Panel >
LEDs
Status >
Operation Bits
Breaker
Protection >
Protection Blocks
Phase Current
Neutral Current
Ground Current
Sens. Ground Current
Neg. Seq. Current
Thermal Model
4 Voltage
Power
Control Elements >
Frequency
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Broken Conductor
Setting Groups
Locked Rotor
Switchgear Status >
Switchgear 1
Switchgear ...
Switchgear 16
Calibration
Flex Curves
System Info
SNTP/IRIG_B
Records Status >
Fault Reports
Control Events
Oscillography
Data logger
Demand
Energy
Breaker Maintenan.
Metering >
Primary Values >
Current
Voltage
Power
Energy
Demand
Secondary Values >
Current

Voltage
Power
Phasor Diagram
Frequency
Inputs/Outputs >
Contact Inputs >
Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output St. >
Cont. Output Op. >
Cont. Output Rs. >
IO Board Status
Virtual Inputs >
Virtual Inp.Latched
Virtual Inp.SR
Virtual Outputs
Remote Outputs > 4
DNA
User St
Remote Inputs >
Remote Input
Remote Devices
Analog Inputs >
To enter this menu press the shuttle key when the option Actual Values is selected in main menu. A secondary level will be
displayed with different sublevels as shown on Table 4–30:. Rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right for moving
down) select the next level to be displayed, press the shuttle key again to enter in next level and press ESC key to return to
previous level if desired. This navigation will be performed the same for all the menus in Actual Values. Once the last
sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the actual values selected.
One example of data screen for actual values is shown in Figure 4–18:.
First Line: Header of last level in actual values (Phase Current in the example)
Second Line: Data identifier (in the example PH IOC1 HIGH A, is the pickup signal for the first instantaneous
overcurrent function level high for phase A).
Third line: Status of the displayed actual value.
Fourth Line: Relative position in the menu (it is the first value of 114)
P haseCurrent
PHIO C 1HIGHAP KP
OFF
(1/114)
Figure 4–18: ACTUAL VALUES SCREEN DATA

In the Actual Values menus are different types of data, each type of data will display its particular status type (on and off, 0
or 1, ok or fail, analog values, etc.)

4.2.5.3 SNAPSHOT EVENTS

To enter this menu press the shuttle key when the option Snapshot events is selected in main menu (). In this menu all the
snapshot events stored can be displayed.
Snapshot events are changes in the relay internal status.
One snapshot event is displayed in two text screens:
The first screen display the status, date and time of the snapshot event: the snapshot event identifier, its status,
event number and the date and time of the occurrence. If the snapshot event identifier does not fit the first line, the
whole text will be shown using as well the second line alternating with the status and event number.
The second screen displays currents and voltages in primary values for that particular snapshot event. Ia, Ib, Ic
and Ig for currents and Vab, Vbc, Vca and V0 for voltages. To access the metering screen in snapshot events
menu, press shuttle key from the snapshot event first screen. To exit from the metering screen pres ESC.
To select different snapshot events to be displayed, rotate the shuttle key to select the snapshot event and then press the
shuttle key to enter the metering screen. Press esc to exit the metering screen and return to snapshot events menu.

Figure 4–19: shows an example of snapshot events navigation:
F 6 5 0 2 .0 0 (3 .0 ) Press shuttle key from the default main screen and enter in the main text menu.
G e n e r a l E le c tr ic
F 6 5 0 M Z D F 2 G 1 H IR
19200N 81: M O D B U S : 254
E N T E R
E SC
Move the shuttle key until a single scroll bar character appears in the left part of
A c tu a l V a lu e s
Snapshot event header.
? S n ap sh o t even t
F a u lt r e p o r t
V ie w s e ttin g s
Press shuttle key to enter in the snapshot events menu
E N T E R
E SC
B r e a k e r C lo s e d O N > Select the snapshot event to display using the shuttle key (left and right to move up
S t: O N (4 /4 7 9 )
T im e : 1 6 :3 5 :0 2 .0 2 7
and down inside the recorded snapshot events).
4
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5
L –R
Is o la te d G n d 3 B lo c k > Once selected the snapshot event, identifier , status, date and time will be displayed.
S t: O F F (5 /4 7 9 ) In the second line St: is showing the status and the relative snapshot index from the
T im e : 1 6 :3 5 :0 1 .9 9 5 whole recorded number. Third and fourth lines are used to display the time and date
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 of the snapshot event.
E N T E R
E SC
Ia 0 .0 0 0 V ab 0 .0 0 0 Pressing the shuttle key the metering screen for the snapshot event will be
Ib 0 .0 0 0 V b c 0 .0 0 0 displayed.
Ic 0 .0 0 0 V ca 0 .0 0 0
To exit from this screen press the ESC key and return to the snapshot events menu.
Ig 0 .0 0 0 V 0 0 .0 0 0
Figure 4–19: SNAPSHOT EVENTS NAVIGATION IN HMI

4.2.5.4 FAULT REPORT

To enter this menu press the shuttle key when the option Fault report is selected in main menu (). This menu displays
information about the last ten faults recorded in the relay.
The Relay HMI allows two types of visualization for the fault reports stored in the Relay:
1. Showing the fault warning messages in the text display when the fault is produced. This option has to be enabled
by setting. To change from the HMI go to the menu “Change Settings >Product Setup > Fault Report > Show
Fault On HMI” and enable it.
2.Only saving and allowing viewing the information from the last ten faults recorded in the relay.
In the first option, when a fault occurs a warning message is displayed, including information about the fault in two screens,
one with general fault information, and a second one with the measured values in the moment of the fault.
The fault-warning message must be acknowledged by the user; this means that the user must press the shuttle key for this
screen to disappear, The HMI will not allow to perform any other operation until the screen is acknowledged. In the event of
several consecutive faults, the HMI will always show the most recent fault, and the user will need to acknowledge all of
them, up to a maximum of ten faults.
In the second option, viewing the fault reports in the menu available in the HMI, the Fault Report menu in the main text
screen must be accessed by pressing the shuttle key. The display will show the information about the last ten faults
4 produced, and both the general information and the metering screens can be viewed for each fault. Displayed information
starts in the most recent fault, and the user can switch to another fault by rotating the shuttle key.
Displayed information is stored in the relay volatile memory, so if the relay is turned off this information will be lost, as well
as if a “Clear Fault Report” command is executed. However, fault reports stored in the relay non-volatile memory will
remain after the Fault reset, and they can be obtained from the relay using EnerVista 650 Setup software, at the
“Actual>Records>Fault report” menu.
If there is no fault report available through the display, the relay will show a “Fault report not available” message.

The format of the displayed screens is as follows:
A c tu a l V a lu e s
S napshot event Select the Fault report menu in text menu
* F a u lt r e p o r t
V ie w s e ttin g s
E N T E R
E SC
Fa u lt R e p o rt # 1 If there is more than one fault record rotate the shuttle key and select the desired
N A F d is t: 0 .0 0 record to be displayed.
T im e : 0 9 :2 1 :4 0 .5 4 5
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5
L –R
Fa u lt R e p o rt # 2 First screen with general fault information: Fault report #number, fault type, distance
N A F d is t: 0 .0 0 and date and time.
T im e : 0 9 :2 2 :0 3 .0 4 7
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 4
E N T E R
E SC
F a u lt R e p o r t # 2
Ia 0 .0 0 V ab 0 .0 0 Second screen with metering data for that fault record. All this data is a summary
Ib 0 .0 0 V bc 0 .0 0 from the fault report file that can be retrieved via EnerVista 650 Setup software.
Ic 0 .0 0 V ca 0 .0 0
Figure 4–20: FAULT REPORT NAVIGATION IN HMI
Possible fault types are as follows:
GROUND Ground faults

AG phase A to ground
ABG phase AB to ground
BG phase BG to ground
BCG phase BCG to ground
CG phase CG to ground
CAG phase CAG to ground
PHASE Phase to phase faults
AB phase A to phase B
BC phase B to phase C
CA phase C to phase A
3PHASE Three-phase faults (shown on the display as 3PH)
NAF Fault type not calculated

4.2.5.5 VIEW SETTINGS

To enter this menu press the shuttle key when the option “View Settings” is selected in main menu. A secondary level will
be displayed with different sublevels as shown on . Rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right for moving down)
select the next level to be displayed, press the shuttle key again to enter in next level and press esc key to return to
previous level if desired. This navigation will be performed the same for all the menus in “View Settings”. Once the last
sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the settings selected.
Table 4–31: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF “VIEW/CHANGE SETTINGS” MAIN MENU
MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL
Product Setup >
Communication >
Serial Ports
Ethernet >
Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave >
DNP3 Slave 1
4 DNP3 Slave 2
DNP3 Slave 3
IEC 870-5-104
SNTP
Fault Report
Oscillography
Demand
System Setup >
General Settings
Breaker >
Breaker Settings
Breaker Maintenance
Protection Element >
Phase Current >
Phase TOC High >
Phase TOC High 1
Phase TOC High 2
Phase TOC High 3
Phase TOC Low >
Phase TOC Low 1
Phase TOC Low 2
Phase TOC Low 3
Phase IOC High >
Phase IOC High 1
Phase IOC High 2
Phase IOC High 3
Phase IOC Low >
Phase IOC Low 1
Phase IOC Low 2
Phase IOC Low 3
Phase Directional >
Phase Directional 1
Phase Directional 2
Phase Directional 3
Thermal Model >
Thermal Model 1


Thermal Model 2
Thermal Model 3
Neutral Current >
Neutral TOC >
Neutral TOC 1
Neutral TOC 2
Neutral TOC 3
Neutral IOC >
Neutral IOC 1
Neutral IOC 2
Neutral IOC 3
Neutral Dir >
Neutral Dir 1
Neutral Dir 2
Neutral Dir 3
Ground Current >
Ground TOC >
Ground TOC 1 4
Ground TOC 2
Ground TOC 3
Ground IOC >
Ground IOC 1
Ground IOC 2
Ground IOC 3
Ground Dir >
Ground Dir 1
Ground Dir 2
Ground Dir 3
Sens. Ground Curr >
Sens. Ground TOC >
Sens. Ground TOC 1
Sens. Ground TOC 2
Sens. Ground TOC 3
Sens. Ground IOC >
Sens. Ground IOC 1
Sens. Ground IOC 2
Sens. Ground IOC 3
Isolated Gnd IOC >
Isolated Gnd IOC 1
Isolated Gnd IOC 2
Isolated Gnd IOC 3
Sens. Ground Dir. >
Sens. Ground Dir. 1
Sens. Ground Dir. 2
Sens. Ground Dir. 3
Neg. Seq. Current >
Neg. Seq. TOC >
Neg. Seq. TOC 1
Neg. Seq. TOC 2
Neg. Seq. TOC 3
Voltage Elements >
Phase UV >


Phase UV 1
Phase UV 2
Phase UV 3
Phase OV >
Phase OV 1
Phase OV 2
Phase OV 3
Neutral OV High >
Neutral OV High 1
Neutral OV High 2
Neutral OV High 3
Neutral OV Low >
Neutral OV Low 1
Neutral OV Low 2
Neutral OV Low 3
Neg. Seq. OV >
Neg. Seq. OV 1
4 Neg. Seq. OV 2
Neg. Seq. OV 3
Auxiliary OV >
Auxiliary OV 1
Auxiliary OV 2
Auxiliary OV 3
Auxiliary UV >
Auxiliary UV 1
Auxiliary UV 2
Auxiliary UV 3
Power >
Forward Power >
Forward Power 1
Forward Power 2
Forward Power 3
Directional Power >
Directional Power 1
Directional Power 2
Directional Power 3
Control Elements >
Setting Group
Underfrequency >
Underfrequency 1
Underfrequency 2
Underfrequency 3
Overfrequency >
Overfrequency 1
Overfrequency 2
Overfrequency 3
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Broken Conductor >
Broken Conductor 1


Broken Conductor 2
Broken Conductor 3
Locked Rotor >
Locked Rotor 1
Locked Rotor 2
Locked Rotor 3
Inputs/outputs >
Remote Comms.

4.2.5.6 CHANGE SETTINGS

To enter this menu press the shuttle key when the option “Change Settings” is selected in main menu. A secondary level
will be displayed with different sublevels as shown on Table 4–31:. Rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right for
moving down) select the next level to be displayed press the shuttle key again to enter in next level and press ESC key to
return to previous level if desired. This navigation will be performed the same for all the menus in “Change Settings”. Once
the last sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the settings selected.
To change a particular setting, press the shuttle key on the setting to be modified. After selecting the setting, the value for
that setting will appear between brackets. Choose the new value moving up and down the shuttle key. After selecting the
appropriate value press again the shuttle key to fix that value. To save the new settings, go to the end of the menu rotating
the shuttle key right, and select the menu “Press intro to save settings”. When pressing the shuttle key inside this menu the
new settings will be saved.
Figure 4–21: shows an example of change settings navigation:
Select the menu Change settings and press the shuttle key to enter in the next
sublevel.
S n ap sh o t even t
F a u lt r e p o r t
V ie w s e ttin g s
* C h a n g e s e ttin g s
4 If there is more than one sublevel, select the next sublevel by rotating and pressing
P ro d u c t S e tu p >
the shuttle key till the last level is reached.
* S y s te m S e tu p >
P r o te c tio n E le m e n ts >
C o n tr o l E le m e n ts >
Press the shuttle key in the function to be modified

* G e n e r a l S e ttin g s
B re a k e r >
< − re tu rn
G e n e r a l S e ttin g s -> Group of settings

P h a s e C T R a tio -> Setting to be modified
6 .0
-> Value
[ 1 .0 :6 0 0 0 .0 :0 .1 ]
-> Range and step
G e n e r a l S e ttin g s
P h a s e C T R a tio Pressing the shuttle key, value appears between brackets and can be modified
< 6 > .0 rotating the shuttle key. Pressing again the shuttle key, the new value will be
[ 1 .0 :6 0 0 0 .0 :0 .1 ] accepted.
P r e s s In tr o Once all settings inside the group have been modified, go to the last screen rotating
to s a v e s e ttin g s the shuttle key and press Intro. At this moment of time, the new settings will be
active in the relay.
Figure 4–21: CHANGE SETTINGS PROCEDURE IN HMI

4.2.5.7 DATE & TIME

The “Date & Time” menu will show the relay date and time information in the following format:
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
To modify date and time, press the shuttle key. The relay will show the year between brackets at the top of the screen. By
rotating the shuttle key, reach the desired value for the year, and press the shuttle key to select and store that value. After
the year, the relay will show the month. Proceed as in the case of the year. The date & time modification sequence is as
follows:
Rotate the shuttle key to select the “Date and Time” menu and press to enter in it
The date and time data will appear in the format related above.
F a u lt re p o rt
V ie w s e ttin g s Pressing the shuttle key the year can be modified rotating the shuttle key, after
C h a n g e s e ttin g s selecting the desired value, press again the shuttle key to store the value.
* D a te & T im e
‘Year’
⇒
Date: Day/Month/<Year>
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 Time: Hour:Minutes:Seconds
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4 After storing the value for Year, Month will appear between brackets and can be 4
S u n d a y modified
⇒
‘Month’
‘Y e a r ’ Date: Day/<Month>/Year
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /< 2 0 0 5 >
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4 Time: Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Month, Day will appear between brackets and can be
⇒ modified
‘M o n th ’ ‘Day’
D a te : 1 0 /< J u n > /2 0 0 5
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4 Date: <Day>/Month/Year
Time: Hour:Minutes:Seconds
⇒ After storing the value for Day, Hour will appear between brackets and can be
‘D a y ’ modified
D a te : < 1 0 > /J u n /2 0 0 5 ‘Hour’
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4
Date: Day/Month/Year
⇒ Time: <Hour>:Minutes:Seconds
‘H o u r ’ After storing the value for Hour, Minutes will appear between brackets and can be
D a te : 0 7 /N o v /2 0 0 4 modified
T im e : < 1 4 > :3 9 :5 4
‘Minute’
⇒ Date: Day/Month/Year
‘M in u te ’ Time: Hour:<Minute>:Seconds
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 After storing the value for Minutes, Seconds will appear between brackets and can
T im e : 1 4 :< 3 9 > :5 4 be modified
‘Second’
⇒
Date: Day/Month/Year
‘S e c o n d ’
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 Time: Hour: Minute:<Seconds>
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 : < 5 4 >
Once this sequence is completed, these values will remain stored in the relay, and
the display will show again the date at the bottom of the text screen.
Figure 4–22: CHANGE DATE AND TIME PROCEDURE IN HMI

4.2.5.8 COMMANDS
Commands are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, and they can be executed using the pushbuttons on the relay front.
Using EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user can configure up to 24 commands with a descriptive text. When executing
the operation from the relay front, the operation description text will be displayed.
Example of commands (operations) executions via HMI
Press the shuttle key in the menu commands when it is selected in the display ().
C h an g e S e ttin g s
D a te & T im e
* C o m m an d s
P assw o rd
E N T E R
E SC
C o m m an d :
C L O S E B R E A K E R All the previously configured commands will be displayed. Rotate the shuttle key
4 move through the available commands. Press ESC to return to previous level.
L –R
C o m m an d :
O P E N B R E A K E R Press shuttle key to pre-select the operation to be executed
E N T E R
E SC
P u s h ‘In tr o ” fo r When the message “Push Intro for Confirmation” appears, press the shuttle key to
C o n fir m a tio n confirm the commands that will be performed.
E N T E R
E SC
C o m m an d
C o m p le te d Once the commands has been performed or the time out has expired the
“Command completed” message will appear in the display.
Figure 4–23: COMMANDS IN HMI

4.2.5.9 PASSWORDS
F650 units incorporate independent passwords for protection and control, in order to prevent unauthorized keypad and
display access to the relay.
Settings Password:
This password allows restricting access to settings changes in the relay protection elements.
Commands Password:
This password is required for executing operation commands through the keypad and display.
If the Commands Password is activated, when the user tries to execute an operation, the relay will request this password,
and in case of using the single-line diagram for graphical display models, all objects will not be operational until this
password is entered, either logging in Login Pwd Commands, or entering the password in the Commands menu.
Relay settings view, measures, and other monitored information are not password-protected, and they can be accessed by
all users.
Access to the password menu is located at the Password option in the relay text menu. This menu includes the following
options:
"Login Pwd Settings"
"Logout Pwd Settings" 4
"Change Pwd Settings"
"Login Pwd Commands"
"Logout Pwd Commands"
"Change Pwd Commands"
"Forgot Password?"
Among the available options in this menu, there are three types of functionality:
Login: For entering the password, either for settings or commands, and enable access to settings or
commands. Once entering the password the relay is no longer password protected, and access is
enabled to settings modification or commands execution.
Logout: Once the necessary setting changes or operation commands have been executed, the user can log
out, so that the relay is password protected again.
Change: This menu allows setting or modifying the desired password.
Forgot Password: This menu provides the encrypted password, so that it can be recovered if the user loses or forgets
it.
Passwords are restricted for Settings change and Commands execution. To password-protect the relay, it is first necessary
to set the desired password, using the corresponding “Change Pwd ...” menu. The default password is 0000. This
password provides access to the whole relay functionality.
Once a new password has been set, the user must log in to access the protected functionality; otherwise, the relay will
request the password when trying to change settings or execute commands. Once the password is entered the relay is
unprotected (as if the user had logged in), and the user must log out to protect again the relay.
a) PASSWORD RANGE
The valid range for F650 passwords is a number from 0000 to 9999.
The default password is 0000, which provides access to the whole relay functionality. This is the default option for enabling
relay use without using passwords.

b) ENTERING THE PASSWORD (LOGIN PWD)

This operation is the same for both the settings and commands passwords. The only difference will be the access menu.
For entering the password, the user must access the Login menus inside the Password menu.
Login Pwd Settings or Login Pwd Commands:
The relay requests the password with the following message on the screen:
Setting passwd.
Login: < 1000 >
For entering the desired password, the user must rotate the shuttle key to the left (decrease) or to the right (increase), and
establish the desired number. Once entered, the selected password between brackets has been entered, the relay will
show the message “Processing passwd. Wait...”. If the password is correct, the relay will allow access to the settings
change or command execution. It is not necessary to enter the password every time a change is to be performed. The relay
will request the password 15 minutes after the last keypad action has taken place. This period of time is the same that takes
the relay to turn off the display backlighting.
c) LOGGING OUT (LOGOUT PWD)

To disable access to settings and commands, the user must logout.
4 Logout Pwd Settings or Logout Pwd Commands:

For safety reasons, if the user does not log out, the relay will do it automatically 15 minutes after the last keypad
action.
d) CHANGING THE PASSWORD (CHANGE PWD COMMANDS)

To set a password in the relay, both for settings and commands, the corresponding menu must be accessed inside the
Password menu:
Change Pwd Settings or Change Pwd Commands:
To modify the password, the user must first introduce the existing password; if the relay has the default factory password,
this would be 0000.
For modifying the password, the relay requests the existing password with the following message:
(Setting or Command) passwd.
Login: < 0000 >
Once the entered password has been acknowledged, the new password must be entered:
(Setting o Command) passwd.
New passwd: < 1000 >
Once the new password has been entered, the relay returns to the general Passwords menu.
e) PASSWORD RECOVERY (FORGOT PASSWORD?)

If the relay passwords need to be recovered, the “Forgot Password?” menu must be accessed. This menu is the last
option inside the text Passwords menu.
This menu will show two passwords, which correspond to the encrypted protection settings, and commands passwords, as
shown in the following example:
Cod Settings: [35c0]
Cod Commands: [35c0]
<Push Intro>
In order to obtain the decoded password from the encrypted codes provided by the relay, it is necessary to contact GE
Multilin and provide these encrypted codes.

4.2.5.10 SELECT MAIN SCREEN

The relay display offers the possibility to select the default main screen. For this purpose, the user must access the “Select
Main Screen” menu through the HMI. This menu includes the following options:
Logotype
This option selects as main screen the relay logotype including the firmware and boot code versions, the relay model and
the communication parameters for local port COM2.
F6502.00(3 .0)
G eneralElectric
F 650MZD F2G1 H IR
19200N81:M OD BU S :254
Figure 4–24: DEFAULT LOGOTYPE SCREEN 4

Metering
This option shows a Metering screen including the phase and ground currents as well as phase-to-phase voltage, and zero
sequence voltage values, all of them in primary values.
Ia 0.000 Vab 0.000

Ib 0.000 Vbc 0.000
Ic 0.000 Vca 0.000
Ig 0.000 V0 0.000
Figure 4–25: DEFAULT METERING SCREEN

All
This option alternates in time the two previous options.

4.2.5.11 SELECT LANGUAGE

Option only available for versions 1.70 or higher.
The relay display offers the possibility to select the default language for the relay. For this purpose, the user must access
the “Select language” menu located at the end of the main menu through the HMI. This menu allows the user to set the
default language of the relay between English (always available) and second language selected in the relay model. (see
section BUSCAR ORIGEN REFERENCIA 2.3. ).
For example one relay in French language (e.g. F650MZDF2G1HIRF) can be displayed in French or in English only by
changing the language setting in HMI. It is necessary to switch off and on the relay to start working with the new language
configuration in the relay. In EnerVista 650 Setup it is possible to select the language for the software (View>Languages).
Example of language selection in HMI
C om m ands Press the shuttle key to enter the select language menu.
P a s s w o rd
Depending on the relay model there will be available different kind of language
S e le c t M a in S c r e e n
selections: English/French, English/ Russian, etc.
* S e le c t L a n g u a g e
4 ENTER
ESC
* E n g lis h
F re n c h Rotate the shuttle key to select the desired language and press it to store the
< − re tu rn selection in the relay
ENTER
ESC
⇐
Language changed.
P le a s e r e b o o t Once the new language has been selected it is necessary to reboot the relay in
th e r e la y . order to start working with the new language in the device.
Figure 4–26: LANGUAGE SELECTION IN HMI

4.2.6 GRAPHIC DISPLAY
4.2.6.1 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

In models with graphic display (F650M) default main screen is the single-line diagram. This single-line diagram can be
configured using EnerVista 650 Setup software by choosing the HMI menu inside Relay Configuration (Settings>Relay
Configuration>HMI).
F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER
Ia = 0.000 kA Vab =0.000 kV
Ib = 0.000 kA Vbc =0.000 kV
Ic = 0.000 kA Vca =0.000 kV

4
Freq = 0.00 Hz
Esc: Menu. Intro:Next. L-R:Select

Figure 4–27: ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
The bottom of the display shows a legend that indicates the possible selections that can be made from this
screen.
Esc: Menu.Intro: Next.L-R: Select.
The meaning of these options is as follows:

Esc: Menu.
Pressing the ESC key, the user will access the relay main menu, similar to the one displayed by the text-
display model (F650B).
Pressing again the ESC key; the menu selection screen (Actual Values, Snapshot events, etc.) will be
displayed. This main menu screen is identical to the one described for the text display. Its functionality is
described in section in this manual.
Intro: Next.
Pressing the shuttle key, the user access the next graphical screen, which in this case corresponds to the
primary metering values screen.
L-R: Select
Once the different switchgear elements to be operated have been configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, the
user will be able to operate them from the graphic display.
If a single-line diagram has been previously configured in the EnerVista 650 Setup, in the HMI option inside the
Relay Configuration menu, the different switchgear elements configured for the display will be operative from
the graphic display. By rotating the shuttle key to the left and right, the cursor moves among the elements and
blinks on each of them. When an element is selected by pressing the shuttle key, the relay will indicate the
command to be executed, and the user will need to confirm it by pressing again the shuttle key.
The following sections describe only the operation of screens that are specific for the graphic display models.

4.2.6.2 METERING SCREEN

The Metering screen displays relay analog measures in their primary values. Available metering values are as follows:
Metering Screen. Total metering56

Phasor Ia Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ib Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ia Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ib Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ic Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ig Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Isg Primary 0.000 KA
I0 Primary 0.000 KA
Intro: Next. ESC: Prev L-R:Scroll.
4
Figure 4–28: METERING SCREEN
As in the rest of graphical display screens, the bottom part shows a legend that indicates the possible options for the user.
In this case, the options are:
Intro: Next.Esc: Prev.L-R: Scroll.
Intro: Next.
Pressing the shuttle key the user accesses the next screen, in this case the ALL EVENTS screen.
Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key the user returns to the previous screen (One-line diagram)
L-R: Scroll.
Rotating the shuttle key to the left (L) or right (R) the user can access all the Metering values in the screen. Rotating the
shuttle key left will move up in the screen, and rotating right will move down.
METERING SCREEN ANALOG MEASURES IN PRIMARY VALUES

Phasor Ia Primary V0 Primary Phase A Real Pwr Line Frequency Primary
Phasor Ib Primary V1 Primary Phase B Reactive Pwr Bus Frequency Primary
Phasor Ic Primary V2 Primary Phase B Apparent Pwr Vx Primary
Phasor Ig Primary Vab Primary Phase B Real Pwr Positive MVarhour
Phasor Isg Primary Vbc Primary Phase C Reactive Pwr Negative MVarhour
Phasor In Primary Vca Primary Phase C Apparent Pwr Positive MWatthour
RMS Ia Primary Vn Primary Phase C Real Pwr Negative MWatthour
RMS Ib Primary Va Primary 3 Phase Reactive Pwr Pos MVarhour Cnt
RMS Ic Primary Vb Primary 3 Phase Apparent Pwr Neg MVarhour Cnt
RMS Ig Primary Vc Primary 3 Phase Real Pwr Pos MWatthour Cnt
RMS Isg Primary VBB Primary Phase A Power Factor Neg MWatthour Cnt
I0 Primary VL Primary Phase B Power Factor
I1 Primary Phase A Reactive Pwr Phase C Power Factor
I2 Primary Phase A Apparent Pwr 3 Phase Power Factor

4.2.6.3 ALL EVENTS SCREEN

This screen shows all events that have been produced in the relay. The top of the screen shows its name (All Events), and
the relative and total number of events contained in the screen.
All Events (1/479)
This legend means that there are a total of 479 events stored in the relay, and that the cursor is located on event number 1.
The information shown on this screen for each event is as follows:
“Hour:Minute:Second:Millisecond” “Event text” “Event status(ON/OFF)”
All Events (1/479).

- [ Ready LED ON ] -
16:11:08.035 Ready LED ON ON
16:11:08.017 Breaker Closed ON ON
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd2 Block OFF OFF 4
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd1 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC3 Block OFF OFF
Esc: Prev. Intro: Menu. L-R: Scroll.
Figure 4–29: ALL EVENTS SCREEN

The screen legend options are:
Esc: Prev. Intro: Menu. L-R: Scroll.
Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the user returns to the previous screen (Metering screen)
Intro: Menu.
Pressing the shuttle key, the user accesses the Events menu that offers the following options at the bottom of the screen:
next prev reload details At
To access the different options in the snapshot events graphic menu the user must move the cursor from left to right. The
selected option will be displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, the user must press
again the shuttle key.
<NEXT>
The user accesses the next available graphic screen (Events – New)
<PREV>
This option returns to the general events graphic menu (All Events)
<RELOAD>
This option updates all events stored in the relay and returns to the general events screen.

<DETAILS>
The Details screen provides access to metering values, and date and time related with the event.
The top of the screen displays a legend with the event text, followed by the date and time, the event status (ON or
OFF), and the event index number related to the complete list of events in the relay, for example (1/479). The rest of
information provided by the Details screen corresponds to the relay measures in the moment of the event. Metering
values provided in the events are secondary, and voltage values correspond to phase-to-ground voltage.
Ready LED ON
Date: 10/Jun/2005 St:ON
Time: 16:11:08.035 (1/479)
Phasor Ia Primary 0.000

Phasor Ib Primary 0.000
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000
Line Frequency 0.000
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000
I0 Primary 0.000
4 I1 Primary 0.000
Intro: Meters. ESC: Prev. L-R: Scroll.
Figure 4–30: SNAPSHOT EVENTS DETAIL SCREEN

To navigate this screen the user must follow the legend at the bottom of the screen:
Intro: Meters. ESC: Prev.L-R: Scroll.
Intro: Meters.
To access the metering values in the moment of the event, the user must press the shuttle key. A new metering screen
will be displayed, containing the primary metering values in the snapshot event, such as:
Phasor Ia Primary I2 Primary

Phasor Ib Primary Vab Primary
Phasor Ic Primary Vbc Primary
Line Frequency Primary Vca Primary
Phasor Ig Primary V1 Primary
Phasor Isg Primary V2 Primary
I0 Primary V0 Primary
I1 Primary 3 Phase Power Factor
Once inside the Metering screen, a new legend will be shown for each event (Intro or ESC: Prev. L-R: Scroll); this
legend indicates that by pressing ESC or the shuttle key, the system will return to the Event Detail screen, and rotating
the shuttle key the user will access all the metering values contained in the metering screen of the considered event.
ESC: Prev.
If the user presses the ESC key from the event detail screen, the system will return to the all events screen.

L-R: Scroll.
Rotating the shuttle key left (L) or right (R) moves among all the events contained in the all events screen, allowing a
preview of the details for each of them.
<AT>
When this option is selected, the system marks the event where the cursor is located. A relative time stamp is
performed, in such a way that the selected event, marked with an asterisk (*) between the time and the event name is
set with a relative time of 00:00:00:000 on the top line of the event screen, together with its relative index, and the rest
of events in the screen will show a date/time that relates to the marked event. This operation mode allows a quick
inspection of the relative time passed between several events, which is very useful for analyzing events in the field.
The corresponding legend to this relative event-marking screen is as follows:
Esc: Out At. Intro: Tag event.
Esc: Out At.
The relative event marking is eliminated and the system returns to the general events screen.
Intro: Tag event.
If the user places the cursor on a different event by rotating the shuttle key left or right, pressing the shuttle key
will change the relative mark to that new event.
4
4.2.6.4 NEW EVENTS SCREEN
This screen shows the new events that have been produced in the relay since the last time the New Events screen was
read. The top of the screen shows a “New Events” legend, and the relative and total number of events contained.
Navigation through the different menus in this New Events screen is similar to the one described in the previous section for
All Events. The main difference is that in the case of new events it is necessary to select the RELOAD submenu to update
the screen with new events that have been produced, while in the All Events screen, this refreshment is automatic.
After the new events have been read, if the user selects again the Reload menu, the system will show a <No new events
available.> message, indicating that there are no more new events available since the last reading.

4.2.6.5 ALARMS PANEL

Alarms panel can be viewed in all F650 models using communication software EnerVista 650 Setup, however, only models
with graphic display allow access to the alarms panel from the HMI.
First line shows the relative and total number of alarms existing in that screen. The relative number refers to the alarm on
which the cursor is located, and the total number refers to the total amount of alarms available. The second line on this
screen shows an index that indicates the number of the configured control event that corresponds to the displayed alarm,
followed by the alarm text configured in the Control Events menu inside the Relay Configuration option
(“Settings>Relay Configuration>Control Events”).
Alarm Panel (1/3).

#1 OPERATIONS IN LOCAL MODE
7/11/04 16:54:16 OPERATIONS IN LO. ON

7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL PICKUP ON
7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL TRIP ON
Esc: Prev. Intro: Menu
Figure 4–31: ALARMS PANEL IN HMI

The rest of the screen shows the different alarms produced in the relay with the date and time when the corresponding
event was produced, followed by the alarm identification text, and its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF).
In the previous example, the produced alarm is the change to local of the execution of operations (OPERATIONS IN
LOCAL MODE), the date and time when this event has been produced, and its status (ON):
The bottom of the screen shows the legend that indicates how to navigate through the different options available in the
screen.
ESC: Prev. Intro: Menu.
ESC: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the system returns to the previous New Events screen.
Intro: Menu.
Pressing the shuttle key, the user accessed the available alarms menu, which includes the following options.
next prev ack ack all
To access the different options provided by the alarms graphic menu, the user must move the shuttle key left to right. The
selected option will be displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, the shuttle key must
be pressed.
<NEXT>
This option provides access to the next available graphic screen (I/O boards)
<PREV>
The system returns to the previous New Events screen.
<ACK>
This option acknowledges the alarm on which the cursor is located.

<ACK ALL>
This option acknowledges all alarms. Alarm acknowledgement through the graphic HMI is considered as through
communication port COM2, as it is considered to be Local in both cases.
When an alarm has been acknowledged, a selection mark will appear to the right of its status. Inactive alarms will
disappear from the screen once they are acknowledged.
4.2.6.6 INPUT/OUTPUT MONITORING SCREEN

This is the last screen available in the graphic display. This screen allows viewing the status of the relay inputs and outputs,
as well as emulate inputs (for verification of the logic, or related functions), and contact outputs (to verify wiring).
The format of this screen is shown on the figure below.
The first line shows the name of the screen “I/O Cards”, followed by the type and description of the board where the cursor
is located, which will appear between selection marks > < and blinking.
IO Card.
Type: 2, Nº IN 8, Nº OUT8 4
>F<
G
H
J
Esc: Prev. Intro: Menu. L-R: Chg Card.
Figure 4–32: INPUTS/OUTPUTS GENERAL SCREEN

The navigation legend on this screen is as follows:
Esc: Prev.Intro: Menu.L-R: Chg Card

Esc: Prev.
This option returns to the previous screen (Alarms Panel).
Intro: Menu.
This option provides access to the selected I/O board menu:
This menu includes the following options.
next view test input test output
As in previous screens, to access the different options provided by the inputs/outputs graphic menu, the user must move
the shuttle key left to right. The selected option will be displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the
selected option, the shuttle key must be pressed.

IO Card F. Type: 2, # IN 8, # OUT 8
Input (ON OFF) Output
0 CC1 8 Va COIL1 0 OUT1 ??

1 CC2 9 Vb COIL1 1 OUT2 ??
2 CC3 10 Va COIL2 2 OUT3 ??
3 CC4 11 Vb COIL2 3 OUT4 ??
4 CC5 12 Isense1 4 OUT5 ??
5 CC6 13 Isense1 5 OUT6 ??
6 CC7 14 SUP21 6 OUT7 ??
7 CC8 15 SUP22 7 OUT8 ??
next >VIEW< test input test output
Figure 4–33: INPUT/OUTPUT VIEWING SCREEN
4 <NEXT>
This option brings the system back to the one-line diagram.
<VIEW>
This option shows the real status of all inputs and outputs in the selected board. Depending on the type of board, with
or without supervision, the screen will vary to get adapted to the characteristics of each board.
The first line of this screen shows the slot where the board is located, F, G, H or J, and the type of board, 2 if it includes
supervision (8 inputs, 8 outputs, and 4 supervision circuits), or 1 if it is a mixed board (without supervision) with 16
digital inputs and 8 outputs. The view menu differentiates inputs and outputs; the active status (ON) is represented by
the lighting of the corresponding input or output.
The legend at the bottom of the screen indicates how to navigate:
Esc: Prev. Intro: Menu. L-R: Chg Card
Esc: Prev.
Returns to the general I/O screen
Intro: Menu.
Provides access to the I/O menu (next, view, test input, test output).
L-R: Chg Card
Moving the shuttle key to the left or right provides access to the status of inputs/outputs for the different boards
available in the relay.
<TEST INPUT>
This option allows testing the input activation (in emulation mode). The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay inputs.
This screen shows the Input name lit up, showing that this is an Input emulation mode.
The first relay input will appear blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different input by rotating the
shuttle key. When the shuttle key is pressed, the selected input will be activated. Navigation through this screen is
indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Intro: Chg Input.

Esc: Exit Text.

The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
Intro: Chg Input.
Pressing the shuttle key on the blinking input, this input will be activated in emulation mode.
Note: input emulation can only be executed through the TEST INPUT tool on the graphic display.
<TEST OUTPUT>
This option allows testing the output activation in emulation mode. The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay contact outputs to test the wiring.
This screen shows the Output name lit up, showing that this is an output emulation mode.
The first relay output will appear blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different output by rotating the
shuttle key. When the shuttle key is pressed, the selected output will be activated. Navigation through this screen is
indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Intro: Chg Output.
Esc: Exit Text.
The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
4
Intro: Chg Output.
Pressing the shuttle keyshuttle key on the blinking output, this output will be activated in emulation mode.
Note: Output emulation can be executed through the TEST OUTPUT tool on the graphic display, and also
through communications using EnerVista 650 Setup software for all F650 models.
L-R: Chg Card
Rotating the shuttle key allows to change the selected I/O board in the main I/O screen.

4.3 WEB SERVER 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.3 WEB SERVER 4.3.1 HOME
The web server in the F650 can be accessed running the Windows explorer, and keying http://xxx.xxx.xx.xxx, being
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx the relay IP address, which must be configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings
> Ethernet .
The main screen of the F650 web server shows the different monitoring possibilities for snapshot events, events, alarms,
oscillography, fault reports, data logger and metering values provided by the relay through the web.
In order to access the different functions provided by the web server, the user must simply click on the list name on the left
side of the screen.
The web server (for version 1.70 and higher ones) allows the user to visualize the different web server screen languages:
English, French, Spanish and Russian by pressing the language button on the top right corner of the main window. Take
into account that this selection only changes the language in the web server screen, all the relay texts, such as snapshot
events, control events, etc. will be the in the language selected in the relay (see section 4.2.5.11 in this manual).
Figure 4–34: WEB SERVER MAIN SCREEN

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 WEB SERVER
4.3.2 SNAPSHOT EVENTS
The Snapshot events screen shows all Snapshot events produced in the relay. This screen is refreshed automatically every
minute.
The information provided in this screen includes: first, the relative event index, the lowest index corresponding to the most
recent event; next, the event text that shows the reason for the event, its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF), and finally
the date and time when the event was produced.
The bottom of the screen shows a Metering screen; clicking on one of the events, the associated metering
values will be shown on that screen.
Figure 4–35: SNAPSHOT EVENTS SCREEN
4.3.3 CONTROL EVENTS
The control events screen provides access to all events that have been configured in the Control Events screen inside the
Relay Configuration menu of EnerVista 650 Setup.

Figure 4–36: CONTROL EVENTS SCREEN
Unlike the case of Snapshot events, in this screen the highest index corresponds to the most recent event. The information
provided is the control event index, the text that has been associated to such event when configured, its status, active (ON)
or inactive (OFF), and its date and time.

4.3.4 ALARMS
The alarms screen provides access to alarms configured in the relay. As in the case of snapshot events and control events,
this screen allows only to view the alarms, but not to acknowledge them.
Figure 4–37: ALARMS SCREEN

4.3.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The oscillography screen allows obtaining from the relay available oscillography records in that moment.
This screen includes two windows. The first window shows oscillography records available in the relay,
identified by an index, being the highest index the most recent record (oscillography record No 6 in the
example below).
Figure 4–38: OSCILLOGRAPHY SCREEN

If the user clicks on the oscillo record he wants to retrieve, the window on the right will show a description of the record
header, indicating its date, time, and the most relevant parameters of the record. Once a record is selected, it is required to
press the Download button. The system will then open a window to allow saving the files in Comtrade format in the PC
hard drive. Once the records have been saved, the system will ask if the user wants to open GE-OSC tool (Comtrade
record viewer) to view the downloaded files.
Figure 4–39: GE-OSC LAUNCH SCREEN
Clicking on the Home option, the system will return to the web server main screen.

4.3.6 FAULT REPORT
The fault report screen provides access to the last 10 fault reports obtained by the relay. These records are stored
according to an index that marks their position among all records produced in the relay, with a range from 1 to 999,
returning to 1 in case of exceeding the limit of 999. As in the case of oscillography records, the highest index corresponds
to the most recent record.
In the fault report, oscillography and data logger screens, the system will request acceptance of a safety-warning message.
Figure 4–40: FAULT REPORT SCREEN
The information provided in this screen includes the date and time when the fault was registered, fault calculations such as
distance to the fault, type of fault, date and time, and the line parameters, as well as the recloser and breaker status during
the fault.
This screen shows also prefault and fault voltage and current primary values. At the top of the screen, associated to the
trigger event number there is a button labeled as INFO. This button displays at the bottom of the screen the events
produced before and after the fault report trigger, so that the user has very useful information about the moment when the
fault was produced.
To obtain a text file with all the fault report information, press the Download option and save the file in the computer.

4.3.7 DATA LOGGER
The data logger screen allows viewing the data logger first and last value retrieval date and allows
downloading the data record files in Comtrade format, by pressing the Download option. Stored files can be
viewed later using any Comtrade format viewer.
Figure 4–41: DATA LOGGER SCREEN

4.3.8 METERING
This screen includes the 53 primary metering values provided by the relay display.
Figure 4–42: METERING SCREEN


5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETPOINTS 5.1OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
Table 5–1: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF SETPOINTS MAIN MENU IN ENERVISTA 650 SETUP:
Product Setup
Communication setpoints
Serial Ports
Network (Ethernet)
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave
IEC 870-5-104
ModBus User Map
Fault Report
Oscillography
Data Logger
Demand
System Setup
General setpoints
Flex Curves
Breaker
Breaker setpoints
Breaker Maintenance
Switchgear
Protection Elements
Phase Current
Phase TOC High 5
Phase TOC Low
Phase IOC High
Phase IOC Low
Phase Directional
Thermal Model
Neutral Current
Ground Current
Ground TOC
Ground IOC
Ground Directional
Sensitive Ground Current
Sensitive Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground IOC
Isolated Ground IOC
Sensitive Ground Directional
Negative Sequence Current
Negative Sequence TOC
Voltage Elements
Phase UV
Phase OV
Neutral OV High
Neutral OV Low
Negative Sequence OV
Auxiliary OV
Auxiliary UV
Power
Forward Power
Directional Power
Control Elements

5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETPOINTS
setpoint Group
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Broken Conductor
Input/Outputs
Contact I/O
Board F
Board G
Board H
Board J
Virtual Inputs
Latched Virtual Inputs
Self-Reset Virtual Inputs

5 SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 COMMUNICATION SETPOINTS
5.2.1.1 SERIAL PORTS

Baud rate and parity for COM1 and COM2 serial communication ports.
Table 5–2: SERIAL PORTS SETPOINTS
PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETPOINTS >SERIAL PORTS

Name Default Value Step Range
COM1 Baud Rate 19200 [300 : 115200]
COM2 Baud Rate 19200 [300 : 115200]
Parity NONE [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
5.2.1.2 NETWORK (ETHERNET)

Ethernet communication parameters for COM3. Two different Ethernet addresses can be used, but the first IP has always
to be set as the second IP Address is an Alias. The ModBus Slave address used by Ethernet ports is the one set for COM2.
Table 5–3: NETWORK SETPOINTS

PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETPOINTS >NETWORK (ETHERNET) NETWORK
(ETHERNET)1 > NETWORK (ETHERNET)2 5
IP Address Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Gateway IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
5.2.1.3 MODBUS PROTOCOL

ModBus Slave Addresses for serial and Ethernet communication and the ModBus port number used for ModBus TCP/IP.
For more detail information go to appendix B in this manual.
Table 5–4: MODBUS PROTOCOL SETPOINTS

PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETPOINTS >MODBUS PROTOCO
ModBus Address COM1 254 [1 : 255]
ModBus Address COM2 254 [1 : 255]
ModBus Port Number 502 [0 : 65535]

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETPOINTS
5.2.1.4 DNP3 SLAVE

Physical port, Slave Address for DNP, IP Addresses for Masters, TCP/UDP Port, Unsolicited Response parameters, Analog
scale factors and deadbands, message fragment size, Binary input block. For more detail information go to appendix C in
this manual.
Table 5–5: DNP PROTOCOL SETPOINTS

PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETPOINTS >DNP3 SLAVE
DNP3 SLAVE 1 > DNP3 SLAVE 2 > DNP3 SLAVE 3
Physical Port NONE [COM1:COM2:NETWORK]
Address 255 [0 : 65534]
IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
5 IP Addr Client3 Oct4

IP Addr Client4 Oct1
0
0
[0 : 255]
[0 : 255]
TCP/UDP Port 20000 [0 : 65535]
Unsol Resp Function DISABLED [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 [0 : 60]
Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 [0 : 255]
Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 [0 : 65535]
Current Scale Factor 1 [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Voltage Scale Factor 1 [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Power Scale Factor 1 [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Energy Scale Factor 1 [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Other Scale Factor 1 [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Current Deadband 30000 [0 : 65535]
Voltage Deadband 30000 [0 : 65535]
Power Deadband 30000 [0 : 65535]
Energy Deadband 30000 [0 : 65535]
Other Deadband 30000 [0 : 65535]
Msg Fragment Size 240 [30 : 2048]
Binary Input Block 1 CTL EVENTS 1-16


Binary Input Block 9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8
Binary Input Block 10 SWITCHGEAR 9-16
5.2.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104

Communication setpoints for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. For more detail information go to appendix D in this manual.
Table 5–6: IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL SETPOINTS

PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETPOINTS >IEC 870-5-104
Function DISABLED [DISABLED – ENABLED]
TCP Port 2404 [0 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 255 [0 : 65535]
Cyclic Meter Period 0 [0 : 3600]
Synchronization Event 0 [0 : 3600]
5.2.2 MODBUS USER MAP

5
ModBus user map definition. 256 records, selectable from the complete relay ModBus map form the ModBus user map. For
more detail information go to appendix B in this manual.
Table 5–7: MODBUS USER MAP SETPOINTS

PRODUCT SETUP > MODBUS USER MAP
Address 00 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 01 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
... ...
Address 254 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 255 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
5.2.3 FAULT REPORT
5.2.3.1 OVERVIEW
The fault report module defines the type of fault (three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground), and the distance to the
fault. The fault activation signal (FAULT REPORT TRIGG) is programmed at “Setpoint > Relay Configuration >
Protection Elements”.
The fault report provides fault date, fault type, fault location information, and the index of the last fault report produced
(Fault Report Number) for the last fault produced.
Information referred to the last ten faults is stored as fault report and available to the user through EnerVista 650 Setup
software or the web server application. Each fault report includes the following information:
• Fault date and time
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values

• Fault current and voltages in primary values

• Fault type
• Distance to the fault (fault location)
• Line parameters
• Recloser and breaker status information
As an option, the Relay offers the possibility to display a fault-warning message on the relay HMI (selectable by setpoint).
5.2.3.2 FAULT REPORT SETPOINTS
Table 5–8: FAULT REPORT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > FAULT REPORT
setpoint Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Positive sequence impedance module Pos Seq Module 3.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 250.00]
Positive sequence impedance angle Pos Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Zero sequence impedance module Zero Seq Module 9.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 750.00]
Zero sequence impedance angle Zero Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Line length Line Length 100.0 0.1 [0.0 : 2000.0]
Display fault on HMI Show Fault On HMI DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
5 Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Function permission (Function): Enabling this setpoint allows to create a fault report when the FAULT REPORT TRIGG
is activated.
Positive sequence impedance module (Pos Seq Module): Value in ohms of the line positive sequence impedance
module.
Positive sequence impedance Angle (Pos Seq Angle): Value in degrees of the line positive sequence angle.
Zero sequence impedance module (Zero Seq Module): Value in ohms of the line zero sequence impedance module.
Zero sequence impedance Angle (Zero Seq Angle): Value in degrees of the line zero sequence angle.
Line Length: The metering unit can be kilometers or miles.
Show Fault On HMI: This setpoint enables or disables the option to display faults on the Relay HMI.
Snapshot Events: This setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the fault report unit.
5.2.3.3 FAULT REPORT STATES
States associated to the fault report (“Actual >Metering>Records Status>Fault Reports”), are shown on Table 5–9:
Table 5–9: FAULT REPORT STATES
FAULT REPORT STATES
FAULT REPORT TRIGG
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER

FAULT REPORT TRIGG: The activation of this state initiates the calculation of the fault location and the generation of the
corresponding report.
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: The activation of this state produces the removal of all faults stored in the relay. Additionally, all
active faults on the HMI display will be acknowledged. This signal is programmed at “setpoints>Relay
Configuration>Protection Elements”.
FAULT DATE: Date and time of the last fault produced.
FAULT TYPE: Type of the last fault produced (3PHASE, AG, BG, CG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, NAF). NAF indicates
that the type of fault has not been calculated.
FAULT LOCATION: Calculated distance to the last fault (the metering unit will be the same used for setpoint the line
length).
FAULT REPORT NUMBER: Number of the fault report file saved in the relay non-volatile memory, associated to the last
fault produced.
5.2.3.4 FAULT REPORT RETRIEVAL

Fault report files can be retrieved using EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
For obtaining fault reports using EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user must access “Actual>Records>Fault report”.
The top of the window shows the number of the last fault report stored by the device (Fault Record Number). Clicking on
the “View header” button, the system will show the header of the record selected at “Select Record”.
Clicking on the “Download” button, the file is retrieved, and saved in folder “..\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc”, using 5
“FLTxxx.DAT”, where xxx is the corresponding record number. The fault report retrieval can be done using serial
communication (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp).
Fault reports are stored in the relay non-volatile memory, so that they are accessible from the EnerVista 650 Setup software
or the relay web server. The fault report is a text file named FLTxxx.txt where xxx is the record number, with a range of 001
to 999. Only files from the 10 last faults will be stored. If there are already ten files stored and a new fault occurs, this most
recent file will overwrite the oldest file. Afterwards, the fault information is sent to the HMI shared memory, to enable the
corresponding indicators to display the fault on the HMI display (if this option has been enabled by setpoint).
When a fault is produced and a warning message is displayed on the HMI, fault information alternates in two separate
screens: one with general information, and a second one with the fault metering values. This screen needs to be
acknowledged by the user by pressing the INTRO button to exit the fault report screen. If several consecutive faults are
produced, the HMI will always display the most recent one, and each fault will need to be acknowledged up to a maximum
of 10 faults. The HMI menu offers an option to view the last 10 faults produced, that menu displays both the general
information screen and the metering screen for each fault.
5.2.4 OSCILLOGRAPHY
5.2.4.1 OVERVIEW
F650 units allocate 1-Mbyte of memory for storing oscillography records in RAM memory. These oscillography records are
restored in a non-volatile memory (relay Flash memory).
Oscillography records are stored in COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999 standard format.
The oscillography module is in charge of storing instantaneous values of the 9 analog signals and the 16 digital signals
programmable at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Oscillography in fault conditions (OSCILLO TRIGGER signal
activation).
All oscillography records store all analog signals (fixed) plus 16 digital signals (programmable). The order of storage in the
case of analog signals is as follows:
Analog 1IA channel.

Analog 2IB channel.

Analog 3IC channel.
Analog 4IG channel.
Analog 5ISG channel.
Analog 6 VA or VAB channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta at “setpoints>System
Setup>General setpoints>Phase VT Connection”).
Analog 7VB or VBC channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta at “setpoints>System
Analog 8VC or VCA channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta at “setpoints>System
Analog 9VN or VX channel, depending on the selected configuration (zero sequence measured, or busbar voltage at
“setpoints>System Setup>General setpoints>Auxiliary Voltage”).
The 16 digital channels and the oscillography trigger signal are programmable using EnerVista 650 Setup software at
Setpoint > Relay configuration > Oscillography. Each digital channel can be associated to a single status or to a logic
status. In this last case, the logic must be configured using the PLC Editor tool at Setpoint > Logic Configuration inside
EnerVista 650 Setup, and its output must be associated to a virtual output. Then, this output must be associated to the
digital channel. The oscillography trigger signal can be a single status or a configured logic. The relay default configuration
associates this signal to Virtual Output 83, which corresponds to the logic associated to the general trip of protection
elements.
5 5.2.4.2 OSCILLOGRAPHY SETPOINTS

These setpoints (“Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography”) are described in Table 5–10:
Table 5–10: OSCILLOGRAPHY SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > OSCILLOGRAPHY
Function Permission Function ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Prefault Trigger Position 30 1% [5 : 95]
Samples per cycle Samples/Cycle 64 N/A [4 – 8 – 16 –32 – 64]
Maximum number of oscillos Max. Number Osc. 4 1 oscillo [1 : 20]
Automatic oscillography overwrite Automatic Overwrite DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Function Permission (Function): Enabling this setpoint allows to create an oscillography record when the “TRIGGER
OSCILLO” signal is activated.
Trigger Position: This setpoint defines the prefault data (in percentage) stored every time a new oscillo is produced.
Samples/Cycle: This setpoint defines the number of samples per cycle stored in each oscillography record. Please see
example below.
Maximum Number of Oscillos (Max. Number Osc.): 1 to 20 oscillography records can be selected. The capacity of each
record will depend on the capacity = 1Mbyte / Max. Number Osc. This capacity is divided in 9 measures * 4 bytes/measure
+ 2 digital bytes = 38 bytes per stored sample. Please refer to example below.
Automatic Overwrite: This setpoint allows chained oscillographies during the fault (TRIGGER OSCILLO signal
activation). The maximum allowed value to be stored as a chained oscillography is 1 Mbyte. In this case, even if the trip
continues during a time longer than the associated to 1 Mbyte of memory, the relay will stop storing oscillography in RAM
memory until the complete record has been saved in non-volatile memory. The oscillography module will be reset once the
Mbyte has been completely stored in Flash memory and the TRIGGER OSCILLO state is deactivated.

Snapshot Events: This setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the oscillography unit.
EXAMPLE
For a Max. Number Osc. of 4, each record will store 1Mbyte / 4 = 262144 bytes.
For this example, the number of samples per oscillography record is 262144 bytes / 38 bytes = 6898 samples per stored
oscillo.
If we set the relay to 64 samples per cycle, each record will store up to 6898 / 64 = 107.78 signal cycles. This value
expressed in terms of time would be:
For 50 Hz: 107.78 cycles x 20 ms/cycle =2.155 seconds.
For 60 Hz: 107.78 cycles x 16.67 ms/cycle =1.796 seconds.
5.2.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
States associated to the oscillography module (“Actual >Metering>Records Status>Oscillography”), are shown in Table
5–11:
Table 5–11: OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS
OSC DIGITAL CHANNEL XX: These states are configured at “setpoints>Relay configuration>Oscillography”. Each of
these states can be associated to any protection state or to any virtual output. Each oscillography record will reflect the
changes experienced by this state during the record.
OSCILLO TRIGGER: The activation of this state will produce the oscillography record capture. Each record will contain a
percentage of its capacity to store prefault information. This percentage can be selected in the Trigger Position setpoint,
and the rest of the record capacity will store post-fault information.
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: This is the number of the most recent oscillography record stored in the relay in COMTRADE
format. The range is 0 to 999.
CYCLES PER RECORD: This state contains the number of cycles that will be stored in each oscillography record.
Although the number of cycles can be a decimal digit, the record will represent only the integer part.

AVAILABLE RECORDS: This is the number of records in COMTRADE format stored in the relay, which can be retrieved
by serial communication (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp). The range is 0 to 20.
5.2.4.4 OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES RETRIEVAL

Oscillography files can be retrieved using EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
For obtaining oscillography records using EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user must access
“Actual>Records>Waveform capture”. The top of the window shows the number of the last oscillography record stored
by the device (Newest Record Number), followed by the maximum number of oscillos available in the unit (Available
Records in Device), programmable by setpoint. Clicking on the “View header” button, the system will show the header of
the record selected at “Select Record”.
Clicking on the “Download” button, the three files (*.DAT, *.HDR, *.CFG) that form the oscillography record in COMTRADE
standard will be retrieved, and they will be viewed automatically if the GE-OSC software is installed in the computer.
Retrieved oscillographies can be viewed using any Comtrade format viewer. EnerVista 650 Setup software stores by
default oscillography records in folder “.\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc”, in the same directory where the program is
installed, using “OSCxxx.DAT”, “OSCxxx.CFG”, “OSCxxx.HDR” names, where xxx is the corresponding record number.
The oscillography retrieval can be done using serial communication (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp).
5.2.5 DATA LOGGER
The F650 data logger can store information of up to 16 analog channels, among all channels available in the relay, with a
sampling rate selectable by setpoint. The memory capacity of the data logger is fixed, 64 Kbytes, two bytes per analog
5 measure. Selected channels will take all the available memory space. Therefore, the storage days will depend on the
selected number of channels and sampling rate.
5.2.5.1 DATA LOGGER SETPOINTS

Data logger setpoints can be found at “setpoints>Product Setup>Data Logger”.
Table 5–12: DATA LOGGER SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > DATA LOGGER
Data logger Rate Data Logger Rate 1s N/A [1 s, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 60 min.]
Data Logger analog channels X Data Logger Chnl X None N/A See Note 1
Function permission (Function):Enabling this setpoint allows to start storing analog channel information programmed in
this tool.
Data Logger Rate: the data logger can be configured in rates of 1 second, and 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 and 60 minutes
Data Logger Analog Channel X (Data Logger Chnl X): Analog Channels programmable in the data logger. The X value
has a range from 0 to 16.
Any setpoint change in the Data Logger will erase all the stored information.

5.2.5.2 DATA LOGGER ASSOCIATED STATES

States associated to the data logger module (“Actual >Metering>Records Status>Records”) are shown on the table
below:
Table 5–13: DATA LOGGER STATES
DATA LOGGER STATES
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS
DATA LOGGER DAYS
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:Date/time state type with 6 characters. This is the time that corresponds to the oldest sample.
This value will remain constant until the available memory capacity is exceeded. At that time, this value will change
according to the sampling rate (Data Logger Rate).
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: Date/time state type with 6 characters. This is the time when the most recent sample was taken.
This value advanced in the time period defined by the sample rate setpoint.
If no channel has been selected, these setpoints remain with a static value.
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS:This state shows the number of Channels Selected by setpoint.
DATA LOGGER DAYS:This state shows the number of days that can be stored in the associated data file. It depends on
the Data Logger Rate setpoint, and on the number of channels selected.
5
5.2.5.3 DATA LOGGER FILES FORMAT AND RETRIEVAL
File Retrieval
Data logger files can be retrieved using EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
For obtaining data logger files using EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user must access “Actual>Records>Data
Logger”. The top of the window shows the date when the oldest sample was taken, and then the date when the newest
sample was taken.
This screen shows the measures stored for the different channels through the time.
Clicking on the “Download” button, all the information contained in the file can be read.
Clicking on the “Save” button, the data logger files (*.DAT, *.CFG) are retrieved in COMTRADE format, and saved by
default in folder “..\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc”, using “DLGxxx.DAT”, “DLGxxx.CFG” names, where xxx is the
corresponding record number. Data logger files can be retrieved only by Ethernet.
File Format
Data logger information is made of two text files: configuration file (datalogger.cfg), and data file (datalogger.dat).

5.2.6 DEMAND
5.2.6.1 METERING VALUES AND SETPOINTS FOR THE DEMAND

The demand calculation is made according to the following primary parameters:
Table 5–14: PRIMARY DEMAND VALUES

PRIMARY DEMAND VALUES STEP
IA (RMS) KA
IB (RMS) KA
IC (RMS) KA
IG (RMS) KA
ISG (RMS) KA
I2 KA
Three phase active power (W) MW
Three phase reactive power (VAR) MVAr
Apparent power (VA) MVA
Different integration methods can be selected to calculate current and power values.
Calculated demand values are as follows:
5 Table 5–15: DEMAND CALCULATED VALUES

DEMAND CALCULATED VALUES
DEMAND IA DEMAND IG DEMAND W
DEMAND IA MAX DEMAND IG MAX DEMAND W MAX
DEMAND IA DATE DEMAND IG DATE DEMAND W DATE
DEMAND IB DEMAND ISG DEMAND VAR PWR
DEMAND IB MAX DEMAND ISG MAX DEMAND VAR MAX
DEMAND IB DATE DEMAND ISG DATE DEMAND VAR DATE
DEMAND IC DEMAND I2 DEMAND VA PWR
DEMAND IC MAX DEMAND I2 MAX DEMAND VA MAX
DEMAND IC DATE DEMAND I2 DATE DEMAND VA DATE
Demand module setpoints are as follows:

Table 5–16: DEMAND SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > DEMAND
Function permission Demand Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Demand method for current values CRNT Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
ROLLING DEMAND -
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL]
Demand method for Power values POWER Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
ROLLING DEMAND -
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL]
Demand interval Demand Interval 5 Minutes N/A [5 – 10 – 15 – 20– 30–60]
Trigger Enabled Trigger Enabled DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Function permission (Function): Enabling this setpoint allows to start the demand function.
Demand Method for Current values (CRNT Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for current
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling Demand.
Demand Method for Power values (POWER Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for power
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling Demand.
Demand Interval: Integration time, with a range of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes. Measure integration is performed in the
period adjusted in the Demand Interval setpoint.
Demand Trigger: Operation mode selection for the Block Interval calculation method. This operation mode depends on
the Trigger Enabled setpoint. If trigger enabled is set as disabled, measure integration is made in the Demand Interval
period. IF trigger enabled is set as enabled, measure integration is made during the time interval between two consecutive
pulses of the input assigned to the demand, DEMAND TRIGGER INP, at Setpoint > Relay configuration > Protection
Elements
Snapshot Events: This setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the demand unit.
5.2.6.2 DEMAND CALCULATION METHODS
a) CALCULATION METHOD 1: THERMAL EXPONENTIAL

This method simulates the action of a peak demand thermal analog recorder. The relay measures the magnitude for each
phase (or three-phase, depending on the case) each second, and it assumes that the magnitude remains in that value until
the next update. It calculates the equivalent thermal demand based on the following equation:
5
– kt
d(t) = D(1 – e )
Where:
DInput signal (constant).
d(t) Demand value after applying the input value during time t (in minutes)
K 2.3 / setpoint time d(t) reaches 90% of the signal entered in this time
If we assume that the input signal is monotonous increasing (each new value is higher than the previous value), with an
initial value of D0, different from zero, the previous equation becomes:
D = ( VS – D0 )
Being D0 the demand value in the moment when the input signal starts to increase.
If the input signal decreases, time t restarts at 0 and the equation to be applied (cooling) will be:
– kt
d ( t ) = D0 – ( D0 – VS ) ( 1 – e )

b) CALCULATION METHOD 2: ROLLING DEMAND.

This method calculates the linear average of the magnitude in the specified interval. The measure integration is made in the
time period specified by the Demand Interval setpoint. The calculation is made every second. Operation of the rest of the
system is performed every minute. The demand value is the average of the values obtained during the time period
specified by the Demand Interval setpoint
c) CALCULATION METHOD 3: BLOCK INTERVAL

The Block Interval operation mode depends on the “Trigger Enabled” setpoint.
CALCULATION METHOD 3a: BLOCK INTERVAL – With trigger setpoint DISABLED.

This method consists on integrating the measure during the time period specified in the DEMAND INTERVAL setpoint.
The calculation will be made every second and the demand value will be the average of all values produced during the
time interval specified in the DEMAND INTERVAL setpoint. The interval demand value will be shown once this time
has expired.
If, for example, the setpoint indicates 15 minutes for integration, the demand value update towards outside of the
module will be made every 15 minutes (although the calculation is made every second). This method calculates a
linear average of the magnitude.
CALCULATION METHOD 3b: BLOCK INTERVAL – With trigger setpoint ENABLED.

The demand value is given by integration of the measure during the time between two consecutive pulses in the input
5 assigned to DEMAND_TRIGGER in Relay Configuration. Calculation of integration is made every second with each new
measure.
In case the interval between two consecutive pulses exceeds 60 minutes, the relay will calculate the demand after 60
minutes from the last pulse, this measure will be updated in the status and a new demand count will start. This method
calculates a linear average of the magnitude.
Figure 5–1: shows the behavior of the demand, depending on the Selected setpoint for demand calculation.

1.2
0.8
0.6
Input
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0.2
Tiempo(minutos)
1,2
0,8
Demanda %
0,6
0,4
0,2
-0,2
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
5
Tiempo (minutos)
Respuesta "Caractaerística Exponencial Térmica"
1.2
0.8
Demanda%
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0.2
Tiempo (minutos)
Respuesta "Característica Block interval"
1.2
0.8
Demanda %
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0.2
Tiempo (minutos)
Respuesta "Característica Rolling"
Figure 5–1: RESPONSE TO THE DIFFERENT DEMAND METHODS

5.2.6.3 DEMAND FUNCTION MEASURES AND STATES

Demand values are available at Actual > Metering > Primary Values > Demand.
Table 5–17: DEMAND MEASURES
NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP
DEMAND IA 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IB 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IC 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IG 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND ISG 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND I2 0.000 KA
DEMAND I2 MAX 0.000 KA
5 DEMAND I2 DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND W 0.000 MW
DEMAND W MAX 0.000 MW
DEMAND W DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VAR PWR 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR MAX 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VA PWR 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA MAX 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
Demand measures for current values are as follows:

DEMAND IX Demand state; this is the demand value every minute or every integration period,
depending on the selected setpoints.
DEMAND IX MAX Demand maximeter; it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is
produced.
DEMAND IX DATE Date of the Maximum demand value
Being X the current considered in each case.

Demand measures for power values are as follows:

DEMAND Y Demand state; this is the demand value every minute or every integration period,
depending on the selected setpoints
DEMAND Y MAX Demand maximeter; it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is
produced.
DEMAND Y DATE Date of the Maximum demand value.
Being Y the power considered in each case.
W Three-phase active power

VAR Three-phase reactive power
VA Three-phase apparent power
The maximum demand value is stored in non-volatile memory, and it is not cleared when the relay is turned off. When the
relay is turned on again, the maximum values are updated.
States associated to the demand (“Actual>Metering>Records Status>Demand”) are the following:
Table 5–18: DEMAND ASOCIATED VALUES

DEMAND ASOCIATED STATES
DEMAND TRIGGER INP
DEMAND RESET INP
5
Besides the previously considered demand measures, two states are used for the demand control:
DEMAND TRIGGER INPBit type state, Programmable at “setpoints>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements” in
EnerVista 650 Setup software. This signal is used by the Block Interval demand method. If this signal is associated to a
digital input, the time to acknowledge this input is given by setpoints selected for the I/O boards set at Setpoint > Inputs /
outputs > Contact I/O > Board X.
DEMAND RESET INPBit type state, programmable at “setpoints>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements” in
EnerVista 650 Setup software. When this bit is activated, the demand measures are reset. All stored values are reset to
zero (for demand dates, this value represents January 1st, 2000).

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETPOINTS
5.3SYSTEM SETUP
This section shows the setpoints related to the system setup definition.
5.3.1 GENERAL SETPOINTS
This section determines the unit configuration regarding its connection to the power system.
Access to these setpoints using EnerVista 650 Setup software is at Setpoint > System Setup > General setpoints.
The corresponding setpoints are shown on the table below:
Table 5–19: GENERAL SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > GENERAL SETPOINTS
Phase CT ratio Phase CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Ground CT ratio Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Sensitive ground CT ratio Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT ratio Phase VT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT connection Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Rated voltage Nominal Voltage 100.0 0.1 [1.0 : 250.0]
Rated Frequency Nominal Frequency 50 Hz Hz [50-60]
Phase rotation Phase Rotation ABC N/A [ABC – ACB]
Frequency reference Frequency Reference VI N/A [VI-VII-VIII]
Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Voltage VX N/A [VX – VN]
5 Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The system rated voltage is used as reference by the voltage restraint in the phase timed overcurrent element.
The Frequency reference marks the voltage channel to which the system Frequency is measured.
The auxiliary voltage setpoint can be selected between VN and VX.
VN means that the V0 voltage value used by the neutral, ground, and sensitive ground directional elements, as well as
59NH and 59NL elements is going to be measured directly from the fourth voltage transformer of the F650 [A1-A12]. In this
case, the synchronism element will be disabled, as the busbar voltage necessary for its operation would not be available.
If VX is selected in the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint, the measured voltage would be the busbar voltage used for the
synchronism element, in this case the zero sequence voltage used by the neutral, ground and sensitive ground directional
elements. 59N will be calculated from the phase voltages.

5 SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.2 FLEX CURVES
The relay incorporates 4 user curves called Flex Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user
in “setpoints>System Setup>Flex Curves” menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex curves can be selected as an
operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the relay.
In the flex curves menu there are 120 point to define a user curve. 40 point for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the pickup value)
and 80 for operate (from 1.03 to 20 times the pickup).
Table 5–20: FLEX CURVE SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > FLEX CURVES
FLEX CURVES A > FLEX CURVES B> FLEX CURVES C > FLEX CURVES D
Values for reset points 0.00 pkp Time 0.00xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …
Values for operation points 1.03 pkp Time 1.03xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …
The definition of the curve points can be introduced directly in the Flex Curve setpoints menu or create them using the
5
graphical tool provided by pressing “Edit Curve” in the Flex curves menu.
In the user curve edition screen (see Figure 5–2:), a base curve can be selected, from the Standard Curves menu, as
reference among all the curves implemented in the relay. This curve will be used as a template to create the user curve.
Once the standard curve is viewed, it is possible to make the user curve (operate, reset or both) reconcile the standard
curve, using the Flex curve > set flex curve from the standard curve, and then modifying any of the points by editing in
the table the corresponding value.
The user can also view a different curve model to the one the FlexCurve has been adapted to, and compare both models to
adopt the most appropriate values in each case. If once the user curve has been configured the user wants to store the
information, the “Flex Curve > Exit with Data” menu must be selected. If the results are not to be saved, the Exit without
Data option must be selected. Once the configured curve point values have been stored, for these values to be definitely
stored in the FlexCurve, the information must be saved in the FlexCurve general menu, by clicking on the “Store” option.
This way the selected user curve is definitely stored, so that it can be used by any of the time overcurrent elements
available in the relay.

Figure 5–2: FLEXCURVES EDITION
5.3.3 BREAKER
There are two types of breaker setpoints:

Breaker setpoints: These setpoints correspond to the switchgear configured as breaker in the F650; this switchgear is
used in the recloser functions, breaker failure and synchronism.
Breaker Maintenance: These setpoints correspond to the initialization of (KI)2t counters, and the counting of number of
openings and closings of the switchgear configured as breaker.

5.3.3.1 BREAKER SETPOINTS
BREAKER setpointS (Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker setpoints)
Table 5–21: BREAKER SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER > BREAKER SETPOINTS
setpoint Description Name Default Step Range
Value
Number of Switchgear selected as breaker Number of Switchgear 1 1 [1 : 16]
Maximum value of KI2t Maximum KI2t 9999.99 0.01(KA)2 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
KI2t integration time KI2t Integ. Time 0.03 0.01s [0.03 : 0.25]
Maximum number of openings Maximum Openings 9999 1 [0 : 9999]
Maximum Openings in one hour Max.Openings 1 hour 40 1 [1 : 60]
Breaker setpoints are as follows:

Number of switchgear: This is the Number of Switchgear that is configured as a breaker. It is the reference for breaker
failure (50BF), recloser (79) and synchronism (25) elements. The selected switchgear in the breaker setpoints must be
previously configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear. The relay allows to configure up to 16 switchgear
elements, but the one configured as a breaker will be the reference for (KI)2t, openings and closings counters.
Maximum KI2t: This is the maximum set value for the square of current multiplied by the breaker opening time. There is a
separate counter for each phase, but the value set as maximum is a single value for the three phases.
KI2t Integration Time: This is the integration time taken as base (fixed opening time) for the calculation of KI2t. 5
Maximum Openings: This is the maximum number of openings allowed in the relay, with a limit of 9999; once this value is
exceeded, the relay will produce an alarm. When the limit 9999 is reached the maximum openings counter will start form
zero.
Maximum Openings in 1 hour: This is the maximum number of openings allowed in the relay during one hour; once this
value is exceeded, the corresponding alarm signal will be activated; this value is updated and reset after one hour.
Snapshot Events: This setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the breaker signals.
The interrupted current limit setpoint, fixes the Maximum breaker capacity (this value is set depending on the information
provided by the breaker manufacturer); the relay incorporates a KI2t counter for each phase, where every time a trip or
breaker opening occurs, the counter increases its value (in primary values). If the flowing current is lower than the rated
current, the relay will take the rated current value for its calculations. When the cumulate counter for each phase reaches or
exceeds the set value, the corresponding alarm signal will be activated.
The purpose of this function is to provide closer information of the current status of the breaker internal contacts, in order to
ensure appropriate breaker maintenance, and to decrease the possible risk of damage when the breaker has suffered
severe operations during a long time. Once the breaker has been operated, and the preventive maintenance is in place,
accumulated I2t values and the number of operations are reset to zero.

5.3.3.2 BREAKER MAINTENANCE

To consider used breakers, the relay allows to set initial I2t values as well as an initial number of operations, in order to
have into account previous breaker operations, as well as operations produced during testing. This breaker maintenance
parameters can be set in the breaker maintenance menu.
BREAKER MAINTENANCE (Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker Maintenance)
Table 5–22: BREAKER MAINTENANCE SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER > BREAKER MAINTENANCE
KI2t Counter Phase A KI2t BKR Ph A Cnt 0.00 0.01 (KA)2 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
KI2t Counter Phase B KI2t BKR Ph B Cnt 0.00 0.01 (KA)2 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
KI2t Counter Phase C KI2t BKR Ph C Cnt 0.00 0.01 (KA)2 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
Openings counter BKR Openings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]
Closings counter BKR Closings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]
In this group of setpoints, the start values of the breaker Counters can be reset.
These Counters allow the breaker Maintenance. They are used to accumulate the breaker aging produced by a trip or a
breaker opening. In order to incorporate the breaker historic, in case of second hand breakers, the system allows assigning
an initial value to cumulated amperes, and to the number of opening and closing operations.
To supervise the breaker aging, Σ(KI)2t accumulated values are calculated and stored for each phase in each opening. If
the rated current is not exceeded, as in the case of a manual opening command, without fault current, the relay uses the
rated current value instead of the metered value.
5 (KI)2t value is accumulated and maintained in independent Counters for each phase. Counters can be accessed through
the local HMI as well as through the EnerVista 650 Setup software. The unit incorporates a setpoint to select the integration
time (KI2t Integ. Time) that allows either to assign a fix Opening time, or to leave the relay measure that time, from the
opening command to the breaker opening.
The signals associated to the opened or closed status of the breaker can be monitored at “Actual > Status > Breaker”
Table 5–23: BREAKER STATUS
BREAKER STATUS DESCRIPTION
BREAKER OPEN Open breaker status. In the switchgear selected as breaker, besides providing the usual switchgear contact
status, the system provides also the open breaker, closed breaker, and undefined breaker states, as well as
an indication of the set closing and opening failure time for such switchgear.
BREAKER CLOSED Breaker closed
BREAKER UNDEFINED Breaker undefined

The signals associated to breaker maintenance can be Table 5–24: BREAKER MAINTENANCE STATUS
monitored at “Actual > Metering > Records Status >
Breaker Maintenance”, and they are as follows:
BREAKER MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION
KI2t PHASE A ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase A is exceeded.
KI2t PHASE B ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase B is exceeded.
KI2t PHASE C ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase C is exceeded.
BKR OPENINGS ALARM Relay total Number of Openings alarm
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM Relay total Number of Openings in one hour alarm
RESET KI2t COUNTERS KI2t Counters reset signal. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements, and it is used for resetpoint the KI2t counter through the corresponding signal, command,
digital input, etc.
RESET BKR COUNTERS Reset signal for the Opening and Closing Counters. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements, and it is used for resetpoint the breaker Opening and closing
counters.
BREAKER OPENINGS Number of Breaker openings
BREAKER CLOSINGS Number of Breaker closings
KI2t PHASE A Accumulated KI2t value for phase A ( KI2t Counter for Phase A)
KI2t PHASE B Accumulated KI2t value for phase B ( KI2t Counter for Phase B)
KI2t PHASE C Accumulated KI2t value for phase C ( KI2t Counter for Phase C)
BKR OPENING TIME Maximum breaker Opening time. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration
>Switchgear in the number of switchgear corresponding to the breaker selection
BKR CLOSING TIME Maximum breaker Closing time. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration
>Switchgear in the number of switchgear corresponding to the breaker selection
5
5.3.4 SWITCHGEAR
In firmware release 1.70 and higher ones there is the The configuration of snapshot events for each switchgear
possibility to enable or disable the generation of internal (enable or disable) can be selected at setpoints> System
signals for the different units (protection, control, inputs and Setup > Switchgear.
outputs, switchgear) available in the device.
Table 5–25: SWITCHGEAR SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHGEAR

setpoint Description Name Default Step Range
Value
Snapshot Event generation for switchgear #1 Snapshot Events SWGR 1 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.4PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5.4.1 CHANGE OF SETPOINT TABLES IN F650 UNITS
F650 relays incorporate the following protection units:

CURRENT UNITS
Instantaneous overcurrent:
3 x PHASE IOC HIGH (50PH)
3 x PHASE IOC LOW (50PL)
3 x NEUTRAL IOC (50N)
3 x GROUND IOC (50G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND IOC (50SG)
3 x ISOLATED GROUND IOC (50IG)
Time delayed overcurrent:
3 x PHASE TOC HIGH (51PH)
3 x PHASE TOC LOW (51PL)
3 x NEUTRAL TOC (51N)
3 x GROUND TOC (51G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND TOC (51SG)
Negative sequence overcurrent:
5 3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC (46P)

Thermal image:
3 x THERMAL MODEL (49P)
DIRECTIONAL UNITS
3 x PHASE DIR (67P)
3 x NEUTRAL DIR (67N)
3 x GROUND DIR (67G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND DIR (67SG)
VOLTAGE UNITS
Phase under/overvoltage
3 x PHASE UV (27P)
3 x PHASE OV (59P)
Zero sequence overvoltage
3 x NEUTRAL OV HIGH (59NH)
3 x NEUTRAL OV LOW (59NL)

5 SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
Additional under/overvoltage (can be connected to the open delta for measured zero sequence, or to the busbar)
3 x AUXILIARY OV (59X)
3 x AUXILIARY UV (27X)
Negative sequence overvoltage:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV (47P)
POWER
3 x FORWARD POWER (32FP)
3 x DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
Besides, F650 units incorporate also the following control units:
1 x setpoint GROUP
3 x OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
3 x UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
1 x SYNCHROCHECK(25)
1 x AUTORECLOSE (79)
1 x BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)
1 x FUSE FAILURE (VTFF)
3 x BROKEN CONDUCTOR
1 x BREAKER setpointS 5
F650 units incorporate a flexible grouping capability for protection units. This means that protection units can be used in
either one of the following modes:
a) SINGLE SETPOINT GROUP

In this operation mode, all protection units can be activated and operate simultaneously. This provides the use of up to 87
independent protection units that can be adapted to any application requiring a high number of protection units in a
single relay.
In order to simplify the use of F650 units, this is the default mode.
b) THREE SETPOINT GROUPS

In this mode, protection units are grouped in three independent tables with 29 protection units each, so that only one of
them will be active at a given time. A logic signal, e.g. a digital input, will select which table is active at each time, providing
adaptive protection to each network condition.
Protection element grouping involves only Protection elements together with broken conductor detection and active and
directional power, which are usually considered as control elements. The rest of control elements such as recloser, fuse
failure, breaker failure, synchronism, and breaker setpoints are not involved in the tabled groups concept.
The distribution of protection units in tabled groups is described in Table 5–26:

Table 5–26: DISTRIBUTION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS

TABLE 1 TABLE 2 TABLE 3
1x50PH 1x50PH 1x50PH
1x50PL 1x50PL 1x50PL
1x50N 1x50N 1x50N
1x50G 1x50G 1x50G
1x50SG 1x50SG 1x50SG
1x50IG 1x50IG 1x50IG
1x51PH 1x51PH 1x51PH
1x51PL 1x51PL 1x51PL
1x51N 1x51N 1x51N
1x51G 1x51G 1x51G
1x46P 1x46P 1x46P
1x49P 1x49P 1x49P
1x67P 1x67P 1x67P
1x67N 1x67N 1x67N
1x67G 1x67G 1x67G
1x27P 1x27P 1x27P
1x59P 1x59P 1x59P
1x47P 1x47P 1x47P
1x59NH 1x59NH 1x59NH
5 1x59NL
1x59X
1x59NL
1x59X
1x59NL
1x59X
1x27X 1x27X 1x27X
1x32FP 1x32FP 1x32FP
1x32 1x32 1x32
1x81U 1x81U 1x81U
1x81O 1x81O 1x81O
1 x Broken conductor 1 x Broken conductor 1 x Broken conductor
The setpoints used for setpoint table management are located in Setpoint >Control Elements > setpoint Group:
Table 5–27: SETPOINT GROUP SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SETPOINT GROUP
setpoint Grouping Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A [GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 – GROUP 3]
setpoint Group setpoints are as follows:

Function: Possible values are: [DISABLED – ENABLED]
When this setpoint is disabled, which is the default value, it means that the relay is working in single setpoint group mode,
with all the available protection elements working at the same time. If this function is enabled, the setpoint groups will be
enabled, and only the setpoint group indicated by the Active Group setpoint will be active.
Active group: Possible values are 1, 2 or 3.
The setpoint group selected by default is setpoint Group 1. This setpoint indicates which setpoint group is active (for this
purpose, the previous setpoint must be set as ENABLED)

The Relay incorporates several signals associated to the Protection elements grouping in tables. First, signals that indicate
the group activation:
GROUP 1 ACT ON This signal produces the activation of setpoint group 1
These activation signals for the different setpoint groups are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements as shown in the figure.
Figure 5–3: TABLE CHANGE SIGNALS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
The example above uses three digital inputs to perform the table selection, but it is possible to use any other logic signal in
the relay. 5
In case of using digital inputs, this allows the user to select the setpoint table using these digital inputs (which could come
from the PLC, or from a different relay, or from an auxiliary switch, for adaptive protection). This selection of the active
group has priority over the setpoint. If several signals are active at the same time, the highest one will be taken as valid. For
example, if selection signals for both groups 1 and 2 are active, the active table will be number 2.
The time used in the table change is one PLC logic scan cycle (5 ms typical), allowing a fast adaptation to system changes.
Another type of signals that refer to setpoint Groups are block signals. These are internal relay signals that indicate which
groups are active, and which are blocked. For example, if the setpoint grouping function is enabled and setpoint group 1
has been set as active, block signals from setpoint groups 2 and 3 will be active, and the block signal that corresponds to
group 1 will be inactive because that group is enabled.
Block signals are as follows:
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
All signals corresponding to setpoint Groups, both the activation and the block signals, are located in the Actual > Status >
Control Elements > setpoint Groups menu.

5.4.2 INVERSE TIME CURVES CHARACTERISTICS
Inverse time curves available in time overcurrent units are as follows:

IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC Curve A/B/C/Long-Time Inverse/ Short-Time Inverse
IAC extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
User Curve - FlexCurve A/B/C/D
The saturation level for the user curve is 20 times the pickup value, for the rest of time overcurrent units the
saturation level is 48 times the pickup.
All these curves follow the standards defined for each of them, allowing an efficient coordination with other devices located
downstream. A dial or curve setpoint allows selection of a tripping time X times the set time in the selected curve. Fixing
this value to 0 would produce an instantaneous response for any selected curve.
Tripping time calculations are performed on the base of an internal variable called “energy”. This energy represents the
system dissipation capability, that is, when 100% of energy is reached, this means that the tripping time associated to the
curve for a certain current value has expired.
Therefore, once the current value has exceeded the pickup value, the relay starts increasing the energy variable value. If it
5 reaches 100%, a trip is produced. When the current value falls below 97% of the pickup value, the unit is reset. There are
two reset types: Instantaneous and Timed (IEEE) or Linear.
The instantaneous mode provides that, when the current value falls below the reset level, energy is immediately reset to 0.
This mode is used for coordinating with static devices, which behave in a similar way. In the Linear mode, energy is
reduced at a speed associated to the reset times curve (showed in the curve tables), trying to simulate the behavior of
electromechanical relays.
5.4.2.1 IEEE CURVES

This family of curves follows standard IEEE C37.112-1996 for extremely inverse, very inverse, and inverse
curves. The following formulas define this type of curve:
Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setpoint
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
A, B, p = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds
tr = characteristic constant.

Table 5–28: CONSTANTS FOR IEEE CURVES

IEEE CURVE SHAPE NAME A B P TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE Ext Inv 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Very Inv 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Inverse IEEE Mod Inv 0.0515 0.1140 0.0200 4.85
Table 5–29: TABLE 5-29: TRIPPING TIME IN SECONDS FOR IEEE CURVES
DIAL CURRENT (I/ITAP)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE Extremely Inverse
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE Very Inverse
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378 5
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE Inverse
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

5.4.2.2 IEC CURVES

This family of curves follows European standard IEC 255-4, and British standard BF142 for IEC Curves A, B and C, IEC
Long-Time Inverse and IEC Short-Time Inverse. The formulas that define these curves are as follows:
Where:
Dial = multiplying factor
I = Input current
K, E = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated)
5 tr = characteristic constant.
Table 5–30: CONSTANTS FOR IEC CURVES

IEC CURVE SHAPE NAME K E tr
IEC Curve A IEC Curve A 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B IEC Curve B 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C IEC Curve C 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Long-Time Inverse IEC Long-Time Inv 120.000 1.000 120.0
IEC Short-Time Inverse IEC Short-Time Inv 0.050 0.040 0.5

Table 5–31: TRIPPING TIME IN SECONDS FOR IEC CURVES

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162 5
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Long-Time Inverse
0.05 12.000 6.000 3.000 2.000 1.500 1.200 1.000 0.857 0.750 0.667
0.10 24.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 2.400 2.000 1.714 1.500 1.333
0.20 48.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 4.800 4.000 3.429 3.000 2.667
0.40 96.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 9.600 8.000 6.857 6.000 5.333
0.60 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 14.400 12.000 10.286 9.000 8.000
0.80 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 19.200 16.000 13.714 12.000 10.667
1.00 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 24.000 20.000 17.143 15.000 13.333
IEC Short-Time Inverse
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

5.4.2.3 IAC CURVES

This family of curves follows the time response of General Electric IAC electromechanical relays. The following formulas
define these curves:
Where:
I = Input current
A, B, C, D, E = predefined constants
5 tr = characteristic constant.
Table 5–32: CONSTANTS FOR IAC CURVES

IAC CURVE SHAPE NAME A B C D E TR
IAC Extremely Inverse IAC Ext Inv 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse IAC Very Inv 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 -1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse IAC Mod Inv 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 -0.4180 0.1947 0.990

Table 5–33: TRIPPING TIMES IN SECONDS FOR IAC CURVES

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594 5
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969

5.4.2.4 ANSI CURVES

This family of curves complies with American Standard ANSI C37.90 for Extremely inverse, Very inverse, Normally inverse
and Moderately inverse curves. The formulas that define these curves are as follows:
B D E
T = Dial A + ----------------------------------- + ----------------------------------2- + ----------------------------------3-
⎛ ------------------- – C⎞ ⎛ ---------------- – C⎞
I I ⎛ ---------------- – C⎞
I
⎝ I pickkup ⎠ ⎝ I pickup ⎠ ⎝ I pickup ⎠
Tr
T RESET = TDM × ---------------------------------
-
I ⎞2
⎛ --------------- - –1
⎝ I pickup⎠
where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
Dial = Multiplying factor
5 I = Input current
Ipickup = Current pickup setpoint
A, B, C, D, E = Constants
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated
Tr = Characteristic constant
The different constants that define the above-mentioned curves are:
Table 5–34: CONSTANTS FOR ANSI CURVES

ANSI CURVE SHAPE A B C D E TR
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222 5.67
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505 3.88
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -4.1899 9.1272 5.95
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271 1.08

Table 5–35: TRIPPING TIMES IN SECONDS FOR ANSI CURVES

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI Extremely inverse
0.50 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.00 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.00 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.00 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.00 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.00 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.00 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI Very Inverse
0.50 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073
1.00 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.00 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.00 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.00 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.00 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.00 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI Normally inverse
0.50 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.00 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.00 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452 5
4.00 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.00 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356
8.00 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.00 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI Moderately inverse
0.50 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.00 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.00 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.00 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.00 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.00 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.00 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465

5.4.2.5 I2T CURVES

The following formulas define this type of curves:
where:
I = Input current
Table 5–36: TRIPPING TIME IN SECONDS FOR I2T CURVES

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.444 0.250 0.111 0.063 0.040 0.028 0.020 0.016 0.012 0.010
0.10 4.444 2.500 1.111 0.625 0.400 0.278 0.204 0.156 0.123 0.100
1.00 44.444 25.000 11.111 6.250 4.000 2.778 2.041 1.563 1.235 1.000
10.00 444.444 250.000 111.111 62.500 40.000 27.778 20.408 15.625 12.346 10.000
100.00 4444.444 2500.000 1111.111 625.000 400.000 277.778 204.082 156.250 123.457 100.000
5 600.00 26666.667 15000.000 6666.667 3750.000 2400.000 1666.667 1224.490 937.500 740.741 600.000
5.4.2.6 DEFINITE TIME CURVES

The definite time makes the unit trip when the current value is maintained beyond the pickup value during a longer period
than the set value. The Dial setpoint allows modifying this time frame from instantaneous to 900 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
5.4.2.7 RECTIFIER CURVES

Rectifier curves are generated from the following formulas:
⎛ ⎞ ⎛
⎜
⎞
⎟
⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
⎜ 45900 ⎟ ⎜
45900 ⎟
T=TDM× ⎜ ⎟ ×⎜⎜
Treset= TDM ⎟
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞5,6 ⎟ ⎜ 2 ⎟⎟
⎜⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎜ ⎟ −1⎟⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝Ipickup⎠ ⎠ ⎜ ⎝Ipickup
⎝ ⎠ ⎟
⎠
where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
TDM = Multiplying factor
I = Input current
Ipickup = Pickup current
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated

5.4.2.8 USER CURVES - FLEXCURVES A/B/C/D

The relay incorporates 4 user curves called User Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user.
Each of the four curves has an operation characteristic (operate), defined by 80 points, and a reset characteristic, defined
by 40 points. Each point is defined as a time value for each I/Ipickup value (number of times the pickup current) given on
the table. The user can assign values between 0 and 65.535 seconds in steps of 1 ms.
The following table details the 120 points as well as the characteristic for each of them, and a blank cell where the user can
indicate the time value when the operation (for I > Ipickup) or the reset (for I < Ipickup) is required,
Table 5–37: USER CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

RESET TIME RESET TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
(XPKP) (S) (XPKP) (S) (XPKP) (S) (XPKP) (S) (XPKP) (S) (XPKP) (S)
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5 5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The two first columns (40 points) correspond to the RESET curve. The other 4 columns, with 80 points in total, correspond
to the OPERATE curve. Reset characteristic values are between 0 and 0.98, and operation values are between 1.03 and
20.
The final curve will be created by means of a linear interpolation from the points defined by the user. This is a separate
process for the RESET and the OPERATE curve.
The definition of these points is performed in a separate module from the relay, using a configuration program included in
the EnerVista 650 Setup, which incorporates a graphical environment for viewing the curve, thus making it easy for the user
to create it. This module can be accessed from the “Edit Curve” option in the FlexCurve menu, at Setpoint > System
Setup > Flex Curves.

5.4.3 PHASE CURRENT
The F650 Phase current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
Phase time overcurrent (51PH/51PL)
Phase instantaneous overcurrent (50PH/50PL)
Phase directional overcurrent (67P)
Thermal Model (49)
5.4.3.1 PHASE TIME DELAYED OVERCURRENT UNITS – PHASE TOC (51PH/51PL)

The phase overcurrent element (51P) operates in a time period that depends on the applied current and on the set curve.
The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS
magnitude as required by the application. The unit reset can be selected between Instantaneous and Linear (timed
according to the corresponding equation).
If the element timing is set as Definite Time, then the TD Multiplier setpoint will be use to define both the Operation time and
the Reset time of the unit, in case of selecting Linear reset.
The unit incorporates independent block inputs for each phase. When the unit is blocked, the tripping time counter is reset
to 0. This feature allows the use of this input to instantaneously reset the protection unit timing. The PICKUP setpoint of the
element can be dynamically reduced by a VOLTAGE RESTRAINT feature. The possible outputs for the protection element
logic are the pickup and tripping signals independent for each phase, and the general unit pickup and tripping signals.
The pickup current magnitude can be dynamically reduced depending on the existing voltage value, using the Voltage
5 Restraint setpoint. The pickup current level is proportional to the phase-to-phase voltage measured according to a
coefficient shown on Figure 5–4: .This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages
of the voltage restraint characteristic curve; the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’ times the ‘Pickup’ setpoint. In the figure,
Vpp is the phase-to-phase voltage, and VT Nominal is the rated voltage set under General setpoints (please refer to section
1.3.1. BUSCAR REFERENCIA EN CAP. 1)
Figure 5–4: VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC

Table 5–38: 51PH/51PL UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > PHASE CURRENT >
> PHASE TOC HIGH > PHASE TOC HIGH 1> PHASE TOC HIGH 2 > PHASE TOC HIGH 3
> PHASE TOC LOW > PHASE TOC LOW 1 > PHASE TOC LOW 2 > PHASE TOC LOW 3
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N/A [See list of curves]
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A [INSTANTANEOUS – LINEAR]
Voltage Restraint Voltage Restraint DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the value set in the Pickup Level setpoint.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the phase time overcurrent units.

The following diagram shows the logic scheme followed by high range and low range time overcurrent elements (51PH and
51PL) in the following figure.
Figure 5–5: FIGURE 5-5. TOC UNIT LOGIC SCHEME (A6632F2)

5.4.3.2 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT UNIT- PHASE IOC (50PH/ 50PL)

The 50P phase instantaneous overcurrent unit has a setpoint range from 0.05 A to 160 A, which can be set as
instantaneous or timed, with a timer selectable between 0.00 and 900 seconds. The phase current input quantities may be
programmed as Fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. The unit
incorporates a reset time selectable between 0 and 900 seconds.
This unit incorporates a block input for disabling the pickup and trip signals. The logic outputs are the pickup and trip flags
independent for each phase, and general pickup and trip flags for the unit.
Table 5–39: 50PH/50PL UNIT SETPOINTS

> PHASE IOC HIGH > PHASE IOC HIGH 1> PHASE IOC HIGH 2 > PHASE IOC HIGH 3
> PHASE IOC LOW > PHASE IOC LOW 1 > PHASE IOC LOW 2 > PHASE IOC LOW 3
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the phase instantaneous overcurrent
units.
5

The following figure shows the logic scheme diagram followed by high range and low range Instantaneous overcurrent
elements (50PH, 50PL).
Figure 5–6: PHASE IOC UNITS LOGIC SCHEME (A6632F1)

5.4.3.3 PHASE DIRECTIONAL UNIT (67P)

The phase directional unit (67P) provides independent elements for each phase, and determines the direction of the
current both in permanence and in fault condition.
Its main function is to apply a blocking signal to overcurrent units for preventing their operation when the current is flowing
in certain direction. In order to determine the direction of current, the unit uses phase current values as operation
magnitude, and phase-to-phase voltage values as polarization magnitude. This means that in order to polarize a phase, we
use the phase-to-phase voltage of the other two phases, known as crossed polarization.
The following table describes the phase directional unit setpoints.
Table 5–40: 67P UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > PHASE CURRENT > PHASE DIRECTIONAL >
PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1> PHASE DIRECTIONAL 2 > PHASE DIRECTIONAL 3
Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45º 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Block logic Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 40 1V [0 : 300]
Function: This setpoint allows enabling or disabling the corresponding directional unit.
MTA: The MTA setpoint corresponds to the Torque angle, which is the rotation applied to 5
phase-to-phase crossed voltage.
Direction: This setpoint allows selecting the area for the directional unit to operate, either forward
or reverse.
Block Logic: This setpoint allows selecting either permission or block, depending on the logic to be
applied in the event of directional element block.
Polarization Voltage Threshold: this is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation. Under this
setpoint, the unit will be blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the
phase directional units.
Phase directional element is an independent Protection unit that provides block and Operation signals for each phase.
These signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection
> Phase Current”

Table 5–41: BLOCK AND OPERATION SIGNALS FOR THE PHASE DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT
BLOCK AND OPERATION FOR 67P
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR1 A OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR1 B OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR1 C OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR2 A OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR2 B OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR2 C OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR3 A OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR3 B OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR3 C OP
5 Internal signals provided by the relay in the directional unit are of two types, block signals and operation signals. In the
phase directional element, we can see how the obtained signals are separated for each phase (A, B, C), and by unit (1, 2,
3), and separated in block and operation signals.
Block signals indicate whether the directional unit is blocked, either by an external block signal or by polarization voltage
loss. Operation signals indicate whether the directional unit provides operation permission or not.
Upon block of the directional unit, the user can select its behavior in a block situation, this means, whether operation of its
supervised units is permitted, or on the other hand, if their operation is to be blocked under polarization voltage loss or
external block of the directional unit. This selection is made through the “Block Logic” setpoint. If the Block option is
selected, the supervised units operation will be disabled, and if the Permission option is selected, the supervised units will
remain enabled.
In the example shown on OVERCURRENT UNITS BLOCK CONFIGURATION BY THE DIRECTIONAL UNIT , the Block
Logic setpoint in the directional unit is set as Block, so in case of a directional unit block, operation signals will not produce
an output. As shown on the figure, block signals are activated, as the directional unit is blocked and the permission signals
are disabled to avoid operation of the associated protection units. If the Block Logic setpoint had set as Permission,
operation signals would be activated to allow the operation of the associated overcurrent elements.

Signals used to block overcurrent units are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Figure 5–7: OVERCURRENT UNITS BLOCK CONFIGURATION BY THE DIRECTIONAL UNIT
The figure shows the block configuration for the Group 1 high range time overcurrent element. Block is configured
independently for each phase and setpoint group, and the selected block signals can vary according to the user’s 5
requirements. The phase overcurrent unit will be blocked when the corresponding directional unit doesn’t allow operation.
PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK = NOT(PHASE DIR1 A OP). In this example, the overcurrent unit is also blocked by a digital input.
Directional units can also be blocked with signals coming from other relays, PLCs, or through signals configured in the relay
PLC Editor (Logic configuration tool). The signal used in that case is PHASE DIR BLK INP. Figure 5–8: shows an example
of the default block configuration of directional units by digital input. There is one block signal per input for each setpoint
group.
Figure 5–8: DIRECTIONAL UNIT BLOCK CONFIGURATION BY INPUT

The main component of the phase directional element is the angle comparator with two inputs: the operation magnitude
(phase current) and the polarization magnitude (phase-to-phase voltage rotated the angle set in MTA setpoint), which is the
torque angle.
The Polarization type used in the directional unit is crossed, this means that in case of a fault in phase A, the Operation
magnitude will be Ia, and the polarization magnitude will be Vbc, rotated the set torque angle. In case of a fault in phase B,
the operation magnitude will be Ib, and the polarization magnitude will be Vca rotated the set torque angle. Finally, in case
of a fault in phase C, the operation magnitudes will be Ic, and Vab.
Table 5–42: OPERATION AND POLARIZATION MAGNITUDES FOR DIRECTIONAL UNITS

POLARIZING SIGNAL VPOL
PHASE OPERATING SIGNAL ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A IA angle VBC angle x 1 MTA VCB angle x 1 MTA
B IB angle VCA angle x 1 MTA VAC angle x 1 MTA
C IC angle VAB angle x 1 MTA VBA angle x 1 MTA

The polarization diagram is as follows:
Figure 5–9: POLARIZATION DIAGRAM

The diagram shows a fault in phase A, therefore the Operation magnitude is IA, the polarization magnitude is VBC, which
has been rotated the torque angle set as MTA. Positive angles are considered as counter clockwise rotations, and negative
angles clockwise rotations. Direction is considered to be forward when the fault current is inside an arc of ±90º to both sides
of the polarization voltage. In the directional unit setpoints there is a Direction setpoint that allows to select in which area
the unit operation is allowed, either forward or reverse. Operation areas include a safety zone of 5º to each side of the
cone. This safety cone is applied when the operation direction calculation is performed from initial block conditions. When
we go from a non-trip area to a trip area, the safety cone is considered. In case we go from a trip area to a non-trip area,
this cone will not be considered, and the whole area will be operative. This safety cone is located always in the operation
area, both in forward and reverse cases.
NOTE: In situations where a current inversion is produced during a fault, the phase directional unit will require a period of
time to establish the blocking signal. This time is approximately 20 ms. Certain instantaneous overcurrent units can be
activated before receiving the blocking signal from the directional unit. In cases where these situations can be expected, we
recommend to add a 50ms delay to IOC units.

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the phase directional unit.
Figure 5–10: DIRECTIONAL UNIT LOGIC SCHEME (A6632F3)

5.4.3.4 THERMAL MODEL UNIT (49)

Unit 49 is a protection element that measures the thermal heating generated as a result of the flowing current, and prevents
this heating from causing damage to the protected equipment. In order to calculate the thermal image value, the following
equation is used:
I'2
t =τ*Ln'2
I −1
Where,
τ is the heating/cooling time constant.
I is the ratio current/pickup

When a body is cooled, it does not always follow a time constant similar to the heating time constant; this is why the
function has independent setpoints for heating and cooling constants.
Table 5–43: 49 UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > PHASE CURRENT > THERMAL MODEL >
THERMAL MODEL 1> THERMAL MODEL 2 > THERMAL MODEL 3
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT STEP RANGE
VALUE
5 Function permission
Heating constant
Function
Heat Time Constant
DISABLED
6.0
N/A
0.1 min
[DISABLED – ENABLED]
[3.0 : 600.0]
Cooling constant Cool Time Constant 2.00 0.01 times Heat Time Ct.) [1.00 : 6.00]
Alarm level Alarm Level 80.0 0.1 % [1.0 : 110.0]
The cooling constant is given in times the heating constant.

The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the thermal model units.

5.4.4 NEUTRAL CURRENT
The F650 Neutral Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
• Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
• Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
• Neutral directional unit (67N)
5.4.4.1 NEUTRAL TIME DELAYED OVERCURRENT UNIT (51N)

Unit 51N is a neutral time delayed overcurrent protection element. This unit uses as input quantity the neutral current,
calculated from the phase currents. Trip can be timed by a curve selectable by setpoint. Reset can be instantaneous or
linear.
Table 5–44: 51N UNIT SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC 1> NEUTRAL TOC 2 > NEUTRAL TOC 3
5
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
5.4.4.2 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT UNIT (50N)

This function can be used as an instantaneous unit or as a definite time unit. The unit responds to the neutral current
fundamental harmonic magnitude, calculated from the phase currents.

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL IOC
NEUTRAL IOC 1> NEUTRAL IOC 2 > NEUTRAL IOC 3
VALUE

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the neutral Instantaneous overcurrent unit.
Figure 5–11: LOGIC SCHEME FOR NEUTRAL IOC UNIT

5.4.4.3 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL UNIT (67N)

The neutral directional unit is used for supervising the neutral (3I0) overcurrent units, calculated from the phase currents
as operation magnitude, in order to discriminate the fault direction. This unit can be set to use either the neutral voltage
(3V0), or the polarization current measured by the 5th current input (Ip), or both of them as polarization magnitude.

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL >
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1> NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 2 > NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 3
Maximum Torque Angle MTA -45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Polarization type Polarization VO N/A [V0 – IP – V0+IP – V0*IP ]
Block logic type Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
setpoints for this unit are:

Maximum Torque Angle (MTA): angle used to rotate the polarization voltage. Positive angles are counter clockwise
rotations, and negative angles are counter clockwise rotations. The polarization
magnitude, once rotated, defines the MTA line. Vn rotated this angle points the semi
plane that corresponds to a Reverse fault. -Vn rotated this angle points the semi
plane that corresponds to a Forward fault. A typical setpoint can be –45º.
5
Directional unit direction (Direction): This setpoint indicates the Direction for which the unit will allow a trip. Depending
on this setpoint, the unit will be activated for faults in a direction, or on the opposite
direction, allowing its use in tripping or blocking schemes. Possible options for this
setpoint are FORWARD and REVERSE.
Polarization type (Polarization): This setpoint indicates the type of Polarization to be used. The relay can use voltage
polarization (V0), and/or current polarization (Ip). Possible setpoint values are:
V0 Voltage polarization
Ip Current polarization
V0 + Ip Voltage or current polarization, allows the unit to operate when
any of the polarization magnitudes allow operation.
V0 * Ip Voltage and current polarization, allows the unit to operate when
both polarization magnitudes allow operation.
If the selected polarization type is V0+Ip, then the relay will operate when any of the
polarization magnitudes indicate the selected direction in the Direction setpoint.
If the selected polarization type is V0*Ip, then the relay will only operate when both
polarization magnitudes indicate the selected direction in the Direction setpoint.
Polarization Voltage Threshold this is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation. Under this
setpoint, the unit will be blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for
this units.

Neutral directional element is an independent Protection unit that provides block and Operation signals. These signals can
be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection > Neutral
Current”
67N Block (NEUTRAL DIR BLOCK): It indicates that the unit is blocked by digital input or because the Operation magnitude
(In current), or the Polarization magnitude (Vn voltage and/or Ip current) level is too low.
67N Operation (NEUTRAL DIR OP): It indicates that the directional unit is giving permission, that the angle
relations between the operation magnitude and the polarization magnitude are met, according to the set
conditions, or in case of having selected Permission in the Block Logic setpoint, it indicates that the unit allows
operation under block conditions.
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP
NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP
NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP
a) VOLTAGE POLARIZATION OPERATION PRINCIPLES:
5 Operation Magnitude: In = 3·Io, calculated from the phase currents.

Polarization Magnitude: -3V0. Calculated from the phase voltages or measured at the input terminals (A11, A12).The
relay measures 3V0 and rotates 180º internally to obtain -3V0.
Figure 2–12: shows the operation of the zero sequence polarization, 3V0, in case of an AG fault. In this case, the
polarization magnitude 3V0 can be calculated from the three phase voltage values, or measured through the fourth voltage
input (Vx). In this last case, voltage transformer must be wye connected, and the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint in General
setpoints must be configured as VX. The operation magnitude 3I0, is calculated from the phase currents.
When Ip Polarization is selected, the Polarization magnitude is Ip, the current value measured at the fifth current input
(terminals B11-B12). This polarization current must usually come from a CT metering the current that flows from the ground
to the neutral of the neutral fault current source, which will mainly be a transformer. The direction is considered to be
Forward when the neutral current 3I0 is inside a ±90º arc at both sides of the polarization current. In any other case, the
direction will be Reverse. If the polarization current is lower than 5 mA, the unit output takes the value of the Block Logic
setpoint.VOLTAGE POLARIZATION

Figure 5–12: shows the Operation of the directional unit for a Phase A to Ground fault, where the Phase A current grows in
magnitude and is delayed with respect to its voltage by an angle similar to the protected line, while Va voltage decreases or
can even disappear if the fault is close and the fault resistance is very low.
-3V0
Fault Ia ≈ In
Cone 5º Maximum
-45º torque angle
IA
-85º = 90º - 5º cone

-90º
Forward
Vc Vb
3V0 = Va +Vb+Vc
Figure 5–12: VOLTAGE POLARIZATION

The voltage polarization algorithm uses –Vn, -(Va+Vb+Vc) = -3·V0, as a substitute for the faulted phase voltage. This
magnitude can be rotated by the desired angle to fix the MTA line and to define the operative semi plane of the relay,
following the rule that positive angles are in counter clockwise direction. A typical setpoint is –45º, as shown on the figure.
The operative semi plane is delimited to +/- 85º of the MTA line. Every time the operation magnitude, In, is inside this semi
plane, the unit will consider that the direction is forward. If the Direction setpoint is set as Forward, the operation signal of
the neutral directional unit (NEUTRAL DIR OP) will be activated.
Minimum acceptable values, both for the polarization magnitude and the operation magnitude are as follows: minimum In
current for the unit to operate is 50 mA. Minimum polarization voltage for the unit to operate is set in the Polarization
Voltage Threshold setpoint. Minimum polarization current (Ip) is 5 mA.
The voltage polarized directional unit needs a typical time of 1 cycle (20ms @ 50Hz) to polarize. This time must be
considered when setpoint the overcurrent units with the Block Logic setpoint as Permission. In this situation it may occur,
especially in testing processes, that the relay produces a trip with counter direction faults when voltage and current are
applied at the same time starting from zero. As there is no previous polarization voltage, the overcurrent unit is ready to trip
under any overcurrent (as set in the Block Logic setpoint), while the directional unit will need a complete cycle to polarize
and give the correct direction. If the current is high enough to pickup the overcurrent unit and there is no set time delay, the
unit will trip before the directional unit blocks the trip. In cases where this situation is foreseen, it is recommended to
program the Block Logic setpoint as Block, or else to add a small time delay to the overcurrent unit to allow the directional
unit to polarize and block the trip.

b) CURRENT POLARIZATION OPERATION PRINCIPLES:

Operation Magnitude: In = 3·Io, calculated from the phase currents.
Polarization Magnitude: Ip, measured at input terminals B11-B12.
To perform a directional comparison by current, the polarization magnitude used is the current measured at the relay Ip
input, terminals B11-B12, with input or “positive” in B11. This current is taken from the source (transformer or generator)
neutral grounding.
Direction is considered to be forward when the phase shift between both magnitudes is lower than 85º. If the angle is higher
than 85º, the fault is considered to be reverse.
The following table shows the unit output signals management (block and permission) depending on the polarization type
setpoint.
Table 5–47: OUTPUT SIGNALS MANAGEMENT ACCORDING TO THE POLARIZATION TYPE SETPOINT
POLARIZATION SETPOINT NEUTRAL DIR BLOCK SIGNAL NEUTRAL DIR OP SIGNAL
Vo Vo < POL V THRESHOLD setpoint Permission Vo
Ip Ip < 5 mA Permission Ip
Vo + Ip Vo < POL V THRESHOLD Permission Vo
Ip < 5 Ma Permission Ip
Vo * Ip Vo < POL V THRESHOLD Permission Vo

Ip < 5 mA Permission Ip
5 Configuration of the required signals for blocking the neutral overcurrent units from the signals provided by the neutral
directional units is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using the inverted operation
signals to block the trip, as shown in the following example:
How to block neutral time overcurrent units with neutral directional functions:
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR1 OP)
To block neutral instantaneous units:
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR1 OP)

Table 5–48: QUANTITIES

POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
FORWARD -Vo Io x 1 MTA
VOLTAGE (Vo)
REVERSE -Vo -Io x 1 MTA
FORWARD Isg Io
CURRENT (Ip)
REVERSE Isg -Io
- Vo Io
FORWARD or
Isg Io
Vo + Ip
- Vo -Io
REVERSE or
Isg -Io
- Vo Io
FORWARD and
Isg Io
Vo * Ip
- Vo -Io
REVERSE and
Isg -Io

5.4.5 GROUND CURRENT
The F650 Ground Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
Ground time overcurrent (51G)
Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G)
Ground directional unit (67G)
5.4.5.1 GROUND TIME DELAYED OVERCURRENT UNIT (51G)

51G unit is a ground time delayed overcurrent protection element. The ground current input quantity is measured from the
magnetic module ground input, terminals B9-B10, and it may be programmed as Fundamental phasor magnitude or total
waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. The unit trip can be time delayed using a selectable curve. And it
incorporates a reset time selectable between instantaneous or linear.
Table 5–49: 51G UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND TOC
GROUND TOC 1> GROUND TOC 2 > GROUND TOC 3
5 Curve shape
Time Dial
Curve
TD Multiplier
IEEE Ext Inv
1.00
N/A
0.01 s
[See list of curves]
[0.00 : 900.00]
5.4.5.2 GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT UNIT (50G)

50G unit is a ground instantaneous overcurrent protection element, with a setpoint range from 0.05 A to 160 A, which can
also be time delayed, with a delay selectable between 0.00 and 900 seconds. The ground current input quantity is
measured from the transformers module ground input, and it may be programmed as Fundamental phasor magnitude or
total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. The unit incorporates a reset time selectable between 0 and
900 seconds, and a block input that resets the pickup and trip signals to 0. The unit outputs are the general pickup and trip
signals of the unit.

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND IOC
GROUND IOC 1> GROUND IOC 2 > GROUND IOC 3

5.4.5.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL UNIT (67G)
67G unit is a directional protection element, used for monitoring the ground overcurrent units. The operation magnitude is
the ground current measured directly from the corresponding input (B9-B10), while the polarization magnitude is the neutral
voltage (3Vo) calculated from the three phase voltages or measured from the dedicated voltage input (A11-A12).
In case of using the voltage measured from the dedicated voltage input terminals, the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint in
General setpoints must be VN.
If the F650 is set to have synchronism check protection, then this input will be adjusted as busbar voltage and it will not be
the 3V0 voltage (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setpoint as VX)
If the F650 does not have a synchronism check unit, then this input can be set as 3V0 neutral voltage, and it can be used
as polarization magnitude for the 67G unit (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setpoint as VN).
As in the case of a phase directional unit, this element incorporates a voltage loss logic that allows blocking or permitting
the trip by means of a setpoint

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND DIRECTIONAL >
GROUND DIRECTIONAL 1> GROUND DIRECTIONAL 2 > GROUND DIRECTIONAL 3
Polarization type Polarization VO N/A [V0 – IP – V0+IP – V0*IP ] 5
Operation of the Ground directional unit 67G is similar to the operation of the neutral directional unit 66N (please refer to
section NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL UNIT (67N)), with the exception that the operation magnitude here is the ground current
Ig (67G), measured from the input terminals B9-B10 instead of the Neutral current, In (67N), calculated from the phase
currents.
Polarization magnitudes can be, as in the case of 67N, Polarization voltage (3V0), either calculated from the phase
voltages or measured from terminals A11-A12, or polarization current (Ip), measured from the firth input transformer
terminals, Isg, terminals B11-B12.
The following table shows the used magnitudes in each of the Polarization possibilities:
Table 5–52: USED MAGNITUDES ACCORDING TO THE POLARIZATION SETPOINT

POLARIZATION SETPOINT OPERATION MAG. POLARIZATION MAG.
Vo Ig 3V0
Ip Ig Isg
Vo + Ip Ig 3V0 or Isg
Vo * Ip Ig 3V0 and Isg

The following table shows the management of the unit output signals (block and permission) depending on the
Polarization Type setpoint.
Table 5–53: OUTPUT SIGNALS MANAGEMENT ACCORDING TO THE POLARIZTION TYPE SETPOINT
POLARIZATION SETPOINT GROUND DIR BLOCK SIGNAL GROUND DIR OP SIGNAL
Vo V0 < Ajs. POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0
Ip IP < 5 mA Permission IP
Vo + Ip V0 < POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0
IP < 5 mA Permission IP
Vo * Ip V0 < POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0

IP < 5 mA Permission IP
The configuration of the signals required for blocking the Ground overcurrent elements from the signals provided by the
Ground directional unit is made at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using inverted operation
signals to block the trip.
For example, to block the ground time delayed units:
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR1 OP)
5 To block the Ground Instantaneous units:
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR1 OP)

5.4.6 SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT
The F650 Sensitive ground Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
• Sensitive ground time overcurrent (51SG)
• Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (50SG)
• Isolated ground overcurrent (50IG)
• Sensitive ground directional overcurrent (67SG)
5.4.6.1 SENSITIVE GROUND TIME DELAYED OVERCURRENT UNIT (51SG)

51SG unit is a sensitive ground time delayed overcurrent protection element with a setpoint range 0.005A to 16A. The
sensitive ground current input quantity is measured from the transformers module sensitive ground input, terminals B11-
B12, and it may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the
application. The unit trip can be time delayed using a selectable curve. And it incorporates a reset time selectable between
instantaneous or linear.
Table 5–54: 51SG UNIT SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND TOC
SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 1> SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 3
Pickup level
Curve shape
Pickup Level
Curve
0.050
IEEE Ext Inv
0.001 A
N/A
[0.005 : 16.000]
[See list of curves]
5
5.4.6.2 SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT UNIT (50SG)

50SG unit is a sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent protection element, with a setpoint range from 0.005 A to 16.00
A, which can also be time delayed, with a delay selectable between 0 and 900 seconds. The ground current input quantity
is measured from the transformers module sensitive ground input, and it may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. The unit incorporates a reset time selectable
between 0 and 900 seconds, and a block input that resets the pickup and trip signals to 0. The unit outputs are the general
pickup and trip signals of the unit.
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND IOC
SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 1> SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 3

5.4.6.3 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT UNIT FOR UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS (50IG)

50IG unit is a protection element for distribution feeders connected to a busbar that is fed by a power transformer in a delta
or wye connection. The operation of this unit is similar to that of sensitive ground overcurrent units; the difference is that in
the case of 50IG, the 3I0 current is capacitive, and uses very reduced magnitudes (0.5-10 A primary values).
The operation characteristic is shown on figure Figure 5–13:, where Vh, Vl, Ih and Il are unit setpoints.
Vn=3V0
Operation Area
Vh
Vl
Il Ih In=3I0
Figure 5–13: OPERATION CHARACTERISTIC FOR UNIT 50IG
5 Table 5–56: 50IG UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > ISOLATED GROUND IOC
ISOLATED GROUND IOC 1> ISOLATED GROUND IOC 2 > ISOLATED GROUND IOC 3
Function Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
High Voltage Vh Level 20 1V [2 : 70]
Low Current Il LEVEL 0.005 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Low Voltage Vl LEVEL 2 1V [2 : 70]
High Current Ih LEVEL 0.025 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Operation time Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Deviation time to instantaneous Time to inst 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
The relay setpoints for the 50IG elements are as follows:

Function: This setpoint determines whether the unit is operative and can generate pickup and
trip events, which can be configured to close outputs, light up LEDs or trigger
oscillography.
Vh, VL, Ih, IL: Vn and In values that define the points in the operative area.
Operation time (Delay): This is the selectable period between the unit pickup and trip, with a range from 0 to
900 seconds in steps of 0,01 seconds.
Deviation time to Instantaneous (Time to inst): Time after the trip during which the units become instantaneous. It must
be set to zero if the functionality is not required.
this unit.

OPERATION PRINCIPLES:
Operation of the isolated Ground unit is based on the detection of a current that exceeds the setpoint, with neutral voltage
supervision (3V0). This allows to set the unit in a very sensitive way, with a very low current level, ensuring that small angle
or ratio errors in the current transformers will not produce the relay operation, as the neutral voltage verified is higher than
the one set.
Values for h, IL, Vh and VL, which define the relay operation area, are configurable. H magnitudes must be higher than L
magnitudes. The 50IG unit can be supervised by directional unit 67SG.
Using the relay input magnitudes In and Vn, if the point defined by (In, Vn) is inside the operation area and if the directional
unit (if directional supervision is set) allows it, the unit picks up and the set delay time starts counting down. If a directional
block appears during the countdown, the unit is reset. After the set time the unit trips. Once tripped, the relay cannot be
blocked by the directional unit, and the trip remains while the fault exists.
After the trip, the deviation time to instantaneous starts to run, so that all pickups produced during this time will produce an
Instantaneous trip. This means that, if after a trip the breaker is reclosed and the fault persists or reappears, the relay trip
will be instantaneous. If the user doesn’t want to use this function, then the Deviation Time to Instantaneous (Time to
inst) setpoint must be set to zero seconds. Once the time has expired, the unit returns to its normal operation.
5.4.6.4 SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL UNIT (67SG)

Function 67SG is a directional element used for supervising sensitive ground overcurrent functions. The operation
magnitude is the ground current measured directly from the corresponding input (terminals B11-B12), while the polarization
magnitude is the neutral voltage (3Vo) either calculated from three phase voltages or measured from the dedicated voltage
input (A11-A12)
In case of using the voltage measured at the dedicated voltage input terminals, the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint in Setpoint
> System Setup > General setpoints must be VN. 5
If the F650 is set to have synchronism check protection, then this input will be adjusted as busbar voltage and it will not be
the 3V0 voltage (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setpoint as VX)
If the F650 does not have a synchronism check unit, then this input can be set as 3V0 neutral voltage, and it can be used
as polarization magnitude for the 67SG unit (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setpoint as VN).
The same way as the directional unit for phases, it has a polarization voltage loss logic that allows blocking or producing
trip depending on the setpoint.

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL >
SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 1> SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 3
Available setpoints are:

Function permission (Function): This setpoint determines whether the sensitive Ground directional unit is enabled or
Disabled.
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA): This angle is used to rotate the Polarization voltage. Positive angles mean counter
clockwise rotation, and negative angles mean delay (counter clockwise). The
polarization magnitude, once rotated, defines the MTA line. Vn rotated this angle points
the semi plane that corresponds to a Reverse fault. (-Vn) rotated this angle points the
semi plane that corresponds to a Forward fault.

Operation Direction (Direction): This setpoint indicates the Direction for which the unit will allow a trip. Depending on
this setpoint, the unit will be activated for faults in a direction or in the opposite direction.
Possible setpoint values are FORWARD or REVERSE.
Polarization Voltage Threshold (Pol. V Threshold):This is the minimum polarization voltage threshold, for a voltage
value lower than this setpoint the directional unit will be blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this
unit.
Sensitive ground directional element is an independent Protection unit that provides block and Operation signals. These
signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection >
Sensitive Ground Current”
67SG Block (SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK): It indicates that the unit is blocked by digital input or because the Operation
magnitude (In current), or the Polarization magnitude (Vn voltage and/or Ip current) level is too low.
67SG Operation (SENS GND DIR1 OP): It indicates that the directional unit is giving permission, that the angle relations
between the operation magnitude and the polarization magnitude are met, according to the set conditions, or in case of
having selected Permission in the Block Logic setpoint, it indicates that the unit allows operation under block conditions.
SENS GND DIRECTIONAL

SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK
SENS GND DIR1 OP
SENS GND DIR2 BLOCK
SENS GND DIR2 OP
5 SENS GND DIR3 BLOCK
SENS GND DIR3 OP
Configuration of the required signals for blocking the sensitive ground overcurrent units from the signals provided by the
sensitive ground directional units is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using the
inverted operation signals to block the trip, as shown in the following example:
For example, to block sensitive Ground time overcurrent units, use the following signals:
SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)
To block Ground instantaneous units:
SENS GND IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)
To block isolated Ground units:
ISOLATED GND1 BLK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)

5.4.7 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
The F650 Negative sequence menu incorporates the Negative sequence time overcurrent (46P) unit:
5.4.7.1 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT UNIT (46P)

46P unit is an overcurrent protection element that uses the fundamental phasor of the negative sequence current as input
magnitude, calculated from the phase currents. This unit can be used for detecting load unbalance in the system, and for
open phase conditions (fallen or broken conductor). The trip time can be selected as an inverse curve or instantaneous.
The unit reset can also be selected as instantaneous or linear.

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC >
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 1> NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 2 > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 3
5

5.4.8 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
The F650 incorporates the following voltage units:

• Phase undervoltage (27P)
• Phase overvoltage (59P)
• Neutral overvoltage (59NH/59NL)
• Negative sequence overvoltage (47)
• Auxiliary overvoltage (59X)
• Auxiliary undervoltage (27X)
These protection elements can be used in multiple applications, such as:
Undervoltage protection: for induction motor load types, where a voltage dip can cause an increase of the consumed
current. Unit 27P (phase undervoltage) can be used to issue a trip or an alarm.
Transfer Schemes: in the event of an undervoltage condition, we can use Unit 27P (phase undervoltage) to send a signal
that will transfer load to another power source.
Undervoltage units can be set to operate with definite time or with an inverse time curve. If the unit is set as definite time, it
will operate when voltage remains under the set value during the set period of time. This period can be set from 0s to
900.00 s in steps of 10ms.
These units can also be set as inverse time curves. This family of curves is defined by the following formula:
D
T=
5 1−
V
Vpickup
Where:
T = operation time
D = operation time setpoint (delay)
V = voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = pickup setpoint (Pickup level)
Figure 5–14: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

5.4.8.1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE UNIT (27P)

27P unit is a phase undervoltage protection element that uses as input magnitude the fundamental phasor of phase-to-
phase or phase-to-ground voltage, selectable by setpoint. The unit time delay can be selected between definite time and
inverse time. The unit reset is always instantaneous, that is, when the voltage exceeds the dropout value, the unit is reset.
There is an undervoltage setpoint that allows selection of a voltage level under which the unit will be inhibited. This way, we
can distinguish between a fault condition and a Deadline condition where VTs are located in front of the breaker, and when
it is open, the relay loses the voltage values. By setpoint this level to 0 we make this element operate every time the voltage
value is lower than the setpoint. This unit generates independent pickup and trip signals per phase, and general pickup and
trip signals for the unit. These last signals can be selected, by means of the operation logic setpoint, to be an OR (any
phase signal) or an AND (all phase signals).
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE UV >
PHASE UV 1> PHASE UV 2 > PHASE UV 3
VALUE
Input mode Mode PHASE-PHASE N/A [PHASE-PHASE, PHASE-GROUND]
Pickup Level Pickup Level 10 1V [3 : 300]
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A [DEFINITE TIME – INVERSE TIME]
Time Dial Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Minimum Voltage Threshold Minimum Voltage 0 1V [0 : 300]
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A [ANY PHASE – TWO PHASES – ALL PHASES]
Supervision by breaker status Supervised by 52 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED] 5
Phase undervoltage unit setpoints are:
Function Permission (Function):This setpoint indicates whether the phase undervoltage element is enabled or disabled.
Input mode (Mode): This setpoint allows selecting operation for phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltage,
depending on the selected setpoint.
Pickup Level: This is the voltage threshold under which the undervoltage unit will operate.
Curve Shape (Curve): Undervoltage elements can be set to operate with definite time or with an inverse time
curve. Units set as definite time operate when the voltage value remains under the
pickup setpoint during the set time. If inverse time is selected, the unit will operate
according the previously described inverse time curve.
Time Dial (Delay): setpoint of the Protection element operation time.
Minimum voltage Threshold (Minimum Voltage):Voltage setpoint under which the undervoltage element in inhibited, in
order not to operate in deadline cases.
Operation logic (Logic): This setpoint allows the unit operation logic selection:
ANY PHASE The unit will operate under an undervoltage condition in any of the three
phases.
TWO PHASES The unit will operate under an undervoltage condition in at least two
phases.
ALL PHASES The unit will operate under an undervoltage condition in the three
phases.
Supervision by breaker status (Supervised by 52):This setpoint allows inhibiting the undervoltage element if the
breaker is open breaker. In case this setpoint is enabled, the undervoltage element will
be supervised by the breaker status. Otherwise, the element will operate independently
of the breaker status.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this
unit.

5.4.8.2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE UNIT (59P)

59P unit is a phase overvoltage protection element that uses as input magnitudes the phase-to-phase voltages, either
measured directly from the voltage inputs in case the type of connection (General Setpoint > Phase VT Connection) is
DELTA, or calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages in the case of a wye connection. The time delay can be set from
instantaneous to 900 seconds. The unit reset can be delayed up to 900 seconds.
As in the case of the undervoltage unit, this unit generates independent pickup and trip signals for each phase. The general
signal is selectable by setpoint to be an OR or an AND of the phase signals.

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE OV >
PHASE OV 1> PHASE OV 2 > PHASE OV 3
VALUE
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A [ANY PHASE – TWO PHASES – ALL PHASES]
Phase overvoltage unit setpoints are:
5 Function Permission (Function): This setpoint indicates whether the phase overvoltage element is enabled or disabled.
Pickup Level: This is the voltage threshold over which the overvoltage unit will operate.
Trip time (Trip Delay): setpoint of the Protection element operation time.
Reset time (Reset Delay): Reset time of the Protection element.
Operation logic (Logic): This setpoint allows the unit operation logic selection:
ANY PHASE The unit will operate under an overvoltage condition in any of the
three phases.
TWO PHASES The unit will operate under an overvoltage condition in at least two
phases.
ALL PHASES The unit will operate under an overvoltage condition in the three
phases.
this unit.

5.4.8.3 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE UNIT (HIGH LEVEL AND LOW LEVEL) (59NH/59NL)
59NH unit is a neutral overvoltage protection element that uses as input magnitude the system neutral voltage (3V0)
calculated from the phase voltages, or the voltage value measured by the 4th voltage transformer. It is used for detecting
unbalanced system voltage conditions, caused by a ground fault condition, or by the loss of one or two of the voltages. The
unit time delay is selectable between 0 and 900 seconds. The unit incorporates a reset with a selectable delay between 0
and 900 seconds.
A setpoint makes the selection of the input voltage for this unit, either calculated from the phase voltages or measured from
the 4th transformer of the F650. The setpoint to select the source of this voltage is configured in Setpoint > System Setup
> General Setpoint >Auxiliary Voltage (Vn or Vx). By selecting Vn, the neutral voltage used in the phase overvoltage
element will be measured at the fourth relay voltage transformer (A11-A12), and in this case the synchronism element of
the relay will not be available. If Vx is selected as auxiliary voltage, this setpoint corresponds to the busbar voltage input
used for the synchronism element, and the neutral voltage used in protection elements 59NH and 59NL will be calculated
from the phase voltages.
Notice that the neutral overvoltage element will not be available if a DELTA Connection is set in the Phase VT Connection
setpoint in General setpoints, and the fourth voltage transformer input is set to the busbar voltage for the synchronism
element (Vx in Auxiliary Voltage setpoint). This is due to the fact that with this combination of setpoints is not possible to
calculate the zero sequence component from the phase-to-phase voltage magnitudes.
Table 5–61: 59NH/59NL UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS >
>NEUTRAL OV HIGH > NEUTRAL OV HIGH 1> NEUTRAL OV HIGH 2 > NEUTRAL OV HIGH 3
>NEUTRAL OV LOW > NEUTRAL OV LOW 1> NEUTRAL OV LOW 2 > NEUTRAL OV LOW 3
Function permission
Pickup Level
Function
Pickup Level
DISABLED
10
N/A
1V
[DISABLED – ENABLED]
[3 : 300]
5
If the voltage input is calculated from the phase voltages, the equation for obtaining the input value will be as
follows:
3V 0 = V A + V B + V C
If the voltage input is set as the voltage measured by the 4th voltage transformer, then the metered value will be applied
directly to the algorithm. This voltage can be taken through a grounding resistance, a high impedance grounding, a busbar
voltage etc.

5.4.8.4 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE UNIT (47)

47P unit is a negative sequence phase overvoltage protection element. It uses as input magnitude the negative sequence
component calculated from the phase voltage values. This unit can be used to detect the loss of one or two phases,
unbalance voltage conditions, etc.
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV >
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV 1> NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV 2 > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV 3
VALUE
5.4.8.5 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE UNIT (59X)

This is an auxiliary one-phase overvoltage unit for general use that uses as input magnitude the voltage measured by the
4th VT. This voltage can be measured from the busbar, the neutral, etc. (this being the reason for its generic name and use).
The time delay for unit 59X can be set from 0 to 900 seconds. The unit has a reset than can be programmed from 0 to 900
seconds.
5 Table 5–63: 59X UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > AUXILIARY OV >
AUXILIARY OV 1> AUXILIARY OV 2 > AUXILIARY OV 3
5.4.8.6 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE UNIT (27X)

This is an auxiliary one-phase undervoltage unit for general use that uses as input magnitude the voltage measured by the
4th VT, terminals A11-A12. This voltage can be measured from the busbar, the neutral, etc. (this being the reason for its
generic name and use).
Table 5–64: 27X UNIT SETPOINTS
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Auxiliary UV >
Auxiliary UV 1> Auxiliary UV 2 > Auxiliary UV 3
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A [DEFINITE TIME – INVERSE TIME]
Time Dial Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]

5.4.9 POWER
5.4.9.1 FORWARD POWER UNIT (32FP)

F650 units incorporate a forward power element with three units, as the rest of protection functions. The 32FP element
produces a trip when exported power exceeds the setpoint value. Monitored power is active power, calculated by the three
phase voltages and currents, and it is considered to be exported, positive active power, the one given in the direction of the
line protected by the relay; in this situation, the angle between secondary voltage and current is lower than 90º, according
to the relay wiring diagram.
RESTRAINING OPERATION
P- P+
0
Figure 5–15: FORWARD POWER CHARACTERISTIC
Table 5–65: 2FP UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > POWER > FORWARD POWER
FORWARD POWER 1> FORWARD POWER 2 > FORWARD POWER 3
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT
VALUE
STEP RANGE
5
Block from off-line Blk Time After Close 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Pickup level for stage 1 Stage 1 Tap 10.00 0.01MW [0.00 : 10000.00]
Trip time for stage 1 Stage 1 Time 60.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
The F650 includes three 32FP elements. Each elements incorporates two stages, the first stage, less critical, is intended to
produce an alarm, the second stage is used for trip. Both levels are set in primary values, for instance: if in general
setpoints we set CT_RATIO to a value of 100, and the same value for PT_RATIO, the base power will be: 100 x 100 =
10.000 W
The block time allows blocking the element operation during a set time after the coupling breaker closure. For this purpose
it is necessary to connect the breaker bay using a 52B type contact. The purpose of this setpoint is to avoid spurious trips
caused by overloads after the breaker closure.
Power calculations depending on the VT connection:
1- WYE VT connection, or only one transformer in phase-to-ground connection:
P = V a × I a × cos Y a + V b × I b × cos Y b + V c × I c × cos Y c

2- DELTA VT connection, or only one voltage transformer in phase-to-ground connection:
V ab V bc V ca
P = --------- × I a × cos ( Y a – 30 ) + --------- × I b × cos ( Y b – 30 ) + --------- × I c × cos ( Y c – 30 )
3 3 3

5.4.9.2 DIRECTIONAL POWER UNIT (32)
a) UNIT DESCRIPTION
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase active power measured from the feeder associated to the F650.
This element can be selected to operate according to the power threshold adjusted in the corresponding setpoint. This
element is ideal for reverse power applications (F32 REV) or forward power (F32 FWD), depending on the selected
setpoint. The relay measures the three-phase power for wye or delta connections.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power
Characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos(ϕ) + Q sin (ϕ) > SMIN
where: P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the F650 convention, ϕ is the angle set at the 32 setpoint
(DIR POWER ANGLE) in degrees in steps of 0.01º, and SMIN is the minimum operating power
The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay setpoints) units. Both units can be used for alarm and trip,
and they can be set separately to provide a mixed power protection.
The Directional Power Characteristic is shown in the following diagram.
Figure 5–16: POWER DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC

By making the characteristic angle adjustable from 0º to 360º in steps of 0.01º, a variety of operating characteristics can be
achieved as presented in the figures below. For example, for an angle of 0º, the unit would operate as a 32 Forward Power
element, while if setpoint an RCA angle of 180º, the unit would operate as a 32 Reverse Power element. For angles of 90º
and 270º, the case would be similar but with reactive power.

Figure (a) below shows setpoints for reverse power application, while Figure (b) shows setpoints for low forward power
application.
Figure 5–17: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS
The following table shows the SMIN and angle values that must be used for some typical applications:
Table 5–66: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT

SMIN (STAGE TAP) ANGLE (RCA) ELEMENT
>0 0º Forward Active Power
<0 0º Reverse Low Forward Active Power
>0 180º Reverse Forward Active Power
<0 180º Low Forward Active Power

By adding 90º to the angles shown on the table, the represented units would be similar but with Reactive Power instead of
Active Power.
Any other angle would provide a mixed Protection Between Active and Reactive power.
A different angle selection for Stage 1 and Stage 2 could provide in a single unit, a Reactive and Active power limitation. For
example, using the following values:
Dir Power Angle 1(RCA) 0º
Stage 1 Tap 0
Dir Power Angle 2(RCA) 90º
Stage 2 Tap 0
We would obtain a mixed Protection Between figure (d) and figure (e).
b) SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > POWER > DIRECTIONAL POWER>
DIRECTIONAL POWER 1> DIRECTIONAL POWER 2 > DIRECTIONAL POWER 3
VALUE
Directional Angle for stage 1 (RCA1) Dir Power Angle 1 0.00 1 Deg [0.00 : 359.99] 5
Pickup level for stage 1 Stage 1 Tap 10.00 0.01MW [-10000.00 : 10000.00]
Directional Angle for stage 2 (RCA2) Dir Power Angle 2 0.00 1 Deg [0.00 : 359.99]
Function: Enables or disables the directional element.
Blk Time After Close: In seconds. This setpoints allow to block the 32 element during the time specified in
the setpoint after the breaker switches from OPEN to CLOSED.
Dir Power Angle (1-2) (RCA): This setpoint specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional power
unit. This setpoint provides ability to respond to the function in any direction defined
(active forward power, active low forward power, etc.)

The following figure illustrates the conventions established:
Figure 5–18: ANGLES

Stage (1 - 2) Tap: This setpoint specifies the minimum Operation three-phase power for the Stage 1 (2) element. The
power value defined in this setpoint is the minimum distance between the source and the directional power characteristic.
This value can be positive or negative. A positive value would define a characteristic slip through the positive power axis,
while a negative value would move the characteristic through the negative axis. The value of this setpoint is defined in total
MW (primary) – the CT and VT value is considered in the calculations.
NOTE:
Even if the unit defined in this setpoint is MW, this does not necessarily mean that the resulting value and the RCA
setpoint are in MW. For example:
RCA : 30 º SMIN: 100 MW.
If we assume that there is only active power. The unit operation would be produced for a value of:
P = 100 / cos (30) = 115,7 MW.
If there was only reactive power:
Q = 100/sin (30) = 200,0 MVar.
(In this case the real Operation units are Mvar, even if SMIN is expressed in MW.)
Stage 1 (2)Time: This setpoint specifies the delay for Stage 1 of the element. For reverse power or direct power
applications, usually Stage 1 is used for alarm functions, while Stage 2 is used for tripping functions.
Events: This setpoint enables or disables the generation of events. All states in this function are affected by this setpoint.

c) STATUSES
Statuses defined for this Function are as follows:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLOCK : Writing status, operates by level. When this status is activated externally (via PLC), the
directional power element is blocked. This status affects both units in the protection
element (stage 1 and 2).
Activation of this status produces the event: DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLK ON.
Deactivation produces the event : DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLK OFF.
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP: Reading status. This is activated when the unit that corresponds to stage 1/2 is
activated. Events generated by this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP: Reading status. Activation of this status indicates that the power value has exceeded the
threshold indicated by the Stage 1/2 unit. Events generated by this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP: Reading status. This status is a logic OR between the DIR PWR STG1 PKP and DIR
PWR STG2 PKP statuses. Activation of this status indicates that the power value has
exceeded the threshold indicated by any of the Stage 1/2 units. Events generated by
this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP ON
5 DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP: Reading status. This status is a logic OR between the DIR PWR STG1 OP and DIR
PWR STG2 OP statuses. Activation of this status indicates that the power value has
exceeded the threshold indicated by any of the Stage 1/2 units. Events generated by
this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP OFF

5 SETPOINTS 5.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.5CONTROL ELEMENTS
The F650 incorporates the following control elements:
setpoint Group
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Synchrocheck (25)
Autoreclose (79)
Breaker Failure (50BF)
Broken Conductor (I2/I1)
Note: for all control elements related to the breaker, it must be considered that all operations will be performed considering
the status of the switchgear configured as breaker. In setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear up to 16 switchgear
elements can be configured to operate and be monitored, but only one of them can be configured as breaker, for
monitoring, number of openings and closings counters, (KI)2t.
5.5.1 SETPOINT GROUP
The setpoints used for setpoint table management are located in Setpoint >Control Elements > setpoint Group:
Table 5–68: SETPOINT GROUP SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SETPOINT GROUP
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT
VALUE
STEP RANGE 5
setpoint Grouping Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A [GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 – GROUP 3]
For more detail information go to section 5.4.1

5.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.5.2 UNDERFREQUENCY UNIT (81U)
Setpoint >Control Elements > Underfrequency

The 81U unit is an underfrequency control element. The pickup setpoint can be selected from 20.00 to 65.00 Hz, allowing
its use as load shedding unit. The unit reset time delayed is selectable between 0.00 and 900 seconds, and for the unit to
operate it is necessary that the voltage value is over the value set for minimum voltage threshold. This way undesired trips
are prevented when the signal for metering the frequency is not available or has a very low value.
Table 5–69: 81U UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > UNDERFREQUENCY
UNDERFREQUENCY 1 > UNDERFREQUENCY 2 > UNDERFREQUENCY 3
Pickup level Pickup Level 49.50 0.01 Hz [20.00 : 65.00]
Minimum voltage threshold Minimum Voltage 30 1V [30 : 300]
Frequency elements operate with the system frequency, this frequency is measured in the voltage channel set for the
5 frequency reference, in the Frequency Reference setpoint inside Setpoint > System Setup >General setpoints.
5.5.3 OVERFREQUENCY UNIT (81O)
Setpoint >Control Elements > Overfrequency

The 81O unit is an overfrequency protection element. The pickup setpoint can be selected from 20.00 to 65.00 Hz, with a
time delay selectable between 0 and 900 seconds. The unit-reset delay is from 0.00 to 900.00 seconds.
Table 5–70: 81O UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > OVERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQUENCY 1 > OVERFREQUENCY 2 > OVERFREQUENCY 3

5.5.4 SYNCHRONISM CHECK UNIT - SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Note: The Switchgear element used in the F650 synchronism unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint inside Breaker setpoints, at “Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker setpoints”.
WARNING
When testing this function do not forget that the relay must detect an open breaker to operate.
The synchronism element is used for monitoring the connection of two parts of the circuit by the close of a breaker. This unit
verifies that voltages (V1 and V2) at both sides of the breaker are within the magnitude, angle and frequency limits set by
the user. V1 and V2 are the line and busbar voltage values measured by the relay.
Synchronism check (25) is defined as the comparison of the voltage difference of two circuits with different sources to be
either linked through an impedance element (transmission line, feeder, etc.), or connected through parallel circuits of
defined impedance( Figure 5–19:) . The voltage comparison between both sides of a breaker is performed before closing
the breaker, in order to minimize internal damage that could occur due to the voltage difference, both in magnitude and
angle. This is extremely important in steam generating plants, where reclosing output lines with angle differences could
lead to severe damage to the turbine axis.
V
s
5
2s 2
5r
V
r
5
C
/2 Z
lin
e C
/2
2
5
Z
Pa
ralle
l
Figure 5–19:
The difference in voltage level and phase angle in a given moment is the result of the existing load between remote sources
connected through parallel circuits (load flux), as well as a consequence of the impedance of those elements connecting
them (even if there is no load flux in parallel circuits, or because sources to be connected are completely independent and
isolated from one another).
In interconnected systems, the angle difference between both ends of an open breaker is usually negligible, as its sources
are remotely connected through other elements (equivalent or parallel circuits). However, in isolated circuits as in the case
of an independent generator, the difference in angle, voltage levels and relative slip of voltage phasors can be very
important. It may happen that the relative slip of voltage values is very low or null so that they will rarely be in phase.
Luckily, due to the changing conditions of a power system (connection-disconnection of loads, sources, and new inductive-
capacitive elements) the relative slip between phasors is not null and they can be synchronized.
In the first case, even if we must take into consideration the length of the line whose ends (sources) will be connected for
determining the angle difference between them, this is not enough to fix the synchronism conditions before closing the
breaker. Experience tells us that the window of angle difference between voltage phasors must be fixed to a value of 15º-
20º.

5.5.4.1 VOLTAGE INPUTS

In order to perform the synchronism check function, the F650 uses only one voltage from each end of the breaker. Voltage
values to be compared must be on the same basis, either phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltage; they must be the
same at both ends of the breaker; it is not possible to compare a phase-to-ground voltage at one end with a phase-to-
phase voltage at the other end.
Additionally, if on one end, three voltages have been connected, the necessary voltage on the other end for Function 25 will
only be single-phase voltage. If there is only one voltage (either phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground) at both ends of the
breaker, this must be from the same phase in both cases.
The selection of voltage values to be used by the synchronism unit is made in the relay General setpoints:
V1 is the line voltage, selectable from the relay voltage channels, using the “Frequency Reference” setpoint at
Setpoint > System Setup > General setpoints > Frequency Reference. (Please refer to the voltage
correspondence )
V2 is the busbar voltage measured at the auxiliary voltage input (terminals A11-A12). To enable the busbar voltage
metering in the relay, it is required to select VX in the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint at Setpoint > System Setup >
General setpoints > Auxiliary Voltage.
The voltage correspondence is detailed in the following table:
Table 5–71: VOLTAGE CORRESPONDENCE UNIT 25

VOLTAGE CORRESPONDENCE
setpoints>System Setup>General setpoints>Frequency Reference VI VII VIII
Voltage selection for unit 25 of F650
setpoints>System Setup>General setpoints>Phase VT Connection=WYE Va-g Vb-g Vc-g
5 Phase-to-ground voltage connection.(Wye connection)
setpoints>System Setup>General setpoints>Phase VT Connection=DELTA Phase-to- Va-b Vb-c Vc-a
phase voltage connection.(Delta connection).
setpoints>System Setup>General setpoints> Auxiliary Voltage=VX Vx
setpoints/System Setup/General setpoints/Auxiliary Voltage setpoint must be set to Vx, in order to monitor auxiliary
voltage instead of Vn (neutral voltage, coming from an open delta connection).
5.5.4.2 APPLICATION
Even if the application range of F650 is quite wide and the unit can be used in distribution lines at any voltage level, it must
be taken into account that it is a three-pole tripping relay, designed for managing a single breaker. This is why F650 is
not suitable for one and a half breaker configurations, or ring configurations where a transmission line or feeder has two
breakers.

5.5.4.3 SETPOINTS
Setpoint > Control Elements > Synchrocheck
There is only one synchrocheck unit in the F650.
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SYNCHROCHECK
VALUE
Dead bus voltage level Dead Bus Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live bus voltage level Live Bus Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Dead line voltage level Dead Line Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live line voltage level Live Line Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Voltage Difference Max Volt Difference 10.00 0.01 V [2.00 : 300.00]
Angle Difference Max Angle Difference 10.0 0.1 Deg [2.0 : 80.0]
Frequency Slip Max Freq Difference 20 10 mHz [10 : 5000]
Breaker Closing time Time 0.50 0.01 s [0.01 : 600.00]
Dead Line – Dead Bus Function permission DL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Live Line – Dead Bus Function permission LL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Dead Line – Live Bus Function permission DL-LB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
setpoints description for 25 unit: 5

Function permission (Function): This setpoint allows enabling and disabling the synchrocheck unit.
Voltage Level determination setpoints for busbar and line:

This setpoint group allows determining the voltage levels considered as dead and live for line and busbar voltage.
Dead Bus voltage level (Dead Bus Level): Voltage level considered as dead bus
Live Bus voltage level (Live Bus Level): Voltage level considered as live bus
Dead Line voltage level (Dead Line Level): Voltage level considered as dead line
Live Line voltage level (Live Line Level): Voltage level considered as live line
Synchrocheck setpoints (live bus, live line):
F650 relays verify synchronism by establishing and comparing three basic parameters: the difference in
module and angle of voltage phasors, and the frequency slip of a phasor related to the other one.
synchrocheck setpoints include a fourth time setpoint, that allows using an anticipative algorithm to issue a
closing signal.
Voltage Difference (Max Volt Difference): Maximum Difference in module between the line and busbar voltage
to allow a closing in the synchrocheck unit.
Angle Difference (Max Angle Difference): Maximum Difference in angle between the line and busbar voltage
to allow a closing in the synchrocheck unit.
Frequency Slip (Max Freq Difference): Maximum difference in frequency (slip) between both voltage values to
be compared in the synchrocheck unit.
Breaker Closing time (Time): Estimated breaker Closing time, used for establishing the Closing order in a
moment that allows the busbar and line voltages to be in phase.

This time is considered if the relative slip is higher than 5 mHz; in this case, an anticipative algorithm is
executed to calculate the closing signal with the necessary advance for the breaker effective Closing to be
produced when voltages are in phase. In case the frequency slip is high (higher than 5 Hz) and it is not
possible to obtain a closing in phase, the used algorithm ensures that the voltage difference in the moment
of the closing is lower than the set angle (Max Angle Difference).
Closing permission logic setpoints:

In case that the voltage at one or both ends of the breaker is null, the synchronism unit cannot establish the necessary
parameters to give closing conditions, and therefore it does not issue synchronism permission. For those situations where
the user wants to enable the closing permission in a condition of loss of one or both voltages at both ends of the breaker,
F650 units incorporate closing permission logics for the cases of: dead line-dead bus, live line-dead bus and dead line-live
bus.
Dead line- Dead Bus Function permission (DL-DB Function): Enabling this Function allows issuing a
Closing permission signal in dead line and dead bus Condition (without voltage at both sides of the breaker).
Live line- Dead Bus Function permission (LL-DB Function): Enabling this Function allows to issue a
Closing permission signal in live line and dead bus Condition (without voltage at the sides of the breaker that
corresponds to the busbar voltage)
Dead line- Live Bus Function permission (DL-LB Function): Enabling this Function allows issuing a
Closing permission signal in live line and dead bus Condition (without voltage at the sides of the breaker that
corresponds to the line voltage).
Snapshot event: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
5 5.5.4.4 SYNCHROCHECK STATES
Internal signals provided by the F650 (Actual> Status > Control Elements > Synchrocheck) for the synchronism unit are as
follows:
Table 5–73: SYNCHROCHECK INTERNAL STATES
SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP
SYNCROCHECK OP
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
SYNCROCHECK COND OP
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
LL-DB OPERATION
SLIP CONDITION
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP: Block signal for the synchrocheck unit, configurable at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements
SYNCROCHECK OP: Closing permission signal in live line-live bus conditions with open breaker.
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM: General Closing permission of the Synchronism unit. It contemplates all possible
situations, live line-live bus conditions, and the closing permission logics (dead line-
dead bus, live line- dead bus, dead line-live bus). Note: in case the Function is
disabled, the Closing permission signal will be activated in order not to interfere with
possible logics where it is included. If the synchronism unit is enabled, this signal will
only be activated in the closing conditions established by setpoint.
SYNCROCHECK COND OP: Closing permission according to permission logics (DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB).
DL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – dead bus condition.

DL-LB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – live bus condition.

LL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in live line – dead bus condition.
SLIP CONDITION: I Internal signal indicating frequency slip between the line voltage and bus voltage
phasors.
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency higher than line frequency
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency lower than line frequency
Voltage and frequency values for line and busbar can be obtained, both in primary and secondary values at:
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage
VBB Primary (KV) Busbar voltage in primary values
VL Primary (KV) Line voltage in primary values
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Voltage
Line Voltage (V) Line voltage in secondary values
Bus Voltage (V) Busbar voltage in secondary values
Actual> Metering > Frequency
Line Frequency (Hz) Line frequency in Hz
Bus Frequency (Hz) Bus frequency in Hz
Note on the measure: voltage and current angles are available for the user from firmware version 1.60.
The voltage angles can be obtained in primary metering values (Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage), being the 5
line voltage angle, the one that corresponds to the voltage set in the frequency reference in General setpoints (please refer
to the voltage correspondence table (Table 5–71:), and the angle of the busbar voltage the one that corresponds to Vx
Angle, when the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint as been selected as VX.
5.5.4.5 ALGORITHM
F650 units perform the synchronism check by basically establishing and comparing three parameters:
Module difference of voltage phasors ΔV (V)
Phase angle of voltage phasors Δϕ (º)
Frequency slip between two phasors S (Hz)
These parameters are continuously determined and managed once that Unit 25 has been enabled by setpoint, and
in open breaker conditions. It is necessary to consider that all calculations are made once the open breaker condition is
detected; if the breaker is closed or undefined, the synchronism unit will not issue a closing permission signal, even when
closing conditions are met.
If voltage on one side of the breaker to be closed is null, the synchronism unit cannot establish the synchronism check, and
therefore it will not issue synchronism permission. For these cases, usual in breaker maintenance situations, or in new
installations where voltage might not be present, but the breaker operation needs to be verified, F650 units incorporate
closing permission logics for situations of:
Dead Line – Dead Bus (DL-DB)
Live Line – Dead Bus (LL-DB)
Dead Line – Live Bus (DL-LB)
In order to establish the closing permission signal, the first parameter used by the algorithm is the difference in magnitude
between line and bus voltages, and afterwards, the angle difference and frequency slip are verified.
Voltage Difference ΔV

Comparing the voltage values for line voltage (V1) and busbar voltage (V2) at both sides of the breaker, the relay can
determine the synchronism situation of the unit (see Table 2–73:).
Being:
V1 line voltage
V2 bus voltage
VL Minimum acceptable voltage by setpoint to establish synchronism conditions (dead line and bus levels).
VH Appropriate voltage to establish synchronism conditions, configured by setpoint (live line and bus levels).
Table 5–74: SYNCHRONISM CONDITIONS

SYNCHRONISM SITUATION SYNCHRONISM CLOSING LOGIC LINE VOLTAGE BUSBAR VOLTAGE
CHECK LEVELS LEVELS
(1) VL < (V1 & V2)< VH Not permitted Not permitted V1 > dead line level V2 > dead bus level
V1 < live line level V2 < live bus level
(2) (V1 & V2) > VH Permitted Live Line – Live Bus V1 > live line level V2 > live bus level
(3) (V1 & V2) < VL Not permitted Dead Line – Dead Bus V1 < dead line level V2 < dead bus level
(4) (V1 < VL) & (VL< V2 < VH) Not permitted Not permitted V1 < dead line level V2 > dead bus level
V2 < live bus level
(5) (V2 < VL) & (VL < V1 < VH) Not permitted Not permitted V1 > dead line level V2 < dead bus level
V1 < live line level
(6) (V1 < VL) & (V2 > VH) Not permitted Dead Line – Live Bus V1 < dead line level V2 > live bus level
(7) (V2 < VL) & (V1 > VH) Not permitted Live Line – Dead Bus V1 > live line level V2 < dead bus level
5
Table 5–74: shows the different synchrocheck and closing logic situations, that can be produced depending on
the line and busbar voltage levels.
Live Line – Live Bus (Synchronism check): Only in case number (2), with live line and live bus, the unit will start
evaluating the line and busbar voltage comparison with respect to the setpoint ΔVset
established by setpoint (Max Volt Difference). In this case, if the voltage difference is
lower than ΔVset, the synchronism check unit (25) will verify the angle difference Δϕ
adjusted by setpoint (Max Angle Difference).
Dead Line – Dead Bus (DL - DB): Case number (3) will not allow the synchronism function, but it will allow DL-DB
operation logic, if this logic is enabled by setpoint (DL-DB Function).
Dead Line – Live Bus (DL - LB): Case number (6) will not allow the synchronism function, but it will allow DL-LB Operation
logic, if this logic is enabled by setpoint (DL-LB Function)
Live Line – Dead Bus (LL - DB): Case number (7) will not allow the synchronism function, but it will allow LL-DB operation
logic, if this logic is enabled by setpoint (LL-DB Function)
Case numbers (1), (4) and (5) are not considered neither for synchronism check purposes, nor for closing logic.

Phase Angle Difference Δϕ

In the live line-live bus Condition, once the voltage difference has been successfully verified in magnitude, the system
establishes the angle difference between both voltage phasors. If the angle difference is lower than the Δϕset (Max Angle
Difference) setpoint, then the system will verify the frequency slip S (Max Freq Difference).
Δ ϕ se t
Δ ϕ a c tu a
V H
V L
V 1 V 2
Figure 5–20: VOLTAGE ANGLE DIFFERENCE

5
FREQUENCY SLIP Δf
The relative frequency slip between phasors is calculated if the angle difference is lower than the Δϕset (Max Freq
Difference) setpoint. From the information obtained from the relay, the algorithm can know the slip (mHz) of both phasors,
and it will take as reference (VRef) the lowest frequency phasor.
If the relative slip is higher than 5 mHz, the unit performs an anticipative algorithm, determining the right moment to give the
closing command to the breaker, so that the breaker closes when the line and busbar voltages are in phase. If the slip is
higher than 5 Hz, as a close in phase is not possible, the algorithm ensures that the difference between voltages in the real
closing moment is not higher than the set value (Max Volt Difference). If the relative slip, Δf, is equal or lower than 0.005
Hz, the algorithm gives closing permission as soon as the angle difference conditions are met, because at such a low
speed, the hold time for getting an “in-phase” closing permission would be too long.
When the difference between voltage values equals “two times” the set angle as maximum angle difference (ΔV = ΔVset),
the anticipative algorithm starts running and uses the set breaker closing time to establish the initiation of permission, so
that it is executed in the moment when both voltage phasors are completely in phase, thus minimizing the voltage
difference in the breaker chamber to negligible values.
The main benefit is that after a considerable number of breaker operations, damage to internal connection elements, as
well as to the chamber isolating element is drastically reduced, ensuring a longer life for the breaker, and reducing costly
maintenance operations.

The Closing process using anticipative algorithm is described on the following figure:
ϕ2
ϕ1
ϕ
V R e f V ’s V
Figure 5–21: ANTICIPATIVE ALGORITHM
Where:
Vref Referenced phasor (the one with lower frequency)
Vs Actual voltage phasor (the one with lower frequency)
V’s Calculated voltage phasor, depending on the set breaker closing time (anticipative algorithm)
5 ϕ 360º *TCB *Δf = Calculated angle for phasor V’s
TCB Breaker Closing time defined by setpoint
Δf Frequency slip (mHz) between phasors
ϕ1 Angle difference set as maximum angle difference (Δϕset , Max Angle Difference)
ϕ2 = Angle difference between Vref and Vs. The algorithm starts operating when ϕ2 equals two times
the angle set as maximum angle difference.
Closing permission is given when V’s is over Vref, which means that line and busbar voltages are in phase.
If the frequency slip is high, it is possible that as soon as the window defined by two times the maximum angle difference
(ϕ2) is entered, the relay will produce a closing permission output, if it is guaranteed that the projected phasor will be within
the limit marked by the setpoint, as shown in the following figure.
ϕ2
ϕ1 ϕ1
V Ref
V ’s
ϕ
V
Figure 5–22: HIGH SLIP CLOSING PERMISSION SIGNAL

5.5.5 AUTORECLOSE (79)
5.5.5.1 INTRODUCTION
Note: The Switchgear element used in the F650 autoreclose unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint inside Breaker setpoints, at “Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker setpoints”. Configuration of these
Switchgear parameters is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear using EnerVista 650 Setup
software.
The F650 autoreclose unit allows producing up to four breaker “shots” prior to locking out. Thanks to the great flexibility of
F650 configurable logic, the conditions to produce the autoreclose initiation and the selection of which protection elements
will be enabled after each shot can be programmed. This flexibility allows implementing protection schemes that used to
require wiring and special functions in conventional equipments. One application is, for instance, to program instantaneous
the first protection trip and the second one to be time delayed, in order to give time for output fuses to burning of a feeder
branch. This can be as simply as disable the instantaneous units after the first shot using the programmable logic. (see
example in section )
5.5.5.2 MAIN AUTORECLOSE SETPOINTS

Setpoint > Control Elements > Autoreclose
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > AUTORECLOSE
VALUE
Maximum Number of shots
Dead time 1
Max Number Shots
Dead Time 1
1
0.00
N/A
0.01 s
[1 : 4]
[0.00 : 900.00]
5
Dead time 2 Dead Time 2 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reclaim time or reset lockout delay Reclaim Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reclose conditions permission Cond. Permission DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Hold time Hold Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Autoreclose setpoints description:

Function: This setpoint allows enabling or disabling the autoreclose operation. If this setpoint is adjusted as
DISABLED, the recloser will be out of service.
Max Number Shots: This setpoint specifies the number of autoreclose shots allowed in the unit. If this number is
exceeded, the autoreclose goes to LOCKOUT status, and the fault is considered to be permanent.
Dead Time 1 ... 4: These times correspond to the first, second, third and fourth breaker reclosings configured in the unit.
Reclaim Time (also known as safety time or reset lockout delay): This is the time required to go from LOCKOUT
to READY status once the breaker is closed.
Cond. Permission: This setpoint enables the verification of the relay reclose conditions. If this setpoint is enabled, before
the breaker closing command execution the system will verify the possible reclose conditions. If this
setpoint is disabled, the closing command will be executed after the reclose time without verifying
these conditions. The reclose conditions input is configured as AR CONDS INPUT at Setpoint >
Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
Hold Time: This setpoint indicates the waiting time for the reclose conditions to be present. This setpoint is only
operative if the Cond. Permission setpoint is enabled.
Reset Time: This is the time that the autoreclose takes to return to READY status after a successful reclose. Once
this time has expired, the shot counter will reset and the autoreclose will get to READY.

5.5.5.3 AUTORECLOSE INPUTS

For the correct operation of the autoreclose element, it is required to configure several input signals in the Relay. These
signals can be configured using EnerVista 650 Setup software, at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements. The Protection Elements screen allows to select simple signals provided directly by the relay (states), or to
use more complex logics using virtual outputs, configured at setpoint > Logic Configuration using the PLC Editor tool
inside EnerVista 650 Setup.
Actual> Status > Control Elements > Autoreclose
Table 5–76: 79 CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

AUTORECLOSE INPUTS
AR LEVEL BLOCK
AR PULSE BLOCK
AR PULSE UNBLOCK
AR INITIATE
AR CONDS INPUT
AR LEVEL BLOCK: This signal is configured to block the autoreclose by level; when the block signal disappears, the
recloser goes to Lockout status before returning to either the READY status, or the
corresponding status in the reclosing cycle.
AR PULSE BLOCK: This signal is configured to block the autoreclose by pulse; a pulse moves the autoreclose to
5 BLOCK status. The autoreclose block is active until an unblock signal is received.
AR PULSE UNBLOCK: This signal is configured as autoreclose unblock by pulse; this pulse is required to bring the
recloser out of the block status. The autoreclose goes to Lockout after a block situation.
AR INITIATE: This signal indicates the autoreclose initiation. Usually, the factory default configuration sets this
signal as a combination of the general trip signal (Virtual Output 83), and an external input
configured as AR Initiate.
AR CONDS INPUT: This signal configures the conditions that are to be met before executing a breaker close
command. These conditions are verified once the configured Dead Time has expired, and they
are only considered if the Cond. Permission setpoint is enabled. Otherwise, these conditions
wouldn’t have any effect. In the default factory configuration, the conditions input is associated to
the synchronism check element close permission.

5.5.5.4 AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS

Actual> Status > Control Elements > Autoreclose. These signals can be used as conditions for executing logics in the
relay; they are also useful to know the autoreclose behavior.
Table 5–77: 79 INTERNAL STATUS

AUTORECLOSE SINGLE STATUS AUTORECLOSE ENUMERATED STATUS
AR CLOSE BREAKER AR STATUS
AR OUT OF SERVICE AR READY
AR READY AR LOCKOUT
AR LOCKOUT AR BLOCK
AR BLOCK AR RCL IN PROGRESS
AR RCL IN PROGRESS AR LOCKOUT MODE
AR LCK BY ANOMALY AR LCK BY ANOMALY
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE
AR LCK BY USER AR LCK BY USER
AR LCK BY CONDS AR LCK BY CONDS
AR LCK BY TRIPS AR LCK BY TRIPS
AR LCK BY SHOTS AR LCK BY SHOTS
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT AR BLOCK MODE
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT AR BLOCK BY PULSE
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
5
AR BLOCK BY PULSE
Description of autoreclose internal status:

AR CLOSE BREAKER Breaker close command given by the autoreclose
AR OUT OF SERVICE Autoreclose out of service (Disabled)
AR READY Autoreclose in service
AR LOCKOUT Autoreclose in lockout status (finished cycled-definite trip)
AR BLOCK Autoreclose blocked (by input, logic, others, etc).
AR RCL IN PROGRESS Cycle in course (autoreclose in progress).
AR LCK BY ANOMALY Autoreclose in “Lockout” by anomaly.
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN Autoreclose in “Lockout” by failure to open
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSEAutoreclose in “Lockout” by failure to close
AR LCK BY USER Autoreclose in “Lockout” by user Command; manual breaker close during the autoreclose cycle
AR LCK BY CONDS Autoreclose in lockout by non-compliance of the autoreclose conditions
AR LCK BY TRIPS Autoreclose in “Lockout” by maximum number of trips (Lockout status not available)
AR LCK BY SHOTS Autoreclose in “Lockout” at the end of cycle – Definite trip (due to Maximum Number of shots
reached).
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the first shot
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the second shot
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the third shot
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the fourth shot
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL Autoreclose blocked by level. See AR block signals configuration (AR LEVEL BLOCK)

AR BLOCK BY PULSE Autoreclose blocked by pulse. See AR block signals configuration (AR PULSE BLOCK)
AR STATUS Autoreclose status (see )
AR LOCKOUT MODE Autoreclose lockout mode (see )
AR BLOCK MODE Autoreclose block mode (see )

5.5.5.5 GENERAL AUTORECLOSE STATUS DIAGRAM
The following diagram describes the different autoreclose states, as well as the transitions between states.
Figure 5–23: GENERAL AUTORECLOSE STATUS DIAGRAM
Description of the general autoreclose status:

OUT OF SERVICE / AR DISABLE
In this status, the autoreclose is disabled. From any state, if the Function setpoint is set as DISABLED, the autoreclose will
move to OUT OF SERVICE status, where it is not operative.
AR READY
This is the initiation and normality situation status: closed breaker. There are neither faults producing a autoreclose
initiation nor Block signal.
If the autoreclose was in LOCKOUT, if the breaker is closed and the time set in Reclaim Time setpoint expires, the
autoreclose will go to the initial status of READY.
From RECLOSE IN PROGRESS, the recloser will move to READY, if the Reset Time setpoint expires without any
autoreclose initiation condition.
AR RECLOSE IN PROGRESS
From READY status, a reclose initiation will set the cycle counter to 1 and a reclosing sequence will be initiated which
will produce breaker close commands, unless any abnormality is produced that will make the autoreclose go to
LOCKOUT status.
The reclosing sequence consists on the following steps:
Wait until the breaker is open, if the waiting exceeds the Fail to Open Time setpoint, the autoreclose will go to
LOCKOUT by failure of opening status (AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN).

Once the breaker is open, it waits for the time set in Dead Time N setpoint, being N the number of the cycle in
progress. If during this waiting the breaker is closed or reclose initiation conditions are given, the recloser will go to
LOCKOUT status by anomaly (AR LCK BY ANOMALY).
Once the Dead Time has expired, in case the Conditions Permission setpoint is disabled, a closing command would
be produced. If the conditions permission setpoint is enabled, the system will wait for the conditions fixed in the
conditions input (AR CONDS INPUT) configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements; if the
waiting period for the reclosing conditions signal activation exceeds the Hold Time, the autoreclose will go to Lockout
status by conditions (AR LCK BY CONDS).
The autoreclose gives a Closing command and waits for the breaker to close. If the Fail to Close Time setpoint is
exceeded, the autoreclose will go to lockout by failure of closing (AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE).
At this point, the diagram indicates that a reclosing cycle has been reached, and so the cycle counter is increased. In this
time, the period set in Reset Time starts to count. If during the set unit reset time there is no autoreclose initiation, the cycle
counter will reset to its initial value (1), and the autoreclose will return to the standby status (READY). If during the Reset
Time setpoint period, there is a new autoreclose initiation, the Reclose In Progress sequence will start again. If this
reclose is produced after the last configured cycle in the Maximum Number of Shots setpoint, the autorecloser will go to
Lockout by maximum number of shots (AR LCK BY SHOTS).
AR LOCKOUT
This is a safety status, scheme lockout blocks all phases of the reclosing cycle, preventing automatic reclosure.
From the out of service (AR DISABLE) and BLOCK statuses, the autoreclose will stay in LOCKOUT prior going to
READY.
From the RECLOSE IN PROGRESS status, the recloser will go to LOCKOUT status if any of the anomalies described
above occur.
5 To go from the LOCKOUT status to READY it is necessary that the breaker is closed and stays closed for preset time in
Reclaim Time setpoint.
AR BLOCK
The BLOCK status is similar to the LOCKOUT status, as it guarantees that if the autoreclose is in Block, no breaker
close command will be produced, but the difference between them is that this Block status is reached by an external
action. The autoreclose block can be configured by pulse or level signals. This configuration must be selected at
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
When the autoreclose block signal is deactivated, either by a level change in the set signal (in case of block by level) or
by an Unblock pulse (in case of block by pulse), the block status is abandoned and the autoreclose returns to the
Lockout status.
Configurable signals to block the autorecloser are described in section 5.5.5.3.

5.5.5.6 LOGIC FOR BLOCKING PROTECTION FUNCTIONS DURING THE RECLOSING CYCLE
The F650 autoreclose generates a series of internal signals that allow performing block logics for Protection units during
the reclosing cycle. These signals are blocks after autoreclose shots (BLK AFTER SHOT). For example, if the user wants
to block a protection unit during the complete reclosing cycle, it is necessary to configure a signal as an OR of the four
blocking signals provided after each reclosing cycle in the logic configuration tool Setpoint > Logic Configuration, and
then use it to block the desired protection units at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Figure 5–24:shows an example of the logic configuration for the block signal during the reclosing cycle.
Figure 5–24: BLOCK SIGNAL DURING THE RECLOSING CYCLE
Figure 5–25: shows an example of the autoreclose initiation and protection unit block signals after the different
shots. The autoreclose initiate signal is configured to the relay general trip that corresponds to virtual output 83
configured in the logic configuration tool, and a physical contact to generate an external autoreclose initiation.
5
In the example shown on the figure, the 50PH element block signal is configured as a combination of block by digital input,
block by non-trip permission of the directional unit, and finally the unit will remain blocked during the reclosing cycle. This
means that only the first trip can be executed by the phase instantaneous overcurrent unit; after the first reclose shot, the
unit will remain blocked until the end of the cycle.
Figure 5–25: CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE OF THE RECLOSE INITIATION AND BLOCK SIGNALS

5.5.6 BREAKER FAILURE UNIT (50BF)
Note: The Switchgear element used in the Breaker Failure unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint, inside Breaker setpoints at Setpoint > Protection Elements > Breaker > Breaker setpoints
The breaker failure unit is used to determine when a trip command sent to a breaker has not been executed within a
selectable delay. Most commonly it is a failure to open from the tripped breaker. In the event of a breaker failure, the 50BF
unit must issue a signal that will trip the rest of breakers connected at that time to the same busbar, and that can provide
fault current.
Comparing the current measured by the Relay with a setpoint level makes breaker failure detection. If after receiving a
breaker initiate signal, the current level were maintained over the setpoint level during a longer period than the set time, this
would indicate that the breaker that has received the opening command has not been able to open and clear the fault, and
the relay would issue the corresponding breaker failure signal.
F650 units incorporate 2 levels of current and time, together with a trip without current unit, and an internal arc detection
unit.
The breaker failure Initiate signal is configured at setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements. In the BRK
FAILURE INITIATE input, the user must select the desired signal for the breaker failure initiation.
The following table describes the breaker failure unit setpoints: Setpoint > Control Elements > Breaker Failure
Table 5–78: 50BF UNIT SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > BREAKER FAILURE
Supervision (retrip) pickup level Supervision Pickup 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
5 Hiset pickup level Hiset Pickup 5.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Lowset pickup level Lowset Pickup 2.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Internal arc pickup level Internal Arc Pickup 0.10 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Internal arc time delay Internal Arc Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Retrip time delay Supervision Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Hiset time delay HiSet Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Lowset time delay LowSet Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Second stage time delay 2nd Step Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
WITHOUT current unit time delay No Current Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
setpoints description for breaker failure unit:

Function permission (Function): This setpoint allows enabling and disabling the 50BF unit
Supervision or retrip pickup level (Supervision Pickup): Supervision level pickup current threshold
Hiset pickup level (Hiset Pickup): High-level pickup current threshold.
Lowset pickup level (Loset Pickup): Low level pickup current threshold.
Internal arc pickup level (Internal Arc Pickup): Internal arc unit pickup current threshold.
Internal arc time delay (Internal Arc Delay): Time delay applied to the internal arc unit
Supervision or Retrip time delay (Supervision Delay): Time delay applied to the supervision or retrip unit.
High-level time delay (Hiset Delay): Time delay applied to the high level unit.
Low-level time delay (Lowset Delay): Time delay applied to the low level unit.
2nd step time delay (2nd Step Delay): Time delay applied to the breaker failure second step.
No current unit time delay (No Current Delay): Time delay applied to the trip without current unit.

Signals relative to breaker failure provided by the relay can be viewed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Breaker
Failure, and they are as follows:
Table 5–79: BREAKER FAILURE STATUS
BREAKER FAILURE STATUS
BKR FAIL INITIATE
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION
BKR FAIL HISET
BKR FAIL LOWSET
INTERNAL ARC
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP
BKR FAIL INITIATE External signal for breaker failure initiation. (Configurable at setpoints> Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements).
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Signal for breaker failure without current
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Signal for supervision level breaker failure (retrip)
BKR FAIL HISET Signal for high-level breaker failure
BKR FAIL LOWSET Signal for low-level breaker failure
INTERNAL ARC Signal for internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Signal for Second level breaker failure (high and low)

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the breaker failure unit:
Figure 5–26: LOGIC SCHEME FOR 50BF

The breaker failure unit has three levels. The first one is called “Retrip” or “Supervision”. This operation level can be used to
give a signal to the breaker on which the initial opening has been executed. This is sometimes a usual practice; 50
milliseconds after the trip signal, a retrip signal is sent to the breaker.
Besides the supervision or retrip level, there are two additional levels, known as “Hiset” and “Lowset”. These two levels,
together with their time delays, allow executing complex protection schemes. Additionally to these two supervision levels,
there is a second time stage called “second step”.
Operation of breaker failure units by level (supervision, hiset and loset) is produced when the current level is higher than
the set current for the pickup of each level during the time set in the corresponding delay setpoint.
High and low levels constitute a second step level; for the pickup of this second level, only the pickup of any of the two
levels (hiset and loset) is required. For the unit pickup to dropout it is required that the current is under the pickup levels of
both hiset and loset setpoints. Once the second level time delay has expired, a “Second Step” trip signal will be issued.
50BF unit incorporates also a no current tripping unit, and an internal arc unit. The no-current rip unit is governed only by
the status of the breaker auxiliary contact; once the external breaker failure initiation signal is received, if the breaker status
does not change to open during the set time in the unit (No Current Delay), the corresponding breaker failure signal is
issued (BKR FAIL NO CURRENT),
The internal arc unit inside the breaker failure element is independent from the external breaker failure signal; this unit is
used to detect arcing produced with an open breaker; if a higher current that the set level is detected during a period that is
longer than the set delay for the unit (Internal Arc Delay), and the breaker is open, the corresponding internal arc signal will
be issued (INTERNAL ARC).

5.5.7 VT FUSE FAILURE UNIT (VTFF)
Note: The Switchgear element used in the VT Fuse Failure unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint, inside Breaker setpoints at Setpoint > Protection Elements > Breaker > Breaker setpoints. This switchgear
must have previously been configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear
Fuse failure detector is used to block protection units that can operate incorrectly due to a partial or total voltage loss. This
loss can be caused by the voltage transformers secondary circuit protection fuse failure.
Setpoint > Control Elements > VT Fuse Failure
Table 5–80: VT FUSE FAILURE UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > VT FUSE FAILURE
The fuse failure unit has only two setpoints, one to enable or disable the unit and the other to enable or disable the
snapshot event generation.
The fuse failure signal provided by the unit (VT FUSE FAILURE) can be monitored at Actual> Status > Control Elements
>VT Fuse Failure
5.5.7.1 FUSE FAILURE ALGORITHM

To detect the different types of fuse failure that can occur, it is necessary to use different detection methods. A fuse failure
5
indication with loss of one or two voltage phases provides a significant level of negative sequence voltage, while a failure
caused by loss of the three phases is present with a noticeable positive sequence current level, being the positive
sequence voltage level very low.
F650 units detect fuse failure under three possible situations:
(1)Breaker closed and positive sequence voltage (V1) under an established value (V1<0.5 p.u.).
(2)Positive sequence voltage lower than 0.5 p.u (V1<0.5 p.u.) and positive sequence current higher than 0.075 p.u.
(I1>0.075 p.u.).
(3)Ratio between the negative and positive voltage components (V2/V1) higher than 0.25.
With the activation of any of the three previous signals during a period longer than 80 ms, the fuse failure signal (VT FUSE
FAILURE) is activated. Once this signal is activated, it is latched until the cause that produced it disappears; for this
purpose the following condition must be met:
(4)Positive sequence voltage higher than 0.75 p.u and positive sequence current lower than 0.05 p.u.
The fuse failure signal can be used to issue an alarm and/or to block elements that may operate incorrectly due to a partial
or total loss of voltage. Protection elements that are usually blocked by the fuse failure signal are voltage restraint
overcurrent units, and directional units. To configure the block of these elements it is necessary to enter the Setpoint >
Relay Configuration > Protection Elements” menu and select as block input for protection units, the fuse failure
operation signal.

Figure 5–27: FUSE FAILURE UNIT BLOCK DIAGRAM
5 5.5.8 BROKEN CONDUCTOR
F650 units incorporate a broken or fallen conductor detection function. The relay uses the ratio between the negative
sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In normal and balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while
in severe load fault conditions, an unbalance is produced and this ratio is increased.
Setpoint > Control Elements > Broken Conductor
Table 5–81: BROKEN CONDUCTOR UNIT SETPOINTS

Tap Level in percentage of I2/I1 Tap 20.0 0.1 % [20.0 : 100.0]
Trip Time Trip Delay 60.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Current Inhibition Level setpoint Operation Threshold 0.005 0.001 A [0.000 : 1.000]
This way, when the function is enabled and the unbalance is produced over the set percentage, the unit will pick up. If
unbalance conditions are maintained during a period longer than the set time delay, the unit will trip.
In order to avoid trips or pickups with very weak loads there is a current level threshold to inhibit the operation of the
unit when the three phase currents are below that fixed level.
Note: The I2/I1 current inhibition level for the different firmware versions is as follows:
FIRMWARE VERSION CURRENT INHIBITION LEVEL

1.50 or Lower 10 mA
1.60 or Higher 50 mA
1.80 or Higher Selectable by setpoint from 0.000 to 1.000 in steps of 0.001 A

The Operation Threshold level has been included to allow the user selecting the current inhibition level suitable for a
particular application, in order to avoid operation of the unit when the relay is not connected to the line or in case the relay
has previously operated correctly and has been disconected from the line, as in this case the operation condition is met but
the relay should not trip.
The operation threshold operation is as follows:
The Broken conductor element will be fully operational if at least one of the phase current levels is higher than the setpoint.
This condition assumes that the relay is connected to the line.
If the unit is on trip or pickup condition, the element will be reset if the three phase currents are below the operation
threshold level. This condition assumes that the relay is not connected to the line and therefore the relay should not trip.
Due to the response time of this function, if the set time delay is 0s, a trip could occur in situations where, for example, one
of the currents is stopped before the rest, as these currents would produce a negative sequence current calculation.
Therefore, to avoid this kind of undesired trips, it is strongly recommended to establish a minimum time delay setpoint, such
as 100 ms, or higher depending on the expected normal unbalances in the network, to differentiate these situations from
broken conductor situations.
5.5.9 LOCKED ROTOR
F650 units incorporate a locked rotor element with three units. Protection element 48 produces a trip when current
(primary values) exceeds the setpoint value. This current setpoint value is the product of the Full load current setpoint by
the pickup setpoint. 5
Setpoint > Control Elements > Locked Rotor
Table 5–82: LOCKED ROTOR UNIT SETPOINTS

SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > LOCKED ROTOR
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STE RANGE
P
Full load current Full Load Current 0.50 KA [0.10 : 10.00]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.01 N/A [1.01 : 109.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Locked rotor unit setpoints are:

Function Permission (Function): This setpoint indicates whether the locked rotor element is enabled or disabled.
Input (Phasor(DFT)-RMS): Selection between fundamental phasor magnitude (DFT) or total waveform RMS
magnitude.
Full Load Current (FLC): This is the average maximum expected operating phase current for the motor.
Pickup Level: This is the current threshold over the full load current setpoint in which the unit will
operate. The operating current for this unit is calculated as follows:
I tap = FLC × PKP _ Level
Trip time (Trip Delay): setpoint of the Protection element operation time.
Reset time (Reset Delay): Reset time of the Protection element.

this unit.

The signals related to the locked rotor pickups and operations for the three locked rotor units can be viewed at Actual >
Status > Control Elements > Locked Rotor and they are as follows:
Table 5–83: LOCKED ROTOR STATUS

LOCKED ROTOR STATUS
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP
LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR2 OP
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR3 OP
The block signals for the locked rotor unit can be configured at: Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
Table 5–84: LOCKED ROTOR BLOCKS

LOCKED ROTOR BLOCKS
LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK
LOCKED ROTOR2 BLK
LOCKED ROTOR3 BLK
Note:
The unit works with primary values.
The unit will pickup if at least one of the three phase currents are above the adjusted level. The operation value will be the
higher of the three.
5
Reset level at 97% of the pickup level.

5.6 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.6INPUTS/OUTPUTS
This section includes the Coil Supervision and mixed I/O boards, or any other board located on relay terminals F and G,
plus H and J connectors from the remote Bus Can I/O modules (CIO)
5.6.1 INPUT/OUTPUT PLACEMENT
.
M IX E D S U P E R V IS IO N
T E R M IN A L S 1 2
IN P U T S
1 C C 1 C O IL 1
V
2 C C 2 5 2 /a
3 C C 3 C O IL 1
V
4 C C 4 5 2 /b
5 C C 5 C C 1
6 C C 6 C C 2
7 C C 7 C C 3
8 C C 8 C C 4
9 C O M M O N 1 /8 C O M M O N 1 /4
1 0 C O M M O N 9 /1 6 C O M M O N 5 /8
1 1 C C 9 C C 5
1 2 C C 1 0 C C 6
1 3 C C 1 1 C C 7
1 4 C C 1 2 C C 8
1 5 C C 1 3 C O IL 2
5
V
1 6 C C 1 4 5 2 /a
1 7 C C 1 5 C O IL 2
V
1 8 C C 1 6 5 2 /b
O U T P U T S
1 9
O 1
2 0 O 1
2 1
O 2
2 2
2 3 O 2
O 3
2 4
2 5
O 3 O 4
2 6
2 7
O 4 O 5
2 8
2 9
O 5 O 6
3 0
3 1 I S E N S
O 6
I
3 2
O 7
3 3
O 7
3 4 I S E N S
I
3 5
O 8 O 8
3 6
Figure 5–28: INPUT/OUTPUT LOCATION AND TYPE

5 SETPOINTS 5.6 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.6.2 CONTROL SETPOINTS FOR INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Configuration of setpoints relative to inputs and outputs can only be accessed through EnerVista 650 Setup
software, and not via the HMI. For this purpose, the user must access Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Contact I/O > Board
X, being X the corresponding I/O board.
setpoints relative to I/O boards are described in :
Table 5–85: I/O BOARD SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT I/O >
BOARD F > BOARD G > BOARD H > BOARD J
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT STE RANGE
VALUE P
I/O board type (available only for CIO modules) I/O Board Type_H NONE N/A [NONE,
16 INP + 8OUT,
8 INP + 8OUT + SUPV]
Input activation voltage threshold Voltage Threshold A_X 80 1V [0 : 255]
Group A
Input activation voltage threshold Voltage Threshold B_X 80 1V [0 : 255]
Group B
Debounce time for Group A Debounce Time A_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group B Debounce Time B_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Input type Input Type_X_CCY (CCY) POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE-EDGE,
NEGATIVE-EDGE,
POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE]
Input signal time delay Delay Input Time_X_CCY (CCY) 0 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Output logic type Output Logic_X_0Z POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE] 5
Output type Output Type_X_0Z NORMAL N/A [NORMAL,
PULSE,
LATCH]
Output pulse length Pulse Output Time_X_0Z 10000 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Being:
X F, G, H or J, the I/O board name, depending on the Relay model.

F and G are internal Relay boards, and H and J are additional boards available in CIO modules (remote Bus CAN I/O
module).
For the I/O board selection in the relay model, associated digits to each board type are as follows:
Table 5–86: I/O BOARD TYPE
ASSOCIATED DIGIT ENERVISTA 650 Setup BOARD setpointS BOARD TYPE
0 NONE None
1 16 INP+ 8OUT Mixed
2 8 INP +8 OUT +SUPV Supervision
CCY Is the name used for inputs in I/O boards
Mixed, 16 digital inputs: CC1….CC16
Supervision: 8 digital inputs: CC1,..., CC8

0Z Is the name used for the different outputs in I/O boards, 8 outputs available for any of the two types of board
(01,…., 08)

5.6.3 INPUTS
5.6.3.1 INPUT SETPOINTS DESCRIPTION
Input Activation Voltage Threshold: The range of this value goes from 0 to 255 volts. There is a single setpoint for all
inputs in the same group (inputs sharing the same common). In mixed and supervision boards there are two groups of
inputs, called A and B.
Debounce Time: This is the debounce time set for inputs (1 to 50 ms). The debounce time is the time window for input
filtering. If an input suffers a change of level that lasts less than this set time, the change will not be considered. There is a
single setpoint for all inputs in the same group.
Input Type: Type of logic associated to the physical input. Possible setpoints are, positive and negative.
Positive and Negative setpoints correspond to signals that re activated or deactivated with the input level, considering the
delay setpoint. Positive-edge, and Negative-edge setpoints correspond to signals that are activated with the change of the
input signal; in this case, the Delay Input Time will not be considered, only the Debounce Time; this edge signals are
deactivated automatically after one PLC scan cycle. shows the types of signals associated to the different input
configuration types.
Delay Input Time: This is the delay applied to the input signal; the default value is zero, meaning no delay; the setpoint
range is 0 to 60000 milliseconds (1 minute). This setpoint is used in slow switchgear applications.
This is not a grouped setpoint; there is a different setpoint for each input. It is important to distinguish between this delay
input time and the debounce time used for filtering undesired transients in the input signal. The Debounce time is always
5 added to the delay input time.
Figure 5–29: INPUT LOGIC TYPES

5.6.3.2 INPUT STATUS SIGNALS

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact inputs > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case). Depending on the
I/O board, inputs are represented as follows:
Table 5–87: CONTACT INPUTS STATUS

INPUT STATUS MIXED BOARD SUPERVISION BOARD
(X: BOARD F, G, H, J) (TYPE 1) (TYPE 2)
CONT IP_X_CC1 CC1 CC1
CONT IP_X_CC9 CC9 Va_COIL1
CONT IP_X_CC10 CC10 Vb_COIL1
CONT IP_X_CC11 CC11 Va_COIL2
CONT IP_X_CC12 CC12 Vb_COIL2
CONT IP_X_CC13 CC13 O7_SEAL
CONT IP_X_CC14 CC14 O8_SEAL
CONT IP_X_CC15 CC15 SUP_COIL1
CONT IP_X_CC16 CC16 SUP_COIL2
5
The operation logic for supervision signals (board type 2) is detailed in section . in this manual.

5.6.4 OUTPUTS
5.6.4.1 OUTPUT SETPOINTS DESCRIPTION

Output Logic_0X _0Z: Type of logic applied to outputs. Possible values are positive and negative. The default value is
positive. Depending on the type of setpoint selected, the physical output will be in the same direction (positive) or opposite
(negative) the output activation command.
Output Type_0X _0Z: Type of output adjusted. Possible values are normal, pulse or latched, the default value is Normal.
Normal: The contact output follows the activation command. Remains active while the operation signal is active.
Pulse: The contact output remains active the time the operation signal is active plus the pulse output time,
according to the Pulse Output Time setpoint.
Latched: the output remains active after the operation signal has been cleared. The reset signal for the latched
outputs is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs > Contact Output Reset”.
Pulse Output Time_0X _0Z: This is the length of the output pulse in case the output type is selected as pulse;
the default value is 10000 ms.
Figure 5–30:shows the types of signals associated to the different output configuration types.
Figure 5–30: OUTPUT LOGIC TYPES.

5.6.4.2 OUTPUT STATUS SIGNALS

Boards types 1 and 2 have both 8 outputs, so the representation is the same for both types as shown in .
Actual > Inputs/Outputs >Contact Output Status
Real status of the contact output, which corresponds to the transformation of the output activation signal (Contact output
operate), by the logic applied to this output in “Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board X”
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Operates
Activated or deactivated status of those variables used internally to operate a contact output.
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Resets
These are the logic signals associated to the contact output reset, which produce the reset of those signals previously
configured as Latched. Configuration for the contact output reset signal is set at Setpoint > Relay Configuration >
Outputs > Contact Output Reset.
Actual > Inputs/Outputs >I/O Board Status
These signals are associated to the different I/O boards. There are internal signals that provide information about the status
of these boards, indicating whether there is any anomaly in the board, or whether the board is not available in the relay
according to the relay model.
Table 5–88: CONTACT OUTPUT SIGNALS

CONTACT OUTPUT STATUS CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATES CONTACT OUTPUT RESETS IO BOARD STATUS
CONT OP_X_01 CONT OP OPER_X_01 CONT OP RESET_X_01 BOARD F STATUS
CONT OP_X_02 CONT OP OPER_X_02 CONT OP RESET_X_02 BOARD G STATUS
CONT OP_X_03 CONT OP OPER_X_03 CONT OP RESET_X_03 BOARD H STATUS 5
CONT OP_X_04 CONT OP OPER_X_04 CONT OP RESET_X_04 BOARD J STATUS
CONT OP_X_05 CONT OP OPER_X_05 CONT OP RESET_X_05
Being X the corresponding board in each case

5.6.5 CIRCUIT SUPERVISION AND CONTACT SEAL-IN CIRCUITS
Circuit Supervision:
F650 units can include supervision boards (type 2), either in their internal slot F, or in an additional CIO module connected
to the unit via a CAN Bus (slots H and J). This type of board includes 4 voltage detectors for implementing tripping or
opening circuit supervision control logics.
Contact Seal-in:
The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit during the time that the tripping contact
remains closed. If the current in the tripping circuit is maintained over 200 mA, the function is sealed independently of the
status of the function that caused the trip.
This current seal-in function in tripping circuits is mainly used in applications where auxiliary contacts 52/a (in charge of
cutting the current in the tripping circuit) are very slow. This may cause that, once the function that produced the trip is
reset, the relay contact will open before the breaker auxiliary 52/a, even if the time delay of the first has expired.
By using this function, we prevent the relay contact from cutting the current (basically inductive and high) from the tripping
circuit, which could cause damage to the unit, as these currents exceed the nominal breaking characteristics.
The circuit and the current threshold of the function are as follows:
100 mA min
Figure 5–31: CURRENT SUPERVISION
5.6.5.1 DIGITAL INPUTS
a) WITH TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION

Supervision board includes:
8 digital inputs in two groups of 4 inputs with one common, in terminals F9 to F10
8 auxiliary outputs: 6 normally open contacts in terminals F19 to F30 and two current sensing (latching) outputs (F31-F33
and F34-F36).
2 groups of inputs for trip circuit supervision with 4 voltage detectors. The first group includes two isolated digital inputs,
terminals F1-F2 and F3-F4. The second group, symmetrical and identical to the first, is formed by isolated voltage inputs
F15-F16 and F17-F18.
Using voltage detectors and current sensing, it is possible to implement several trip or close circuit supervision schemes, as
well as protection of the unit output contact.

In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to perform any setpoint in the unit. Internal functions are always
operative and provide the following logic operands:
Table 5–89: SUPERVISION LOGIC OPERANDS

ACTUAL > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS > BOARD X
BEING X THE CORRESPONDING BOARD IN EACH CASE
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONT IP_X_CC9 (Va_COIL1) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F1 - F2 (circuit 1)
CONT IP_X_CC10 (Vb_COIL1) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F3 - F4 (circuit 1)
CONT IP_X_CC11 (Va_COIL2) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F15 - F16 (circuit 2)
CONT IP_X_CC12 (Vb_COIL2) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F17 - F18 (circuit 2)
CONT IP_X_CC13 (O7_SEAL) Active if current is detected by sensor in output O7 (F31-F33)
CONT IP_X_CC14 (O8_SEAL) Active if current is detected by sensor in output O8 (F34-F36)
CONT IP_X_CC15 (SUP_COIL1) Active when continuity is detected in circuit 1
CONT IP_X_CC16 (SUP_COIL2) Active when continuity is detected in circuit 2
A continuity failure is detected in a circuit when both voltage detectors (Va and Vb) detect lack of voltage during more than
500 ms. This function is not influenced by the breaker status.
These operands can be associated to internal signals (virtual outputs), LEDs or unit outputs, to issue alarm signals or to
block elements, for example for blocking the Breaker close if an anomaly is detected in the trip circuit.
Available schemes are as follows:
1. Without supervision
5
2. With current supervision (with seal-in)
3. With simple voltage supervision
4. With double voltage supervision
5. With current and simple voltage supervision (with seal-in)
6. With current and double voltage supervision (with seal-in)
7. With current and double voltage supervision (with seal-in) and serial resistor in voltage monitors.
The following subsections describe the different types of connection to create each supervision scheme in an easy way. As
the supervision circuits are identical, only the first group connection examples will be described, being also applicable to the
second group.
In order to assure a high isolation level between groups, the digital inputs for supervision have been located in a
symmetrical basis. That is to optimize the isolation between groups that can be connected to different batteries, and
therefore requiring a greater distance between circuits.

b) WITHOUT SUPERVISION
This is a very frequent common case, and we must only wire the tripping circuit to terminals F35 and F36, leaving unused
terminals F34, F15, F16, F17, F18.
Figure 5–32: CIRCUIT WITHOUT TRIPPING CIRCUIT SUPERVISION (A6631F1)

c) WITH CURRENT SUPERVISION (WITH SEAL-IN)

In this case, as shown in Figure 5–33:, the current supervision circuit consists of a circuit connected in series with the
output contact, so that the external circuit is wired to terminals F34 and F36. This supervision circuit includes a low
impedance reed relay that is activated when the current value exceeds 100 200 mA, and sends a signal to the main
microprocessor. This will latch the output relay in such a way that this indication can be used to produce a latching of the
output relay, so that it will remain closed while the circulating current is over 100 200 mA. To use the seal-in feature in the
relay. For this purpose t is not necessary to configure any setpoint, it works only we must program the corresponding
Circuit latching setpoint wiring the external circuit to terminals F34 and F36.
With this scheme, in the case of a failure to open from the breaker auxiliary contact, the F650 output relay will not be the
one to open the tripping coil current, as in this case the contact may result damaged, as it is prepared for opening currents
around 0.35 A at 125 Vdc. This latching or memory function is only guaranteed while the unit is powered.
Figure 5–33: CURRENT SUPERVISION OF THE TRIPPING CONTACT (A6631F2)

d) WITH SIMPLE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
Figure 5–34: SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH AUXILIARY CONTACT 52A AND A RESISTOR (A6631F3)

Table 5–90: SUPERVISION WITH 52/A

INTERNAL STATE V 52/A SUPERVISION
52 open ON Ok
52 closed ON Ok
TRIP OFF Ok if t < 0.5 s
TRIP with 52 open OFF Ok if t < 0.5 s
There is a possibility to monitor the trip circuit and trip coil continuity. This can be done by monitoring Vdc through the
output contact when this is open.
Table 5–91: SUPERVISION ALGORITHM WITH SIMPLE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION SCHEME

STATUS OF INVOLVED ELEMENTS INPUT TO F650 DECISION
CIRCUIT OUTPUT BREAKER OPERAND OPERAND
STATUS STATUS STATUS CONT IP_X_CC11 CONT IP_X_CC16
(F35-F36) (VA_COIL2) (SUP_COIL2)
V 52/A (F15-F16)
Healthy Open 52 closed ON ON
Healthy Open 52 open ON ON
Healthy Closed 52 closed OFF ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Healthy Closed 52 open OFF ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Faulty Open 52 closed OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Faulty
Faulty
Open
Closed
52 open
52 closed
OFF
OFF
OFF (500 ms delay)
OFF (500 ms delay)
5
Faulty Closed 52 open OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
In this table, ON means that the voltage detector V52/a is active, detecting voltage presence.
In the first case shown on the table, with closed breaker, voltage is detected by V 52/a sensor, and this means that there is
continuity in the supervised circuit.
As shown on , when the relay is not tripped, trip contact F35-F36 remains open. If the breaker is closed, its auxiliary contact
52a is closed. Therefore, a little current is flowing, about 2 mA, through terminals F15 and F16 through the voltage detector
circuit, which flows through 52/a and the tripping coil 52TC (TC = tripping coil). Current will only circulate when there is
continuity in the whole circuit, so the complete circuit is monitored, and not only the trip coil. This circuit includes auxiliary
52/a as well as the whole wiring between the battery and the relay tripping terminals, and between these and the breaker
tripping circuit.
For the second case shown on the table, open breaker, its auxiliary contact 52/a remains open, and current
cannot flow through it for detecting continuity. In order to correctly monitor the circuit, a resistor must be used,
not included in the protection, connected in parallel. The value of resistance will be selected so that the V 52/a
input circuit minimum detection current flows, but not as high as to activate the breaker-tripping coil. The figure
shows the following equation:
Where:
Vmin Is the minimum voltage, in Volts, expected in the battery (e.g. 80% of Vn)
V −15
R= min R Resistance, in kilo ohms.
2 2 2 mA of approximate current flowing through input V 52/a
As shown in the second case in the table, with an open breaker, as current will flow through R if there is continuity in the
WHOLE tripping circuit, voltage will be detected in input V 52/a.

This works correctly in steady state. However, if the breaker trips, while it is opening, the V 52/a input signal can be
deactivated without this meaning that the circuit is not correct. This is due to the fact that the tripping relay, terminals F35-
F36, short circuits input V 52/a temporarily.
Therefore, if there is a trip signal, it is admitted that no signal will be detected during a period of 1 s to allow the breaker to
open, and reopen the tripping relay F35-F36.
shows the possibility of monitoring the circuit only when the breaker is closed. In this case resistance R will not
be used, but it must be observed in the unit logic, that the corresponding signal CONT IP_F_CC16
(SUP_COIL2) will be activated showing a failure when the breaker is open, and therefore it will be required to
supervise the continuity failure signaling by the breaker status information.
Figure 5–35: TRIP CIRCUIT AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION USING AUXILIARY CONTACT 52/A. ONLY WITH
CLOSED BREAKER (A6631F5)

e) WITH DOUBLE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
Figure 5–36: SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH AUXILIARY CONTACTS 52A AND 52B (A6631F4)

Table 5–92: SUPERVISION ALGORITHM WITH DOUBLE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION SCHEME

STATUS OF INVOLVED ELEMENTS INPUTS TO F650 DECISION
CIRCUIT OUTPUT BREAKER STATUS OPERAND OPERAND OPERAND
STATUS STATUS CONT IP_X_CC11 CONT IP_X_CC12 CONT IP_X_CC16
(F35-F36) (VA_COIL2) (VB_COIL2) (SUP_COIL2)
V 52/A (F15-F16) V 52/B (F17-F18)
Healthy Open 52 closed ON OFF ON
Healthy Open 52 open ON ON ON
Healthy Closed 52 closed OFF OFF ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Healthy Closed 52 open OFF ON ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Defective Open 52 closed OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Defective Open 52 open OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Defective Closed 52 closed OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Defective Closed 52 open OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
There is a possibility to monitor the trip circuit continuity not only via its auxiliary contact 52/a, but also with auxiliary contact
52/b. This avoids the need to install a resistance in parallel with auxiliary 52/a. The correct connection is shown on Figure
5–36:
The circuit works in a similar way to the one described in the previous section, but it uses both supervision inputs F15-F16
and F17-F18.
The advantage in this case is that circuit supervision with 52 open is more complete, as input V 52/b is used through
contact 52/b, (that is closed when the breaker is open).
5 We must point out that in this scheme, the tripping contact, shown in the example as the F650 trip relay, can be the one in
the relay (terminals F35 and F36), or be provided by another protection or by the parallel of several protections. This
provides high flexibility in the use of this circuit.
The battery voltage can also be monitored, by using one of the standard digital inputs.

f) WITH DOUBLE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION AND SERIAL RESISTOR IN VOLTAGE MONITORS.

Figure 2–37:shows the supervision scheme with an external resistor.
An external series resistor is used with the 52a voltage monitor to prevent CB tripping with a short-circuited voltage monitor.
With CB open, 52/a is open and 52/b is closed. A shorted 52/a voltage monitor will not cause a trip because 52/b voltage
monitor is limiting current to 2mA. With a shorted 52/b voltage monitor, no false trip will be performed because 52/a is in
series limiting current to 2mA.
Figure 5–37: SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH AUXILIARY CONTACTS 52A AND 52B AND SERIES RESISTOR IN
F15-F16

5.6.6 VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virtual inputs are signals that can be written directly via communications. Their status can be established as ON (1) and
OFF (0), through writing by communications using EnerVista 650 Setup.
The change of state of virtual inputs is made according to their type. Latched virtual inputs remain at the set value until it is
changed by communications. Self-reset virtual inputs are activated by writing, and they remain active during one cycle.
There are 32 virtual inputs of each type.
5.6.6.1 VIRTUAL INPUTS WRITING:

Setpoint > Input/Outputs >Virtual Inputs for activating / deactivating signals
To write a virtual input, select the virtual input to activate clicking on the virtual input checkbox, after that press on the store
button and virtual input will be write in the relay (see Figure 5–38: ).
If it is a self-reset one it will remain active during one PLC cycle and after that the virtual input value will be cleared.
If it is a latched one, the value will remain active until it is cleared by the user, clicking again in the virtual input
checkbox after that press on store to clear the value.
Figure 5–38: VIRTUAL INPUTS WRITING THROUGH ENERVISTA 650 SETUP
5.6.6.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS STATUS MONITORING:

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Inputs > Virtual Input Latched > Virtual Input Self-Reset
Table 5–93: VIRTUAL INPUTS STATUS
VIRTUAL INPUTS LATCHED VIRTUAL INPUTS SELF-RESET
LATCHED VIRT IP 1 SELF-RST VIRT IP 1
… …
Text assignment for virtual input is made at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Virtual Inputs ,but take into account that
the text assigned for virtual inputs in the relay configuration screen are only for file management, they are not sent to the
relay.
5.6.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
There are 512 virtual outputs that may be assigned via Logic configuration. If not assigned, the output will be forced to
.OFF. (Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the
evaluation of the logic equations. For more detail information see chapters 5.8 and 5.9 in this manual.

5 SETPOINTS 5.7 TESTINGS
5.7TESTINGS 5.7.1 FORCE IO –INPUT TESTING
The input testing can only be performed in relay with graphical display, see the human interfaces section in this manual for
more detail information.
5.7.2 FORCE IO –OUTPUT TESTING
Output testing can be performed via HMI in models with graphical display and via communications through EnerVista 650
Setup in all models.
Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Force Outputs
This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate maintenance testing. In the screen, the user can
select the I/O board to be tested, and also select which output is to be forced (operated).
After selecting the desired output, clicking on the checkbox on the left, the user must press on the Force Output button to
activate the selected output.
In order to refresh the real status of outputs, according to the information received by the relay processor, the Refresh
button must be pressed.
The following figure shows the output-testing screen:
Figure 5–39: FORCE IO

5.8 RELAY CONFIGURATION 5 SETPOINTS
5.8RELAY CONFIGURATION
Setpoint > Relay Configuration
This is the relay configuration section in which the relay can be configured (all input/output and LEDs configuration,
protection elements signals, graphic display configuration, etc) using internal states or already compiled equation on PLC
Editor (see section 5.9).
5.8.1 OUTPUTS
Configuration of contact output operates and reset signals for all boards available in the device:
To configure any output it is necessary to select the output to be configured, clicking on the checkbox in the select column
and choose the logic operand in the source column. Different simple logics can be performed in this screen, using the “or”
and “not” columns, for more complex logics go to the logic configuration tool to create the virtual outputs and afterwards
select it in the source column.
The different options available in this screen are the following:
• Select checkbox enables each output. The output must be enabled before modifying any other setpoint on that output
• Name setpoint for defining identification for the output.
• Source setpoint for defining a function, logic, remote input, digital input, etc. that will activate the contact.
• OR checkbox for configuring the output operation by activation of any of the indicated signals. The unit performs an
OR of the signals, and its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox for inverting or not the configured logic.
Figure 5–40: OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION

5 SETPOINTS 5.8 RELAY CONFIGURATION
5.8.2 LEDS
F650 has 15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. First 5th are latched by hardware, the
rest are self-reset but can be latched through PLC configuration.
This window displays the entire relay LEDs with the following setpoint options for each of them:
• Select checkbox enables each LED. The LED must be enabled before modifying any other setpoint on that LED
• Name setpoint for defining identification for the LED
• Source setpoint defines which function; logic, remote input, digital input, etc. will activate the LED.
• OR checkbox for configuring the LED operation by activation of any of the indicated signals. The unit performs an OR
of the signals, and its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox for inverting or not the configured logic.
From the LED configuration screen, it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay. For this purpose, press on the
printer icon. The label obtained will be similar to the default factory label, with black background and the LED texts in white.
This label can replace the original one under the black plastic cover. The label is also provided in word format and can be
modified by the user (e.g. different color marking)
Figure 5–41: LED CONFIGURATION

5.8.3 OPERATIONS
This menu option shows the setpoints for the 24 control operations that can be programmed, as follows:
• Select checkbox enables the desired operation.
• Command Text setpoint defines the command name.
• Interlocks Type setpoint defines the desired interlock type (An interlock is a condition that must be fulfilled for an
operation to be performed). The possible options are Logic or None. If the LOGIC option is selected, the program will
enable a new window for creating the logic. If the NONE option is selected, then the following setpoint (Interlockings)
will be irrelevant.
• Interlocks setpoint define the desired interlocks. This setpoint is enabled selecting the “logic” option in “Interlock
type”. In the “Interlock logic” screen we can set the interlock logic, as shown on .
The setpoints on this screen allow creating a logic configuration with up to 3 AND gates and 1 OR gate for each of the
24 operations available in the relay. These setpoints are:
Select – Enables/disables the selection for the interlock input
Source – Selects a function, digital input, logic, etc. for defining each input of each AND gate.
NOT – Logic inverter
Figure 5–42: OPERATIONS AND INTERLOCKS
• Final State Type setpoint: defines whether the operation requires (in addition to the interlock logic) any other
conditions to determine a “success condition”. If so, we must select LOGIC. Otherwise, we must select NONE.
• Final State setpoint: defines the success condition of a programmed operation, if the previous setpoint (Final State
type) was set as LOGIC.
• Front Key setpoint: defines the front pushbutton from which the operation can be executed.
• Contact Input setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by digital input. It defines the digital input to be
used for this purpose.
• Virtual Output setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed from a virtual output previously defined at the
logic configuration tool (PLC logic).
• Time Out setpoint: defines the period during which the operation command will remain activated waiting for a success
condition. If the success signal is received before this period expires, the command signal will be removed and the
timer reset. If the success condition is not received within this period of time, the operation is considered to be finished.

• COM1 (REMOTE) setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through rear port
COM1.
• COM2 (LOCAL) setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through rear port COM2.
We must note that this local port is the same as the front port (DB-9 connector). We can establish simultaneous
communication with the relay through ports COM1 and COM2. However, it is not possible to use rear COM2 and the
front port simultaneously.
• ETHER-MASTER setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through the
ETHERNET.
It must be taken into account that besides the master selection in the operations screen inside relay configuration, there is
a hardware selection (with the operation pushbutton in the front part of the relay) to switch between local (COM2 and HMI)
and remote masters (COM1 and ETHERNET) for operations.
The following diagram shows an example of the operations internal logic.
Operations Logic
Without interlock
logic
Condition 1
Interlocking
Condition n
5
Condition 1
Interlocking Time Out

Condition n Operation Bit
Reset
(state)
Condition 1
Interlocking
Condition n
Keyboard
Push button Operation
Digital input
Condition 1
Success
Condition n
Figure 5–43: OPERATION LOGIC DIAGRAM

5.8.3.1 HOW TO PROGRAM AN OPERATION

Example of how to program an operation to close a breaker with an operating time of 90 ms (closing), incorporating 52/b
contacts to indicate the change of position, using an interlock logic to enable the operation if there is synchronism condition,
and there is no autoreclose in progress. The operation must be commanded from the relay faceplate using one of the
available operation push buttons.
To configure the related operation, go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration and select Operations tab.
This screen shows all the fields required for the operations configuration in the F650. In order to select an operation, press
on the operation name under the Select column, and all the related parameters will be enabled. The chosen name for the
operation is entered in “Command Text”. To configure an interlock logic, select the Logic option in “Interlocks Type”.
Once this option has been selected, the interlock configuration screen will be enabled. To display this screen, click on
“Press for Logic” for the desired operation on its Interlocks column. On this Interlocks screen, the two conditions that
conform the Interlock that enables the operation have been selected. To save the interlock, press on the disk icon on the
toolbar. A “Logic Saved” message will be displayed.
Once the Interlocks have been defined, the user must define the success conditions for the operation, define Final State
Type as LOGIC, and a “PRESS FOR LOGIC” message will light up below Final States. When clicking on “PRESS FOR
LOGIC”, the success condition screen will be displayed, defining there as BREAKER CLOSED.
The front key to be used for executing the Operation can be selected on the Frontal Key column, in this example the Key I
option is selected on “Frontal Key”. As none of the other contact input or virtual output options are going to be used they
will be set as None. The success condition time “Time out” is set to 500 ms, and the operation is only enabled through the
relay keypad, so only the MMI option is selected, thus disabling the rest of options (COM1, COM2, ETHERNET master are
not selected).
All the selections previously related are summarized in the following table:
5 Table 5–94: OPERATION SETPOINTS

OPERATION COMMAND TEXT SETPOINTS VALUE/SOURCE
Operation1 CLOSE BREAKER INTERLOCK (LOGIC) SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
FINAL STATES (LOGIC) BREAKER CLOSED
FRONT KEY I Key
INPUT Not configured
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS MMI
Finally, configure a contact output to be activated with the programmed Operation (Operation1).

This is done in the menu Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Output, selecting an output and choosing the internal signal
OPERATION BIT 1, which corresponds to the bit that is activated when the related operation is executed.
Figure 5–44: CONTACT OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
Note: Operations time out for confirmation

5
Configurable screen in graphical HMI: In the relay HMI the configurable objects wait one minute for confirmation after
operation selection. The object will be blinking during one minute. After that time, the object will be deselected.
Front Keys: In operations performed by front keys, the time out for confirmation is 10 seconds.

5.8.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different protection elements. This way, the user assigns
which operands can reset the Thermal Image, which operands can initiate the autoreclose, block the protection elements,
etc. In this screen we can also configure a logic signal to perform the LED reset by communications.
The setpoints are as follows:
• Select checkbox enables/disables the selection.
• Source setpoint defines the operand that performs the function indicated in the SELECT column. NOT setpoint inverts
the block signal.
• NOT setpoint for inverting the logic signal.
• OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs an OR of the signals, and its
output produces the operation.
The following figure shows this screen:
Figure 5–45: PROTECTION ELEMENTS

5.8.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY
This menu is used for selecting the digital channels to be included in oscillography records, and the oscillo trigger signal. As
for the above-described setpoints, the trigger selection can be any of the signals provided by the relay or a logic
combination of these.
setpoints are described below:
• Select checkbox enables or disables a digital channel and the oscillography trigger.
• Name setpoint defines the name of the digital channel to be included in oscillography records.
• Source setpoint defines the source or signal to be recorded in that specific channel, which can be selected among all
the operands available in the signals menu.
• NOT checkbox inverts the enabled digital channel signal.
• OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs an OR of the signals, and its
output produces operation.
Figure 5–46: OSCILLOGRAPHY CONFIGURATION
NOTE This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and oscillography trigger. The rest of parameters,
such as function enabling/disabling, sampling rate, number of oscillography files, etc. must be set on the
Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography menu.

5.8.6 CONTROL EVENTS
This menu is used for defining the CONTROL EVENTS, up to 128 user programmable events.
A control event is a logic signal associated to an operand or combination of operands which monitories the change of status
of the logic operand. The relay shows which events are active each time, as well as their date and time of activation.
There are 128 user programmable events and 64 pre-established events for switchgear, which correspond to opening,
closing, Error00 and Error11 of the 16 programmable switchgear elements. (Please refer to section for more detailed
information).
As for the rest of previous setpoints, the source selection can be made between:
• An operand, selecting it directly on this screen.
• An OR of several operands, selecting directly the OR column in this same menu.
• A logic combination of operands, by selecting a VIRTUAL OUTPUT as trigger source, and using the logic configuration
available in the relay, graphical PLC, that allows to design logic circuits and to assign their outputs to internal variables,
called VIRTUAL OUTPUT.
Available setpoints are as follows:
• Select checkbox: enables or disables the generation of each event.
• Name setpoint: defines the text for each control event.
• Source setpoint defines the source that will trigger the event. The source is chosen from the list that shows all the
operands available in the unit.
• NOT checkbox inverts the selected signal.
5 • OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs an OR of the signals, and its
• Alarm checkbox: allows treating the event as an alarm and making the event activation to be reported on the alarm
panel.
Figure 5–47: CONTROL EVENTS CONFIGURATION

The Alarm panel can be displayed in:

HMI screen for models with graphical display.
EnerVista 650 Setup: Actual>Event Recorder>Alarm Panel for all models.
Web Server application: http://xxx. xxx. xxx. xxx /Alarms.htm for all models.
If the event is not selected as an alarm, it can be viewed as an event at:
HMI screen for all models in snapshot event screen (with default text).
EnerVista 650 Setup: Actual>Event Recorder> Control Events for all models.
Web Server application: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/ControlEvents.htm for all models.
Alarm management in F650:

The relay can manage alarms in from three different masters, local, remote com1, remote Ethernet. The alarms can be
active or not active and can be acknowledged or not acknowledged. As shown in the following table:
Table 5–95: ALARM MANAGEMENT

ALARM STATUS MASTER MANAGEMENT
ACTIVE - NOT ACTIVE ALL MASTERS
ACKNOWLEDGED - NOT ACKNOWLEDGED LOCAL REMOTE
COM2 & HMI COM1 ETHERNET
ACTIVE status is shown on the display (relay HMI), showing an ON label on the right of the alarm. The PC will show the
alarm text in red color. 5
ACKNOWLEDGED: Operation acknowledgement can be performed from three independent channels: MMI-COM2 (local),
COM1 (remote) and COM3 (Ethernet). Inactive alarms disappear from the HMI when being acknowledged.
HMI: Acknowledged status is shown on the HMI with a selection mark on the right of the ON label.
EnerVista 650 Setup: the acknowledged status is shown by a selection mark to the left of the Operation name.

5.8.7 SWITCHGEAR
This menu is used for defining the SWITCHGEAR elements to be controlled by the relay. A switchgear element can be a
breaker, a line selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar selector switch, etc. It is possible to define up to 16
switchgear elements. The setpoints are as follows:
• Select checkbox: enables or disables the control of a new switchgear element
• Contacts setpoint: allows selecting which type of contact is used for monitoring the status (open/closed) of the
element. The selection can be: 52a (contact type A, showing the same status as the represented element), 52b
(opposite status to the represented element), 52a+52b (both types of contacts are used), NONE (no status
monitoring).
• Opening Time setpoint: defines the maximum opening time of an element. It is used for issuing an opening time
failure signal if the element opening is not produced within this time.
• Closing Time setpoint: defines the maximum closing time of an element. It is used for issuing a closing time failure
signal if the element closing is not produced within this time.
• Contact A checkbox: allows selecting which operand or combination of operands activate the type A contact status.
Usually it will be an input contact wired to type A contact of the element (Breaker/selector switch). This column and the
next two columns are only active if the selected contact type in the Contacts column is 52a or 52a+52b.
• OR checkbox: selects a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs and OR of the signals, and its
• NOT checkbox inverts the status of the signal selected in column Contact A.
• Contact B checkbox: allows selecting which operand or combination of operands activates the type B contact status.
Usually it will be an input contact wired to type B contact of the element (Breaker/selector switch). This column and the
5 next two columns are only active if the selected contact type in the Contacts column is 52b or 52a+52b.
• OR checkbox selects a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs and OR of the signals, and
its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox inverts the status of the signal selected in column Contact B.
• Open text setpoint: allows associating a text to the control event associated to the element opening.
• Close text setpoint: allows associating a text to the control event associated to the element closing.
• Error 00 text setpoint: in case of using double contact for the switchgear element status (52a+52b), this setpoint
allows to associate a text to the Error00 internal status, this means, when both contacts are inactive during a period
longer than the associated to the opening or closing Operation, depending on which Operation is being performed.
• Error 11 text setpoint: in case of using double contact for the switchgear element status (52a+52b), this setpoint
allows to associate a text to the Error11 internal status, this means, when both contacts are active during a period
longer than the associated to the opening or closing Operation, depending on which Operation is being performed.
• ALARM setpoint: enables the issue of an alarm in the event of a close, open, 00-type, 11-type error. If it is configured
as an alarm.
• Opening init setpoint: this setpoint selects which operand or combination of operands indicate the initiation of an
opening operation, in order to allow the follow up of the operation and generate the corresponding alarms if the
operation is not successful. The operation bit signal used to launch the opening init must be configured in the
operations tab inside relay configuration.
• Closing init setpoint: this setpoint selects which operand or combination of operands indicate the initiation of a closing
operation, in order to allow the follow up of the operation and generate the corresponding alarms if the operation is not
successful. The operation bit signal used to launch the opening init must be configured in the operations tab inside
relay configuration.

Figure 5–48: SWITCHGEAR CONFIGURATION

Note: when a switchgear device is only monitored (open init and closing init signals are not used), it is not possible to
distinguish between the fail to open or fail to close time, the time used to give an error 00 or 11 signal is the maximum of the
opening and closing time configured for that switchgear.
5.8.8 HMI (HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE)

5
This menu shows a scenario to draw a simplified one-line diagram of a bay in a feeder, line, transformer, etc. The menu
includes a library for power elements, metering elements, text and drawings.
For using the drawing toolbar elements, we must select the desired element with the mouse and then click on the yellow
area. The selected element will be moved to the screen on the selected spot (see ).
The graphic display can be used to configured switchgear elements, operations, metering values, date and time, etc. The
configured values will always be updated with the real status of the relay.
This functionality is only applicable to F650 units with graphical display (240x128pixels), and not for units with
alphanumerical display (20x4 characters).
Figure 5–49: HMI CONFIGURATION

On the left side of the window all the available elements to be programmed on the HMI are displayed. Their meaning is
detailed on the right.
Table 5–96: ACTIVE SYMBOLS CONFIGURABLE IN ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR GRAPHICAL HMI
ACTIVE SYMBOLS
ICONS IN SCREEN DESCRIPTION
SWITCHGEAR SYMBOLS
These symbols correspond to switchgear elements: breaker (square) and selector switch
(rhombus), in vertical and horizontal positions. It is necessary to associate the figure to its
corresponding switchgear number. The figure is shown filled if the element is closed, and
blank if the element is open. The symbol on the right represents an unpluggable breaker.
In this case it is necessary to indicate which operands show whether the element is
plugged or unplugged. The figure shows also graphically these two statuses.
MULTISTATE VARIABLE SYMBOL
Displays on screen a dialog box that is one variable status function (like a switch case) for
the following internal states AR STATUS, AR LOCKOUT MODE, AR BLOCK MODE and
FAULT TYPE.
This type of data allows to visualize the different states of one particular value, for
example, AR STATUS has several states such as (0) OUT OF SERVICE, (1) READY, (2)
LOCKOUT, (3) BLOCK, (4) RECLOSE IN PROGRESS. Significant texts can be
associated with those states.
STATUS SYMBOLS (TEXT AND GRAPHIC MODES):
BitRepresents the state of an operand by means of a configurable text. It allows
associating a test to the active status and a different text to the inactive status.
Led(O)Performs the same function in a graphical mode. This way, it works as a virtual
LED. When showing a black circle, it means that the selected operand is active, and if the
circle is blank, the operand is inactive
5 ANALOG MAGNITUDE SYMBOL
Used for displaying analog magnitudes (current, voltage, power, etc.) in floating point
numbers, such as a current value (123.5 A). Both the number of decimals and the integer
characters can be selected, in order to facilitate the reading. Any of the analog
magnitudes available in the relay can be configured
DATE AND TIME SYMBOL
Symbol used for displaying in the HMI the date and time provided by the device.
OPERATIONS SYMBOL:
This symbol indicates de possibility to configure and execute operations on the graphic
display. This symbol can only be selected once the operations have already been
configured in the “Operations” screen of the “Relay Configuration” menu. To select an
Operation, click on the element and then on the display. The program will show a window
to select the required operation among the displayed options, and the tab order. Once
selected, a red border square will be shown. Place this square on the object to be
operated. When the operated object is selected on the screen to execute this operation,
the object on which it is located will blink. It is possible to place several operations on the
same object, for example to open and close the breaker object.

Table 5–97: GRAPHIC AND TEXT EDITION SYMBOLS

GRAPHIC AND TEXT EDITION SYMBOLS
Ground symbols in different positions.
Transformers representation
Symbols reserved for future uses
Symbol for capacitor banks.
Symbol for wye connection
Symbol for open delta and delta connection
Display of a fix text up to 40 ASCII characters
Auxiliary drawing lines

5.9 LOGIC CONFIGURATION (PLC EDITOR) 5 SETPOINTS
5.9LOGIC CONFIGURATION (PLC EDITOR)

Setpoint > Logic Configuration
The F650 logic allows setpoint the relay logic configuration using a sophisticated and complete program based on standard
IEC 61131-3, with block diagrams, which is described in this section.
5.9.1 INTRODUCTION
The logic configuration (or PLC Editor) tool is a graphical design tool that allows the F650 built complex logic diagram in an
easy way using different logic functions.
The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the IEC 61131-3 standard.
• This standard defines five basic ways of programming:
• Sequential Function Chart (SFC).
• Instruction List (IL).
• Structured Text (ST).
• Ladder Diagram (LD).
• Function Block Diagram (FBD).
Out of these five methods, FBD has been chosen because it allows for graphical configurations that are more
comprehensive. This method provides the possibility of grouping several basic functions inside a single function (hereon
called libraries), achieving higher modularity and clarity in the design.
5
Please take note of the following remarks:
The first equation entered in the PLC can never be a timer
Analog elements (analog comparators, etc,) are not implemented.

5 SETPOINTS 5.9 LOGIC CONFIGURATION (PLC EDITOR)
5.9.2 THEORY OF OPERATION
5.9.2.1 DESCRIPTION
As already mentioned in the introduction, this tool uses FBD mode of IEC 61131-3 standard. For this purpose we have
defined a series of basic operations with illustrations below.
The basic operations available in PLC Editor are located in the tool bar of the application and are as follows:
Table 5–98: PLC EDITOR BASIC OPERATION IN F650

PLC EDITOR BASIC OPERATION
INPUT TO LOGIC: Selection of the digital input to the logic. (All available internal status can be used as logic
inputs)
OUTPUT FROM LOGIG: Virtual output built with internal logic. (Up to 512)
LIBRARY: Possibility to build blocks of logic in a simple graphic object. OR and AND from 3 to 8 inputs are provided
as libraries.
AND of two digital inputs.
OR of two digital inputs.
NOT of a digital input.

5
NAND of two digital inputs.
XOR of two digital inputs.
SR: Latch (set-reset): reset dominant.
ONS: signal to pulse an logic input to a signal of one scan cycle length.
TIMER: timer signal with set, reset and mask for timing.
TEXT LABEL: text to customize the logic configuration file.
Flip-Flop D : signal that maintains the actual value frozen during a PLC cycle
MASK: Time mask to be used in timing operations.

Example of logic signals in F650 logic configuration:
Table 5–99: LOGIC SIGNALS IN F650

LOGIC SIGNALS EXAMPLES
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION TIME DIAGRAM
SET When the input
signal is set to 1 the 1
output signal In
put
remain fixed to 1 till 0
a reset signal is
received.
1
O
utp
ut
0
RESET When the input

signal is reset to 1 1
the output signal In
put
remain fixed to 0.
0
1
O
utp
ut
0
5 ONS The input signal is

pulsed. The width of
the output pulse will
1
be the same as that In
put
of the PLC cycle 0
1
O
utp
ut
0
TIMER With selectable time

(MASK), one SET
input and one 1
RESET input S
ETin
p u
t
0
1
R
ESE
Tin
p u
t
0
1
Ou
tpu
t
0
T(ms) T1 T2 T1
+ T2
= T

5.9.2.2 LOGIC COMPILATION

The F650 configuration will be made using the basic operations related before and more complex operations can be
developed inside libraries.
All the graphical configuration performed in the Logic configuration editor must be read and interpreted by the PLC as the
F650 engine. The graphical equations must be translated into compiled equations to be understood by the relay. For this
purpose the logic configuration editor provides a compilation option to compile the whole configuration, creating a series of
equations that will form the logical configuration of the unit.
The next diagram shows the way compiled logic equations are built.
DAT OPERATION
COMPILATIO
PLC
EQUATIONS
PLC 5
Figure 5–50: COMPILED LOGIC EQUATIONS
A single equation is composed of one or more inputs, one or more operations, and one output. The order of equations is
determined by the relative position of their outputs.
In the following example is shown the order of compilation for equations determined by their relative position in the
configuration file:
EQUATIONA EQUATIONAOUTPUT
EQUATIONB EQUATIONBOUTPUT
EQUATIONA EQUATIONBOUTPUT
EQUATIONB EQUATIONAOUTPUT
Figure 5–51: ORDER OF EQUATIONS
In this case, equation A is the first to be executed. However, in the second case, the first equation to be executed would be
B, as its output is before the Equation A output.

5.9.3 MAIN MENU
The PLC Editor tool (Setpoint > Logic Configuration ) provides a main menu with different submenus (File, Project, Edit,
Run, View, and Window) that allows the user to built customized logic for the F650 devices.
5.9.3.1 FILE MENU

The FILE menu includes the following options:
New Project: allows to create a new project that will include the files of the logic configuration
Open Project: opens an existing project.
Close Project: closes the currently open project.
Save Project and Save Project as: saves the open project.
Save Automatic Function
& Save Automatic Function As: Saves the file of the active project.
Library: Gives access to the libraries sub-menus, where new libraries can be created and
existing ones can be modified and saved.
Print: Prints the active configuration file.
Preview: Preview of the document before printing.
Exit: The system closes all open projects and exits the application.
5 5.9.3.2 PROJECT MENU

The Project menu includes the following options:
Project Explorer: Displays a window where we see a tree structure with the files contained in the
project.
Insert library: Inserts a library in the active automatic function.
5.9.3.3 EDIT MENU

The Edit menu includes the following options:
Undo: Undoes the last modification in the active function.
Redo: Remakes the last modification.
Cut: Cuts one or more logic operations.
Copy: Copies one or more logic operations.
Paste: Pastes one or more logic operations.
Find: Looks for a logic operation in the project.
Copy as Bitmap: Copies the active automatic function to the clipboard in picture format.
View Clipboard: Launches the clipboard viewer application.
5.9.3.4 RUN MENU

The RUN menu includes the following options:
Configuration: Not valid in the current application (for analog operations still not available)
Compile: Compiles the configuration functions to generate the equations that will be interpreted
by the F650 PLC.

5.9.3.5 VIEW MENU

The VIEW menu includes the following options:
Log: Displays in one screen the status name and time stamp of the digital statuses
configured in the PLC logic (still not available).
Debug-Release window: Displays the values for the different project inputs, outputs, and variables (still not
available).
Equations: Displays the equations resulting from the compilation.
Grid: Shows or hides the form grid where the configuration functions are developed. It
also aligns the different objects to the grid.
Zoom: Allows selecting the percentage of zoom in the application.
Rectangle Zoom (Zoom rectangular): Allows zooming the Selected rectangle.
5.9.4 CONFIGURATION GENERATION
5.9.4.1 CREATE A NEW PROJECT

Clicking on the “File > New Project” menu option, a new PLC project is open, where the user can program the desired
automatism. An automatism can be formed by one or more equations.
5.9.4.2 CREATE EQUATION

A single equation can be formed by one or more inputs, one or more operations, and one output.
The order of equations is determined by the relative position of their respective outputs, this order being downward.
5
To link the output of an equation with the input of another equation, an internal variable (virtual output) must be used.
The virtual output is used as an input to the second equation.
5.9.4.3 ADD AN INPUT TO AN AUTOMATISM

Using the mouse click on the button that represents the inputs in the toolbar at the top of the screen. A logic input can be
any of the available digital internal status provided by the relay. Such as protection status, contact inputs, contact outputs, I/
O status, other protection status, front keys, LEDs, operation bits, virtual inputs and virtual outputs.
5.9.4.4 ADD AN OUTPUT TO AN AUTOMATISM

Using the mouse click on the button that represents the outputs in the toolbar at the top of the screen. The logic outputs are
always virtual outputs (up to 512 configurable signals).
5.9.4.5 ADD A DIGITAL OPERATION

Press on any of the digital operations in the toolbar at the top of the screen, and then click on the window background.
Afterward a box with the selected digital operation will be displayed and the inputs and outputs much be connected to the
logic box as explained before.
5.9.4.6 LINK INPUTS, OUTPUTS AND OPERATIONS

The user can link the different graphic objects clicking on an object output and dragging to the input of another graphic
object. Graphic objects available in the PLC configuration are digital objects.
There is a series of restrictions when performing connections:
It is not possible to auto-link an object; the output of a certain object cannot be linked to its input;
There can only be one input per object input;
RESET and SET outputs must be internal variables or outputs.
We must take into account that as the timer is a digital operation that operates as an analog, there must only be a single
internal variable or digital input in the timer input.

5.9.4.7 ADD A LIBRARY

Click on the “LIB” button and select the corresponding file.
The user can built their own libraries and distribute them in their projects in an easy way.
The manufacturer provides default libraries such as ORs, ANDs of 3 up to 8 inputs, besides timers (pickup-dropout) and
key examples.
5.9.5 GENERATION OF LIBRARIES
Libraries can contain a set of operations grouped in a single graphic object being formed by inputs, outputs and operations
Working with libraries follows the same procedure as working in the main project menu, the only difference is that the inputs
and outputs to the library must be selected as external inputs and outputs. The rest of variables are internal variables used
in the logic compilation.
The name assigned to the inputs and outputs of the library and to the library itself will be ones used to represent the library
as an object in the main project.
Internal variables inside the libraries will be assigned randomly when compiling.
These libraries are saved in the LIB folder in order to be used in further projects
5.9.5.1 LIBRARY EXAMPLE
Go to the main menu File >Library > Open Library

> New Library
5 Open a new library or modify an existing one, in this example a timer library is going to be displayed Timer(Pkp-Dpt).lib as
shown on Figure 2–52:
Figure 5–52: TIMER(PKP-DPT).LIB CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Green and blue signals are internal inputs and outputs used in the library and are not going to be accessible to the user
when working in the main menu outside the library environment. The white boxes (T_Input, T_Pickup, T_Dropout,
T_output) are inputs and outputs to the library that are going to be accessible to the user to connect the library in the main
application to create virtual outputs to be sent to the relay.
Once the library is created and saved it can be selected in the main application menu in Project > Insert Library. The
library will have the following object:
Figure 5–53: LIBRARY OBJECT

5.9.6 EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION
In this section a simple logic application is described step by step, a logic is such that keeping one digital input
activated, several outputs will be activated and deactivated in a time window (outputs will remain activated for
200 ms and deactivated for 5 ms). See the following figure:
Figure 5–54: LOGIC EXAMPLE

Go to the main menu and select File >New project , create a new project and select an input in the icons
toolbar on the top of the window. This input will be selected as a digital input among the several options for
inputs that can be selected. This input is the SET input for the first timer to launch the output activation signal.
Click on the icon related to the timer to insert the timer on the project. The timer has three inputs (S=set,
R=reset and T=timing input)
The reset signal of the first timer is a virtual output called output_deactivation that has been created as an
output of another second timer. This signal is selected as an output
The timing signal for the first timer is a mask provided by the application, in which the time in milliseconds must
be entered in order to configure the timer time delay.
After creating the first timer, the second one for output deactivation is made. The set signal will be the virtual output created
as an output of the first timer (VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION), the reset signal will be the output of the second timer
(VO_100_OUTPUT_DEACTIVATION), the time delay is set as 200 ms.
Once the timing logic (timer 1 + timer 2) has been created, the activation signal (VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION) is linked
to several virtual outputs. Therefore, virtual outputs (VO_102_OUTPUT_1, VO_103_OUTPUT_2, VO_104_OUTPUT_3,
VO_105_OUTPUT_4) will be activated if the CONT IP_G_CC1(CC1) variable is set to 1. Once the
VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION is active, it will be deactivated after 200 ms, and will remain deactivated for 5 seconds.
This process will be repeated while the digital input is active.
To finish the process the logic must be compiled (Run >Compile)and the equations sent to the relay (Run >Send
Equations to relay) to start working with the new logic.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 FRONT PANEL
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1FRONT PANEL

The menu bar in the main screen of EnerVista F650 Setup software shows the ACTUAL menu option. This option
concentrates and displays all status of protection, control elements, metering, counters information, oscillography, events,
fault locator, etc. This menu is divided in several submenus that will be detailed in the following sections.
6.1.1 LEDS
Operation of the relay front LEDs is shown on the following figure (Actual > Front Panel > LEDs) by the lighting of the
associated LED in the appropriate color. The Ready LED is green when the relay is in service. LEDs 1 to 5 light up in red
when active, LEDs 6 to 10 light up in orange, and the last 5 LEDs light up in green.
The first five LEDs are latched by hardware and can only be reset by a LEDs RESET Command, either pressing the “esc”
key on the Front of the Relay, or by Communications using the appropriate signal. The rest of LEDs are not latched, but can
be latched by logic.
Table 6–1: FRONT PANEL LEDS
LEDS
READY LED
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9
LED 10
LED 11
LED 12
LED 13
LED 14
6
LED 15
LOCAL OPERATION MODE
OPERATIONS BLOCKED

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2STATUS 6.2.1 OPERATION BITS
(Actual > Status > Operation bits)

OPERATION BIT 1..24 These 24 bits are the outputs of each possible Operation modules, programmed in menu
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Operations. The light up LED indicates their status 1
(activation)
Table 6–2: OPERATION BITS
OPERATION BITS
OPERATION BIT 1
OPERATION BIT 2
…
OPERATION BIT 24
6.2.2 BREAKER
The signals associated to the opened or closed status of the breaker can be monitored at “Actual > Status > Breaker”
Table 6–3: BREAKER STATUS
BREAKER STATUS
BREAKER OPEN
BREAKER CLOSED
BREAKER UNDEFINED
BREAKER OPEN: Open breaker status. In the switchgear selected as breaker, besides providing the usual
switchgear contact status, the system provides also the open breaker, closed breaker, and
6 undefined breaker states.
BREAKER CLOSED: Breaker closed.
BREAKER UNDEFINED: If there are two digital inputs configured for breaker contacts 52/a and 52/b, this status will be
present when both inputs are at 0 or at 1. This status can be caused by a wiring failure, failure of
auxiliary elements, etc.
6.2.3 PROTECTION
6.2.3.1 PROTECTION BLOCKS

(Actual > Status > Protection > Protection Blocks)
This screen shows the entire protection element blocks available. If the protection element is blocked, the green LED
located on the right side of the text will light up and will remain lit as long as the element remains blocked.
Protection elements block signals are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Table 6–4: PROTECTION ELEMENTS BLOCK
IOC BLOCK SIGNALS TOC BLOCK SIGNALS DIRECTIONAL BLOCKS VOLTAGE BLOCKS
PH IOC1 HIGH A /B / C BLK PH TOC1 HIGH A /B /C BLK PHASE DIR1 BLK INP PHASE UV1 BLOCK
PH IOC1 LOW A /B / C BLK PH TOC1 LOW A /B /C BLK NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK INP PHASE OV1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK GROUND DIR1 BLK INP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK GROUND TOC1 BLOCK SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK
SENS GND IOC1 BLK SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK POWER BLOCKS AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC2 BLK SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK FWD PWR1 BLOCK AUXILIARY UV2 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC3 BLK SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK FWD PWR2 BLOCK AUXILIARY UV3 BLOCK
ISOLATED GROUND BLOCKS NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK FWD PWR3 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND1 BLK NEG SEQ TOC2 BLOCK DIR PWR1 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV2 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND2 BLK NEG SEQ TOC3 BLOCK DIR PWR2 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV3 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND3 BLK THERMAL MODEL BLOCKS DIR PWR3 BLOCK NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK
SETTING GROUPS BLOCK IP THERMAL1 BLOCK FREQUENCY BLOCKS NEG SEQ OV2 BLOCK
SETT GROUPS BLOCK THERMAL2 BLOCK OVERFREQ1 BLOCK NEG SEQ OV3 BLOCK
THERMAL3 BLOCK OVERFREQ2 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR BLK
BROKEN CONDUCTOR BLK OVERFREQ3 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR2 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT2 BLK UNDERFREQ2 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR3 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT3 BLK UNDERFREQ3 BLOCK
6.2.3.2 PHASE CURRENT

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all phase instantaneous and time overcurrent elements in the F650 and block and
operation signals provided by the phase directional units. Any of these two events of any phase element will light up the
corresponding LED in this screen, and it will remain lit as the associated function remains in pickup or operation. All the
values are provided for phases and total as shown on the table below.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual> Status > Protection > Phase Current, and includes the following signaling
LEDs:
Table 6–5: PHASE CURRENT ACTUAL VALUES
PHASE IOC ACTUAL VALUES
PH IOC1 HIGH A / B / C PKP
PHASE IOC ACTUAL VALUES
PH TOC1 HIGH A / B / C PKP
PHASE DIRECTIONAL ACTUAL VALUES
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A
6
PH IOC1 HIGH A / B / C OP PH TOC1 HIGH A / B / C OP PHASE DIR1 A OP
PH IOC1 HIGH PKP PH TOC1 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B
PH IOC1 HIGH OP PH TOC1 HIGH OP PHASE DIR1 B OP
PH IOC2 HIGH A / B / C PKP PH TOC2 HIGH A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C
PH IOC2 HIGH A / B / C OP PH TOC2 HIGH A / B / C OP PHASE DIR1 C OP
PH IOC2 HIGH PKP PH TOC2 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A
PH IOC2 HIGH OP PH TOC2 HIGH OP PHASE DIR2 A OP
PH IOC3 HIGH A / B / C PKP PH TOC3 HIGH A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B
PH IOC3 HIGH A / B / C OP PH TOC3 HIGH A / B / C OP PHASE DIR2 B OP
PH IOC3 HIGH PKP PH TOC3 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C
PH IOC3 HIGH OP PH TOC3 HIGH OP PHASE DIR2 C OP
PH IOC1 LOW A / B / C PKP PH TOC1 LOW A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A
PH IOC1 LOW A / B / C OP PH TOC1 LOW A / B / C OP PHASE DIR3 A OP
PH IOC1 LOW PKP PH TOC1 LOW PKP PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B
PH IOC1 LOW OP PH TOC1 LOW OP PHASE DIR3 B OP
PH IOC2 LOW A / B / C PKP PH TOC2 LOW A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C
PH IOC2 LOW A / B / C OP PH TOC2 LOW A / B / C OP PHASE DIR3 C OP
PH IOC2 LOW PKP PH TOC2 LOW PKP
PH IOC2 LOW OP PH TOC2 LOW OP
PH IOC3 LOW A / B / C PKP PH TOC3 LOW A / B / C PKP
PH IOC3 LOW A / B / C OP PH TOC3 LOW A / B / C OP
PH IOC3 LOW PKP PH TOC3 LOW PKP
PH IOC3 LOW OP PH TOC3 LOW OP

6.2.3.3 NEUTRAL CURRENT

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all neutral instantaneous and time overcurrent elements in the F650 and block
and operation signals provided by the neutral directional units. Any of these two events of any neutral element will light up
the corresponding LED in this screen, and it will remain lit as the associated function remains in pickup or operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual > Status > Protection > Neutral Current, and includes the following signaling
LEDs:
Table 6–6: NEUTRAL CURRENT ACTUAL VALUES
NEUTRAL IOC ACTUAL NEUTRAL TOC ACTUAL NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
VALUES VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 OP NEUTRAL DIR1 OP
6.2.3.4 GROUND CURRENT

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all ground instantaneous and time overcurrent elements in the F650 and block
and operation signals provided by the ground directional units. Any of these two events of any ground element will light up
the corresponding LED in this screen, and it will remain lit as the associated function remains in pickup or operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual > Status > Protection > Ground Current, and includes the following signaling
LEDs:
Table 6–7: GROUND CURRENT ACTUAL VALUES
GROUND IOC ACTUAL GROUND TOC ACTUAL GROUND DIRECTIONAL
VALUES VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND DIR1 BLOCK
6 GROUND IOC1 OP
GROUND IOC2 PKP
GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC2 PKP
GROUND DIR1 OP
GROUND DIR2 BLOCK
GROUND IOC2 OP GROUND TOC2 OP GROUND DIR2 OP
GROUND IOC3 PKP GROUND TOC3 PKP GROUND DIR3 BLOCK
GROUND IOC3 OP GROUND TOC3 OP GROUND DIR3 OP
6.2.3.5 SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all sensitive ground instantaneous, time overcurrent and isolated ground
elements in the F650 and block and operation signals provided by the sensitive ground directional units. Any of these two
events of any ground element will light up the corresponding LED in this screen, and it will remain lit as the associated
function remains in pickup or operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual > Status > Protection >Sensitive Ground Current, and includes the following
signaling LEDs:
Table 6–8: SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT ACTUAL VALUES
SENSITIVE GROUND IOC SENSITIVE GROUND TOC ISOLATED GROUND SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL
ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
SENS GND IOC1 PKP SENS GND TOC1 PKP ISOLATED GND1 PKP SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC1 OP SENS GND TOC1 OP ISOLATED GND1 OP SENS GND DIR1 OP

6.2.3.6 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

This screen shows the pickup and trip for negative sequence elements in the F650. Any of these two events of any ground
element will light up the corresponding LED in this screen, and it will remain lit as the associated function remains in pickup
or operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual> Status > Protection >Negative Sequence Current, and includes the following
signaling LEDs:
Table 6–9: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ACTUAL VALUES
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE ACTUAL VALUES
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC2 OP
NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC3 OP
6.2.3.7 THERMAL MODEL

F650 units incorporate up to 3 thermal image elements. For each of them, this screen shows by means of green LEDs, the
activation of the reset, alarm, operation and thermal image signals for each phase (A, B, C) and each unit (1, 2, 3). Any of
the reset, alarm and operation signals will light up the corresponding LED in this screen, and it will remain lit as the
associated function remains in reset, pickup or operation. This function also provides the thermal image value for all the
phases and functions in percentage. All the values are provides individually for phases and for the three thermal elements.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual> Status > Protection >Thermal image, and includes the following signaling
LEDs:
Table 6–10: THERMAL IMAGE ACTUAL VALUES
THERMAL IMAGE RESET THERMAL IMAGE THERMAL IMAGE THERMAL IMAGE
SIGNALS ALARM SIGNALS OPERATION SIGNALS VALUE IN %
THERMAL1 A RST
THERMAL1 ALARM
THERMAL1 A ALRM
THERMAL1 OP
THERMAL1 A OP THERMAL1 IMAGE A
6
THERMAL1 B RST THERMAL1 B ALRM THERMAL1 B OP THERMAL1 IMAGE B
THERMAL1 C RST THERMAL1 C ALRM THERMAL1 C OP THERMAL1 IMAGE C
THERMAL2 ALARM THERMAL2 OP
THERMAL2 A RST THERMAL2 A ALRM THERMAL2 A OP THERMAL2 IMAGE A
THERMAL3 ALARM THERMAL3 OP
THERMAL3 A RST THERMAL3 A ALRM THERMAL3 A OP THERMAL3 IMAGE A

6.2.3.8 VOLTAGE
This screen shows the activation of all voltage elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu: Actual >
Status > Protection > Voltage, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
The values shown are:
Pickup and operation signals for phase to ground and phase-to-phase undervoltage elements and the three-phase signal
for pickup and operation for the undervoltage element.
Pickup and operation for negative sequence overvoltage element.
Pickup and operation signals for phase-to-phase overvoltage elements and the three-phase signal for pickup and operation
for the overvoltage element.
Pickup and operation for neutral overvoltage elements (High and low).
Pickup and operation for auxiliary undervoltage and overvoltage elements.
Table 6–11: VOLTAGE ACTUAL VALUES
UNDERVOLTAGE ACTUAL VALUES OVERVOLTAGE ACTUAL NEUTRAL OV (HIGH AND LOW)
VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
PHASE UV1 A PKP PHASE UV2 PKP PHASE OV1 AB PKP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 A OP PHASE UV2 OP PHASE OV1 AB OP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 B PKP PHASE UV3 A PKP PHASE OV1 BC PKP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 B OP PHASE UV3 A OP PHASE OV1 BC OP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 C PKP PHASE UV3 B PKP PHASE OV1 CA PKP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 C OP PHASE UV3 B OP PHASE OV1 CA OP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 AB PKP PHASE UV3 C PKP PHASE OV1 PKP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 AB OP PHASE UV3 C OP PHASE OV1 OP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 BC PKP PHASE UV3 AB PKP PHASE OV2 AB PKP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 BC OP PHASE UV3 AB OP PHASE OV2 AB OP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 CA PKP PHASE UV3 BC PKP PHASE OV2 BC PKP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 CA OP PHASE UV3 BC OP PHASE OV2 BC OP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 PKP PHASE UV3 CA PKP PHASE OV2 CA PKP AUXILIARY OV
6 PHASE UV1 OP PHASE UV3 CA OP PHASE OV2 CA OP AUXILIARY OV1 PKP
PHASE UV2 A PKP PHASE UV3 PKP PHASE OV2 PKP AUXILIARY OV1 OP
PHASE UV2 A OP PHASE UV3 OP PHASE OV2 OP AUXILIARY OV2 PKP
PHASE UV2 B PKP PHASE OV3 AB PKP AUXILIARY OV2 OP
PHASE UV2 B OP PHASE OV3 AB OP AUXILIARY OV3 PKP
PHASE UV2 C PKP PHASE OV3 BC PKP AUXILIARY OV3 OP
PHASE UV2 C OP PHASE OV3 BC OP AUXILIARY UV
PHASE UV2 AB PKP PHASE OV3 CA PKP AUXILIARY UV1 PKP
PHASE UV2 AB OP PHASE OV3 CA OP AUXILIARY UV1 OP
PHASE UV2 BC PKP PHASE OV3 PKP AUXILIARY UV2 PKP
PHASE UV2 BC OP PHASE OV3 OP AUXILIARY UV2 OP
PHASE UV2 CA PKP AUXILIARY UV3 PKP
PHASE UV2 CA OP AUXILIARY UV3 OP

6.2.3.9 POWER
Forward Power and directional power elements
There are three identical forward power and three directional power detection elements, each of them with two power-
setting levels.
Represented statuses are basically Pickup and Trip (Operation) for each step in each function.
This functions may have several applications, for example, small generating plants connected to the power system, to limit
the supplied power and not to exceed its rated capacity.
If programmed conditions for any of the three elements are met, the corresponding LEDs will light up.
This screen shows the activation of all power elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu: Actual>
Status > Protection >Power, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
Table 6–12: POWER ACTUAL VALUES

FORWARD POWER ACTUAL VALUES DIRECTIONAL POWER ACTUAL VALUES
FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP DIR PWR1 STG1 PKP
FWD PWR1 STG1 OP DIR PWR1 STG1 OP
DIR PWR1 STG PKP
DIR PWR1 STG OP
DIR PWR2 STG PKP
DIR PWR2 STG OP
FWD PWR3 STG1 OP
FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP
DIR PWR3 STG1 OP
DIR PWR3 STG2 PKP
6
DIR PWR3 STG PKP
DIR PWR3 STG OP

6.2.4 CONTROL ELEMENTS
6.2.4.1 FREQUENCY
F650 units incorporate three overfrequency and three underfrequency units. For each of them there are two magnitudes
pickup and trip (operation).
Frequency elements are often used in generating plants, as well as in the connection of substations to the main system.
Frequency monitoring is the base for synchronous machines protection application, with a couple of setting levels, as well
as for the development of automatic shedding functions and underfrequency reset.
This screen shows the activation of all frequency elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements >Frequency, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
Table 6–13: FREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES
OVERFREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES UNDERFREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES
OVERFREQ1 PKP UNDERFREQ1 PKP
OVERFREQ1 OP UNDERFREQ1 OP
6.2.4.2 SYNCHROCHECK
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Synchrocheck, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the synchronism check function:
Table 6–14: SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP
6 SYNCROCHECK OP
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
SYNCROCHECK COND OP
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
LL-DB OPERATION
SLIP CONDITION
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP: Block signal for the synchrocheck unit, configurable at Setpoint > Relay Configuration >
Protection Elements
SYNCROCHECK OP: Closing permission signal in live line-live bus conditions with open breaker.
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM: General Closing permission of the Synchronism unit. It contemplates all possible situations,
live line-live bus conditions, and the closing permission logics (dead line-dead bus, live line-
dead bus, dead line-live bus). Note: in case the Function is disabled, the Closing permission
signal will be activated in order not to interfere with possible logics where it is included. If the
synchronism unit is enabled, this signal will only be activated in the closing conditions
established by setting.
SYNCROCHECK COND OP: Closing permission according to permission logics (DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB).
DL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – dead bus condition.
DL-LB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – live bus condition.

LL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in live line – dead bus condition.

SLIP CONDITION: Internal signal indicating frequency slip between the line voltage and bus voltage phasors.
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency higher than line frequency
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency lower than line frequency
6.2.4.3 AUTORECLOSE
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Autoreclose, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the Autoreclose function:
Table 6–15: AUTORECLOSE ACTUAL VALUES
AUTORECLOSE INPUTS
AR LEVEL BLOCK
AR PULSE BLOCK
AR PULSE UNBLOCK
AR INITIATE
AR CONDS INPUT
AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS
AR CLOSE BREAKER
AR OUT OF SERVICE
AR READY
AR LOCKOUT
AR BLOCK
AR RCL IN PROGRESS
AR LCK BY ANOMALY
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE
AR LCK BY USER
AR LCK BY CONDS 6
AR LCK BY TRIPS
AR LCK BY SHOTS
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
AR BLOCK BY PULSE
AR STATUS
AR LOCKOUT MODE
AR BLOCK MODE
The AUTORECLOSE INPUTS are signal configurable by the user at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements to:
AR LEVEL BLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by level
AR PULSE BLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by pulse
AR PULSE UNBLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by pulse
AR INITIATE: programmable signal to initiate the autoreclose.
AR CONDS INPUT: programmable signal to set the conditions to be met before executing a breaker close.

The AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS are internal signals provided by the autoreclose unit:
AR CLOSE BREAKER: Breaker close command given by the autoreclose
AR OUT OF SERVICE: Autoreclose out of service (Disabled)
AR READY: Autoreclose in service
AR LOCKOUT: Autoreclose in lockout status (finished cycled-definite trip)
AR BLOCK: Autoreclose blocked (by input, logic, others, etc).
AR RCL IN PROGRESS: Cycle in course (autoreclose in progress).
AR LCK BY ANOMALY: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by anomaly.
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by a failure in opening the breaker.
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by a failure in closing the breaker.
AR LCK BY USER: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by manual close.
AR LCK BY CONDS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by conditions. See input conditions configuration.
AR LCK BY TRIPS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by maximum number of trips.
AR LCK BY SHOTS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” at the end of cycle – Definite trip.
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 1st shot.
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 2nd shot.
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 3rd shot.
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 4th shot.
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL: Autoreclose blocked by level. See AR block signals configuration
AR BLOCK BY PULSE: Autoreclose blocked by pulse. See AR block signals configuration
AR STATUS: Autoreclose status (in service – out of service)
AR LOCKOUT MODE: Relay “Lockout” status.
6 AR BLOCK MODE: Relay “Block” status

6.2.4.4 BREAKER FAILURE

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Breaker Failure, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the breaker failure function:
Table 6–16: BREAKER FAILURE ACTUAL VALUES
BREAKER FAILURE ACTUAL VALUES
BKR FAIL INITIATE
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION
BKR FAIL HISET
BKR FAIL LOWSET
INTERNAL ARC
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP
BKR FAIL INITIATE External signal for breaker failure initiation. (configurable at Settings> Relay Configuration >
Protection Elements).
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Signal for breaker failure without current
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Signal for supervision level breaker failure (retrip)
BKR FAIL HISET Signal for high-level breaker failure
BKR FAIL LOWSET Signal for low-level breaker failure
INTERNAL ARC Signal for internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Signal for Second level breaker failure (high and low)
6.2.4.5 VT FUSE FAILURE

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements >VT Fuse Failure, and it includes only one LEDs for
the VT fuse failure function, indicating the activation of the unit.
Table 6–17: VT FUSE FAILURE ACTUAL VALUES 6
VT FUSE FAILURE ACTUAL VALUES
VT FUSE FAILURE
6.2.4.6 BROKEN CONDUCTOR

F650 units incorporate three Broken Conductor elements for special applications that may require different timing steps or
levels for alarm or trip purposes.
The green LED will light up when the pickup or trip (operation) of each of the three available functions is activated. The
three of them are identical and can be configured separately.
These functions compare the negative and positive sequence current levels per phase. If this magnitude exceeds a
programmable threshold and is maintained for a programmable time delay, a tripping output will be issued. If a pickup or
operation is produced, the corresponding LED in this screen will light up.
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Broken Conductor, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the breaker failure function:
Table 6–18: TABLE 6-18 BROKEN CONDUCTOR ACTUAL VALUES
BROKEN CONDUCTOR ACTUAL VALUES
BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP
BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP
BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP

6.2.4.7 SETTING GROUPS

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Setting Groups, and it includes activation and
block signals for the relay setting groups change in the following signaling LEDs:
Table 6–19: SETTING GROUP ACTUAL VALUES
SETTING GROUPS ACTUAL VALUES
GROUP 1 ACT ON
GROUP 2 ACT ON
GROUP 3 ACT ON
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
6.2.4.8 LOCKED ROTOR

F650 units incorporate three locked rotor units. For each of them there are two magnitudes pickup and trip (operation).
This screen shows the activation of all locked rotor elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements > Locked Rotor, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
Table 6–20: LOCKED ROTOR ACTUAL VALUES
LOCKED ROTOR ACTUAL VALUES
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP
LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR2 OP
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR3 OP

6.2.5 PROTECTION SUMMARY
Actual > Status > Protection Summary . This screen Synchrocheck

shows a complete listing of all protection and control Recloser
elements in the relay, showing their status (enabled or not) Neutral OV1 High
through the corresponding LED . Table 6–21: Neutral OV2 High
Phase IOC1 High Neutral OV3 High
Phase IOC2 High Neutral OV1 Low
Phase IOC3 High Neutral OV2 Low
Phase IOC1 Low Neutral OV3 Low
Phase IOC2 Low Auxiliary UV1
Phase IOC3 Low Auxiliary UV2
Neutral IOC1 Auxiliary UV3
Neutral IOC2 Phase OV1
Neutral IOC3 Phase OV2
Ground IOC1 Phase OV3
Ground IOC2 Auxiliary OV1
Ground IOC3 Auxiliary OV2
Sensitive Ground IOC1 Auxiliary OV3
Sensitive Ground IOC2 Negative Sequence TOC1
Sensitive Ground IOC3 Negative Sequence TOC2
Phase TOC1 High Negative Sequence TOC3
Phase TOC2 High Overfrequency1
Phase TOC3 High Overfrequency2
Neutral TOC1 Overfrequency3
Neutral TOC2 Underfrequency1
Neutral TOC3 Underfrequency2
Ground TOC1 Underfrequency3
Ground TOC2 Oscillography
Ground TOC3 Fault Report 6
Sensitive Ground TOC1 Broken Conductor1
Phase UV1 Isolated Ground IOC1
Negative Sequence OV1 Sensitive Ground Directional1
Thermal Image1 Forward power1
Phase Directional1 Demand
Phase Directional2 Phase TOC1 Low
Phase Directional3 Phase TOC2 Low
Neutral Directional1 Phase TOC3 Low
Neutral Directional2 Data Logger
Neutral Directional3 Directional Power1
Ground Directional1 Directional Power2
Ground Directional2 Directional Power3
Ground Directional3 Locked Rotor1
Breaker Failure Locked Rotor2
Fuse Failure Locked Rotor3

6.2.6 SNAPSHOT EVENTS SUMMARY
Actual > Status > Snapshot Event Summary Thermal Model3 Event
The F650 provides via setting the possibility to enable or Phase Directional1 Event
disable the snapshot event generation in the different Phase Directional2 Event
functions available in the device. Phase Directional3 Event
Neutral Directional1 Event
This screen shows a complete listing of the snapshot event
generation for all the protection, control and inputs/outputs Neutral Directional2 Event
elements in the relay, showing their status (enabled or not) Neutral Directional3 Event
through the corresponding LED. Ground Directional1 Event
Ground Directional2 Event
Table 6–22: SNAPSHOT EVENT SUMMARY
Ground Directional3 Event
SNAPSHOT EVENTS Breaker Failure Event
SUMMARY
VT Fuse Failure Event
Board F Event
Synchrocheck Event
Board G Event
Autoreclose Event
General Settings Event
Neutral OV1 High Event
Phase IOC1 High Event
Neutral OV1 Low Event
Phase IOC1 Low Event
Auxiliary UV1 Event
Neutral IOC1 Event
Auxiliary UV2 Event
Neutral IOC2 Event
Auxiliary UV3 Event
Neutral IOC3 Event
Phase OV1 Event
Ground IOC1 Event
Phase OV2 Event
Ground IOC2 Event
Phase OV3 Event
Ground IOC3 Event
Auxiliary OV1 Event
6 Sensitive Ground
IOC1 Event Auxiliary OV2 Event
Sensitive Ground Auxiliary OV3 Event
IOC2 Event Negative Sequence TOC1 Event
Sensitive Ground Negative Sequence TOC2 Event
IOC3 Event
Negative Sequence TOC3 Event
Phase TOC1 High Event
Overfrequency1 Event
Neutral TOC1 Event
Underfrequency1 Event
Neutral TOC2 Event
Neutral TOC3 Event
Ground TOC1 Event
Oscillography Event
Ground TOC2 Event
Fault Report Event
Ground TOC3 Event
Setting Group Event
Sensitive Ground TOC1 Event
Broken Conductor1 Event
Phase UV1 Event
Isolated Ground IOC1 Event
Phase UV2 Event
Phase UV3 Event
Negative Sequence OV1 Event
Sensitive Ground Directional1
Negative Sequence OV2 Event Event
Negative Sequence OV3 Event Sensitive Ground Directional2
Thermal Model1 Event Event
Thermal Model2 Event


Event
Forward Power1 Event
Demand Event
Board H Event
Board J Event
Phase TOC1 Low Event
Switchgear1 Event
Switchgear2 Event
Switchgear3 Event
Switchgear4 Event
Switchgear5 Event
Switchgear6 Event
Switchgear7 Event
Switchgear8 Event
Switchgear9 Event
Switchgear10 Event
Switchgear11 Event
Switchgear12 Event
Switchgear13 Event
Switchgear14 Event
Switchgear15 Event
Switchgear16 Event
Breaker Settings Event
Directional Power1 Event
6
Locked Rotor1 Event
Locked Rotor2 Event
Locked Rotor3 Event
6.2.7 MODBUS USER MAP
The ModBus User Map consists of a selection of the most important 256 records in the complete ModBus Map regarding
the application. By selecting these records and defining the user map appropriately, it is possible to read all the information
included by a single ModBus reading operation, optimizing the refresh time.
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > ModBus User Map, and it includes all the readings for the previously
configured records in the ModBus memory map.
Table 6–23: MODBUS USER MAP ACTUAL VALUES
MODBUS USER MAP
Address 00
Address 01
…
Address 255

6.2.8 SWITCHGEAR STATUS
Actual > Status > Switchgear Status

For a better understanding of the represented statuses in this screen, figure 6.1 shows the available “Switchgear” modules
to be programmed in the F650. Each of them has a series of inputs/outputs that are the statuses represented on this
screen. Separate signal for each switchgear device (for 1 to 16).g
Each Switchgear module can be programmed at: Setpoint > Relay Configuration >Switchgear, and its statuses are as
follows:
Table 6–24: SWITHGEAR STATUS
SWITCHGEAR 1 STATUS SWITCHGEAR X STATUS SWITCHGEAR 16 STATUS
SWITCH 1 A INPUT … SWITCH X A INPUT … SWITCH 16 A INPUT
SWITCH 1 B INPUT … SWITCH X B INPUT … SWITCH 16 B INPUT
SWITCH 1 A STATUS … SWITCH X A STATUS … SWITCH 16 A STATUS
SWITCH 1 B STATUS … SWITCH X B STATUS … SWITCH 16 B STATUS
SWITCH 1 OPEN … SWITCH X OPEN … SWITCH 16 OPEN
SWITCH 1 CLOSED … SWITCH X CLOSED … SWITCH 16 CLOSED
SWITCH 1 00_ERROR … SWITCH X 00_ERROR … SWITCH 16 00_ERROR
SWITCH 1 11_ERROR … SWITCH X 11_ERROR … SWITCH 16 11_ERROR
SWITCH 1 OPEN INIT … SWITCH X OPEN INIT … SWITCH 16 OPEN INIT
SWITCH 1 CLOSE INIT … SWITCH X CLOSE INIT … SWITCH 16 CLOSE INIT
SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN … SWGR X FAIL TO OPEN … SWGR 16 FAIL TO OPEN
SWGR 1 FAIL TO CLOSE … SWGR X FAIL TO CLOSE … SWGR 16 FAIL TO CLOSE
SWITCH X A INPUT The LED will light up when the input associated to that switchgear Contact A is activated.
SWITCH X B INPUT The LED will light up when the input associated to that switchgear Contact B is activated.
SWITCH X A STATUS Status associated to Switchgear contact A. It is activated once the time required for the
Switchgear module to acknowledge contact A has expired.
6 SWITCH X B STATUS Status associated to Switchgear contact B. It is activated once the time required for the
Switchgear module to acknowledge contact B has expired..
SWITCH X OPEN Lights up when the associated switchgear is open
SWITCH X CLOSED Lights up when the associated switchgear is closed
SWITCH X 00_ERROR Output that represents the Switchgear status 00, considered as abnormal.
SWITCH X 11_ERROR Output that represents the Switchgear status 11, considered as abnormal.
SWITCH X OPEN INIT Programmable input that indicates the initiation of the Opening Operation for the considered
switchgear.
SWITCH X CLOSE INIT Programmable input that indicates the initiation of the closing Operation for the considered
switchgear.
SWGR X FAIL TO OPEN Output that represents a failure to open, from the associated external device (opening time
exceeded)
SWGR X FAIL TO CLOSE Output that represents a failure to close from the associated external device (closing time
exceeded)

See attached figure
SW IT C H X O PEN SW G R X FAIL T O O PEN

IN IT
SW IT CH X CLO SE SW G R X FAIL TO CLO SE

IN IT
SW IT C H X A SW IT CH X A ST AT US
IN PU T
SW ITC H X B SW IT C H X B ST AT U S
IN PUT
SW IT C H X O PEN
SW IT C H X
CLO SED
Sw itchgear logic
m odule SW IT C H X
00 ER R O R
SW IT C H X
11 ERR O R
Figure 6–1: SWITCHGEAR CONTACTS
6.2.9 CALIBRATION
6
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Calibration, and it includes the internal calibration status for the relay.
Table 6–25: CALIBRATION STATUS
CALIBRATION
FACTORY CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION ERROR
FACTORY CALIBRATION: this value will be active when the relay calibration settings are the default values (no
calibration).
CALIBRATION ERROR: Error shown when there is a problem in the calibration settings (wrong values).

6.2.10 FLEX CURVES
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Flex Curves, and it includes the internal flex curves status.
If the LED associated to the FlexCurve status is lit up, this indicates that the user curve has been configured with new
values (not default values).
Table 6–26: FLEX CURVES STATUS
FLEX CURVES STATUS
FLEXCURVE A STATUS
FLEXCURVE B STATUS
FLEXCURVE C STATUS
FLEXCURVE D STATUS
6.2.11 SYSTEM INFO
This screen can monitor the system parameters and the internal status of the Relay operative system. It is only available
with password provided by the manufacturer.
6.2.12 RECORD STATUS
This screen shows part of the information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as:
6.2.12.1 FAULT REPORTS

Actual> Status > Records Status > Fault Reports
Table 6–27: FAULT REPORT STATUS
FAULT REPORT STATUS
FAULT REPORT TRIGG
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
6 FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER
FAULT REPORT TRIGG: This signal indicates whether the signal that initiates the calculation of the distance to the fault
has been activated.
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: This signal indicates the reset of fault reports.
FAULT DATE: Date and time of the last fault produced in the relay. In format (Day/Month/year
Hour:minutes:seconds.milliseconds)
FAULT TYPE: Type of the last fault produced in the Relay (phase to ground, phase to phase, three-phase,
etc).
FAULT LOCATION: Location of the last fault produced in the relay.
FAULT REPORT NUMBER: Number of fault reports available in the relay (ten is the maximum number of records
supported by the relay).

6.2.12.2 CONTROL EVENTS

Actual> Status > Records Status > Control Events
In this screen Actual> Status > Records Status > Control Events, the status of the signals configured to launch the
control events can be seen, activated or not.
The F650 provides the possibility to configure 128 control events (at Settings>Relay Configuration > Control Events). In
the Actual > Records > Event Recorder > Control Events it is possible to see and retrieve the recorded control events to
a file, seeing the text and date and time and status of the preconfigured control event.
Table 6–28: CONTROL EVENTS STATUS
CONTROL EVENTS
CONTROL EVENT 1
CONTROL EVENT 2
…
CONTROL EVENT 128
6.2.12.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
Actual> Status > Records Status > Oscillography
The following figure shows the status of the different digital channels that can be programmed to be included in
oscillography records. When the signal associated to a specific channel is active, its LED will light up on this screen.
This screen shows as well the oscillography trigger status, active or inactive, by lighting up that channel.
Table 6–29: OSCILLOGRAPHY STATUS
OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS
The last three values shown are as follows:

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: This is the number of the last oscillography record obtained in the relay. This value has a range
of 0 to 999.
CYCLES PER RECORD: This is the number of cycles contained in the oscillography record; this value depends on the
settings adjusted on the oscillography menu at Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography.
AVAILABLE RECORDS: This is the number of available oscillography records in the relay.
Values for these last 3 fields are reset every time the oscillography settings are modified.

6.2.12.4 DATA LOGGER

Actual> Status > Records Status > Data Logger
Table 6–30: DATA LOGGER STATUS
DATA LOGGER
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS
DATA LOGGER DAYS
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: Date and time of the oldest value stored in the data logger.
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: Date and time of the most recent value stored in the data logger
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS: Number of channels configured in the data logger
DATA LOGGER DAYS: Time in days during which, samples are stored without overwriting them.
6.2.12.5 DEMAND
Actual> Status > Records Status > Demand
Table 6–31: DEMAND STATUS
DEMAND
DEMAND TRIGGER INP
DEMAND RESET INP
DEMAND TRIGGER INP: Signal used for triggering the demand in the case of Rolling demand.
DEMAND RESET INP: Signal to reset the demand.
6 These signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
6.2.12.6 ENERGY
Freeze/Unfreeze/reset Energy: These signals correspond to the relay energy counters statuses of freeze, unfreeze and
reset.
Actual> Status > Records Status > Energy
Table 6–32: ENERGY STATUS
ENERGY
FREEZE ENERGY CNT
UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT
RESET ENERGY CNT
FREEZE ENERGY CNT: Signal used to freeze the energy counters for measurement purposes.
UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT: Signal used to unfreeze the energy counters.
RESET ENERGY CNT: Signal to reset the energy measurements and set the values to zero.
These signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements

6.2.12.7 BREAKER MAINTENANCE

Actual> Status > Records Status > Breaker Maintenance
This screen shows the breaker status related to breaker maintenance. Other statuses are provided in the different
switchgear or breaker status signals.
Table 6–33: BREAKER MAINTENANCE STATUS
BREAKER MAINTENANCE INPUTS
RESET KI2t COUNTERS
RESET BKR COUNTERS
BREAKER MAINTENANCE STATUS
KI2t PHASE A ALARM
KI2t PHASE B ALARM
KI2t PHASE C ALARM
BKR OPENINGS ALARM
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM
BREAKER OPENINGS
BREAKER CLOSINGS
KI2t PHASE A
KI2t PHASE B
KI2t PHASE C
BKR OPENING TIME
BKR CLOSING TIME
The breaker maintenance inputs are signals that can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements:
RESET KI2t COUNTERS Signal to reset and set to zero all the KI2t counters (for all phases)
RESET BKR COUNTERS Signal to reset and set to zero all the breaker counters (number of openings and closings
and alarms)
6
KI2t PHASE A ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase A exceeded
KI2t PHASE B ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase B exceeded
KI2t PHASE C ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase C exceeded
BKR OPENINGS ALARM Alarm related to the maximum number of breaker openings
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM Alarm related to the maximum number of breaker openings in one hour
BREAKER OPENINGS Counter of the total number of openings performed by the breaker
BREAKER CLOSINGS Counter of the total number of closings performed by the breaker
KI2t PHASE A kI2t phase A counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase A)
KI2t PHASE B kI2t phase B counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase B)
KI2t PHASE C kI2t phase C counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase C)
BKR OPENING TIME Time to set a failure in opening the breaker.
BKR CLOSING TIME Time to set a failure in closing the breaker.
Breaker opening and closing time signals are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear
for the related switchgear device.

6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3METERING
Values shown in each section are as follows:
6.3.1 PRIMARY VALUES
6.3.1.1 CURRENT
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Current
Table 6–34: CURRENT PRIMARY VALUES

DESCRIPTION UNITS
CT Ratio N/A
CT Ratio Ig N/A
CT Ratio Isg N/A
Ia Angle Deg
Ib Angle Deg
Ic Angle Deg
In Angle Deg
Ig Angle Deg
Isg Angle Deg
Phasor Ia Primary KA
Phasor Ib Primary KA
Phasor Ic Primary KA
Phasor Ig Primary KA
Phasor Isg Primary KA
Phasor In Primary KA
RMS Ia Primary KA
RMS Ib Primary KA
6 RMS Ic Primary KA
RMS Ig Primary KA
RMS Isg Primary KA
I0 Primary KA
I1 Primary KA
I2 Primary KA

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
6.3.1.2 VOLTAGE
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage
Table 6–35: VOLTAGE PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
PT Ratio N/A
Va Angle Deg
Vb Angle Deg
Vc Angle Deg
Vn Angle Deg
Vx Angle Deg
Vab Angle Deg
Vbc Angle Deg
Vca Angle Deg
V0 Primary KV
V1 Primary KV
V2 Primary KV
Vab Primary KV
Vbc Primary KV
Vca Primary KV
Va Primary KV
Vb Primary KV
Vc Primary KV
Vn Primary KV
Vx Primary KV
VBB Primary KV
VL Primary KV
6.3.1.3 POWER 6
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Power
Table 6–36: POWER PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phase A Real Pwr MW
Phase A Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase A Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase B Real Pwr MW
Phase B Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase B Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase C Real Pwr MW
Phase C Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase C Apparent Pwr MVA
3 Phase Real Pwr MW
3 Phase Reactive Pwr MVAr
3 Phase Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase A Power Factor N/A
Phase B Power Factor N/A
Phase C Power Factor N/A
3 Phase Power Factor N/A
NOTE: If voltage inputs are configured in Delta connection and the auxiliary voltage input is set as Vx, measurement of
single phase power value cannot be duly calculated, and therefore, its value will be zero. For the three-phase power value,
the system uses the ARON method, or two-wattmeters method.

6.3.1.4 ENERGY
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Energy
Energy is only given in three phase primary values
Table 6–37: ENERGY PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Positive MWatthour MWh
Negative MWatthour MWh
Positive MVarhour MVArh
Negative MVarhour MVArh
Pos Mwatthour Cnt MWh
Neg Mwatthour Cnt MWh
Pos MVarhour Cnt MVArh
Neg MVarhour Cnt MVArh
When the energy counters reach the value (2ˆ 31)/1000 (approximately. 2147 MVArh and MWh) all the values are set to
zero and starts counting again.
6.3.1.5 DEMAND
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Demand
Demand is only given in primary values
Table 6–38: DEMAND PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
DEMAND IA KA
DEMAND IA MAX KA
DEMAND IA DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IB KA
6 DEMAND IB MAX
DEMAND IB DATE
KA
dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IC KA
DEMAND IC MAX KA
DEMAND IC DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IG KA
DEMAND IG MAX KA
DEMAND IG DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND ISG KA
DEMAND ISG MAX KA
DEMAND ISG DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND I2 KA
DEMAND I2 MAX KA
DEMAND I2 DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND W MW
DEMAND W MAX MW
DEMAND W DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND VAR PWR MVAr
DEMAND VAR MAX MVAr
DEMAND VAR DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND VA PWR MVA
DEMAND VA MAX MVA
DEMAND VA DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms

6.3.2 SECONDARY VALUES
6.3.2.1 CURRENT
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Current
Table 6–39: CURRENT SECONDARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phasor Ia A
RMS Ia A
Phasor Ib A
RMS Ib A
Phasor Ic A
RMS Ic A
Phasor In A
Phasor Ig A
RMS Ig A
Phasor Isg A
RMS Isg A
Zero seq I0 A
Positive Seq I1 A
Negative Seq I2 A
6.3.2.2 VOLTAGE
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Voltage
Table 6–40: VOLTAGE SECONDARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phasor Vab
Phasor Vbc
V
V
6
Phasor Vca V
Phasor Van V
Phasor Vbn V
Phasor Vcn V
Phasor Vn V
Positive Seq V1 V
Negative Seq V2 V
Zero Seq V0 V
Phasor Vx V
Nominal Voltage V
Line Voltage V
Bus Voltage V

6.3.2.3 POWER
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Power
Table 6–41: POWER SECONDARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phase A Apparent Pwr VA
Phase B Apparent Pwr VA
Phase C Apparent Pwr VA
Phase A Real Pwr W
Phase B Real Pwr W
Phase C Real Pwr W
Phase A Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase B Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase C Reactive Pwr VARS
3 Phase Apparent Pwr VA
3 Phase Real Pwr W
3 Phase Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase A Power Factor N/A
Phase B Power Factor N/A
Phase C Power Factor N/A
3 Phase Power Factor N/A
NOTE: If voltage inputs are configured in Delta connection and the auxiliary voltage input is set as Vx, measurement of
single phase power value cannot be duly calculated, and therefore, its value will be zero. For the three-phase power value,
the system uses the ARON method, or two-wattmeters method.

6.3.3 PHASOR DIAGRAM
Actual> Metering > Phasor Diagram

This window shows the phasors for voltage and current values, phase to phase, phase to ground and sequence values,
provided by the unit. The angles provided by the unit are clockwise, all the angles are positive values, so for a system Va
(0,0°), Vb (0,-120°), Vc (0,120°) the relay will provided the following angles Va (0,0°), Vb (0,120°), Vc (0,240°).
The following figure shows the phasor diagram provided by EnerVista F650 Setup:
Figure 6–2: PHASOR DIAGRAM
6.3.4 FREQUENCY
Actual> Metering > Frequency

Table 6–42: FREQUENCY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Line Frequency Hz
Bus Frequency Hz

6.3.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
Digital inputs and outputs are located in the same board. Depending on the relay model, the number of inputs and outputs
will vary as:
If the relay model is F650***F1*** the unit will incorporate 1 board (F) with 16 inputs and 8 outputs.
If the relay model is F650***F2*** the unit will incorporate 1 board (F) with:
8 inputs + 4 tripping coil supervision circuits and
6 outputs + 2 outputs with tripping current supervision circuits
If the relay model is F650***F*G1** the unit will incorporate a second board (G) with 16 inputs and 8 outputs
6.3.5.1 CONTACT INPUTS

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact inputs > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
On the inputs screen, the LED associated to the activated input will light up in green, if an input is not activated, the LED will
not light up. The “Board X Status” LED indicates the status of the board; it will be lit up if the board is correct and the
communication or the Relay model is appropriate.
Table 6–43: CONTACT INPUTS ACTIVATION SIGNALS

CONTACT INPUTS TYPE 1 CONTACT INPUTS TYPE 2
CONT IP_X_CC1 (CC1) CONT IP_X_CC1 (CC1)
6 CONT IP_X_CC8 (CC8) CONT IP_X_CC8 (CC8)
CONT IP_X_CC9 (Va_COIL1) CONT IP_X_CC9 (CC9)
CONT IP_X_CC10 (Vb_COIL1) CONT IP_X_CC10 (CC10)
CONT IP_X_CC11 (Va_COIL2) CONT IP_X_CC11 (CC11)
CONT IP_X_CC12 (Vb_COIL2) CONT IP_X_CC12 (CC12)
CONT IP_X_CC13 (O7_SEAL) CONT IP_X_CC13 (CC13)
CONT IP_X_CC14 (O8_SEAL) CONT IP_X_CC14 (CC14)
CONT IP_X_CC15 (SUP_COIL1) CONT IP_X_CC15 (CC15)
CONT IP_X_CC16 (SUP_COIL2) CONT IP_X_CC16 (CC16)
BOARD X STATUS BOARD X STATUS

6.3.5.2 CONTACT OUTPUT STATUS

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Status > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
The corresponding Outputs screen will display the activation of a contact output by lighting up in green the associated LED.
This screen shows the real status of the contact output, which corresponds to the transformation of the output activation
signal (Contact output operate), by the logic applied to this output in “Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board X”
Table 6–44: CONTACT OUTPUT STATUS

CONTACT OUTPUT STATUS
CONT OP_X_01
CONT OP_X_02
CONT OP_X_03
CONT OP_X_04
CONT OP_X_05
CONT OP_X_06
CONT OP_X_07
CONT OP_X_08
BOARD X STATUS
NOTE: Both in the outputs menu as in the rest of menus available in “Actual”, the user can view several screens at the
same time to facilitate analysis.
6.3.5.3 CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATES

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Operates > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
Table 6–45: CONTACT OUTPUTS OPERATES
CONTACT OUTPUT
OPERATES
CONT OP OPER_X_01
6
CONT OP OPER_X_02
CONT OP OPER_X_03
CONT OP OPER_X_04
CONT OP OPER_X_05
CONT OP OPER_X_06
CONT OP OPER_X_07
CONT OP OPER_X_08
BOARD X STATUS
These screens are available for all boards incorporated in the relay model, which can be F, G, H, and/or J.
This screen shows the activated or deactivated status of those variables used internally to operate a contact output.
Signals shown on this screen are configured in the Outputs screen inside the Setpoint > Relay Configuration menu,
either directly by selecting the signals provided by the relay, or selecting a signal provided by the logic configured at
Setpoint > Logic Configuration.
These logic signals (Contact Output Operates), when being transformed by the outputs logic configured at Setpoint >
Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board X become Contact Output signals. This output logic can be POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE, pulse, latched, etc.

Operation example of output contacts:
Figure 6–3: OUTPUT CONTACTS OPERATION
6 6.3.5.4 CONTACT OUTPUT RESETS

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Resets > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
If the reset signal is active, the green LED will light up. Otherwise, it will remain unlit.
Table 6–46: CONTACT OUTPUT RESETS
CONTACT OUTPUT RESETS
CONT OP RESET_X_01
CONT OP RESET_X_02
CONT OP RESET_X_03
CONT OP RESET_X_04
CONT OP RESET_X_05
CONT OP RESET_X_06
CONT OP RESET_X_07
CONT OP RESET_X_08
BOARD X STATUS
The last LED in this screen, labeled as “Board Status”, indicates the general board status.
This output reset Command will only be effective if the “latch” option has been selected for the “Output Type” setting on
the I/O board, thus when the contact output has been configured to emulate function 86 (latching relay).
Configuration for the contact output reset signal is set at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs > Contact Output
Reset.

6.3.5.5 I/O BOARD STATUS

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > I/O Board Status
This screen is used for verifying the status of I/O boards. If all the I/O boards, one (F) or both (F and G) depending on the
relay model, are correctly inserted in their tracks and are in good state and communicating through the internal CAN Bus,
the green LED will remain lit.
I/O boards accessible through the external CAN Bus are labeled as H and J. In order to start working with the external I/O
boards is necessary to select the appropriated I/O board type for each slot (H or J for the CIO module) at Setpoint >
Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board H and J. Otherwise the relay will not start communicating through external can to
the related board.
If one of the boards has been extracted, or the relay model does not match the installed hardware, the corresponding LED
will remain unlit.
Table 6–47: I/O BOARD STATUS
I/O BOARD STATUS
BOARD F STATUS
BOARD G STATUS
BOARD H STATUS
BOARD J STATUS
For all I/O board screens described above, the last LED provides this same information individually.
6.3.5.6 VIRTUAL INPUTS

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Inputs > Virtual Input Latched > Virtual Input Self-Reset
“Virtual Inputs” are signals transmitted by communications. The EnerVista F650 Setup provides a tool to set virtual inputs
through ModBus at Setpoint > Inputs /Outputs /Virtual inputs that is only available in on line mode (communicating to the
relay). There are two available groups of 32 signals each: Latched inputs and Self-reset inputs, and all of them can be used
internally to perform operations, new logics in the PLC, etc.
In this actual values screen the status of the assigned virtual inputs can as shown on :
6
Table 6–48: VIRTUAL INPUTS STATUS
VIRTUAL INPUTS LATCHED VIRTUAL INPUTS SELF-RESET
… …
6.3.5.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs
This screen provides the status of the 512 configurable virtual outputs (internal variables) used in the logic scheme. The
virtual outputs are set from 000 to 511.
The configuration of the logic associated to the virtual output is in the Setpoint > Logic Configuration tool provided by
EnerVista F650 Setup program.
Table 6–49: VIRTUAL OUTPUTS STATUS
VIRTUAL OUTPUT STATUS
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 000
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 001
…
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 511

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4RECORDS 6.4.1 EVENT RECORDER
6.4.1.1 ALL SNAPSHOT EVENTS

Actual > Records > Event Recorder > All Snapshot Events
By selecting this option, the F650 provides a general list of all snapshot events stored in the relay up to the request
moment:
Figure 6–4: EVENT RECORDER – ALL SNAPSHOT EVENTS
The different options available on this screen are as follows:
6 Save: It allows saving the Snapshot events information obtained in the relay in a CSV format file.
Print: It allows printing the viewed data.
View data: It allows to view the information contained in the selected event, such as the event number, date and time,
cause of the event, as well as the voltage and current values in the moment of the event (see ).
There is a “Select” option, which is used for selecting the events that are required to appear when the screen information is
printed or saved.
Figure 6–5: SNAPSHOT EVENT DETAILS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1.2 NEW SNAPSHOT EVENTS

Actual > Records > Event Recorder > New Snapshot Events
This screen shows new Snapshot events, updated since the last time that this menu was accessed; there are three
possible ways to access new events; in local mode (COM2-HMI), remote mode (COM1) and via Ethernet (COM3).
It is the same type of screen as shown on all snapshot event retrieval.
6.4.1.3 CONTROL EVENTS

Actual > Records > Event Recorder > Control Events
This screen is identical to the previous ones. The difference is that this screen will display only control events, i.e., those
events configured in section Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Events. There are a total of 128 configurable events and
64 non-configurable switchgear events.
In this screen, red or black color for a specific event indicates whether it is activated (to 1) or in standby (to 0)
Figure 6–6: CONTROL EVENTS
6.4.1.4 ALARM PANEL

The alarm panel can be accessed at Actual > Records > Event Recorder > Alarm Panel.
The following screen provides information about the issued alarms. The screen shows information about their status: active
not acknowledged, active acknowledged and not active. The user can either acknowledge all alarms at the same time, or
do it partially by selecting the alarms to be acknowledged.
Figure 6–7: ALARM PANEL

6.4.2 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
The Actual > Records > Waveform Capture screen displays a list of all oscillography records available in the relay. The
F650 stores oscillography records from 1 to 999; this is the index of the obtained oscillography record. This screen allows
selecting the records to be saved among all records available. Download of these records will be done through the selected
connection in the “Communication > Computer” menu, either serial mode or Ethernet.
Figure 6–8: OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORD RETRIEVAL VIA ENERVISTA F650 SETUP

The screen will show all the available records in the Relay, and by clicking on each of them, the system will display the
heading information for that record, allowing downloading the information to a disk. Once the file to be downloaded has
been selected, the oscillography record can be opened using GE-OSC software.
GE-OSC is GE proprietary software that is not distributed together with EnerVista F650 Setup. This program is A
COMTRADE viewer and analysis software for oscillography files.
If the user does not have the GE-OSC tool, the oscillography record can be stored and viewed using any other analysis tool
capable of reproducing COMTRADE.1999 files.
When using GE-OSC software, this program requires the use of a template for each relay. If there is a stored template for
F650 relays (as in the figure), the user must simply select it and click the Open Selected Template key. The program will
6 then be prepared to view oscillography and digital records using the options in available menus (Waveforms and Digital
Flags). Otherwise, it will be required to select the Create New Template option, where the program will help create a new
template. Nevertheless, there is a specific instruction manual for GE-OSC software use.
Figure 6–9: GE-OSC OSCILLOGRAPHY ANALYSIS SOFTWARE

It must be taken into account that any settings change in the oscillography will produce the removal of all the information
stored up to that moment.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4.3 FAULT REPORT
When selecting the Actual > Records > Fault Report menu, EnerVista F650 Setup will show the following screen,
indicating the fault reports available in the relay.
Figure 6–10: FAULT REPORT RETRIEVAL VIA ENERVISTA F650 SETUP
When selecting one of the records, a new screen will detail the following information:
• Date
• Time 6
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault type
• Distance to the fault
The operation of this screen is similar to that of the previous oscillography screen, being in this case the number of fault
reports a fixed number (10), instead of variable and setting-selected like as in the previous case.
Once a fault report is selected, its heading description will be displayed, showing pre-fault information, fault information and
the distance to the fault. This file can be downloaded to the computer in a CSV format file.
Fault report file retrieval can be performed via serial or Ethernet communications. It must be taken into account that any
settings change in the fault report will produce the removal of all the information stored up to that moment.

6.4.4 DATA LOGGER
The access menu is Actual > Records > Data Logger. Once open, this menu will show a screen containing the
information monitored by the relay according to the settings adjusted at “Setpoint > Product Setup > Data Logger”, where
the user can select which analog channels will be recorded, as well as the sampling rate.
It must be taken into account that any settings change in the data logger will produce the removal of all the information
stored up to that moment.
The data logger screen diagram shows the time during which the displayed values have been obtained.
The upper part of the window shows the time when the oldest sample was taken, as well as the time when the most recent
value was taken.
Figure 6–11: DATA LOGGER
This screen offers the possibility of storing the data logger record obtained for a further analysis, in COMTRADE format.
Data Logger file retrieval can be performed only via Ethernet communications.

7 SECURITY 7.1 ADDING USERS
7 SECURITY 7.1 ADDING USERS

New users can only be added by users that have Administrator Access (or Admin Rights) . The Enable Security check
box located in the Security->User Management window must be enabled.
Remember: (In order to add new users and assign user rights )
• must be logged in with Administrator Permission
• and Enable Security checkbox must be enabled
7.1.1 USER RIGHTS
NOTE: Only Administrators have access to the User Management dialog box.
Following is a list of all of the User Rights Options available to be granted to users, and their functions.
Table 7–1: USER RIGHTS AND FUNCTIONS

RIGHT FUNCTION
If this box is checked when the Administrator exits the User Management dialog box, the program will ask you to
Delete Entry confirm the delete and if the Administrator chooses "yes", then the user whose "Delete Entry" box was checked
will be permanently deleted from the list.
WARNING: When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista F650 Setup Administrator, therefore
Admin.
receiving all of the Administrative rights.
Actual Values When this box is checked, the user will have the ability to view Actual Values and all records excluding event
recorder.
When this box is checked, the user will have access to view and modify Settings (Protection, control, inputs/
Settings outputs and calibration).
Commands When this box is checked, the user will be able to use Commands.
Event Recorder When this box is checked, the user will have access to use Event Recorder.
Force IO When this box is checked, the user will be able to use Force IO application.
When this box is checked, the user will have the ability to view and modify Relay Configuration and Logic
Logic Configuration
Configuration.
Upgrade When this box is checked, the user will have the ability to upgrade firmware, bootware and to upload and
download info files to/from relay.

7.2 CHANGING PASSWORDS 7 SECURITY
7.2CHANGING PASSWORDS
Users will be prompted to change their password after the first successful log in or through clicking Security
from the toolbar, and choose Change Password.
Figure 7–1: CHANGE SECURITY

When the operator enters a new password for the first time, he/she should also enter a personal question that
only they could answer. There is a limit of 50 characters available to enter the personal question. One
example, as in the above diagram, would be "What is my mother's maiden name?". This question will be posed
to the user if the user forgets their password and would like to know what their password was.

7 SECURITY 7.3 ENABLING SECURITY
7.3ENABLING SECURITY
EnerVista UR Setup Security Control is disabled by default. Users don't have to log in through user name and password
after installation and are granted access as Administrator.
Security Control can be enabled through Security from the tool bar when logged on as an Administrator. Click on User
Management and a dialog box will show up.
Figure 7–2: SECURITY ENABLING

Security Control is enabled by checking the ENABLE SECURITY check box. The first time the enable security option is
selected is necessary to close and open EnerVista F650 Setup to start working under security management.

7.4 LOGING INTO ENERVISTA F650 SETUP 7 SECURITY
7.4 LOGING INTO ENERVISTA F650 SETUP

Users have to log on in order to use EnerVista F650 Setup program after Security Control has been enabled. After the start
up of EnerVista F650 Setup, a dialog will pop up asking for user name and password.
Figure 7–3: LOGIN USER

The user name field will display the last log in user name as default, in this example, TestUser. For the first log in session of
any user name, the default password will be "password". User will be prompt to change the password to something else
after the first successfully log in.
Log on can also be done by clicking Security from the toolbar and choose Login New User. User will be prompted with the
same log in dialog box for a different user name and password combination.
In case a user has forgotten about the log in password, the Forgot Password function can be used to retrieve the
password.
Figure 7–4: FORGOT YOUR PASSWORD?

A question, which is pre-set by the user, will be asked. The password will be retrieved for entering the right answer.

8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE 8.1 INTRODUCTION
8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE 8.1INTRODUCTION

This section describes the necessary steps to update the F650 operative system and firmware.
WARNING
BEFORE PERFORMING THE UPDATE PROCEDURE CHECK THAT BOOT AND FIRMWARE VERSION MATCH
FIRMWARE VERSION 1.80 WORKS WITH BOOT VERSION 2.35
The operative system and firmware versions can be seen in the relay main screen: After the text “F650”, appears the relay
firmware version (1.20 in the example), and between parenthesis the boot program version (2.20 in the example), followed
by “ GENERAL ELECTRIC”, the relay model and the default front RS232 port communication parameters.
Figure 8–1: MAIN SCREEN
BOOT CODE RELEASE NOTES

Firmware version 1.60 and higher works with 2.35 boot version. It is mandatory to maintain version compatibility between
firmware and boot code in the update procedure, otherwise the relay will not start after the updating procedure (if the
versions are wrongly matched).
FIRMWARE AND BOOT VERSIONS COMPATIBILITY

FIRMWARE VERSION BOOT VERSION
1.8X 2.35
1.7X 2.35
1.6X 2.35
1.5X 2.30
1.4X 2.30
1.3X 2.30
1.2X 2.20
1.13 2.20
1.11 2.00
1.00 2.00 8
NOTE
The end of this section includes a STEP LIST SUMMARY that will allow the user to control the updating process. It is
necessary to read the whole document before accomplishing the F650 UPDATE PROCEDURE related in these pages.
Notice that boot program and firmware upgrades will erase all the data contained in the relay, thus it is advisable to save
all the data, oscillography, events, settings and configuration files previously.
Backward compatibility of PLC projects, settings and configuration files is not assured for versions older than 1.13.

8.1 INTRODUCTION 8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE
NOTE
RELAYS WITH FIBER OPTIC ETHERNET
The update of the boot program (BOOTCODE) will be performed, obligatorily, by crossed copper cable connected to the
PC. It is not necessary to change the internal switch from fiber to RJ45, because the upgrade it is made at 10Mb/s and
for that reason there is not conflict between copper/fiber optic.
This does not apply to the firmware upgrade, which can be done either via Ethernet Fiber connection, or through the
RJ45 cable connection.
8.1.1 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
Before proceeding with the update process, the following points should be taken into account:
Type of Ethernet connection:
If the relay is connected through a hub or to a switch, a direct 10/100 Base TX Ethernet cable should be used, or with its
fiber optic if the relay is of 100FX Ethernet. Otherwise, a direct connection from the PC to the relay (back-to-back) requires
a crossover 10/100 Base T cable.
It is highly recommended to use a crossover cable to do the update process and do a direct connection from the PC to the
relay instead of being connected through a hub or switch.
Relay IP address:
It is necessary to assign a valid IP address to the relay in the Ethernet parameters via HMI in the “Product Setup >
Communication > Ethernet > Ethernet 1” menu or via EnerVista F650 Setup in “Setpoint > Product Setup>Communication
Settings > Network (Ethernet) 1” as shown in Table 8–1: .
Table 8–1: ETHERNET PARAMETERS

PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >NETWORK (ETHERNET) 1
Name Value Units Range
8 IP Address Oct3
IP Address Oct4
37
240
[0 : 255]
[0 : 255]
Netmask Oct1 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct2 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct3 255 [0 : 255]

8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE 8.1 INTRODUCTION
In the case of relay that has updated previously its Bootcode (Sections 2), the IP address already has been assigned in the
previous process (see figure 8-14).
In both cases, it is necessary to check that there is no other equipment connected with the same IP address in the same
net, to avoid collision.
In case of a back-to-back connection from a PC to the relay (through a crossover Ethernet cable), the IP address of the
relay needs to be compatible with the TCP/IP configuration of the computer.
For example, if the relay settings are:
IP address: 192.168.37.240,
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 and
Gateway: 192.168.37.10.
The computer settings have to follow the model:
IP address: 192.168.37.XXX
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 and
Gateway: 192.168.37.10 (if desired).
XXX is a number between 0 and 255 that is not assigned to any other device to avoid collisions.
If there are not TCP/IP settings according to this model in the computer, it should be added (in order to communicate with
the relay) following these steps:
Go to the Control Panel of the computer and select the Network option (the name of this option may depend on the PC
operative system).
Figure 8–2: NETWORK IN CONTROL PANEL
In Network, enter in Protocols and select TCP/IP protocol by clicking on Properties. 8

8.1 INTRODUCTION 8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE
Figure 8–3: TCP/IP PROPERTIES
In IP address tab, select Advanced... () and add a new address in the PC that corresponds to the same LAN that the relay
has (in the example bellow 192.168.37.54).
Figure 8–4: IP ADDRESS FOR COMPUTER
Windows allows Multihosting, so it permits having as many directions as desired. It is necessary to turn off and on the
computer to activate the new address that has been assigned to the PC.

8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE 8.2 BOOT CODE UPDATE
8.2BOOT CODE UPDATE

Operating system update is performed using EnerVista F650 Setup. For this purpose, it is required that there is no
communication between the program and the relay, and that no configuration file is open.
In this case, menu option Upgrade Operating System will be enabled under the EnerVista F650 Setup Communication
menu.
During the operative system updating process, all the data stored in the relay will be lost, so it is required to save all
calibration, settings, oscillography, etc. from the relay before the upgrade. It is extremely important to save the relay
settings and calibration before continuing with the process. In this step of the updating process if the user do not want to
continue, click on the NO option and no change will be perform to the relay.
Figure 8–5: LOST DATA WARNING MESSAGE
For upgrading the operative system, it is required to connect an RS232 cable to the front of the relay, and an Ethernet cable
to the rear port (COM3). The serial communication parameters will be the ones selected in the Communications >
Computer menu, where the COMX port (the port to be used in the upgrade) must be selected. As regards Ethernet
communication, if the upgrade is to be performed through a hub or switch, it is required to connect the relay to the hub or
switch through a direct 10/100 base T cable.
If the connection is made directly from the PC to the relay it is necessary to use a 10/100 Base T crossover cable. This last
connection will be obligatory for relays with Fiber Optic Ethernet, although it will not be necessary to change the internal
switch. During the upgrade, the system will show the following message indicating the procedure to be followed.
Figure 8–6: SERIAL AND ETHERNET CONNECTIONS FOR BOOT UPDATE
NOTE
To obtain more information about the Relay network configuration, please refer to section “Communication Parameters”

8.2 BOOT CODE UPDATE 8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE
After accepting to proceed, a window will open up for selecting a temporary IP Address for the boot update. It is advisable
to set the IP Address that is going to be used lately in the relay for Ethernet connection.
Figure 8–7: TEMPORARY IP ADDRESS SELECTION FOR BOOT UPDATE
After entering the temporary IP address, a window will open up for selecting the appropriate file from the GE Multilin web
site or Product CD.
Figure 8–8: BOOT FILE SELECTION
Once the appropriate boot program file has been selected, the program will proceed to load and update the relay’s boot
8 memory.
Figure 8–9: LOADING BOOT FILE

8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE 8.2 BOOT CODE UPDATE
After the boot memory loading, the program shows a message requiring turning off and back on the relay while the
progress bar is in course.
Figure 8–10: SWITCH THE RELAY OFF AND ON TO START THE BOOT PROCEDURE
It is important to turn the Relay off and on again during the time shown by the progress bar; in case this time expires, the
program will offer the option to continue with the process or to postpone, verify the correct RS232 connections and try again
later. Notice that the serial port used in the boot update procedure is the one selected in the “Communication>computer“
menu.
Figure 8–11: ERROR MESSAGE FOR COMMUNICATIONS PROBLEMS
If the serial communication between EnerVista F650 Setup and the relay has been successful the program shows a
message to select to update the current version to the new one.
Figure 8–12: UPDATE CURRENT VERSION?
At this moment, selecting “YES” in the “Update current version?” option will start, beginning with the relay flash memory
deletion, so at this point all the information stored in the relay will be lost.
Until now, no important change has been made to the relay, the boot memory updating process has simply been prepared.
The process of flash memory erasing and boot memory file loading can take some minutes, during which a progress bar is
displayed.

8.2 BOOT CODE UPDATE 8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE
Figure 8–13: ERASING FLASH MEMORY
Once the memory has been erased and the files updated in the relay, the parameters for the Ethernet communications
parameters must be assigned (Figure 8–14:). The requested values are the IP address and the gateway
Figure 8–14: ETHERNET PARAMETERS
These values should match the LAN structure in which the relay will be connected.
The gateway must be the one used in the LAN structure connecting the relay. The relay IP address should have the first
three octets corresponding with the Gateway and the last octet must be a free IP address reserved to the relay to avoid
possible collisions with other devices.
After assigning the Ethernet parameters, the update of the boot memory program has been completed successfully .
Figure 8–15: BOOT PROGRAM UPDATED
After boot memory update, the equipment firmware must also be updated (Section 8.3).

8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE 8.3 FIRMWARE VERSION UPDATE
8.3FIRMWARE VERSION UPDATE

The F650 equipment includes a mechanism that allows the update of the internal program called firmware, to new versions
that are periodically published in the GE Multilin web.
The relay settings and configuration will be lost, so it is advisable to save them to a file. For firmware revisions
lower than 1.50, it is required to save calibration settings in a file before updating the F650 to a new firmware
version. In case of versions higher than 1.50, the calibration retrieval process is automatic and it is not necessary to save
them to a file (nevertheless is always advisable to do it). Take into account that if the operative system (bootcode) has been
previously updated, all the data (including calibration settings) would be lost.
In case of error during the firmware updating process, the user could repeat the whole process as many times as
necessary, this is possible thanks to an independent boot memory (bootcode).
The firmware updating process should be done through the EnerVista F650 Setup software, after connecting the relay by
Ethernet port (COM3).
8.3.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE
Once the communication with the relay through Ethernet connection has been verified1, enter the EnerVista F650 Setup
program, select Communication and the Upgrade Firmware Version option.
At this point, proceeding with the update will erase all the data stored in the equipment, including the calibration settings in
firmware version previous to 1.50. Therefore, it is necessary to save all settings to a file before following with the process.
After accepting to proceed, a window will open up for the update parameter for the F650 firmware update process. In
firmware version previous to 1.70 the EnerVista F650 Setup program asked for the IP address of the relay to be updated
and its serial number. In versions 1.70 and higher it is also necessary to enter the ordering code for the relay. See figure
below:
This change is due to the multilingual implementation in F650 devices. See ordering code section in product description
chapter in this manual (section 2.3. )
Figure 8–16: FIRMWARE SELECTION WINDOW
1. Calibration settings should be stored in a file before updating the firmware.

Go to EnerVista F650 Setup main menu “Communication > Calibration > Get Calibration Settings”
Store the file in the PC using the relay serial number, for instance, as the name of the file.

8.3 FIRMWARE VERSION UPDATE 8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE
Once the upgrade parameters have been entered, relay IP address, serial number and ordering code, press the “Upgrade
Firmware” button. When communication has been established, the program will show a message requesting to turn off
and back on the relay to continue with the upgrade process.
Once the relay has been turned off and on again, a new screen allows selecting the folder that contains the firmware
update files (“update.txt” file must be located in this folder). This Update.txt file is located in the folder where the desired
firmware upgrade files are. This firmware update files can be found in the GE Multilin web site.
If the files are downloaded from the web, they are compressed in a zip file. It should be decompressed in a temporary
directory from which the update.txt file will be selected.
Once the Update.txt file is selected, the “Upgrade Firmware” button will be enabled. Press this button to initiate the relay
firmware upgrade process. A voltage range selection window will appear, this voltage range is connected to the serial
number of the relay. The EnerVista F650 Setup program automatically pre-selects the appropriate voltage range for the
unit. If the voltage range is not selected correctly the error in voltage measurements will be 20 %.
Figure 8–17: VOLTAGE RANGE SELECTION
During the process, the program displays the files that are being updated. When the file transfer is finished, a message
appears noticing that it is necessary to wait sometime before resetting the unit, in order to start working with the new
firmware version in the relay. When the whole process has finished a message will be displayed asking to reboot the F650.
At this point, the firmware upgrade procedure is finished and the relay ready to be powered down and back up to check that
the firmware has been upgraded properly.
When upgrading the firmware the entire settings and relay configuration are reset to factory default value.
Once the equipment has been properly checked, the F650 is ready to be used.
Remember that calibration settings and configuration must be loaded to the relay. To recover the relay calibration:
Go to EnerVista F650 Setup main menu:
8 Communication > Calibration > Set calibration Settings to store in the relay the calibration settings if necessary.
File > Config file (*.650) Converter to convert the setting and configuration file *.650 for the relay (if is was in a previous
version format) to the new version (see section in human interfaces in this manual)
File > Send info to relay to send the new settings and configuration file to the unit.

8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE 8.4 STEP LIST SUMMARY FOR VERSIONS 1.70 AND LATER
8.4STEP LIST SUMMARY FOR VERSIONS 1.70 AND LATER
Notice that boot program and firmware upgrade will erase all the data contained in the relay, thus it is advisable
to save all the data, oscillography, events, settings and configuration files previously.
8.4.1 BOOT MEMORY UPDATE (*)
1. NSTALL THE PROPER VERSION OF THE ENERVISTA F650 SETUP PROGRAM.

2. CONNECT AN RS-232 CABLE IN THE FRONT PORT OF THE RELAY AND ETHERNET ONE AT THE REAR
ETHERNET PORT (CROSSOVER CABLE FOR BACK-TO-BACK CONNECTION AND DIRECT ETHERNET CABLE
FOR HUB OR SWITCH).
3. GET CALIBRATION SETTINGS (AND SAVE IT TO A FILE).
4. SAVE ALL THE DATA FROM THE RELAY (SETTINGS, OSCILLOGRAPHY, EVENTS).
5. FROM THE ENERVISTA F650 SETUP PROGRAM SELECT COMMUNICATION/UPGRADE OPERATING SYSTEM.
6. FOLLOW THE INDICATIONS OF THE PROGRAM AND SELECT THE BOOT PROGRAM BIN FILE.
7. WHEN REQUIRED BY THE PROGRAM SWITCH OFF AND BACK ON THE RELAY.
8. CONTINUE WITH THE PROCESS AND SET THE IP ADDRESS AND GATEWAY WHEN REQUIRED.
8.4.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE (*)
1. SET THE APPROPRIATE IP ADDRESS IN THE RELAY.

2. SET THE APPROPRIATE IP ADDRESS IN THE PC.
3. FROM THE ENERVISTA F650 SETUP PROGRAM SELECT “COMMUNICATION/UPGRADE SOFTWARE
VERSION”.
4. ENTER THE IP ADDRESS, SERIAL NUMBER AND ORDERING CODE OF THE RELAY TO UPDATE.
5. WHEN REQUIRED BY THE PROGRAM SWITCH OFF AND BACK ON THE RELAY.
6. LOCATE THE UPDATE.TXT FILE ACCORDING TO THE MODEL OF THE RELAY.
7. PRESS UPGRADE FIRMWARE AND INITIATE THE UPGRADE PROCESS.
8. TO COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE, SWITCH OFF AND BACK ON THE RELAY WHEN REQUIRED BY THE
PROGRAM.
9. SET CALIBRATION SETTINGS (FROM THE PC TO THE RELAY) (for versions lower than 1.50).
10. THE SETTINGS AND CONFIGURATION ARE NOW SET TO FACTORY DEFAULT.
8
11. SEND THE NEW SETTINGS AND CONFIGURATION FILES TO THE RELAY IF NECESSARY.
(*) The boot code upgrade must be performed using a crossed copper cable (RJ45) connected to the PC. It is not
necessary to modify the internal fiber/cable switch, as the upgrade is carried out at 10 Mb/s, and thus there is not cable/
fiber conflict.
This fact does not apply to the firmware upgrade, which can be performed either with the Ethernet fiber
connection, or with the cable connection.

8.4 STEP LIST SUMMARY FOR VERSIONS 1.70 AND LATER 8 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPDATE

9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 VISUAL INSPECTION
9 COMMISSIONING 9.1VISUAL INSPECTION

Verify that the relay has not suffered any damage during transportation, and that all screws are correctly fixed, and all relay
terminal boards are in good condition.
Verify that the information shown on the relay front plate corresponds to the data shown on the display, and to the
requested relay model.
Display information:
Firmware version
F650 X.XX(K.KK) Kernel version
GENERAL ELECTRIC
F650XXXXXXXXX Model
19200N81 MODBUS:254

9.2 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ON THE POWER SUPPLY NETWORK 9 COMMISSIONING
9.2GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ON THE POWER SUPPLY NETWORK

All devices running on AC current are affected by frequency. As a non-senoidal wave is the result of a fundamental wave
plus a series of harmonics from this fundamental wave, it can be deducted that devices running on AC current are
influenced by the applied waveform.
For a correct testing of relays running on AC current, it is fundamental to use a current and/or voltage senoidal waveform.
The pureness of a senoidal wave (lack of harmonics) cannot be expressed specifically for a specific relay. However, any
relay incorporating sintonized circuits, R-L and R-C circuits, will be affected by non-senoidal waveforms, as in the case of
F650.
These relays respond to the voltage waveform in a different way to the majority of AC current voltmeters. If the power
supply network used for the testing contains wide harmonics, the voltmeter and relay responses will be different.
Relays have been calibrated in factory using a Network of 50 or 60 Hz with a minimum harmonic content. When the relay is
tested, a power supply network with no harmonics in its waveform must be used.
The ammeters and chronometers used for testing the pickup current and relay operation time must be calibrated and their
accuracy must be better than the relay’s. The power supply used in the tests must remain stable, mainly in the levels near
the operation thresholds.
It is important to point out that the accuracy with which the test is performed depends on the network and on the
instruments used. Functional tests performed with unsuitable power supply network and instruments are useful to check
that the relay operates properly and therefore its operating characteristics are verified in an approximate manner. However,
if the relay would be calibrated in these conditions, its operational characteristics would be outside the tolerance range
values.
The following sections detail the list of tests for verifying the complete relay functionality.

9 COMMISSIONING 9.3 ISOLATION TESTS
9.3ISOLATION TESTS
During all tests, the screw located on the rear of the relay must be grounded.
For verifying isolation, independent groups will be created, and voltage will be applied as follows:
2200 RMS volts will be applied progressively among all terminals in a group, short-circuited between them and the
case, during one second.
2200 RMS volts will be applied progressively between groups, during one second.
WARNING: No communication circuit shall be tested for isolation.
Groups to be created will depend on the type of modules included in F650, selectable according to the model.
The following table shows the different groups depending on the module type:
SOURCE 1: SOURCE 2: MAGNETIC MODULE.

G1: H10, H18 G1: H1, H9 G1: A5..A12
G2: H13, H14, H15 G2: H4, H5, H6 G2: B1..B12
I/O F1 (MIXED) I/O F2 (SUPERVISION) I/O G1 (MIXED)

G1 (Inp. 1): F1..9 G1 (Spv 1): F1..4 G1 (Inp. 1): G1..9
G2 (Inp. 2): F10..18 G2 (Inp. 1): F5..9 G2 (Inp. 2): G10..18
G3 (Out.): F19..36 G3 (Inp. 2): F10..14 G3 (Out.): G19..36
G4 (Spv 2): F15..18
G5 (Out.): F19..30
G6 (Out.): F31.36

9.4 INDICATORS 9 COMMISSIONING
9.4INDICATORS
Feed the relay and verify that when commanding a LED reset operation, all LED indicators light up and they are turned off
when pressing the ESC key for more than 3 seconds.

9 COMMISSIONING 9.5 POWER SUPLY TESTING
9.5POWER SUPLY TESTING

Feed the relay to the minimum and maximum voltage. For each voltage value, verify that the alarm relay is activated when
there is voltage, and it is deactivated when there is no feed. If the power supply source incorporates AC feed, this test will
be performed also for VAC.
If the relay incorporates a redundant power supply, these tests shall be performed on both power supplies.
Voltage values to be applied will be the ones indicated below according to the relay model:
SUPPLY V MIN. V MAX.
HI/HIR
110-250 Vdc 88 Vdc 300 Vdc
120-230 Vac 96 Vac 250 Vac
LO/LOR
24-48 Vdc 20 Vdc 57.6 Vdc
NOTE: Codes HIR and LOR correspond to a redundant power supply

9.6 COMMUNICATIONS 9 COMMISSIONING
9.6COMMUNICATIONS
Verify that available communication ports allow communication with the relay.
Ports to be checked are as follows:
Front:RS232
Rear:2 x RS485, 2 x Fiber Optic - Serial, 2 x Fiber Optic - Ethernet, 1 x RJ45 - Ethernet.
A computer with EnerVista F650 Setup software and an appropriate connector must be used.

9 COMMISSIONING 9.7 VERIFICATION OF MEASURE
9.7VERIFICATION OF MEASURE
Set the relay as follows
GENERAL SETTINGS
NAME VALUE UNITS RANGE
PHASE CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
GROUND CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
STV GROUND CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
PHASE VT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
PHASE VT CONNECTION WYE N/A WYE – DELTA
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 100 V 0.1 1-250 V
NOMINAL FREQUENCY 50 Hz 1 Hz 50-60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION ABC N/A ABC – ACB
FREQUENCY REFERENCE VI N/A VI-VII-VIII
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE VX N/A VX – VN
NOTE:
ALL ANGLES INDICATED ARE DELAY ANGLES
ALL VALUES OBTAINED IN THIS TEST MUST BE THE ONES CORRESPONDING TO THE DFT
9.7.1 VOLTAGES
Apply the following current and frequency values to the relay:
CHANNEL ANGLE FREQUENCY

50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
VI 0º 0 5 50 100 150 275
VII 120º 0 5 50 100 150 275
VIII 240º 0 5 50 100 150 275
VX 0º 0 5 50 100 150 275
Verify that the relay measures the values with an error of +/-1 % of the applied value plus 0,1% of full scale (275V).
9.7.2 PHASE CURRENTS
Apply the following voltage and frequency values to the relay:

CHANNEL ANGLE FREQUENCY
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
Ia (A) 45º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
Ib (A) 165º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
Ic (A) 285º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
IG(A) 0º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
ISG(A) 0º 0 5 1 0.1 0.01 0.005
9
Verify that the relay measures the values with an error lower than +/-0.5% of the test value or+/- 10 mA, whichever is
greater, for phases and ground.
Verify that the relay measures the values with an error lower than +/-1.5% of the test value or+/- 1 mA, whichever is greater,
for sensitive ground (SG).

9.7 VERIFICATION OF MEASURE 9 COMMISSIONING
9.7.3 ACTIVE, REACTIVE POWER, AND COSϑ METERING
Equations to be applied for powers in a wye connection are as follows:
POWER PER PHASE THREE-PHASE POWER

P=V*I*Cosϕ P=Pa+Pb+Pc
Q=V*I*Senϕ Q=Qa+Qb+Qc
Apply the following current and voltage values:
APPLIED VOLTAGE AND CURRENT VALUES PER PHASE

PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C V-I ANGLES
VI = 50 V, 0º VII = 50 V , 120º VIII = 50V, 240º ϕ=45º
Ia = 10∠45º Ib= 10∠165º Ic = 10∠285º Cosϕ= 0.707
With the indicated voltage and current values, verify that the power measure corresponds to theoretical values indicated in
the following table:
THEORETICAL POWER VALUES

PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C THREE-PHASE
Pa = 353.55 MW Pb = 353.55 MW Pc = 353.55 MW P = 1060.66 MW
Qa = 353.55 MVAr Qb = 353.55 MVAr Qc = 353.55 MVAr Q = 1060.66 MVAr
Maximum admissible error is +/-1% of the test value for P and Q, and 0.02 for cosϕ.
9.7.4 FREQUENCY
Frequency measure on channel VII (terminals A7-A8):

Apply 50 Vac at 50 Hz on channel VII. Maximum admissible error:+/- 10 mHz.
Apply 50 Vac at 60 Hz on channel VII. Maximum admissible error: +/- 12 mHz.
Frequency measure on channel Vx (terminals A11-A12):

Apply 50 Vac at 50 Hz on channel Vx. Maximum admissible error:+/- 10 mHz.
Apply 50 Vac at 60 Hz on channel Vx. Maximum admissible error: +/- 12 mHz.
Results:
CHANNEL VOLTAGE (V) SET FREQUENCY (HZ) MEASURED FREQUENCY (HZ)

9 VII 50 50 Hz
60 Hz
VX 50 50 Hz
60 Hz

9 COMMISSIONING 9.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
9.8INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

During all tests, the screw on the rear of the relay must be grounded.
9.8.1 DIGITAL INPUTS
During this test, the user will determine the activation/deactivation points for every input in the relay for the set voltage value
of 30 Volts.
Verify that the error does not exceed +/- 10% (+10% on activation, -10% on deactivation)
Default board settings for the input test can be modified in EnerVista F650 Setup software in:
Settings>Inputs/Outputs>Contact I/O>Board X
X, will be substituted by the corresponding board:
F for board in first slot
G for board in second slot
H for board in first slot of CIO module
J for board in second slot of CIO module
Test settings for mixed board (type 1:16 inputs and 8 outputs) :
I/O BOARD TYPE 1 (MIXED)

Voltage Threshold A_X 30 V
Voltage Threshold B_X 40 V
Debounce Time A_X 5 ms
Debounce Time B_X 5 ms
Input Type_X_CC1 (CC1) POSITIVE
... ...
The inputs test is completed by groups of 8 inputs, as this type of board has 2 groups of 8 inputs with the same common.
For the first 8 inputs, the voltage threshold setting is determined by Voltage Threshold A. For the next 8 inputs, the setting
is Voltage Threshold B. Inputs (or contact converters, CC1 – CC16) must also be set to POSITIVE.
Test settings for mixed board (type 2: 8 digital inputs, 4 blocks for supervision and 8 outputs) :
I/O BOARD TYPE 2 (SUPERVISION)

Voltage Threshold A_X 30 V
Voltage Threshold B_X 40 V
Debounce Time A_X 5 ms
Debounce Time B_X 5 ms
... ...
9
The inputs test is completed by groups of 4 inputs, as this type of board has 2 groups of 4 inputs with the same common.
For the first 4 inputs, the voltage threshold setting is determined by Voltage Threshold A. For the next 4 inputs, the setting
is Voltage Threshold B. Inputs (or contact converters, CC1 – CC8) must also be set to POSITIVE.
If the relay incorporates more input modules, this test must also be applied to them.

9.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 9 COMMISSIONING
9.8.2 CONTACT OUTPUTS
The correct activation of every output will be verified.

For every output, activation command of a single contact must be given, and then verify that only that contact is activated.
Go to EnerVista F650 Setup Software (Settings>Inputs/Outputs>Force Outputs).
For switched contacts, the change of state of both contacts shall be verified.
9.8.3 CIRCUIT CONTINUITY SUPERVISION INPUTS
Supervision inputs will be tested as normal inputs, revising the voltage level that will be 19 Volts.
Coil 1:
Apply 19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F1-F2) and 52/b (terminals F3-F4)”Coil 1” circuit supervision inputs and verify that
they are activated.
Apply -19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F1-F2) and 52/b (terminals F3-F4)”Coil 1” circuit supervision inputs and verify
that they are activated.
Remove voltage from both inputs and verify that it takes them 500 ms to change state (deactivate).
Coil 2:
Apply 19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F15-F16) and 52/b (terminals F17-F18)”Coil 2” circuit supervision inputs and
verify that they are activated.
Apply -19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F15-F16) and 52/b (terminals F17-F18)”Coil 2” circuit supervision inputs and
verify that they are activated.
Remove voltage from both inputs and verify that it takes them 500 ms to change state (deactivate).
9.8.4 LATCHING CIRCUITS
Send a closing command to the latched contact (F31-F33).
Make circulate a current of 200 mA through the contact in series with the sensing terminal.
Send an opening command and verify that the contact does not open.
Interrupt current and check than the contact is released.
200
9
I
Repeat the test for the other latched contact (F34-F36).

9 COMMISSIONING 9.9 CONNECTIONS FOR TESTING PROTECTION ELEMENTS
9.9CONNECTIONS FOR TESTING PROTECTION ELEMENTS

Connect current sources to the relay according to the wiring diagram. Current and voltage input terminals are as follows:
PHASE CONNECTIONS
Current
IA B1-B2
IB B3-B4
IC B5-B6
IG B9-B10
ISG B11-B12
Voltage
VI A5-A6
VII A7-A8
VIII A9-A10
VX A11-A12

9.10 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH, 50PL, 50N, 50G Y 50SG) 9 COMMISSIONING
9.10INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH, 50PL, 50N, 50G Y 50SG)

Set the relay to trip for the protection element being tested. Configure any of the outputs to be activated only by the
protection element being tested.
Apply 0.9 times the Pickup current and check that the relay does not trip.
Gradually increase the current value and verify that the relay operates between 1 and 1.1 times the set pickup current. The
relay must trip by instantaneous in a time frame of 10 to 55 ms. All the relay trip contacts must operate, as well as the
contact set as 50.
Remove current and apply it again suddenly to a value of 4 times the pickup current. The relay should trip instantaneously
in a time frame of 10 to 45 ms.
Test one point for each phase and group of the protection element.
50 ELEMENTS TEST PARAMETERS
Element Settings (50PH, 50PL, 50G y 50SG)

Setting Value Units
Function Enabled
Input RMS NA
Pickup Level 3 A
Delay time 0 Seconds
Test Execution
Configure one output for 50 Trip
Apply times I pickup Element Trip Tripping times (ms)
0.9 x Pickup NO NA
1.1 x Pickup YES 10-55
4 x Pickup YES 10-45
Elements Phase Group
50PH and 50PL IA 0
IB 0
IC 0
50G IG 0
50SG ISG 0

9 COMMISSIONING 9.11 INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G Y 46)
9.11INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G Y 46)

Apply 0.9 times the Pickup current and check that the relay does not trip.
Apply 1.5 times the Pickup current. The relay should trip according to the time corresponding to its set curve.
Apply 5 times the Pickup current. The relay should trip according to the time corresponding to its set curve.
PROTECTION ELEMENT SETTINGS (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G AND 46)

SETTING VALUE UNIT
FUNCTION ENABLED
INPUT PHASOR (DFT)
PICKUP LEVEL 1 A
CURVE MODIFY FOR EACH TEST
TD MULTIPLIER MODIFY FOR EACH TEST
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT DISABLED
ELEMENT PHASE CURVE TYPE DIAL TIMES TRIPPING TIMES (SEC)
IPICKUP
THEORETICA ADMISSIBLE
L
51PH IA IEEE Ext Inv 0.5 0.9 NA
1.5 11.34 [11.00 – 11.60]
5 0.648 [0.600 – 0.710]
IB IEC Curve A 0.05 0.9 NA
1.5 0.860 [0.750 – 0.950]
5 0.214 [0.200 – 0.300]
51PL IC IEEE Ext Inv 0.5 0.9 NA
1.5 11.34 [11.00 – 11.60]
5 0.648 [0.600 – 0.710]
IB IEC Curve A 0.05 0.9 NA
1.5 0.860 [0.750 – 0.950]
5 0.214 [0.200 – 0.300]
51N IC IEEE Ext Inv 0.5 0.9 NA
1.5 11.34 [11.00 – 11.60]
5 0.648 [0.600 – 0.710]
51G IG Definite Time 2 0.9 NA
5 2.000 [1.900 – 2.100]
46 I2 IEC Curve A 0.05 0.9 NA
1.5 0.860 [0.750 – 0.950]
5 0.214 [0.200 – 0.300]

9.12 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG) 9 COMMISSIONING
9.12DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG)

In order to test directional units in the relay, instantaneous trips will be commanded.
Two points will be tested, per phase, test element.
The factory default configuration of the relay makes the overcurrent elements be supervised by directional units. This way,
if the directional element is enabled and detects the fault in the block direction, then the overcurrent unit will not operate. If
the directional element is not enabled or if it is enabled and it detects a fault in a trip direction, then the overcurrent unit will
operate if the set current level is exceeded.
9.12.1 67P ELEMENT
Activate only protection elements 50PH and 67P and set the relay as follows:
67P Settings 50PH Settings

Function ENABLED Function ENABLED
MTA 45 Deg Input PHASOR (DFT)
Direction FORWARD Pickup Level 0.50 A
Block Logic PERMISSION Trip Delay 0.30
Pol V Threshold 30 V Reset Delay 0.00
Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50PH.

Apply the following tests:
ELEMENTS PHASE UNDER TEST POLARIZATION PHASE ELEMENT TRIP

CHANNE MAGNITUDE CHANNEL MAGNITUDE
L MOD ARG MOD ARG
50PH/67P IA 2A 0º VIII 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
IB 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
IC 2A 0º VII 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
9.12.2 67N ELEMENT
Activate only protection elements 50N and 67N and set the relay as follows:
67N Settings 50N Settings
MTA -45 Deg Input PHASOR (DFT)
9 Direction FORWARD Pickup Level 0.50 A
Polarization VO Trip Delay 0.30
Block Logic PERMISSION Reset Delay 0.00
Pol V Threshold 10 V
Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50G.

9 COMMISSIONING 9.12 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG)

L
MOD ARG MOD ARG
50N/67N IA 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
IB 0A 0º VII 0V 0º
IC 0A 0º VIII 0V 0º
9.12.3 67G ELEMENT
Activate only protection elements 50G and 67G and set the relay as follows:
67G SETTINGS 50G SETTINGS

Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50G.


L MOD ARG MOD ARG
50G/67G IG 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
VII 0V 0º
VIII 0V 0º

9.12 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG) 9 COMMISSIONING
9.12.4 67SG ELEMENT
Activate only protection elements 50SG and 67SG and set the relay as follows:
67SG SETTINGS 50SG SETTINGS

Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50SG.


L MOD ARG MOD ARG
50SG/67SG ISG 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
VII 0V 0º
VIII 0V 0º

9 COMMISSIONING 9.13 UNDERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (27P, 27X)
9.13UNDERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (27P, 27X) 9.13.1 27P ELEMENT
Set the relay as follows:
PHASE UV (27P)
Function ENABLED
Mode PHASE-GROUND
Pickup Level 50 V
Curve DEFINITE TIME
Delay 2.00 sec
Minimum Voltage 30 V
Logic ANY PHASE
Supervised by 52 DISABLED
Apply voltage as indicated on the table over the undervoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Decrease voltage level gradually and verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
ELEMENT PHASE CURVE PICKUP DELAY APPLIED TRIPPING TIMES (S)

LEVEL VOLTAGE
L
27P VI DEFINITE 50 V 2 55 V NO TRIP NA
TIME
45 V 2.000 sec [2.000 – 2.100]
9.13.2 27X ELEMENT
AUXILIARY UV (27X)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 50 V
Curve DEFINITE TIME
Delay 2.00 sec
Apply voltage as indicated on the table over the undervoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Decrease voltage level gradually and verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
ELEMENT INPUT CURVE PICKUP DELAY APPLIED TRIPPING TIME (S)

LEVEL VOLTAGE
L
27X VX DEFINITE
TIME
50 V 2 55 V
45 V
NO TRIP
2.000 sec
NA
[2.000 – 2.100]
9

9.14 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47) 9 COMMISSIONING
9.14OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47) 9.14.1 59P ELEMENT
PHSE OV (59P)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
Logic ANY PHASE
Apply voltage as indicated on the table under the overvoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
ELEMENT PHASE PICKUP LEVEL TRIP DELAY APPLIED TRIPPING TIME (S)
(VOLTS) (SECONDS) VOLTAGE (V)
L
59P VII 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]
9.14.2 59X ELEMENT
GENERAL SETTINGS
Auxiliary Voltage VX
AUXILIARY OV (59P)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
Logic ANY PHASE
9 ELEMENT INPUT PICKUP LEVEL TRIP DELAY

(VOLTS) (SECONDS)
APPLIED
VOLTAGE (V)
TRIPPING TIME (S)
L
59X VX 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]

9 COMMISSIONING 9.14 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47)
9.14.3 59NH AND 59NL ELEMENTS
Set the relay as follows
GENERAL SETTINGS
Auxiliary Voltage VN
NEUTRAL OV HIGH/LOW (59NH/59NL)

Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
ELEMENTS INPUT PICKUP LEVEL TRIP DELAY APPLIED TRIPPING TIME (S)
(VOLTS) (SECONDS) VOLTAGE (V) THEORETICA ADMISSIBLE
L
59NH/59NL VX 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]
This element can also be tested by applying only phase voltages. For this purpose, it is necessary to set Auxiliary Voltage =
VX. In this condition, Vn voltage is calculated as a sum of the phase voltages.

9.14 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47) 9 COMMISSIONING
9.14.4 47 ELEMENT - NEG SEQ OV
NEG SEQ OV (47)

Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 50 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
CHANNEL APPLIED VOLTAGE (V) ANGLE TRIPPING TIME (S)

THEORETICAL ADMISSIBLE
VI 65 0º NO TRIP NA
VII 65 120º
VIII 65 240º
VI 55 0º 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
VII 55 240º
VIII 55 120º
VI 45 0º NO TRIP NA
VII 45 240º
VIII 45 120º
NOTE: All angles mentioned on the tables are delay angles, where a balanced ABC system would be composed by:
CHANNEL APPLIED VOLTAGE (V) ANGLE
VI 65 0º
VII 65 120º
VIII 65 240º

9 COMMISSIONING 9.15 FREQUENCY ELEMENTS (81O/81U)
9.15FREQUENCY ELEMENTS (81O/81U)

GENERAL SETTINGS
Nominal Frequency 50 Hz
ELEMENT SETTINGS
FREQUENCY (81) 81U 81O
Function ENABLED ENABLED
Pickup Level 47.50 Hz 52.50 Hz
Trip Delay 2.00 sec 2.00 sec
Reset Delay 0.00 sec 0.00 sec
Minimum Voltage 30 V 30 V
Apply voltage as indicated on the table, modifying frequency from the maximum threshold (48 Hz) to the minimum (46 Hz)
for 81U, and from the minimum (52 Hz) to the maximum (54 Hz) for 81O, in steps of 10 mHz.
Verify that the relay trips at the set frequency in the corresponding element with an error of 3% ó +/-50 mHz.
Apply a voltage that is lower than the “Minimum Voltage” setting, with a frequency under (81U) or over (81O) the setting,
and verify that the relay does not trip.
ELEMENTS PHASE PICKUP LEVEL TRIP DELAY APPLIED FREQUENCY TRIPPING TIME (S)
(HZ) (SECONDS) VOLTAGE (V) THRESHOLDS
L
81U VII 47.5 2 80 48 Hz No trip NA
46 Hz 2 [1.9 –2.2]
25 46 Hz No trip NA
81 O VII 52.5 2 80 52 Hz No trip NA
54 Hz 2 [1.9 –2.2]
25 54 Hz No trip NA

9.16 RECLOSER (79) 9 COMMISSIONING
9.16RECLOSER (79)
Set protection element 79 as follows:
RECLOSER
Function ENABLED
Max Number Shots 4
Dead Time 1 2.10 sec
Reclaim Time 3.00 sec
Cond. Permission ENABLED
Hold Time 7.00 sec
Reset Time 5.00 sec
Set the relay to trip by 50PH
50PH SETTINGS
Function ENABLED
Input RMS
Pickup Level 3A
Trip Delay 0.00 s
Reset Delay 0.00 s
9.16.1 RECLOSING CYCLE
Connect a latching relay simulating the breaker managed by the F650 unit.
Once the relay is set, close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds.
After this time, the recloser is ready to initiate the reclosing cycle.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 2.1 seconds.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the recloser passes to Lockout.
Verify the correct operation of programmed outputs
Tripping times must be within the following values:
Reclosing Cycle
9 Nº shot
1
Theoretical time
2.1 sec
Admissible time
[1.8 – 2.3]
2 4.1 sec [3.8 – 4.3]
3 6.1 sec [5.8 – 6.3]
4 8.1 sec [7.8 – 8.3]

9 COMMISSIONING 9.16 RECLOSER (79)
9.16.2 RECLOSER STATUSES
BLOCK
Activate the block input and verify that the recloser is in BLOCK status.
Close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds.
Command a trip and verify that the breaker opens but there is no reclose.
INHIBITION BY RECLOSING CONDITIONS

Command a trip, verify that the breaker opens and wait for the first shot.
Activate the inhibition input and command a new trip.
Verify that the breaker opens, wait for 8 seconds and verify that the relay does not reclose.
9.16.3 EXTERNAL RECLOSE INITIATION

Activate the reclose initiation input and open the breaker, verify that the relay executes the first shot

9.17 THERMAL IMAGE ELEMENT (49) 9 COMMISSIONING
9.17THERMAL IMAGE ELEMENT (49)

Disable all protection elements except for Thermal Model (49).
Set the pickup level to 2 A.
Set the time constant τ1 to 3 minutes and τ2 t0 one time τ1.
Apply currents of 2, 5, and 10 times the tap and ensure that the operation times are within the range described on the
following table:
RATED CURRENT (A) APPLIED CURRENT (A) TIMES DE SET TAP OPERATION TIME (S)
4.0 2 48.5 - 53.6
5 10.0 5 7.06 - 7.80
20.0 10 1.77 - 1.95
After each measure, the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status
condition.
Repeat the test selecting a time constant τ1 of 60 minutes. Verify that the operation time is within the range described on
the following table:
RATED CURRENT (A) APPLIED CURRENT (A) TIMES DE SET TAP OPERATION TIME (S)
4.0 2 960 - 1072
5 10.0 5 141 - 156
20.0 10 35.4 - 39
After each measure, the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status
condition.

10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 10.1 EXAMPLE1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS PROCEDURE
10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 10.1EXAMPLE1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS PROCEDURE
10.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EXERCISE
The requirements for this setting exercise are:

Communicate the relay via serial cable or Ethernet 10/100 Base T cable using F650 PC program.
Set some Phase Time Overcurrent protection function to operate at 5A , Inverse curve IEC, Dial 0.1
Set some Output contact on board F to be operated and sealed by the operation of the phase TOC.
Set some LED to show the operation of the phase TOC
Set some Operation to reset the output contact after dropout of the phase TOC since the front F1 pushbutton.
Set some Oscillography channel to record the pickup of phase TOC and output contact closing action.
To test the operation of this Phase Time Overcurrent protection
10.1.2 PROCEDURE TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE RELAY
This procedure describes the connection between any Laptop and some F650 relay using the EnerVista 650 SETUP
program
For any one of these connections check first the communication parameters as follows:
Serial Communication (RS232 front port of the relay)

With the ESC key check on the main front screen the serial communication parameters (Baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bit
and ID number).
Connect the serial cable PC-F650
Open the EnerVista 650 SETUP program in the PC and under Communication ⇓ Computer menu check that the serial
communication parameters displayed are the same read in the front of the relay. Check also that:
Control Type is set to No Control Type
Startup Mode is set toCommunicate with relay
Click ON key.
Ethernet LAN (10/100 Base T rear port of the relay)
In the Laptop choose My PC-Control Panel-Network-Protocols-Protocol TCP/IP-Advance and set in IP Address
screen the following:
IP Address 192.168.37.126
Netmask 255.255.255.0
In the front of F650 relay and pressing the ESC key display the Main Settings screen.
Move clockwise the rotating knob to choose Change Settings and press down the rotating knob.
Choose Comm Settings and press down the rotating knob.
Choose Network 0 and press down the rotating knob. It will be displayed IP Address OCT 1 and set it according to the
following table:
SEQUENCE
ACTION
----
SETTING
IP Address OCT 1
ACTION
Set to 192 with rotating knob and press it down
10
Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 2 Set to 168 with rotating knob and press it down

10.1 EXAMPLE1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS PROCEDURE 10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES
Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 1 Set to 255 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise Netway IP OCT 1 Leave default setting without any change
Move rotating knob clockwise Press INTRO Press down the rotating knob to validate settings
Press ESC key once.

Move rotating knob counterclockwise to General Settings and press it down. General Settings 0 will be displayed now.
Press rotating knob down again.
Set ModBus Port Number to 502 and press rotating knob down.
Move counterclockwise the rotating knob to find ModBus Address COM1 and press it down.
Set ModBus Address COM1 to 254 with the rotating knob and then press it down.
Move clockwise the rotating knob to find Press Intro to End and press it down to validate the setting.
Connect a crossover 10/100 MB Ethernet cable from PC to the relay.
Open the EnerVista 650 SETUP program in the PC and under Communication ⇓ Computer menu and set:
IP Address 192.168.37.125
Port 502
Unit Identifier 254
Control Type to ModBus/TCP
Startup Mode to Communicate with relay
Click ON key.
The program will start connection with the relay showing the progress screen.
10

10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 10.1 EXAMPLE1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS PROCEDURE
10.1.3 PROCEDURE TO SET THE PROTECTION FUNCTION
Once the relay has been connected set protection functions and outputs according to the following steps:
Open EnerVista 650 SETUP program and under:
SETPOINT ⇓ SYSTEM SETUP ⇒ ⇓ GENERAL SETTINGS
NAME VALUE
Phase CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Ground CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Phase VT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Phase VT Connection Wye
Nominal Voltage 100.0 (default)
Nominal Frequency 50
Phase Rotation ABC
Frequency Reference VI (default)
Auxiliary Voltage VX (default)
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ELEMENTS ⇒ ⇓ PHASE CURRENT ⇒ ⇓ PHASE TOC HIGH ⇒ PHASE TOC HIGH 1
NAME VALUE
Function Enabled
Input Phasor DFT
Pickup Level 5.0 A
Curve IEC Curve A
TD Multiplier 0.1
Reset Instantaneous
Voltage Restraint Disabled
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ CONTROL ELEMENTS ⇒ INPUTS/OUTPUTS ⇒ BOARD F
NAME VALUE
Output Logic_00_00 Positive
Output Type_00_00 Latch
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OUTPUTS
SELECT NAME SOURCE OR
Contact Output Operate 00 (Board F) C Output Oper_00_00 PRESS FOR LOGIC £
Phase TOC A Op
Phase TOC B Op
Phase TOC C Op
Contact Output Reset 00 (Board F) C Output Reset_00_00 Operation bit 000
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ LEDS 10
SELECT NAME SOURCE

10.1 EXAMPLE1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS PROCEDURE 10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES
£ Led 5 C Output Op 00 C Output_00_00

Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OPERATIONS
Select£ Operation 0
Command TextReset C Output 00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks---
Final State TypeNone
Final States---
Frontal KeyF1
Contact InputNone
Virtual OutputNone
Time Out500 (default)
MMI---
Com1---
Com 2---
ETH-Master 1---
ETH Master 2---
ETH Master 3---
ETH Mastef 4---
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OSCILLOGRAPHY
SELECT NAME SOURCE
£ Digital Channel 1 C Output Op_00_00 C Output Oper_00_00
£ Digital Channel 2 C Output_00_00 C Output_00_00
10.1.4 TEST
Apply 7.5 A in phase A (terminals B1-B2) until contact 00 on Board F operates (terminals F19-F21 should be and remain
closed), and LED 5 should be lit. Check that operating time is in the order of 1.7 seconds.
Remove current from terminals B1-B2
Press pushbutton F1 and check that contact 00 on Board F has been open.
Check that LED 5 in the front of the relay has been turned off.
Repeat the process for phase B (terminals B3-B4) and for phase C (terminals B5-B6)
Under Actual ⇓ Waveform Capture menu retrieve the last oscillography recording stored, open it using GE_OSC program
and check that the two digital signals as well as the current signal were kept.
10

10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 10.2 EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION + RECLOSING SETTINGS PROCEDURE
10.2EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION + RECLOSING SETTINGS PROCEDURE
The purpose of this exercise is to introduce the F650 User about the way to set a protection scheme including:
Trip operation of a phase time overcurrent protection.
Two reclosing shots with successful fault clearing.
Synchronism check action to verify two ends voltage conditions previous to perform each reclosing action.
10.2.2 PROCEDURE TO COMMUNICATE THE RELAY
This procedure is described in Example Nº 1. Therefore check the actual PC communication status to assure a fast and
reliable communication with F650 relay.
10.2.3 PROCEDURE TO SET THE PROTECTION FUNCTION
This procedure is fully described in paragraph 13.3 (see Example Nº 1). Therefore it is not necessary to explain it here
again except about the small modifications required for the actual exercise, as well the additional settings not used until
now (i.e. recloser and synchrocheck).
Therefore, by having the F650 set like in the previous exercise (paragraph 13), the new settings and changes to be done in
the relay to work in a protection-reclosing scheme are:
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ⇒ ELEMENTS BREAKER ⇒ ⇓ BREAKER SETTINGS
NAME VALUE
Number of Switchgear 1
Under
NAME VALUE
Voltage Threshold B_00 80V
Debounce Time B_00 10 ms
Input Type_00_00 (CC1) Positive
Delay Input Time_00_00 (CC1) 0 ms
Output Type_00_00 Normal
Pulse Output Time_00_00 500 ms
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ PROTECTION ELEMENTS
SELECT SOURCE OR
AR Initiate PRESS FOR LOGIC £
Phase TOC A Op
Phase TOC B Op
Phase TOC C Op
AR Conds Input Synch Close Perm
10

10.2 EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION + RECLOSING SETTINGS PROCEDURE 10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES
10.2.4 PROCEDURE TO SET THE RECLOSER
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ELEMENTS ⇒ ⇓ OTHER FUNCTIONS⇒ ⇓ RECLOSER
NAME VALUE
Function Enabled
Max. Number of shots 2
Dead Time 1 2.0s
Dead Time 2 4.0s
Dead Time 3 ---
Dead Time 4 ---
Reclaim Time 0.05s
Condition Permission Enabled
Hold Time 0.1s
Reset Time 1.9s
10.2.5 PROCEDURE TO SET THE SYNCHRO CHECK
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ELEMENTS ⇒ ⇓ OTHER FUNCTIONS ⇒ ⇓ SYNCHROCHECK
The synchrocheck function and its permission to close is a condition in the present exercise to allow the recloser to give the
different programmed shots. Should not this condition be required these settings are non relevant, but if does like in the
present case the synchrocheck function must be set as follows
NAME VALUE
Function Enabled
Dead Bus Level 10V
Live Bus Level 50V
Dead Line Level 10V
Live Line Level 50V
Max. Volt Difference 10
Max. Angle Difference 10º
Max. Freq. Difference 20mHz
Breaker Closing Time 0.07s
DL-DB Function Disabled
LL-DB Function Disabled
DL-LB Function Disabled
Additional Comments on Scheme

The programmed operation of a TOC protection with reclosing and synchrocheck features for the F650 relay is shown in .
Some conclusions follows:
The recloser cycle ends at lockout status since a permanent fault remains after two unsuccessful reclosing trials.
The holding time for reclosing conditions can be very low since the processor internal time to check them is instantaneously
if they are present at this moment. Depending in the application reclosing conditions might come later especially when
commands are sent from dispatching center. If does then this timing must be set properly.
10

10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 10.2 EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION + RECLOSING SETTINGS PROCEDURE
The F650 trip contact over-travel is the time the contact remains closed for some definite time to assure the tripping action
of the breaker, specially in CB’s with large tripping times (bulk or other CB’s). This time delay has been set in group
To test the reclosing scheme one current and two voltages signals equipment with phase and frequency shifting capability
must be used. The current source must be switched OFF and ON in the time ranges described in the scheme
Example Nº 2
F650 Tripping and Reclosing Scheme
2 Shots followed by Permanent Fault
Contact Overtravel (timed)
Contact Overtravel (timed)

Overcurrent Condition
Recloser to Lockout
CB Open-52/b closed
CB Open-52/b closed
CB Open-52/b closed
Contact Overtravel
Recloser 1st Shot

Recloser 1st Shot
(Definitive Trip)
51 Trip
51 Trip
51 Trip
Hold time Hold time
2s -1st Shot time

1.7s 0.35s 1.7s 0.35s
1.7s 0.35s treset 4s - 2nd Shot time
treset
0.15s 0.2s
0.2s
0.15s
0.15s
Figure 10–1:
10

10.3 EXAMPLE Nº 3 – PROCEDURE TO SET AN OPERATION IN THE F650 RELAY 10 APPLICATION
EXAMPLES
10.3EXAMPLE Nº 3 – PROCEDURE TO SET AN OPERATION IN THE F650 RELAY
This simple operation describes how to program and set an operation command on the F650 relay. In the present case the
operation is:
To configure some F650 output contact to be operated since the front of the relay.
To set some LED to show the operation of the output contact (while being closed).
To close a F650 output contact using a front key pushbutton.
To reset the output contact and LED using another front key pushbutton.
10.3.2 PROCEDURE
Set the following values:
Under
NAME VALUE
Output Type_00_00 Latch
Pulse Output Time 10000ms *
* This setting is non-relevant since it applies only when “pulse” type is chosen
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OUTPUTS
SELECT NAME SOURCE

£ Contact Output Operate 00 (Board F) C_Output Oper_00_00 Operation_bit000
£ Contact Output Reset 00 (Board F) C_Output Reset_00_00 Operation_bit001
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ LEDS
SELECT NAME SOURCE

£ Led 14 Close Contact_00_00 C_Output_00_00
10

10 APPLICATION EXAMPLES10.3 EXAMPLE Nº 3 – PROCEDURE TO SET AN OPERATION IN THE F650 RELAY
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OPERATIONS
Select £ Operation 0
Command Text Close C_Output_00_00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks ---
Final State Type None
Final States ---
Frontal Key F2
Contact Input None
Virtual Output None
Time Out 500 (default)
MMI ---
Com1 ---
Com 2 ---
ETH-Master 1 ---
ETH Master 2 ---
ETH Master 3 ---
ETH Mastef 4 ---
In the same window (next rows)
Select £ Operation 1
Command Text Reset C_Output_00_00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks ---
Final State Type None
Final States ---
Frontal Key F1
Contact Input None
Virtual Output None
Time Out 500 (default)
MMI ---
Com1 ---
Com 2 ---
ETH-Master 1 ---
ETH Master 2 ---
ETH Master 3 ---
ETH Mastef 4 ---
10

10.3 EXAMPLE Nº 3 – PROCEDURE TO SET AN OPERATION IN THE F650 RELAY 10 APPLICATION
EXAMPLES
10.3.3 TEST
In the main front screen press F2 key.

A message showing “Press Intro to Confirm Key →F2←” will be displayed.
Press down the rotary knob.
Check that contact_00_00 (board F) has been closed.
Check that the front LED 14th is lit.
In the main front screen press F1 key.
A message showing “Press Intro to Confirm Key →F1←” will be displayed.
Press down the rotary knob.
Check that contact_00_00 (board F) has been opened.
Check that the front LED 14th has been switched off
10

11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 11.1 COMMUNICATIONS
11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 11.1COMMUNICATIONS

Q1 Does the F650 support DNP and ModBus over the Ethernet port? 11
A1 F650 units support both protocols over both the asynchronous serial ports and the Ethernet LAN synchronous port
using TCP/IP and UDP/IP layers over the Ethernet.
Q2 Does this equipment support dual IP access?

A1 Yes, it supports two independent IP addresses in aliasing mode. Those address go in the communications settings
Network0 and Network1.
Q3 Is the protocol IEC 870-103 supported by the F650?

A3 At this moment it is not supported.
Q4 Can the F650 be used as a DNP master station?

A4 Not at this moment. It works as a slave IED station for all protocols.
Q5 How many communication ports are included in the F650?

A5 The equipment has 2 different boards, one for asynchronous serial ports and another for a high-speed synchronous
Ethernet port. The first board has 2 comm ports, COM1 and COM2. COM2 is multiplexed with the front serial RS232
port, whereas the COM1 port is completely independent from COM2.
The synchronous LAN port is COM3.
Q6 Are there one or two Ethernet ports?

A6 The equipment has only 1 Ethernet port. For redundant fiber optic versions, redundancy is done at the physical level
(fiber optic) but there is just one port.
Q7 How many different communication Ethernet sessions can be opened through the LAN port?
A7 ModBus TCP/IP:4 sockets
DNP TCP/IP:3 sessions (from version 1.72 on)
Q8 Does it support peer-to-peer horizontal communications? Is this going to interface with UR relays?
A8 It is not included in the present release.
Q9 May I use the cooper 10/100 BaseTX connection included in the basic model with all protocols?
A9 Yes, it may be used with all protocols. In noisy substation environments and/or long distances, it is recommended to
use fiber optic options due to much better EMC performance and immunity. For fiber optic models, it is necessary to
adjust an internal jumper to use the copper port.
Q10 Remote I/O CAN bus. Does it support DeviceNet protocol?

A10 No it does not support DeviceNet.
Q11: Which functions are available in the relay web server?

A11 Currently, it includes several functions for viewing measures and retrieving information.

11.1 COMMUNICATIONS 11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q12: What is the web site user password and name?
11 A12: The password is: 7169 and user name is: GE
Q13: May I use URPC to program the relay?

A13 Only oscillography records may be viewed with URPC once downloaded to a file using the ENERVISTA F650
SETUP software.
Q14: May I connect URs and F650s to the same Ethernet?

A14: Yes, either in cable as in fiber, or even mix them.
Q15: How do I connect with fiber 10-BASE-FL UR relays with 100-BASE-FX F650 relays?
A15: Take into account that an UR is never connected directly to a F650 (neither two UR nor two F650 with each other)
but they are always connected through a hub or switch. The hub or switch where the URs are connected must be
10-BASE-FL and the hub or switch for the F650 must be 100-BASE-FX.
Q16: How do I connect with cable 10_BASE-T UR relays with 10/100-BASE-TX F650 relays?
A16: The answer to this question is as described before but also in this case there is an advantage added, because the
hub 10-BASE-TX port is able to understand a 10-BASE-T port. This means that a hub 10-BASE-T port may be
connected to an UR or a F650, and a hub 10/100-BASE-TX port may be connected either to an UR or F650.
Q17: What happens with fiber optic connectors compatibility, because the hub that I have has a different
connector to the one of the F650, although both are 100-BASE-FX?
A17: Just buy fiber cables with the appropriate male connectors. For the UR and F650 side we need the same
connectors, ST type, for the hub side, the correspondent ones. And in what concerns to the fiber type, it is used the
same for 10 as for 100, it is the 50/125 or 62.5/125 multimode, this last one allows longer distances.
Q18: What is the difference between a hub and a switch?

A18: In a repeater type hub (shared hub), one unit talks and the rest listen. If all the units are talking at the same time
there may be collisions in the messages, what may produce certain communication delays.
The switch (switched hub) has very powerful processors and a lot of memory and it is much more expensive than
the hub. It directs messages to the proper destination avoiding collisions and allowing a much more efficient
communication.
Q19: Why do we have 10/100 compatibility for cable but not for fiber?
A19: The cable has some advantages that the fiber does not have, and it is that the signal attenuation in short and
medium distances, is worthless and this is truth for low and high frequency signals. By the contrary, the light in one
fiber optic is highly attenuated, being much worse in case of high frequencies than in the low ones. The 10-BASE-FL
fiber transmission is performed in a wavelength of 850nm, what allows a less expensive electronic than the 1300 nm
used in 100-BASE-FX fiber transmission. Using, in both cases, the same glass multimode fiber type, the attenuation
to 1300 nm is lower than the 850 nm ones, this way the greater attenuation of the 100 Mbits is compensated. There
is another fiber standard, the 100-BASE-SX, which uses 850 nm to 100 Mbits, being compatible with the 10-BASE-
FL one, although it sacrifices the maximum distance to 300 m. Nowadays, this standard has not had success among
Ethernet equipment manufacturers and suppliers.

11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 11.2 PROTECTION
11.2PROTECTION
Q1 Does the F650 support IRIG-B signals? Which type and accuracy? How many units may be connected to the
same source?
11
A1 Yes, the F650 includes an IRIG-B input for all models, including the basic ones.
It uses DC level format B. Formats used are B0000, B0002 and B0003.
Actual accuracy is 1 millisecond. Internal sampling rate allows true 1 ms accuracy time tagging.
The input burden is very low. The maximum number of units that may be connected to a generator depends on its
output driving capability. Up to 60 units have been successfully connected with equipments commonly used in the
market.
Q2 Does the equipment work with dry inputs in both AC and DC?
A2 The equipment works only with DC inputs.
Inputs should be driven with externally generated DC current. No special 48 Vdc or other outputs are included in the
equipment to drive these inputs; therefore, contacts connected to the equipment should be connected to a DC
source.
Q3 Is this equipment valid for Petersen coil grounded systems and ungrounded systems?
A3 The 5th current input is a very sensitive unit that measures from 5 mA up to 1.5 A, that is used for these systems.
The present release includes 67SG (sensitive ground) as well as 67IG (isolated ground for ungrounded systems).
Petersen Coil 67PC unit will be included in future releases that will only need firmware update.
Q4 Is oscillography programmable?
A4 Yes, the sampling rate is programmable (4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 samples per input). The depth will depend on the
sampling rate.
Q5 Do I have to select a different model for 1 or 5 A?

A5 No. The same model is able to work with either /1 A or /5 A rated secondary currents. There are high accuracy
sensing transformers that allow the use of any current input through the same terminals to reduce the spares and
simplify wiring.
Q6 In my installation, several digital inputs become active when I energize the transformer. How can I reduce
sensitivity?
A6 By selecting debounce time and/or voltage threshold, the relay may adapt its sensitivity to different applications.
Please select the maximum voltage threshold and debounce time (recommended 15 ms) to minimize AC coupling
effects.

11.3 CONTROL AND HMI 11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
11.3CONTROL AND HMI
11 Q1 What is the difference between Get/Send info from/to relay and Upload/Download info files to/from relay?
A1 Get/Send are used for settings and configuration storage that although both are in a unique file, are sent separately
in two times. Upload/Download are used for project or PLC files group storage. These files are the
setting_configuration file source. To operate, the F650 does not need the source files; the Upload/Download tool is
destined to serve as historic file.
Q2 Could I program interlocks?
A2 Yes, via ENERVISTA F650 SETUP interlocks may be programmed from very simple to advanced schemes.
Q3 Can we rotate the display 90 degrees to show feeders vertically?

A3 No. The product has been designed to view it in horizontal mode (landscape) due to the following reasons:
It is easier to read the LCD display because it has been designed for horizontal positions.
Compatibility between text display (4x20 characters) and LCD display (16x40 characters or 128x240 pixels).
Refresh speed is better in horizontal than vertical format.
Q4 Do I need a laptop or handheld to program the unit?

A4 No, all main operations can easily be performed with just the incorporated HMI. Handheld or laptops may be
required to download large quantities of information (such as oscillograms, etc.) but they are not mandatory for a
conventional user that just needs to change settings, view measurements, states, etc.
Q5 Is there password security for protection and control?

A5 Yes, there are two passwords. An independent password for protection changes and control operations is available
since version 1.44.
Q6 Is it possible to have a remote HMI installed in the front of the panel with the rest of the relay in the rear
side?
A6 Not in the present version.
Q7 Is it possible to program a default screen for the HMI?

A7 In graphic display versions the user may program a custom screen with the single-line diagram, measurements, etc.
In text display models, there is a choice of logo, measurements, or scrolling both screens.
Q8 May I force inputs and outputs to ease commissioning and testing?

A8 Yes.
Q9 How can I disable the rotary knob buzzer?

A9 Press ESC key during more than 3 seconds and then press the knob during a short pulse.
Q10 Why do appear strange texts on the display when switching on the relay?
A10 You will have pressed any button and the HMI has entered in a test mode.
The display messages are updated after a few minutes, once the relay has completed the starting sequence.

11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 11.4 RELAY CONFIGURATION
11.4RELAY CONFIGURATION
Q1 Does the "Service" contact on the Power Supply board cover all possible failures or do I have to create an
output on the I/O board that includes all the internal errors I can access in the logic?
11
A1 The power supply ready contact only monitor hardware failures in the power supply, to monitor the internal error of
the unit it is necessary to configure a virtual output to and the assign it to the device desired (contact output, LED,
etc.).
Q2 I set an output contact as "Latched". If I do not set a "reset" condition, will it reset from the "ESC" key?
A2 No, you have to configure the contact output reset signal (in Settings>Relay Configuration>Outputs). The ESC
key only reset the LED indicators.

11.4 RELAY CONFIGURATION 11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
11

12 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
F650 units have been designed and verified using the most advanced and reliable equipment. Mounting and
testing automation ensure a high consistency of the final product. Before sending a unit back to the factory, we
strongly recommend you follow the recommendations below. Even if it will not always solve the problem, at least
they will help define it better for a quicker repair.
If you need to send a unit back to the factory for repair, please use the appropriate RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORISATION
process, and follow the shipping instructions provided by our Service Department, especially in the case of international
shipments. This will lead to a faster and efficient solution of your problem. 12
CATEGORY SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION
Protection The relay does not trip -Function not permitted - Set the function permission to
ENABLED
- Function blocked - Check Protection units block screen
- Program the output to the desired

- Output not assigned function using ENERVISTA F650
SETUP logic configuration
General When feeding the unit, -Insufficient power supply -Verify the voltage level using a
no indicator is lit up multimeter in the power supply
terminals, and check that it is within
the model range
- Check relay and ENERVISTA F650

- Wrong versions SETUP versions are the same
-Remove power supply, dismount the
power supply module and replace the
-Fused fuse fuse
- Same as above with same fuse
- Loose fuse -Make sure that terminals labeled +

and – are connected to the 9-pin
connector corresponding to the power
-Incorrect wiring source
Communication The relay does not -Incorrect cable -Make sure you are using a straight
communicate via the cable
front RS232 port
-Damaged cable -Replace the cable
-Relay or PC not grounded -Ensure ground connection
-Incorrect baudrate, port, address, etc. -Test other ports, other baudrates, etc.
Make sure that the communication
parameters in the computer match the
ones in the relay.
General After Updating the Check that the bootware version If there is an incompatibility between
firmware the relay match with the firmware version boot and firmware version, update to
does not start up and the corresponding boot and after that
always shows the update the firmware version
message “Os
Loading…”. If the boot and firmware versions are
correct, perform the firmware update
procedure again.
Communications Cannot see properly Disabled Java options in Advanced 1.- Go to Advanced in Internet options
the web server in F650 Internet Explorer properties or high for Internet explorer and select the
with Windows XP. level of security three selections in Microsoft VM (Java
Virtual Machine) and deselect any
Some windows are in other virtual machine not Microsoft, for
grey with a red cross example SUN.
mark. In case Microsoft VM is not installed in
the computer, the user must install it
using the Microsoft VM installation
program msjavx86.exe
For internet explorer 6.0 or higher it is
not included by default.
2.- Try to set a lower level of security in
internet explorer options.
3.-Delete temporary internet files in
“General” screen in internet explorer
options.

Communication Enervista 650 Setup Bad communication in TFTP using Disable and Enable the Ethernet
does not retrieve osc, Windows 2000 connection on Control Panel inside
fault reports and Data Windows 2000. Try again to retrieve
Logger files files from relay
12

APPENDIX A A.1 LOGIC OPERANDS
APPENDIX A A.1LOGIC OPERANDS
OPERANDS - F650 - MODEL F2 - G1

INTERNAL SYSTEM STATUS
TIMER STATUS Real time clock autocheck
E2prom status :(0) Not configured or problems during
E2PROM STATUS
writing process ; (1) Configured and OK
GRAPHIC STATUS Graphic display status
Autocheck internal states ALARM TEXT ARRAY Text display status
DSP COMM ERROR DSP communication error
MAGNETIC MODULE
ERROR Magnetic module error
CALIBRATION ERROR Calibration error A

USER MAP STATUS User map status: (0) Not configured ; (1) Configured
FACTORY Calibration status (0) Not calibrated ; (1) Relay
CALIBRATION calibrated
FLEXCURVE A STATUS User curve A: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
FLEXCURVE B STATUS User curve B: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
FLEXCURVE C STATUS User curve C: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
Other internal states FLEXCURVE D STATUS User curve D: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
Green Zone Memory internal status
Yellow Zone Memory internal status
Orange Zone Memory internal status
Red Zone Memory internal status
UpTime System Time
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 000 Configurable logic output 000
Configurable Logic Outputs (512 elements)
... ...
Operation bit 001: (0) the configured time expires or

OPERATION BIT 1 when success conditions are met;(1) operation 1 is
executed and interlocks are fulfilled.

Operation Bits (24 elements) executed and interlocks are fulfilled.
... ...

executed and interlocks are fulfilled.
CONTROL EVENT 1 Control Event 1 Activation Bit

CONTROL EVENT 2 Control Event 2 Activation Bit
Bits de Eventos de Control (128 elementos)
... ...
CONTROL EVENT 128 Control Event 128 Activation Bot
LATCHED VIRT IP 1 Latched virtual input 1
Latched Virtual Inputs (32 elements)
... ...
SELF-RST VIRT IP 1 Self reset virtual input 1
Self Reset Virtual Inputs (32 elements)
... ...
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller A-1

A.1 LOGIC OPERANDS APPENDIX A
CONT IP_F_CC1 Input 1 (CC1) Board F

Digital Inputs Board F (1 to 8)
... ...
CONT IP_F_CC9 Contact Input 09 (Va_COIL1) for slot F. Input voltage
(Va_COIL1) (Va) detected, Circuit 1. Complete circuit supervised
CONT IP_F_CC10 Contact Input 10 (Vb_COIL1) for slot F. Input voltage

(Vb_COIL1) (Vb) detected, Circuit 1. Complete circuit supervised
CONT IP_F_CC11 Contact Input 11 (Va_COIL2) for slot F. Input voltage

(Va_COIL2) (Va) detected, Circuit 2. Complete circuit supervised
CONT IP_F_CC12 Contact Input 12 (Vb_COIL2) for slot F. Input voltage

(Vb_COIL2) (Vb) detected, Circuit 2. Complete circuit supervised
A Supervision inputs Board F (9 to 16)
CONT IP_F_CC13 Contact Input 13 (07_SEAL) for slot F. Current
detected. Contact output associated with current flow >
(O7_SEAL) 100 mA latched
Contact Input 14 (08_SEAL) for slot F. Current
CONT IP_F_CC14
(O8_SEAL) detected. Contact output associated with current flow >
100 mA latched
CONT IP_F_CC15 Contact Input 15 SUP_COIL1) for slot F. Output for
(SUP_COIL1) circuit 1 supervision element
CONT IP_F_CC16 Contact Input 16 SUP_COIL2) for slot F. Output for

(SUP_COIL2) circuit2 supervision element
CONT OP OPER_F_01 Logic signal for Output 1 activation. Board F
Output activation signals Board F (8 elements)
... ...
CONT OP RESET_F_01 board F, 01 latched output reset
Output Reset Signals Board F (8 elements)
... ...
CONT OP_F_01 Contact output 1 Board F operation
Contact Output Status Board F (8 elements)
... ...
Board F status: (0) Inactive - There is no
Board F Status BOARD F STATUS communication with the board (1) Active - There is
communication with the board
A-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

CONT IP_G_CC1 Input 1 (CC1) Board G

Input Status Board G (16 elements)
... ...
CONT OP OPER_G_01 Logic signal for Output 1 activation. Board G
Output activation signals Board G (8 elements)
... ...
CONT OP RESET_G_01 board G, 01 latched output reset
Output Reset Signals Board G (8 elements)
... ...
CONT OP_G_01 Contact output 1 Board G operation
A
Contact Output Status Board G (8 elements)
... ...
Board G status: (0) Inactive - There is no
Board G Status BOARD G STATUS communication with the board (1) Active - There is
CONT IP_H_CC1 Input 1 (CC1) Board H
Input Status Board H (16 elements) - CIO MODULE
... ...
CONT OP OPER_H_01 Logic signal for Output 1 activation. Board H
Output activation signals Board H (8 elements) - CIO CONT OP OPER_H_02 Logic signal for Output 2 activation. Board H
MODULE ... ...
CONT OP OPER_H_8 Logic signal for Output 8 activation. Board H
CONT OP RESET_H_01 board H, 01 latched output reset
Output Reset Signals Board H (8 elements) - CIO CONT OP RESET_H_02 board H, 02 latched output reset
MODULE ... ...
CONT OP RESET_H_08 board H, 08 latched output reset
CONT OP_H_01 Contact output 1 Board H operation
Contact Output Status Board H (8 elements) - CIO CONT OP_H_02 Contact output 2 Board H operation
MODULE ... ...
CONT OP_H_08 Contact output 8 Board H operation
Board H status: (0) Inactive - There is no
Board H Status - CIO MODULE BOARD H STATUS communication with the board (1) Active - There is
CONT IP_J_CC1 Input 1 (CC1) Board J
Input Status Board H (16 elements) - CIO MODULE
... ...
CONT OP OPER_J_01 Logic signal for Output 1 activation. Board J
Output activation signals Board J (8 elements) - CIO CONT OP OPER_J_02 Logic signal for Output 2 activation. Board J
MODULE ... ...
CONT OP OPER_J_8 Logic signal for Output 8 activation. Board J
CONT OP RESET_J_01 board J, 01 latched output reset
Output Reset Signals Board J (8 elements) - CIO CONT OP RESET_J_02 board J, 02 latched output reset
MODULE ... ...
CONT OP RESET_J_08 board J, 08 latched output reset

CONT OP_J_01 Contact output 1 Board J operation

Contact Output Status Board J (8 elements) - CIO CONT OP_J_02 Contact output 2 Board J operation
MODULE ... ...
CONT OP_J_08 Contact output 8 Board J operation
Board J status: (0) Inactive - There is no communication
Board J Status - CIO MODULE BOARD J STATUS with the board (1) Active - There is communication with
the board
SWITCH 1 A INPUT Contact input type A to switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 1 B INPUT Contact input type B to switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 2 A INPUT Contact input type A to switchgear Function 2
Switchgear status (16 elements) SWITCH 2 B INPUT Contact input type B to switchgear Function 2
... ...
A SWITCH 16 A INPUT
SWITCH 16 B INPUT
Contact input type A to switchgear Function 16
Contact input type B to switchgear Function 16
SWITCH 1 A STATUS Contact logic output type A from switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 1 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 1
Switchgear outputs (16 elements) SWITCH 2 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 2
... ...
SWITCH 16 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 16
SWITCH 1 OPEN switchgear 1 open
SWITCH 1 CLOSED switchgear 1 closed
SWITCH 1 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 1 (contact A = 0, contact B = 0)
Switchgear states (16 elements) SWITCH 2 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 2 (contact A = 0, contact B = 0)
... ...

SWITCH 1 OPEN INIT Switchgear 1 opening initiation

SWITCH 1 CLOSE INIT Switchgear 1 closing initiation
Switchgear Open-Close Initializing States SWITCH 2 CLOSE INIT Switchgear 2 closing initiation
... ...
SWITCH 16 CLOSE INIT Switchgear 16 closing initiation
SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN Failure to open Switchgear 1
SWGR 2 FAIL TO OPEN Failure to open Switchgear 2
... ...
SWGR 16 FAIL TO Failure to open Switchgear 16
OPEN
Switchgear Fail States SWGR 1 FAIL TO
CLOSE Failure to close Switchgear 1 A
SWGR 2 FAIL TO
Failure to close Switchgear 2
CLOSE
... ...
SWGR 16 FAIL TO
CLOSE Failure to close Switchgear 16

Ready LED: (0-Rojo) Relay out of service, protection

READY LED OUT OF ORDER (1-Green) Relay in service; protection
READY
Programmable LED 1 status: Red colour. Latched by
LED 1 hardware. Reset by hardware (ESC) and
programmable (LED RESET INPUT)
A LED 5 hardware. Reset by hardware (ESC) and
Programmable LED 6 status: Orange colour. Not
latched. Latching possibility via PLC. Reset by
LED 6
hardware (ESC) and programmable (LED RESET
INPUT)
LED 7 latched. Latching possibility via PLC. Reset by
INPUT)
LED 8
LEDS HMI (16 elements) INPUT)
INPUT)
LED 10
INPUT)
Programmable LED 11 status: Green colour. Not
INPUT)
LED 12
INPUT)
LED 13 hardware (ESC) and programmable (LED RESET
INPUT)
LED 14
INPUT)
LED 15
INPUT)
LEDs reset input (programmable) LED RESET INPUT Programmable input for remote LED reset
I Key I key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
O Key O key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
Programmable Keypad Status (HMI) * Key * key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
F1 Key F1 key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
F2 Key F2 key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)

Local/remote status for operations 1 = Local, 0 =

LOCAL OPERATION Remote. Selectable only through the front pushbutton
MODE
(Hardware)
LOCAL/REMOTE Operation status LEDs
OPERATIONS Operations OFF status (1) Command execution block
BLOCKED (operations blocked both in local and remote mode)
Oscillography Digital channel 1 : (1) Active ; (0) Not
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2 Oscillography Digital channel 2 : (1) Active ; (0) Not
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3 Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
Active
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6

Oscillography Digital channel 6 : (1) Active ; (0) Not A
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
Active
Active
Oscillography States Oscillography Digital channel 9 : (1) Active ; (0) Not
Oscillography Digital channel 10: (1) Active ; (0) Not
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
Active
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
Active
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
Active
OSCILLO TRIGGER Oscillo trigger activation (1) Active ; (0) Not active

FAULT REPORT TRIGG Fault report trigger (1) Active ; (0) Not active
Fault Report (Fault locator) CLEAR FAULT Fault report removal from HMI and ModBus (volatile
REPORTS memory)
FREEZE ENERGY CNT Energy counter freeze
UNFREEZE ENERGY
Energy Counters Energy counter unfreeze
CNT
RESET ENERGY CNT Energy counter reset
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Demand trigger (for Block interval algorithm)
Demand Inputs
DEMAND RESET INP Demand reset
GROUP 1 ACT ON Group 1 activation, and deactivation of groups 2 and 3
GROUP 2 ACT ON Group 2 activation, and deactivation of groups 1 and 3.
GROUP 3 ACT ON Group 3 activation, and deactivation of groups 1 and 2
A Setting Groups SETT GROUPS BLOCK Group change input blocked
GROUP 1 BLOCKED Settings Group 1 blocked

Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group

PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK 1 phase A
PH IOC1 HIGH B BLK
1 phase B
PH IOC1 HIGH C BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group
1 phase C
Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup high
PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP level Group 1 phase A
PH IOC1 HIGH A OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation

(trip) high level Group 1 phase A

PH IOC1 HIGH B PKP
level Group 1 phase B
Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation

PH IOC1 HIGH B OP
(trip) high level Group 1 phase B A
PH IOC1 HIGH C PKP
level Group 1 phase C
PH IOC1 HIGH C OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation

(trip) high level Group 1 phase C

PH IOC1 HIGH PKP
level Group 1 any phase
PH IOC1 HIGH OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation

(trip) high level Group 1 any phase
PH IOC2 HIGH A BLK
2 phase A
PH IOC2 HIGH B BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group

2 phase B
PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK 2 phase C
PH IOC2 HIGH A PKP
level Group 2 phase A
PH IOC2 HIGH A OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation

(trip) high level Group 2 phase A

PH IOC2 HIGH B PKP
Phase IOC High
PH IOC2 HIGH B OP (trip) high level Group 2 phase B

PH IOC2 HIGH C PKP

PH IOC2 HIGH C OP (trip) high level Group 2 phase C

PH IOC2 HIGH PKP

PH IOC2 HIGH OP (trip) high level Group 2 any phase
PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK
3 phase A
PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group

3 phase B
PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK 3 phase C
PH IOC3 HIGH A PKP

PH IOC3 HIGH A OP (trip) high level Group 3 phase A

Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low

PH IOC1 LOW A BLK level Group 1 phase A
PH IOC1 LOW B BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low


PH IOC1 LOW C BLK level Group 1 phase C
PH IOC1 LOW A PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup low


PH IOC1 LOW A OP
(trip) low level Group 1 phase A
PH IOC1 LOW B PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup low

A Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation
PH IOC1 LOW B OP
(trip) low level Group 1 phase B
PH IOC1 LOW C PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup low


PH IOC1 LOW C OP
(trip) low level Group 1 phase C
PH IOC1 LOW PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup low


PH IOC1 LOW OP
(trip) low level Group 1 any phase
PH IOC2 LOW A BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low


PH IOC2 LOW B BLK
PH IOC2 LOW C BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low

Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup low

PH IOC2 LOW A PKP

PH IOC2 LOW A OP (trip) low level Group 2 phase A

Phase IOC Low PH IOC2 LOW B PKP

PH IOC2 LOW B OP (trip) low level Group 2 phase B

PH IOC2 LOW C PKP

PH IOC2 LOW C OP (trip) low level Group 2 phase C

PH IOC2 LOW PKP

PH IOC2 LOW OP (trip) low level Group 2 any phase

PH IOC3 LOW A BLK

PH IOC3 LOW B BLK level Group 3 phase B
PH IOC3 LOW C BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low


Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element block Group

NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK 1
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element pickup
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
Group 1
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element operation

(trip) Group 1
Neutral IOC NEUTRAL IOC2 PKP
Group 2

(trip) Group 2
NEUTRAL IOC3 PKP
Group 3 A
(trip) Group 3

Ground instantaneous overcurrent element block Group

GROUND IOC1 BLOCK 1
Ground instantaneous overcurrent element pickup
GROUND IOC1 PKP
Group 1
GROUND IOC1 OP Ground instantaneous overcurrent element operation

(trip) Group 1
GROUND IOC2 BLOCK 2
Ground IOC GROUND IOC2 PKP
Group 2
GROUND IOC2 OP Ground instantaneous overcurrent element operation

(trip) Group 2
GROUND IOC3 BLOCK 3
A GROUND IOC3 PKP
Group 3
Ground instantaneous overcurrent element operation
GROUND IOC3 OP
(trip) Group 3
Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element
SENS GND IOC1 BLK block Group 1
SENS GND IOC1 PKP
pickup Group 1
SENS GND IOC1 OP operation (trip) Group 1
SENS GND IOC2 BLK
block Group 2
SENS GND IOC2 PKP Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element
Sensitive Ground IOC pickup Group 2
SENS GND IOC2 OP operation (trip) Group 2
SENS GND IOC3 BLK Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element

block Group 3
SENS GND IOC3 PKP pickup Group 3
SENS GND IOC3 OP
operation (trip) Group 3
ISOLATED GND1 BLK Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element

block Group 1
Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element
ISOLATED GND1 PKP pickup Group 1
ISOLATED GND1 OP Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element

ISOLATED GND2 BLK block Group 2
Isolated Ground ISOLATED GND2 PKP
pickup Group 2
ISOLATED GND2 OP Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element

ISOLATED GND3 BLK
block Group 3
ISOLATED GND3 PKP Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element

pickup Group 3
ISOLATED GND3 OP operation (trip) Group 3

Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 1 phase

PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK A
PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK
B
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 1 phase
C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 phase
PH TOC1 HIGH A PKP A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC1 HIGH A OP
1 phase A
PH TOC1 HIGH B PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 phase
B
PH TOC1 HIGH B OP 1 phase B
PH TOC1 HIGH C PKP
C A
PH TOC1 HIGH C OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
1 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 any
PH TOC1 HIGH PKP phase
PH TOC1 HIGH OP
1 any phase
PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase
A
PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK B
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase
C
PH TOC2 HIGH A PKP A
PH TOC2 HIGH A OP
2 phase A
Phase TOC High PH TOC2 HIGH B PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2 phase
B
PH TOC2 HIGH B OP 2 phase B
PH TOC2 HIGH C PKP
C
PH TOC2 HIGH C OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group

2 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2 any
PH TOC2 HIGH PKP phase
PH TOC2 HIGH OP
2 any phase
PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 3 phase
A
PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK B
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK
C
PH TOC3 HIGH A PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3 phase
A
PH TOC3 HIGH A OP 3 phase A
PH TOC3 HIGH B PKP
B
PH TOC3 HIGH B OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group

3 phase B
PH TOC3 HIGH C PKP C
PH TOC3 HIGH C OP
3 phase C
PH TOC3 HIGH PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3 any
phase
PH TOC3 HIGH OP 3 any phase

Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level

PH TOC1 LOW A BLK Group 1 phase A
PH TOC1 LOW B BLK
Group 1 phase B
PH TOC1 LOW C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level
Group 1 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
PH TOC1 LOW A PKP Group 1 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low
PH TOC1 LOW A OP
PH TOC1 LOW B PKP Group 1 phase B
PH TOC1 LOW B OP
A PH TOC1 LOW C PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 1 phase C
PH TOC1 LOW C OP
PH TOC1 LOW PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 1 any phase
PH TOC1 LOW OP level Group 1 any phase
PH TOC2 LOW A BLK
Group 2 phase A
PH TOC2 LOW B BLK Group 2 phase B
PH TOC2 LOW C BLK
Group 2 phase C
PH TOC2 LOW A PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 2 phase A
PH TOC2 LOW A OP level Group 2 phase A
PH TOC2 LOW B PKP
Phase TOC Low Group 2 phase B
PH TOC2 LOW B OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low

PH TOC2 LOW C PKP
Group 2 phase C
PH TOC2 LOW C OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low

PH TOC2 LOW PKP Group 2 any phase
PH TOC2 LOW OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low

PH TOC3 LOW A BLK Group 3 phase A
PH TOC3 LOW B BLK
Group 3 phase B
PH TOC3 LOW C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level
Group 3 phase C
PH TOC3 LOW A PKP Group 3 phase A
PH TOC3 LOW A OP
PH TOC3 LOW B PKP Group 3 phase B
PH TOC3 LOW B OP
PH TOC3 LOW C PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 3 phase C

NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK Neutral timed overcurrent element block Group 1
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP Neutral timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1

Neutral timed overcurrent element operation (trip)
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
Group 1
NEUTRAL TOC2 Neutral timed overcurrent element block Group 2
BLOCK
Neutral TOC NEUTRAL TOC2 PKP Neutral timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2
NEUTRAL TOC2 OP Group 2
NEUTRAL TOC3
Neutral timed overcurrent element block Group 3
BLOCK
NEUTRAL TOC3 PKP Neutral timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3
NEUTRAL TOC3 OP
Group 3 A
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK Ground timed overcurrent element block Group 1
GROUND TOC1 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1
Ground timed overcurrent element operation (trip)
GROUND TOC1 OP Group 1
Ground TOC GROUND TOC2 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2
GROUND TOC2 OP
Group 2
GROUND TOC3 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3
GROUND TOC3 OP Group 3
SENS GND TOC1 Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element block
BLOCK Group 1
SENS GND TOC1 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup
Group 1
Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element operation
SENS GND TOC1 OP (trip) Group 1
BLOCK Group 2
Sentive Ground TOC SENS GND TOC2 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup
Group 2
BLOCK Group 3
SENS GND TOC3 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup
Group 3

Negative sequence timed overcurrent element block

NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK Group 1
Negative sequence timed overcurrent element pickup
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
Group 1
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP Negative sequence timed overcurrent element

operation Group 1
Negative Sequence TOC NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP
Group 2
NEG SEQ TOC2 OP Negative sequence timed overcurrent element

operation Group 2
A NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP
Group 3
Negative sequence timed overcurrent element
NEG SEQ TOC3 OP
operation Group 3

THERMAL1 BLOCK Thermal image block Group 1

THERMAL1 A RST Thermal image phase A Group 1 element reset
THERMAL1 B RST Thermal image phase B Group 1 element reset
THERMAL1 C RST Thermal image phase C Group 1 element reset
THERMAL1 ALARM Thermal image element alarm any phase Group 1
THERMAL1 OP Thermal image element operation any phase Group 1
THERMAL1 A ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase A Group 1
THERMAL1 A OP Thermal image element operation phase A Group 1
THERMAL1 B ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase B Group 1
THERMAL1 B OP Thermal image element operation phase B Group 1
THERMAL1 C ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase C Group 1
THERMAL1 C OP Thermal image element operation phase C Group 1 A
Thermal Image
THERMAL2 C OP Thermal image element operation phase C Group 2
THERMAL3 C OP Thermal image element operation phase C Group 3

PHASE DIR1 BLK INP Phase directional block Group 1

PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A Phase directional element block Group 1 Phase A
PHASE DIR1 A OP Phase directional element operation Group 1 Phase A
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B Phase directional element block Group 1 Phase B
PHASE DIR1 B OP Phase directional element operation Group 1 Phase B
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C Phase directional element block Group 1 Phase C
PHASE DIR1 C OP Phase directional element operation Group 1 Phase C
Phase Directional PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B Phase directional element block Group 2 Phase B
A PHASE DIR2 B OP Phase directional element operation Group 2 Phase B
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B Phase directional element block Group 3 Phase B
PHASE DIR3 B OP Phase directional element operation Group 3 Phase B
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK
Neutral directional element block Group 1
INP
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK Neutral directional element block Group 1
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP Neutral directional element operation Group 1
NEUTRAL DIR2 BLK Neutral directional element block Group 2
INP
Neutral Directional NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK Neutral directional element block Group 2
NEUTRAL DIR3 BLK
INP Neutral directional element block Group 3
NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK Neutral directional element block Group 3

GROUND DIR1 BLK INP Ground directional element block Group 1
GROUND DIR1 BLOCK Ground directional element block Group 1
GROUND DIR1 OP Ground directional element operation Group 1
Ground Directional GROUND DIR2 BLOCK Ground directional element block Group 2
GROUND DIR3 BLOCK Ground directional element block Group 3

Sensitive ground directional element block input Group

SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP 1
SENS GND DIR1
Sensitive Ground directional element block Group 1
BLOCK
SENS GND DIR1 OP Sensitive Ground directional element operation Group 1
SENS GND DIR2 BLK IP Sensitive ground directional element block input Group
2
Sensitive Ground Directional SENS GND DIR2
BLOCK Sensitive Ground directional element block Group 2
SENS GND DIR2 OP Sensitive Ground directional element operation Group 2

Sensitive ground directional element block input Group
SENS GND DIR3 BLK IP
3
SENS GND DIR3 Sensitive Ground directional element block Group 3
BLOCK
SENS GND DIR3 OP Sensitive Ground directional element operation Group 3 A
Fuse failure VT FUSE FAILURE Fuse failure operation

PHASE UV1 BLOCK Phase undervoltage element block Group 1

PHASE UV1 A PKP Undervoltage element pickup AG Group 1
PHASE UV1 A OP Undervoltage element operation AG Group 1
PHASE UV1 B PKP Undervoltage element pickup BG Group 1
PHASE UV1 B OP Undervoltage element operation BG Group 1
PHASE UV1 C PKP Undervoltage element pickup CG Group 1
PHASE UV1 C OP Undervoltage element operation CG Group 1
PHASE UV1 AB PKP Undervoltage element pickup AB Group 1
PHASE UV1 AB OP Undervoltage element operation AB Group 1
PHASE UV1 BC PKP Undervoltage element pickup BC Group 1
PHASE UV1 BC OP Undervoltage element operation BC Group 1
A PHASE UV1 CA PKP Undervoltage element pickup CA Group 1
PHASE UV1 CA OP Undervoltage element operation CA Group 1
PHASE UV1 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements
PHASE UV1 OP Operation of any of the above mentioned elements
Phase UV PHASE UV2 AB PKP Undervoltage element pickup AB Group 2
PHASE UV2 CA PKP Undervoltage element pickup CA Group 2
PHASE UV3 AB PKP Undervoltage element pickup AB Group 3
PHASE UV3 CA PKP Undervoltage element pickup CA Group 3

PHASE OV1 BLOCK Phase overvoltage element block Group 1

PHASE OV1 AB PKP Overvoltage element pickup AB Group 1
PHASE OV1 AB OP Overvoltage element operation AB Group 1
PHASE OV1 BC PKP Overvoltage element pickup BC Group 1
PHASE OV1 BC OP Overvoltage element operation BC Group 1
PHASE OV1 CA PKP Overvoltage element pickup CA Group 1
PHASE OV1 CA OP Overvoltage element operation CA Group 1
PHASE OV1 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements
PHASE OV1 OP Operation of any of the above mentioned elements
PHASE OV2 AB OP Overvoltage element operation AB Group 2 A
Phase OV PHASE OV2 BC OP Overvoltage element operation BC Group 2
PHASE OV3 AB OP Overvoltage element operation AB Group 3
PHASE OV3 BC OP Overvoltage element operation BC Group 3
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH
Neutral overvoltage element block high level Group 1
BLK
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element pickup high level Group 1
PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element operation high level Group
OP 1
NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH
BLK
Neutral OV High NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element pickup high level Group 2
PKP
OP 2
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH
BLK
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element pickup high level Group 3
PKP
OP 3

NEUTRAL OV1 LOW

BLK Neutral overvoltage element block low level Group 1
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW

Neutral overvoltage element pickup low level Group 1
PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW Neutral overvoltage element operation low level Group
OP 1
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW
Neutral OV Low Neutral overvoltage element pickup low level Group 2
PKP
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW Neutral overvoltage element operation low level Group
OP 2
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW

A PKP
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW
Neutral overvoltage element pickup low level Group 3
Neutral overvoltage element operation low level Group

OP 3
AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK Auxiliary undervoltage element block Group 1
AUXILIARY UV1 PKP Auxiliary undervoltage element pickup Group 1
AUXILIARY UV1 OP Auxiliary undervoltage element operation Group 1
Auxiliary UV AUXILIARY UV2 PKP Auxiliary undervoltage element pickup Group 2
AUXILIARY UV3 PKP Auxiliary undervoltage element pickup Group 3
AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK Auxiliary overvoltage element block Group 1
AUXILIARY OV1 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element pickup Group 1
AUXILIARY OV1 OP Auxiliary overvoltage element operation Group 1
Auxiliary OV AUXILIARY OV2 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element pickup Group 2
AUXILIARY OV3 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element pickup Group 3
NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK Negative sequence overvoltage element block Group 1
Negative sequence overvoltage element pickup Group
NEG SEQ OV1 PKP
1
NEG SEQ OV1 OP Negative sequence overvoltage element operation

Group 1
Negative sequence overvoltage element pickup Group
Negative Sequence OV NEG SEQ OV2 PKP 2
Negative sequence overvoltage element operation
NEG SEQ OV2 OP
Group 2
NEG SEQ OV3 PKP Negative sequence overvoltage element pickup Group
3
Negative sequence overvoltage element operation
NEG SEQ OV3 OP Group 3

OVERFREQ1 BLOCK Overfrequency element block Group 1

OVERFREQ1 PKP Overfrequency element pickup Group 1
OVERFREQ1 OP Overfrequency element operation Group 1
Sobrefrecuencia - Overfrequency OVERFREQ2 PKP Overfrequency element pickup Group 2
OVERFREQ3 PKP Overfrequency element pickup Group 3
UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK Underfrequency element block Group 1
UNDERFREQ1 PKP Underfrequency element pickup Group 1
UNDERFREQ1 OP Underfrequency element operation Group 1 A
Subfrecuencia - Underfrequency UNDERFREQ2 PKP Underfrequency element pickup Group 2
UNDERFREQ2 OP Underfrequency element operation Group 2
UNDERFREQ3 PKP Underfrequency element pickup Group 3
UNDERFREQ3 OP Underfrequency element operation Group 3
BROKEN CONDUCT1
Broken conductor block Group 1
BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT1 Broken conductor element Pickup Group 1
PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT1
OP Broken conductor element operation Group 1
BROKEN CONDUCT2
BLK
Broken Conductor BROKEN CONDUCT2 Broken conductor element Pickup Group 2

PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT2
BROKEN CONDUCT3
BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT3 Broken conductor element Pickup Group 3
PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT3
FWD PWR1 BLOCK Forward power element block Group 1

FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP Forward Power element pickup level 1 Group 1
FWD PWR1 STG1 OP Forward Power element operation level 1 Group 1
Forward Power(32FP) FWD PWR2 STG1 OP Forward Power element operation level 1 Group 2

KI2t PHASE A ALARM K·I2t phase A Alarm

KI2t PHASE B ALARM K·I2t phase B Alarm
KI2t PHASE C ALARM K·I2t phase C Alarm
BKR OPENINGS
ALARM Maximum Breaker openings alarm
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR

Maximum Breaker openings in one hour alarm
Breaker States ALRM
BREAKER OPEN Breaker Opened
BREAKER CLOSED Breaker closed
BREAKER UNDEFINED Breaker undefined (52a and 52b have the same status)
RESET KI2t
COUNTERS KI2t Breaker ageing counter reset
A RESET BKR
COUNTERS Breaker openings and closings counters reset
BKR FAIL INITIATE Breaker failure initiation

BKR FAIL NO
Breaker failure without current
CURRENT
BKR FAIL Breaker failure 1st level (supervision – retrip)
SUPERVISION
Breaker Failure
BKR FAIL HISET Breaker failure 2nd level (high level)
BKR FAIL LOWSET Breaker failure 3rd level (low level)
INTERNAL ARC Internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Breaker failure second step
SYNCROCHECK BLK
Synchronism element block
INP
SYNCROCHECK OP Synchronsim condition (Dv, Dj and Df are within the set
range)
Closing permission for the synchronism element:
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM (SYNCHK OP) OR (SYNCHK CON OP)
SYNCROCHECK COND Active if when it is set, any of the three following

OP conditions is met:
Synchrocheck DL-DB OPERATION Dead line – dead bus condition
DL-LB OPERATION Dead line – live bus condition
LL-DB OPERATION Live line – dead bus condition
SLIP CONDITION Slip conditions are met
BUS FREQ > LINE Bus Frequency higher than line frequency
FREQ
BUS FREQ < LINE
FREQ Bus Frequency lower than line frequency

AR LEVEL BLOCK Recloser element block by level

AR PULSE BLOCK Recloser element block by pulse
AR PULSE UNBLOCK Recloser element unblock by pulse
AR INITIATE Reclose initiate
Reclose permission condition in input to Function 1 =
AR CONDS INPUT there are conditions
AR CLOSE BREAKER Closing permission for the recloser
AR OUT OF SERVICE Recloser out of service
AR READY Recloser READY
AR LOCKOUT Recloser in LOCKOUT
AR BLOCK Recloser BLOCKed
AR RCL IN PROGRESS Recloser – Cycle in progress A
AR LCK BY ANOMALY Recloser – LOCKOUT by anomaly (reclosing command
Autorecloser during cycle in progress)
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN Recloser – LOCKOUT by failure to open
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE Recloser – LOCKOUT by failure to close
Recloser – LOCKOUT by external operation (e.g.:
AR LCK BY USER
manual opening with cycle in progress)
AR LCK BY CONDS Recloser – LOCKOUT by lack of reclosing conditions
AR LCK BY TRIPS Recloser – LOCKOUT by number of trips
AR LCK BY SHOTS Recloser – LOCKOUT by number of shots
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT Recloser – Block after first shot
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT Recloser – Block after second shot
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT Recloser – Block after third shot
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT Recloser – Block after fourth shot
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL Recloser – Block by level
AR BLOCK BY PULSE Recloser – Block by command (pulse)
Default Channel (not used) Default Channel Channel not used

DIR PWR1 BLOCK Directional power element block Group 1

DIR PWR1 STG1 PKP Directional Power element pickup level 1 Group 1
DIR PWR1 STG1 OP Directional Power element operation level 1 Group 1
DIR PWR1 STG PKP Directional power element pickup Group 1
DIR PWR1 STG OP Directional Power element operation Group 1
Directional Power DIR PWR2 STG2 PKP Directional Power element pickup level 2 Group 2
A DIR PWR2 STG2 OP Directional Power element operation level 2 Group 2
LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK Locked rotor element block Group 1
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP Locked rotor element pickup Group 1
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP Locked rotor element operation Group 1
Locked Rotor LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP Locked rotor element pickup Group 2
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP Locked rotor element pickup Group 3

APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS PROTOCOL FOR 650
APPENDIX B B.1MODBUS PROTOCOL FOR 650 B.1.1 ACCESS TO F650 DATA
This document describes the procedure to read and write data in the F650 relay using ModBus/RTU protocol.
To prevent an existing integration from being affected by versions, a generic database has been created, compatible
between versions, with all possible items that a F650 may have, independently from its type or configuration. This
database describes completely each of these items. This descriptions includes the data type, length, memory position,
object version, etc. Moreover, the database will group the different objects by subgroups, such as status and settings
groups.
Each object has a unique memory position for the whole family. Only after reading the objects of a particular relay, it will be
possible to elaborate its map. This map will only be valid for that particular relay and memory version. From one version to
another the memory positions of existing objects remain fixed, and new objects are assigned new addresses, which again
remain the same for following versions.
It is possible to get the Memory Map using EnerVista 650 Setup software, menu:
View, ModBus Memory map
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller B-1

B.1 MODBUS PROTOCOL FOR 650 APPENDIX B
B.1.2 MODBUS F650
B.1.2.1 FUNCTIONS USED
The protocol used is standard ModBus/RTU, so any program or PLC will be able to easily communicate with F650 units.
F650 always works as slave, which means that it never starts the communications. It is always the master who initiates
communication.
Only one ModBus/RTU functions subgroup are implemented:
• Reading function 3 (or 4).
• Writing function 16.
B.1.2.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
ModBus/RTU protocol is independent from the hardware. This way, the physical layer may be in different hardware
B configurations: RS232, RS485, fiber optic or Ethernet.
F650 units incorporate a front RS232 port, two rear RS485 or fiber optic ports, and a 10/100Base T port, and in some
configurations two 100BaseFX ports. The data flow in any of the configurations is “half-duplex”.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous way and it is formed by: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and 1 parity bit if
programmed. Thus you have a 10 or 11-bit data, depending on whether it has parity or not.
The port baud rate and the parity are independent and programmable for each communication port. Any port may be
programmed to baud rates of: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200. Parity may be pair, impair or
without parity.
The master must know the client address with which it is going to communicate. No unit will operate after a master request
if the message address is not its own, except it the address is 0, which is the broadcast address. In this case the relay will
operate, but won’t send any reply.
B-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

B.1.2.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communication is performed in strings, data groups sent in an asynchronous way. The master transmits a string to the
slave and then the slave responds with another string (except for the case of broadcast communication). A timeout or a
silence time in the communication marks the end of a string. The length of this time varies depending on the baud rate,
because it is equal to 3 characters.
The following table shows the generic string format, valid for transmission and reception. However, each function will have
its own particularities, as described later in this manual.
MODBUS FORMAT
CLIENT ADDRESS 1 byte Each device in a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent two
[A] units from responding at the same time to the same request. All relay ports will
use this address, which can be programmed to a value between 1 and 254.
When the master transmits a string with the slave address 0, this indicates that it
is a Broadcast. Every slave in the communication bus will perform the requested
action, but none of them will respond to the master. Broadcast is only accepted for
writing because it is nonsense to perform a reading request in Broadcast, as no
unit will respond to it.
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte This is one of the function codes supported by the equipment. In this case, the
[B] only supported function codes will be 3 and 4 for reading and 16 for writing. When
the slave has to respond with an exception to any of these strings, it will place to 1
the most important bit of the correspondent function. For example, an exception to
B
function 3 will be indicated with an 83 as function code, and an exception to
function 16 or 0x10 in hexadecimal, will be indicated with a 0x90.
DATA N bytes This section includes a variable number of bytes, depending on the function code.
[C] It may include: addresses, data length, settings, commands or exception codes
sent by the client.
CRC 2 bytes Two-byte control code. ModBus/RTU includes a 16-bit CRC in each string for error
[D] detection. If the slave detects a string with errors, based on an incorrect CRC, it
will neither perform any action, nor respond to the master. The CRC order is LSB-
MSB.
TIME OUT Required time to A string is finished when nothing is received during a period of 3,5 bytes:
transmit 3,5 Bytes 15 ms at 2400 bps
2 ms at 19200 bps
300 μs at 115200 bps
etc.

B.1.2.4 GENERIC READING
MASTER SERVER
Request
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]--------------+ +[D]--+

01 03 0B 37 00 03 XX XX
Data addr. Regs.
B
OK Response
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------+ +[D]--+

01 03 06 02 2B 00 00 00 64 XX XX
Bytes ...........Data ..........
Error Response
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]+ +[D]--+

01 83 07 XX XX

B.1.2.5 GENERIC WRITING
MASTER SERVER
Request
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]---------------------------------+ +[D]--+

01 10 00 87 00 02 04 00 0A 01 02 XX XX
Data addr. Regs. Bytes .......Data.......
B
OK Response
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]-----------+ +[D]--+

01 10 00 87 00 02 XX XX
Data addr. Regs.
Error Response
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]+ +[D]--+

01 90 07 XX XX

B.1.2.6 FUNCTION CODES
CODE MODBUS F650 COMMENT

NAME DEFINITION
HEX DEC
03 3 Read Holding Reading of any Any of these two functions allow the master to read 1 or more consecutive relay
Registers value addresses. Registers are always 16-bit long with the most important byte first. The
04 4 Read Input Reading of any maximum number of registers that can be read in a single package is 125, equivalent
to 250 bytes.
Registers value
10 16 Preset Multiple Writing This function allows writing 1 or more registers representing one or more settings.
Registers Registers are 2-byte long values, transmitted with the most important byte first. The
maximum number of registers to be written in a single package is 125.
B.1.2.7 EXCEPTIONS AND ERROR RESPONDS

The following table shows error codes defined in ModBus protocol:
B 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
The slave does not support any function with the received function code in this message.
Master is trying to perform an operation in an incorrect address.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE Slave has detected that the value sent by the master is not valid.
04 ILLEGAL RESPONSE LENGTH Indicates that a response to the master’s request would exceed the maximum specified size for
that function code.
05 ACKNOWLEDGE Generic acknowledgement.
06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY Slave is busy and cannot perform the requested operation.
07 NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE Negative acknowledgement.

B.1.3 DATA TYPE
TYPE LENGTH DESCRIPTIÓN

F1 1 Boolean data type.
As it is a bit, for evaluating it we need a memory address and a bit. For example: Value 0x1A41-0001101001000001b
Bit 150
Bit 140
Bit 130
Bit 121
Bit 111
Bit 100
Bit 091
Bit 080
Bit 070
Bit 061
Bit 050
Bit 040
Bit 030
Bit 020
Bit 010
Bit 001
F2 2 Integer with 4 bytes sign.
It has to be scaled, by multiplying by 1000 the value to be sent, or dividing between 1000 the received value. For
example, if a value of 34509 is received, the converted value will be 34,509, and for writing value 334, we must send
334.000.
B
This prevents the loss of accuracy involved in using float values.
Example: 12312d=0x00003018.
Real Value = 12312/1000=12,312
F3 2 4-byte Floating
Example: 1240.5560x449B11CB
F4 1 Integer with 2 bytes sign.
Example: 1230x007B
F5 2 Integer without 4 bytes sign.
Example: 123120x00003018
F6 4 8 bytes Float
Example: 123.3240x405ED4BC6A7EF9DB
F7 1 Characters without sign. As it needs to be sent in a register, i.e. in two bytes, the character will go below.
Example: ‘β’x00E1
F8 1 Characters with sign As it needs to be sent in a register, i.e. in two bytes, the character will go below.
Example: ‘A’x0041
F9 16 String. Chain of characters with a fixed length (32 bytes). The end of the string is marked with a “\0”.
Example: “ABC”0x41x42x43x00....
F10 1 This is a 16-bit integer without sign. Each value that can be taken by this integer will have a correspondence in the
database Auxiliary Table. In this table we can find the corresponding chain, which must be shown for each value. In
the memory, only an integer value will be received.
Example: 0, 1Correspond to CLOSE, OPEN
F11 3 Milliseconds passed since 1/1/2000 at 00:00:00.000.

B.1.4 MODBUS APPENDIX
B.1.4.1 DATA MANAGEMENT

The different sizes of data to be managed in ModBus and their functionality make it necessary to manage them in different
ways. Depending on the functionality and importance of certain data, the use of ModBus is optimized in time for real time
processes, as in the case of events.
Although configuration settings, such as GRAPHIC, PLC equations, TEXTS and ALARM and LEDS configuration, etc. can
be read and written using ModBus protocol, formats are not shown because these are considered important design
information subject to optimization, expansion and in short to changes. For their management, the user can use EnerVista
650 Setup program to manage and format them in a friendly way
B.1.4.2 WRITING SETTINGS

The writing process of settings GROUP is formed by two phases: writing of any zone and confirmation. The target is to
guarantee the protections functionality and offer versatility for possible legacy programs.
The process of changing protection functionality will almost always involve the change of several settings at the same time,
B requiring a “time point” for new settings operation. The combination of numbers, enums, etc, which cooperate in fulfill a
determined function is called GROUP
The memory map of a setting GROUP includes: the stored settings at the beginning of its settings zone and a temporary
hole for new settings and confirmation.
When settings are changed, we must write in the selected settings zone, in any order or quantity of written zone, and finally,
to give a reference point we must write a register in the last position of the group, (this is called CONFIRMATION by some
protocols).
For safety reasons, there is certain limitation when CONFIRMING settings GROUPS; the time period from the last settings
writing to CONFIRMATION, cannot exceed 15 seconds.
B.1.4.3 SNAP-SHOT EVENTS

Nowadays, event retrieval is completely compatible with UR family. In the F650, the NEW EVENTS concept has been
extended, providing additional functionality. These are the events created after the last request.
Firmware version 1.60 adds a new way of reading snapshot events in binary format. Before this version, the relay sent
information in ASCII format. The snapshot event retrieval is similar to the ASCII.
a) SNAPSHOT EVENT READING IN ASCII FORMAT
The events capture process is based on the opening and reading of a pseudo-file. This process is made in two steps:
1º.- A writing message in the ‘0xfe00’ address, where desired opening file name is written:
- “EVE .TXT”: to obtain all
- “NEW_EVE.TXT": to obtain events created from the last request of this same file
- “EVE0234 .TXT “: to obtain events starting, for example, from 234 rating
2º.- The second and following ones are messages of reading on 0xff00 address, where 244-byte strings are read
from the open file. As this process is a request process, if there was a response string with error, the last string can be
requested again, by a reading message on 0xff02 address.
The first reading message shows the events format, information is transmitted in the rest of messages. In the same string,
the first four bytes indicate the file reading position and the following two bytes form a short with the quantity of useful bytes
sent (if it is lower than 244, this indicates that it is the last message).
In the second step, many BUSY responds may be produced, because internally the ASCII format file is being created.

b) SNAPSHOT EVENTS READING IN BINARY FORMAT:

Write a message in address 0xfe00 to open the file.
“EVE.BIN”: to read all Snapshot events.
“NEW_EVE.BIN”: to read new events since the last reading of this file.
“EVE0234.BIN”: to read events starting by number 234.
The second and successive messages are read in address 0xff00 in blocks of 250 bytes (4 bytes that indicate the point
value to the file, 2 bytes that indicate the number of data sent, and 244 data bytes). If during this process there is an error
response, the request can be repeated in address 0xff02 reading 246 bytes (2 bytes that indicate the number of bytes sent,
and 244 data bytes).
Each Snapshot event includes:
1º byte: event format code.
N bytes: Event information structured depending on the code
At this moment there is only one format type with code 0. Its structure is as follows:
• -UINT16: event handle.
• -8 bytes: event date and time.
• -29 bytes: event cause. (string finished in null).
B
• -UINT32: Phasor Ia (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Phasor Ib (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Phasor Ic (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Line Frequency (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Phasor Ig (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Phasor Isg (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Zero seq I0 (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Positive seq I1 (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Negative seq I2 (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Phasor Van (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Phasor Vbn (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Phasor Vcn (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Positive Seq V1 (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Negative Seq V2 (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: Zero Seq V0 (scaled to 1000).
• -UINT32: 3 Phase Power Factor (scaled to 1000).
Example:
1st step:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x0C 0x4E 0x45 0x57 0x5F 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x2E 0x54 0x58 0x54 0x00 0x16 0xB0] ---
-----> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x65 0xEC]
2nd step:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] --------> RELAY
Probably the relay will respond with “SLAVE DEVICE BUSY”:

PC <--------- 0xFE 0x83 0x06 0xF1 0x02]

The request is repeated:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] --------> RELAY
Now the relay sends the events format:
[A] Position within file (Unsigned 32 bits)
[B] Block size (Unsigned 16 bits)
PC Å--------- [0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xF4 0x46 0x4F 0x52 0x4D 0x41
.............[A].............. .....[B]...... F O R M A
0x54 0x2C 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30
T , E V E N T _ F 6 5 0 _ V 0
0x30 0x2C 0x45 0x76 0x65 0x6E 0x74 0x20 0x4E 0x75 0x6D 0x2C 0x44 0x61 0x74
0 , E v e n t N u m , D a t
B 0x65 0x2F 0x54 0x69 0x6D 0x65 0x3C 0x48 0x65 0x78 0x3E 0x2C 0x43 0x61 0x75
e / T i m e . . . etc . . .
0x73 0x65 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x61 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x62
0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x63 0x2C 0x4C 0x69 0x6E 0x65 0x20 0x46 0x72 0x65 0x71 0x75 0x65
0x6E 0x63 0x79 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x67 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49
0x73 0x67 0x2C 0x5A 0x65 0x72 0x6F 0x20 0x73 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x49 0x30 0x2C 0x50 0x6F 0x73 0x69 0x74 0x69 0x76
0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x49 0x31 0x2C 0x4E 0x65 0x67 0x61 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20
0x49 0x32 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x61 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56
0x62 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x63 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x6F 0x73 0x69 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65
0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x31 0x2C 0x4E 0x65 0x67 0x61 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56
0x32 0x2C 0x5A 0x65 0x72 0x6F 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x20 0x50 0x68 0x4C 0xF3]
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xF4 0x00 0xF4 0x61 0x73 0x65 0x20 0x50 0x6F
0x77 0x65 0x72 0x20 0x46 0x61 0x63 0x74 0x6F 0x72 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (here the format ends)
0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x35 0x36 0x35
E V E N T _ F 6 5 0 _ V 0 0 , 5 6 5
0 x37 0x2C 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x66 0x63 0x39 0x38 0x66
7 , 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 6 f 3 9 8 f
0x34 0x33 0x39 0x2C 0x4C 0x6F 0x63 0x61 0x6C 0x20 0x6D 0x6F 0x64 0x65 0x2C
4 3 9 , l o c a l m o d e ,
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30
....
0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30
0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30
0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A

CR LF (a line ends)
0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x35 0x36 0x35 0x38 0x2C 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x66 0x63 0x39 0x38 0x66 0x34 0x33 0x39 0x2C 0x28 0x31 0x29 0x56 0x69 0x72 0x74
0x75 0x61 0x6C 0x20 0x4F 0x75 0x74 0x38 0x39 0x36 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x34 0x24]
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------[0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xE8 0x00 0x47 0x30 0x0047 => last string
0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30
0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30
0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (a line ends)
0x00 0x00 0x30 0x0D 0x0A 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x30
0x39 0x38 0x2C 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x65 0x62 0x61 0x33 0x33 0x62 0x62 0x38 0x2C 0x43 0x6F
0x6E 0x74 0x61 0x63 0x74 0x20 0x4F 0x75 0x74 0x70 0x75 0x74 0x5F 0x30 0x30 0x5F 0x30 0x30 0x20 0x4F 0x4E 0x2C
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E B
0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0xDB 0xB4]

B.1.4.4 OPERATIONS
For executing an Operation, it is necessary to write the bit corresponding to that Operation. For this purpose, there are two
memory records whose bits represent operations. These records are 0xAFFE and 0xAFFF.
Each operation has assigned one bit in the register:
Operation 1: bit 0 ‘0xaffe’
Operation 2: bit 1‘0xaffe’
...
Operation 16: bit 15‘0xaffe’
Operation 17: bit 0‘0xafff’
...
Operation 24: bit 7‘0xafff’
The register format is ‘MOTOROLA’; this means that the first byte arriving is the one with more weight.
Remember that depending on where it communicates the correspondent channel will be activated, which takes part for
B PLC operations if the operation is successful or not. The operations channels are:
0 - MMI
1 - OPER REMOTE
2 - COM 1- COMUNICACION
3 - COM 2- COMUNICACION
4 - RED 1- COMUNICACION
7 - RED 4- COMUNICACIÓN
Example, operation 1 is going to be perform:

[0xFE 0x10 0xAF 0xFE 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x00 0x01 0x68 0xB0] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xAF 0xFE 0x00 0x01 0x55 0x22] ( ACK (acknowledge) the operation)

B.1.5 OUTPUT WRITING
Relay contacts writing in the I/O boards are thought to make easy wiring checks. Proceeding as with a file access, with
opening, writing and lockout.
If it is a writing to a mixed board (includes 16 inputs and 8 outputs):
1º.- OPEN FILE OF OUTPUTS: writing msg to 0xFE20 of 3 registers with the name: OUTPUT
2º. - DESIRED OUTPUTS WRITING writing message to 0xFF20 of 5 REGISTERS, the first one is the board number
(0 or 1) and the restraint ones are the bytes of bits (bits are grouped byte to byte).
3º.- CLOSE FILE OF OUTPUTS: writing msg to 0xFE 28 of 3 registers with the name: OUTPUT
Example, activate the two lower relays to board ‘0’:

1st Opening
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x20 0x00 0x03 0x06 0x4F 0x55 0x54 0x50 0x55 0x54 0xA8 0x42] ---------> RELAY
O U T P U T
PC <---------[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x20 0x00 0x03 0xA4 0x25]
B
2nd Writing
[0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0x20 0x00 0x05 0x0A 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x0000 0x03
0xAE 0x8D] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0x20 0x00 0x05 0x25 0xDB]
3th Lockout:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x28 0x00 0x03 0x06 0x4F 0x55 0x54 0x50 0x55 0x54 0x29 0xA8] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x28 0x00 0x03 0x25 0xE7]

B.1.5.1 CONTROL EVENTS

This section explains events set aside for control, not to be confused with the “snap shot events” , which are used for
debugging tasks.
The event is the value change from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 of one bit. Associated to a time label, which shows when that
change was performed.
In the F650, any status or combination of status may generate an event. For this, the F650 have 192 bits capable of
generate control events.
The first 128 may be configured through a table from EnerVista 650 Setup menu: Setpoint, Relay configuration, or for
complex configurations by PLC Editor.
The other 64 bits comes from the 16 possible switchgears, which generate 4 bits of status each one:
- Open(52B ON, 52A OFF)
- Close(52A ON, 52B OFF)
- Error 00(52A&52B OFF)
- Error 11(52A&52B ON)
B Internally the events buffer is a circular FIFO of 255 events. The addresses for managing this FIFO are:
- 0x03FF: Number of the following event
(To know whether there are new events)
- 0xFCFF: Access from the oldest event
- 0xFD00 to 0xFDFF: Access to any of the events (circular queue)
In the 0x03FF address it is stored the event number of the following new event that it is going to be generated. For
instance, if the number 7677 is stored, it means that the last event stored is the number 7676. This value, at the beginning
is 0 and it is increased as soon as events from 0 to 2^12 + 1 carry bit are generated.
Carry bit allows knowing whether the F650 has been started, as when it starts, either for lack of power supply or for a
configuration change, the carry bit is set to 0. When events are generated, the event number will be increased up to a
maximum value of 0x1FFF; in the next event the number will be 0x1000, that is, the bit of carriage will get always to 1, until
a new F650 start up. The next figure shows it:
0x000 0x1000
0x1FFF
0x17FF

B.1.5.2 EVENT STRUCTURE

Each event has 14 bytes, being its format:
- Short (2 bytes): event number (0 - 2^12 + carry bit)
- Short (2 bytes): events bit number (from 0 to 191).
- Short (2 bytes): the 0 bit indicates the event value (0 or 1) and the 15 bit whether it is event (to
distinguish not valid values, in case of everything was set to 0)
- Double unsigned (8 bytes): milliseconds from 1 January 2000
The 0xFCFF-address usefulness is for when it is desired to read all the available events in the F650, something that will be
done following a master start up.
WARNING! Unlike a standard ModBus address, these addresses consist of 14 bytes each one, instead of the 2 used in
ModBus. This way, each event, which has a structure of 14 bytes, will be contained in one address, as shown on the table
below:
0xFD00 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte
............ B
0xFDFF 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte
Imagine that the events buffer contains the following information:
C
i
r
cul
a
rqu
e
u
e
Event 7424 7425 .......... 7675 7676 7421 7422 7423

Number
Address 0xFD00 0xFD01 0xFDFB 0xFDFC 0xFDFD 0xFDFE 0xFDFF
105 registers: 15 events * 7 registers.
(NOTE: the 0x03FF address will have the event number 7677 because the 7676 is the last one).
a) EVENTS COLLECTION PROCESS
ALL EVENTS
There are two possibilities:
First possibility: start in 0xFCFF address and read events 15 by 15. The frame sent to the relay is the following one:
[
0xF
E0
x0
30
xF
C0
xF
F0
x0
00
x6
90
x9
10
x8
B]-
--
--
--
--
>RL
A
EY
1
05
re
gi
ste
rs
:1
5e
ve
nt
s*7
re
gi
ste
rs
.
A
d
dr
ess
re
qu
es
to
fa
l
lth
ee
ve
nt
s

With this frame the buffer pointer will be set over the 7421 event, which in the example is the oldest one in the buffer, so it
will send back all events until number 7435.
Now, to read the following 15, from 7436 to 7450, it is necessary to calculate the initiation address and send another frame:
Hex(7436)= 0x1D0C
0x1D0C AND 0x00FF= 0xOC
0xFD00+0x0C= 0xFD0C: initiation address
[0xFE 0x03 0xFD 0x0C 0x00 0x69 0x60 0x44] ---------> RELAY
So, it will be asked until the relay responds 0 in one of the events, or reading address 0x03FF and checking the event
number from the last event read.
Second possibility: read directly the memory from the 0xFD00 to 0xFDFF address and then arrange by event number.
From that moment, only the new ones must be requested.
NEW EVENTS
In the 0x03FF address there is the number of the following event that is going to be written, therefore, it is possible to know
B how many events must be read from the last time that the relay was asked. If the relay indicated that the new event to be
generated is the 7677.
C
i
r
cu
la
r
qu
e
ue
Event 7424 7425 .......... 7675 7676 7421 7422 7423

Number
Address 0xFD00 0xFD01 0xFDFB 0xFDFC 0xFDFD 0xFDFE 0xFDFF
(NOTE: the 0x03FF address will have the event number 7677, because the last one is 7676).
Supposing that we all events until number 7674 have already been read, now a frame must be sent to read the
corresponding 28 bytes to events 7675 and 7676, given that there are only two new events from the last time that they were
requested.
Hex(7675)=0x1DFB
0x1DFB AND 0xFF=0xFB
0xFD00+0xFB=0xFDFB: reading address (*)
[0xFE 0x03 0xFD 0xFB 0x00 0x0E 0x90 0x5C] ---------> RELAY

B.1.6 EVENTS STATUS REQUEST (ALARMS)
The necessary data to retrieve events that have been configured as alarms are located in the following addresses:
0xf000: 24 registers, the first 12 indicate the status active/inactive and the last 12 indicate the status of
acknowledged/not acknowledged.
0xf018: 12 event alarm status (active - not active, acknowledged – not acknowledged) registers.
0xf024: date and hour of the event bits starts (groups of 16 dates and hour must be asked for).
To obtain an instantaneous snapshot of all the events and alarms status, the procedure is:
• - Read the head of events FIFO (0x03FF).
• - Read the zones mentioned before.
• - Finally, read the head again to confirm that it has not changed. If it had changed, restart the procedure.
NOTE: The message must request the address and the quantity of bytes indicated in each zone. If other quantity is needed
it will not respond with the requested data.
B
B.1.6.1 CONTROL EVENTS RETRIEVAL FROM THE COMMAND LINE
Starting EnerVista 650 Setup form the command line offers the possibility of transferring control events to a file. For this
purpose, we need to indicate the event number from which event controls are to be retrieved, and the file where they are to
be stored.
Communication can be established via serial communication by specifying the port and access baudrate, or via Ethernet
through the IP address and communication port. The relay number from which events are to be retrieved must also be
indicated.
For executing this Operation, 6 parameters must be written, for both cases, serial communication or Ethernet.
B.1.6.2 SERIAL COMMUNICATION

F650pc –e event number " File name" –com port: baudrate relay number
E.g.: EnerVista 650 Setup –e 6 “C:\GE Power Management\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\Events\eventos.txt” –com 1:19200
254
B.1.6.3 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

F650pc –e event number " File name" –ip “IP address”: port relay number
E.g.: EnerVista 650 Setup –e 6 “C:\GE Power Management\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\Events \eventos.txt” –ip
192.168.37.240:502 254
The created file format will look as follows:
#Event Number, Event Id,Event Text,Event Data Time,Event Value(0,1)#
6,1,Local,09-Sep-2003 17:42:40.782,1
7,1,Local,09-Sep-2003 17:42:43.236,0
8,2,Remote,09-Sep-2003 17:42:43.236,1

B.1.6.4 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF EVENTS (ALARMS)

For acknowledging the alarms we must simply write message to the 0xf324 address with 12 data registers. Each bit means
an event, if we want to acknowledge an alarm, its corresponding bit must be set to ‘1’ (in order within the 192 bits).
NOTE: it must be borne in mind the independence of the acknowledgement condition, for its reading and its change,
depending on the communication channel
There are 6 channels:
LOCAL: by MMI or COM-2 (front and rear accessible).
REMOTE: by COM-1
NET 1: nowadays by any net communication
NET 2: (it does not exist in version 1.4x and lower)
B.1.6.5 VIRTUAL INPUTS WRITING

B For forcing Virtual Inputs, a message with 4 indivisible records must be written at address, so that each bit corresponds to a
Virtual Input. Values will not be correct if the first 4 records are not written in the same message. The first 32 are LATCHED
(internally stored with RAM with battery), and the last 32 are SELF-RST (activated to 1 and deactivated in the next pass by
the PLC).
For reading the status of Virtual Inputs, it is necessary to start with address 0x0083(bit 0x004) up to 0x0087 (bit 0x0200).
B.1.6.6 USER MAP

F650 units incorporate a powerful feature called ModBus User Map, that allows to read 256 non-consecutive data records
(settings and statuses). It is often required for a master computer to interrogate continuously several connected slave
relays. If those values are dispersed along the memory map, reading them may require several transmissions, and this
may cause a communications overload. The User Map can be programmed to get several memory addresses together in a
block of consecutive addresses of the User Map, so that they can be accessible with a single reading operation.
The user Map has two sections:
A record index area (addresses 0x3384 to 0x3483), containing 256 statuses and/or setting record addresses.
A record area (addresses 0xF330 to 0xF42F), containing the values for addresses indicated in the index area.
Data records that are separated in the rest of the memory map can be remapped to an address of an adjacent record in the
User Map area. For programming the map this way, addresses for the required records must be written in the index area.
This avoids the need for several reading operations, thus improving data transmission yield.
For instance, if Contact Outputs from Board F (address 0x008B) and Board G (address 0x00B0) values are required, these
addresses must be mapped as follows:
In address 0x3384, write 0x008B.
In address 0x3385 XXX write 0x00B0.
The reading of records 0xF330 and 0xF331, applying the corresponding bit masks, will provide the required information
about the two boards Contact Outputs.
NOTE: Only single data can be set in the map, data that are in the memory map and can be read. This feature is not valid
for events, waveform records, etc. that are not located in a map address.

B.1.6.7 RETRIEVING OSCILOGRAPHY

In case of not using the quickest download method by FTP , ModBus can be used for downloading oscillography, in the
same way that events (snap-shots). First of all, open file with writing message in 0xfe40, where desired file to open is
indicated, it could be:
OSC01.DAT (COMTRADE data file in binary)
OSC02.CFG (COMTRADE configuration file)
OSC01.HDR (COMTRADE header file)
OSC02.DAT
OSC02.HDR
...
For reading the oscillography in several strings, several reading requests must be sent to 0xff40 address . For reading the
previous message a reading petition must be sent to 0xff42 address. The maximum number of bytes to be read in each part
is 244.
B.1.6.8 TIME SYNCHRONIZATION

Time synchronization consists of setting of relay date and time.
B
It may be supposed that is similar to a usual settings group writing but it has particularities:
- It is a data type very particular because it is made up of other simples.
- Once the data is changed, varies with time, it is a changing setting that can be read.
- It shares the time change with the IRIGB (this has more priority) and with a possible modification from MMI or another
protocols.
- In case of the relay gets disconnected from its auxiliary power supply, during some days, the time will remain in a
chip, feed by a capacitor (it does not need maintenance).
- And last, there are synchronism between the real time chip and the microprocessor time.
Time synchronization is made by a reading message over 0xfff0 address, either with the address of a single relay, if a
writing confirmation is desired, or in broadcast, to synchronize several relays simultaneously.
Date/time format is unsigned double (8 bytes) in MOTOROLA format, which indicates the passed milliseconds from 1st of
January 2000.
Reading example:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0x60 0x21] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------- [0xFE 0x03 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x17 0x05 0xFA 0xD5 0xBA 0x2D 0x1D]
Synchronism example:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x17 0x9B 0x53 0x3F 0x60 0xA4 0x2B] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0xE5 0xE2]

B.1.6.9 ENQUEUEING MESSAGES

In ModBus protocol, as in other protocols, exists an internal procedure in message reception and transmission.
When a relay gets a string, determined by a silence of 3 or 4 characters, it is queued in a FIFO queue, for a later processing
in its own protocol. When the protocol is free of execution, it searches in the queue for strings to respond of the FIFO. If
there is such string, it processes it and then it is responded.
Several criteria have been adopted for real time operation:
- Each reading or writing is respond as soon as possible.
- This implies that when settings are changed and respond, a writing request recognition is indicated and then, the
modification of internal settings is performed, (PERFORMING IT IN THE SHORTER TIME WITHOUT PROTECTION),
and finally, settings are stored in a non-volatile memory device.
NOTE: As the relay is internally a modular system, it is possible that the response of some process is slower than what is
expected by the external program, considering the message as missed and sending again another request. If so, there will
be 2 queued messages and therefore, 2 messages will be responded. For this reason, response message ‘ACK’ must be
verified with its request, and special attention must be paid to setting confirmation writings, especially with reference to
time-out. EnerVista 650 Setup software is recommended to do the configuration modifications, as this software takes into
B account all these details.
B.1.6.10 TRACES AND TROUBLESHOOTING

The tracer is a debugging tool to view the strings in any writing or reading process in ModBus. This tracer is activated in the
menu from F650: View, Traces.
With this option enabled, request and response strings will be shown. If, for instance, request and response strings view is
desired, between F650 and the relay, in general settings reading we will do what follows:
1º. - Activate traces, from View, Traces menu
2º. - Open the general settings menu
The screen will display that group settings, on the left side bottom the relay reading request will appear
<0001><06/18/03 12:14:15>[0xFE 0x03 0x21 0x8A 0x00 0x16 0xFB 0xDD]
And on the right the settings response will appear:
0001><06/18/03 12:14:15>[0xFE 0x03 0x2C 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F
0x80 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x42 0xC8 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0xFE
0x00 0xFE 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF6 0xAC 0xB5]
This way, any request or mechanism to obtain information from the relay, can be viewed string by string.
There is another tool for tracing the relay memory: in F650 menu: Communication, Troubleshooting, any reading to any
address can be requested, the PC will form the string together with check-sum register.

B.1.6.11 MODBUS CHECK FUNCTION

Next it is described the code to realize the message string check in ModBus, in a MOTOROLA micro. With this routine time
is optimized to obtain the check register.
USHORT fn_035c_cr16(UCHAR *p, UNSIGNED us)

{
const UCHAR hi[] = {
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41, B
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40};
const UCHAR lo[] = {

0X0,0Xc0,0Xc1,0X1,0Xc3,0X3,0X2,0Xc2,0Xc6,0X6,
0X7,0Xc7,0X5,0Xc5,0Xc4,0X4,0Xcc,0Xc,0Xd,0Xcd,
0Xf,0Xcf,0Xce,0Xe,0Xa,0Xca,0Xcb,0Xb,0Xc9,0X9,
0X8,0Xc8,0Xd8,0X18,0X19,0Xd9,0X1b,0Xdb,0Xda,0X1a,
0X1e,0Xde,0Xdf,0X1f,0Xdd,0X1d,0X1c,0Xdc,0X14,0Xd4,
0Xd5,0X15,0Xd7,0X17,0X16,0Xd6,0Xd2,0X12,0X13,0Xd3,

0X11,0Xd1,0Xd0,0X10,0Xf0,0X30,0X31,0Xf1,0X33,0Xf3,
0Xf2,0X32,0X36,0Xf6,0Xf7,0X37,0Xf5,0X35,0X34,0Xf4,
0X3c,0Xfc,0Xfd,0X3d,0Xff,0X3f,0X3e,0Xfe,0Xfa,0X3a,
0X3b,0Xfb,0X39,0Xf9,0Xf8,0X38,0X28,0Xe8,0Xe9,0X29,
0Xeb,0X2b,0X2a,0Xea,0Xee,0X2e,0X2f,0Xef,0X2d,0Xed,
0Xec,0X2c,0Xe4,0X24,0X25,0Xe5,0X27,0Xe7,0Xe6,0X26,
0X22,0Xe2,0Xe3,0X23,0Xe1,0X21,0X20,0Xe0,0Xa0,0X60,
0X61,0Xa1,0X63,0Xa3,0Xa2,0X62,0X66,0Xa6,0Xa7,0X67,
0Xa5,0X65,0X64,0Xa4,0X6c,0Xac,0Xad,0X6d,0Xaf,0X6f,
0X6e,0Xae,0Xaa,0X6a,0X6b,0Xab,0X69,0Xa9,0Xa8,0X68,
0X78,0Xb8,0Xb9,0X79,0Xbb,0X7b,0X7a,0Xba,0Xbe,0X7e,
0X7f,0Xbf,0X7d,0Xbd,0Xbc,0X7c,0Xb4,0X74,0X75,0Xb5,
0X77,0Xb7,0Xb6,0X76,0X72,0Xb2,0Xb3,0X73,0Xb1,0X71,
0X70,0Xb0,0X50,0X90,0X91,0X51,0X93,0X53,0X52,0X92,
B 0X96,0X56,0X57,0X97,0X55,0X95,0X94,0X54,0X9c,0X5c,
0X5d,0X9d,0X5f,0X9f,0X9e,0X5e,0X5a,0X9a,0X9b,0X5b,
0X99,0X59,0X58,0X98,0X88,0X48,0X49,0X89,0X4b,0X8b,
0X8a,0X4a,0X4e,0X8e,0X8f,0X4f,0X8d,0X4d,0X4c,0X8c,
0X44,0X84,0X85,0X45,0X87,0X47,0X46,0X86,0X82,0X42,
0X43,0X83,0X41,0X81,0X80,0X40 };
UCHAR chi;
UCHAR clo;
USHORT ui;
chi = 0xff;
clo = 0xff;
while(us--)
{ ui = chi ^ *p++;
chi = clo ^ hi[ui];
clo = lo[ui];
}
ui = chi;
ui = ui << 8;
ui = ui | clo; // motorola format
return(ui);
}

typedef struct //reading string

{ UCHAR dire;
UCHAR fn; //3 o 4
USHORT mem;
USHORT off;
USHORT check;
} PET_READ;
static PET_READ vpet_read; Å------ this is the message (of reading)
And now it is proceed to perform the reading message check:
USHORT xx;
xx = vpet_read.check;
B
if(fn_035c_cr16( (UCHAR *)&vpet_read, sizeof(PET_READ)-2) == xx)
{ OK }
else
{ko }
If it is INTEL everything works but bytes are interchanged.

B.1.7 MEMORY MAP
The Memory map can be obtained from EnerVista 650 Setup software, menu:
View > ModBus Memory map
ADDRESS Bit Name Format Step Mode Length Miscellaneous
0x0087 0x2000 CONT IP_F_CC2 F001 R 1

... ... ... ... .... ... ... ...
0x0089 0x0800 CONT IP_F_CC32 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F: Contact Output Operate -logical status-
0x0089 0x1000 CONT OP OPER_F_01 F001 R 1
0x0089 0x2000 CONT OP OPER_F_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
B 0x008A 0x0800 CONT OP OPER_F_16 F001 R

Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F: Contact Output Resets
1
0x008A 0x1000 CONT OP RESET_F_1 F001 R 1

0x008A 0x2000 CONT OP RESET_F_12 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x008B 0x0800 CONT OP RESET_F_16 F001 R 1
Estado Salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F: Contact Outputs -physical status-
0x008B 0x1000 CONT OP_F_01 F001 R 1
0x008B 0x2000 CONT OP_F_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x008C 0x0800 CONT OP_F_16 F001 R 1
Estado Tarjeta F - Board F Status
0x008C 0x1000 BOARD F STATUS F001 R 1
Estado Entradas Tarjeta G (32 elementos) - Board G: Contact Input Status
0x00AC 0x2000 CONT IP_G_CC1 F001 R 1
0x00AC 0x4000 CONT IP_G_CC2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00AE 0x1000 CONT IP_G_CC32 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G: Contact Output Operate -logical status-
0x00AE 0x2000 CONT OP OPER_G_01 F001 R 1
0x00AE 0x4000 CONT OP OPER_G_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00AF 0x1000 CONT OP OPER_G_16 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G: Contact Output Resets
0x00AF 0x2000 CONT OP RESET_G_01 F001 R 1
0x00AF 0x4000 CONT OP RESET_G_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00B0 0x1000 CONT OP RESET_G_16 F001 R 1
Estado Salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G: Contact Outputs -physical status-
0x00B0 0x2000 CONT OP_G_01 F001 R 1
0x00B0 0x4000 CONT OP_G_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00B1 0x1000 CONT OP_G_16 F001 R 1

Estado Tarjeta G - Board G Status

0x00B1 0x2000 BOARD G STATUS F001 R 1
LEDS HMI (16 elementos) - HMI Leds
0x00D1 0x4000 READY LED F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x8000 LED 1 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0001 LED 2 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0002 LED 3 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0004 LED 4 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0008 LED 5 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0010 LED 6 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0020 LED 7 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0040 LED 8 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0080 LED 9 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0100 LED 10 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0200 LED 11 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0400 LED 12 F001 R 1 B
0x00D2 0x0800 LED 13 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x1000 LED 14 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x2000 LED 15 F001 R 1
Teclas HMI - HMI Keys
0x00D2 0x4000 I Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x8000 O Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0001 * Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0002 F1 Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0004 F2 Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0008 LOCAL OPERATION MODE F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0010 OPERATIONS BLOCKED F001 R 1
Estados Internos - Internal States
0x00D2 0x0020 DSP COMM ERROR F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0040 MAGNETIC MODULE ERROR F001 R 1
Entrada Reset Leds (configurable) -Led reset Input
0x00D2 0x0080 LED RESET INPUT F001 R 1

Sobrecorriente instantanea de fases nivel alto - Phase IOC High

0x00F2 0x0080 PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0100 PH IOC1 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0200 PH IOC1 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0400 PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0800 PH IOC1 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x1000 PH IOC1 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x2000 PH IOC1 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x4000 PH IOC1 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x8000 PH IOC1 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0001 PH IOC1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0002 PH IOC1 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0004 PH IOC2 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0008 PH IOC2 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0010 PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
B 0x00F8
0x00F8
0x0020
0x0040
PH IOC2 HIGH A PKP
PH IOC2 HIGH A OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x00F8 0x0080 PH IOC2 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0100 PH IOC2 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0200 PH IOC2 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0400 PH IOC2 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0800 PH IOC2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x1000 PH IOC2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x2000 PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x4000 PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x8000 PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0001 PH IOC3 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0002 PH IOC3 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0004 PH IOC3 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0008 PH IOC3 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0010 PH IOC3 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0020 PH IOC3 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0040 PH IOC3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0080 PH IOC3 HIGH OP F001 R 1

Sobrecorriente instantanea de fases nivel bajo - Phase IOC Low

0x0104 0x0100 PH IOC1 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0200 PH IOC1 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0400 PH IOC1 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0800 PH IOC1 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x1000 PH IOC1 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x2000 PH IOC1 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x4000 PH IOC1 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x8000 PH IOC1 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0001 PH IOC1 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0002 PH IOC1 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0004 PH IOC1 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0008 PH IOC2 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0010 PH IOC2 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0020 PH IOC2 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0040 PH IOC2 LOW A PKP F001 R 1 B
0x0109 0x0080 PH IOC2 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x0100 PH IOC2 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x0200 PH IOC2 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x0400 PH IOC2 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x0800 PH IOC2 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x1000 PH IOC2 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x2000 PH IOC2 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x4000 PH IOC3 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x010F 0x8000 PH IOC3 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0001 PH IOC3 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0002 PH IOC3 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0004 PH IOC3 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0008 PH IOC3 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0010 PH IOC3 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0020 PH IOC3 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0040 PH IOC3 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0080 PH IOC3 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0110 0x0100 PH IOC3 LOW OP F001 R 1
Sobreintensidad instantánea de Neutro - Neutral IOC
0x0115 0x0200 NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0115 0x0400 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0115 0x0800 NEUTRAL IOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x011A 0x1000 NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x011A 0x2000 NEUTRAL IOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x011A 0x4000 NEUTRAL IOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x011F 0x8000 NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x011F 0x0001 NEUTRAL IOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x011F 0x0002 NEUTRAL IOC3 OP F001 R 1

Sobreintensidad instantánea de Tierra - Ground IOC

0x0124 0x0004 GROUND IOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0124 0x0008 GROUND IOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0124 0x0010 GROUND IOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0129 0x0020 GROUND IOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0129 0x0040 GROUND IOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0129 0x0080 GROUND IOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x012F 0x0100 GROUND IOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x012F 0x0200 GROUND IOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x012F 0x0400 GROUND IOC3 OP F001 R 1
Sobreintensidad instantánea de Tierra Sensible - Sensitive Ground IOC
0x0134 0x0800 SENS GND IOC1 BLK F001 R 1
0x0134 0x1000 SENS GND IOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0134 0x2000 SENS GND IOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0139 0x4000 SENS GND IOC2 BLK F001 R 1
B 0x0139
0x0139
0x8000
0x0001
SENS GND IOC2 PKP
SENS GND IOC2 OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x013E 0x0002 SENS GND IOC3 BLK F001 R 1
0x013E 0x0004 SENS GND IOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x013E 0x0008 SENS GND IOC3 OP F001 R 1

Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto - Phase TOC High

0x0143 0x0010 PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x0143 0x0020 PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x0143 0x0040 PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x0143 0x0080 PH TOC1 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0100 PH TOC1 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0200 PH TOC1 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0400 PH TOC1 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0800 PH TOC1 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x1000 PH TOC1 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x2000 PH TOC1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x4000 PH TOC1 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x8000 PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0001 PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0002 PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0004 PH TOC2 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1 B
0x0149 0x0008 PH TOC2 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0010 PH TOC2 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0020 PH TOC2 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0040 PH TOC2 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0080 PH TOC2 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x014A 0x0100 PH TOC2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x014A 0x0200 PH TOC2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0400 PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0800 PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x014F 0x1000 PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x014F 0x2000 PH TOC3 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x4000 PH TOC3 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x8000 PH TOC3 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0001 PH TOC3 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0002 PH TOC3 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0004 PH TOC3 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0008 PH TOC3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0010 PH TOC3 HIGH OP F001 R 1
Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Neutro - Neutral TOC
0x0154 0x0020 NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0154 0x0040 NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0154 0x0080 NEUTRAL TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x015A 0x0100 NEUTRAL TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x015A 0x0200 NEUTRAL TOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x015A 0x0400 NEUTRAL TOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x015F 0x0800 NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x015F 0x1000 NEUTRAL TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x015F 0x2000 NEUTRAL TOC3 OP F001 R 1

Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra - Ground TOC

0x0164 0x4000 GROUND TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0164 0x8000 GROUND TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0164 0x0001 GROUND TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0169 0x0002 GROUND TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0169 0x0004 GROUND TOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0169 0x0008 GROUND TOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x016E 0x0010 GROUND TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x016E 0x0020 GROUND TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x016E 0x0040 GROUND TOC3 OP F001 R 1
Sobreintensidad Temporizada Tierra Sensible - Sentive Ground TOC
0x0173 0x0080 SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0174 0x0100 SENS GND TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0174 0x0200 SENS GND TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0179 0x0400 SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
B 0x0179
0x0179
0x0800
0x1000
SENS GND TOC2 PKP
SENS GND TOC2 OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x017E 0x2000 SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x017E 0x4000 SENS GND TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x017E 0x8000 SENS GND TOC3 OP F001 R 1

Subtensión de fases - Phase UV

0x0183 0x0001 PHASE UV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0002 PHASE UV1 A PKP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0004 PHASE UV1 A OP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0008 PHASE UV1 B PKP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0010 PHASE UV1 B OP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0020 PHASE UV1 C PKP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0040 PHASE UV1 C OP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0080 PHASE UV1 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x0100 PHASE UV1 AB OP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x0200 PHASE UV1 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x0400 PHASE UV1 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x0800 PHASE UV1 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x1000 PHASE UV1 CA OP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x2000 PHASE UV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x4000 PHASE UV1 OP F001 R 1 B
0x0189 0x8000 PHASE UV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0001 PHASE UV2 A PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0002 PHASE UV2 A OP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0004 PHASE UV2 B PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0008 PHASE UV2 B OP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0010 PHASE UV2 C PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0020 PHASE UV2 C OP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0040 PHASE UV2 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0080 PHASE UV2 AB OP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0100 PHASE UV2 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0200 PHASE UV2 BC OP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0400 PHASE UV2 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0800 PHASE UV2 CA OP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x1000 PHASE UV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x2000 PHASE UV2 OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x4000 PHASE UV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x018F 0x8000 PHASE UV3 A PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0001 PHASE UV3 A OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0002 PHASE UV3 B PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0004 PHASE UV3 B OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0008 PHASE UV3 C PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0010 PHASE UV3 C OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0020 PHASE UV3 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0040 PHASE UV3 AB OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0080 PHASE UV3 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x0100 PHASE UV3 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x0200 PHASE UV3 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x0400 PHASE UV3 CA OP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x0800 PHASE UV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x1000 PHASE UV3 OP F001 R 1

Sobretensión de Secuencia Negativa - Negative Sequence OV

0x0195 0x2000 NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0195 0x4000 NEG SEQ OV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0195 0x8000 NEG SEQ OV1 OP F001 R 1
0x019A 0x0001 NEG SEQ OV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x019A 0x0002 NEG SEQ OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x019A 0x0004 NEG SEQ OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x019F 0x0008 NEG SEQ OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x019F 0x0010 NEG SEQ OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x019F 0x0020 NEG SEQ OV3 OP F001 R 1
Imagen Térmica - Thermal Image
0x01A4 0x0040 THERMAL1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01A4 0x0080 THERMAL1 A RST F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0100 THERMAL1 B RST F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0200 THERMAL1 C RST F001 R 1
B 0x01A5
0x01A5
0x0400
0x0800
THERMAL1 ALARM
THERMAL1 OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x01A5 0x1000 THERMAL1 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x2000 THERMAL1 A OP F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x4000 THERMAL1 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x8000 THERMAL1 B OP F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0001 THERMAL1 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0002 THERMAL1 C OP F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0004 THERMAL2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0008 THERMAL2 A RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0010 THERMAL2 B RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0020 THERMAL2 C RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0040 THERMAL2 ALARM F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0080 THERMAL2 OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0100 THERMAL2 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0200 THERMAL2 A OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0400 THERMAL2 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0800 THERMAL2 B OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x1000 THERMAL2 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x2000 THERMAL2 C OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x4000 THERMAL3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x8000 THERMAL3 A RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0001 THERMAL3 B RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0002 THERMAL3 C RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0004 THERMAL3 ALARM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0008 THERMAL3 OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0010 THERMAL3 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0020 THERMAL3 A OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0040 THERMAL3 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0080 THERMAL3 B OP F001 R 1
0x01B1 0x0100 THERMAL3 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B1 0x0200 THERMAL3 C OP F001 R 1

Unidad Direccional de Fases - Phase Directional

0x01B6 0x0400 PHASE DIR1 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x0800 PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x1000 PHASE DIR1 A OP F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x2000 PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x4000 PHASE DIR1 B OP F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x8000 PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x0001 PHASE DIR1 C OP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0002 PHASE DIR2 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0004 PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0008 PHASE DIR2 A OP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0010 PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0020 PHASE DIR2 B OP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0040 PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0080 PHASE DIR2 C OP F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x0100 PHASE DIR3 BLK INP F001 R 1 B
0x01C1 0x0200 PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x0400 PHASE DIR3 A OP F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x0800 PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x1000 PHASE DIR3 B OP F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x2000 PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x4000 PHASE DIR3 C OP F001 R 1
Unidad Direccional de Neutro - Neutral Directional
0x01C6 0x8000 NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01C6 0x0001 NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01C6 0x0002 NEUTRAL DIR1 OP F001 R 1
0x01CB 0x0004 NEUTRAL DIR2 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01CB 0x0008 NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01CB 0x0010 NEUTRAL DIR2 OP F001 R 1
0x01D0 0x0020 NEUTRAL DIR3 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01D0 0x0040 NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01D0 0x0080 NEUTRAL DIR3 OP F001 R 1
Unidad Direccional de Tierra - Ground Directional
0x01D6 0x0100 GROUND DIR1 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01D6 0x0200 GROUND DIR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01D6 0x0400 GROUND DIR1 OP F001 R 1
0x01DB 0x0800 GROUND DIR2 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01DB 0x1000 GROUND DIR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01DB 0x2000 GROUND DIR2 OP F001 R 1
0x01E0 0x4000 GROUND DIR3 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01E0 0x8000 GROUND DIR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01E0 0x0001 GROUND DIR3 OP F001 R 1

Fallo de Interruptor - Breaker Failure

0x01E5 0x0002 BKR FAIL INITIATE F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0004 BKR FAIL NO CURRENT F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0008 BKR FAIL SUPERVISION F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0010 BKR FAIL HISET F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0020 BKR FAIL LOWSET F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0040 INTERNAL ARC F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0080 BKR FAIL 2nd STEP F001 R 1
Fallo de Fusible - Fuse failure
0x01EB 0x0100 VT FUSE FAILURE F001 R 1
Unidad de Sincronismo - Synchrocheck
0x01F0 0x0200 SYNCROCHECK BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0400 SYNCROCHECK OP F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0800 SYNCHK CLOSE PERM F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x1000 SYNCROCHECK COND OP F001 R 1
B 0x01F0
0x01F0
0x2000
0x4000
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x01F0 0x8000 LL-DB OPERATION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0001 SLIP CONDITION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0002 BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0004 BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ F001 R 1
Reenganchador (bit) - Autorecloser
0x01F5 0x0008 AR LEVEL BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0010 AR PULSE BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0020 AR PULSE UNBLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0080 AR INITIATE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0100 AR CONDS INPUT F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0200 AR CLOSE BREAKER F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0400 AR OUT OF SERVICE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0800 AR READY F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x1000 AR LOCKOUT F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x2000 AR BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x4000 AR RCL IN PROGRESS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x8000 AR LCK BY ANOMALY F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0001 AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0002 AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0004 AR LCK BY USER F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0008 AR LCK BY CONDS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0010 AR LCK BY TRIPS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0020 AR LCK BY SHOTS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0040 AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0400 AR BLOCK BY LEVEL F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0800 AR BLOCK BY PULSE F001 R 1

Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Alto - Neutral OV High

0x01FC 0x1000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK F001 R 1
0x01FC 0x2000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x01FC 0x4000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0201 0x8000 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH BLK F001 R 1
0x0201 0x0001 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0201 0x0002 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0206 0x0004 NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH BLK F001 R 1
0x0206 0x0008 NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0206 0x0010 NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP F001 R 1
Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Bajo - Neutral OV Low
0x020B 0x0020 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK F001 R 1
0x020B 0x0040 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x020B 0x0080 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0211 0x0100 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW BLK F001 R 1
0x0211 0x0200 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP F001 R 1 B
0x0211 0x0400 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0216 0x0800 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW BLK F001 R 1
0x0216 0x1000 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0216 0x2000 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP F001 R 1
Subtensión Auxiliar - Auxiliary UV
0x021B 0x4000 AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x021B 0x8000 AUXILIARY UV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x021B 0x0001 AUXILIARY UV1 OP F001 R 1
0x0220 0x0002 AUXILIARY UV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0220 0x0004 AUXILIARY UV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0220 0x0008 AUXILIARY UV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0225 0x0010 AUXILIARY UV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0225 0x0020 AUXILIARY UV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0225 0x0040 AUXILIARY UV3 OP F001 R 1

Sobretensión de Fases - Phase OV

0x022A 0x0080 PHASE OV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0100 PHASE OV1 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0200 PHASE OV1 AB OP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0400 PHASE OV1 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0800 PHASE OV1 BC OP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x1000 PHASE OV1 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x2000 PHASE OV1 CA OP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x4000 PHASE OV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x8000 PHASE OV1 OP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0001 PHASE OV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0002 PHASE OV2 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0004 PHASE OV2 AB OP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0008 PHASE OV2 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0010 PHASE OV2 BC OP F001 R 1
B 0x0230
0x0230
0x0020
0x0040
PHASE OV2 CA PKP
PHASE OV2 CA OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x0230 0x0080 PHASE OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0231 0x0100 PHASE OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0200 PHASE OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0400 PHASE OV3 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0800 PHASE OV3 AB OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x1000 PHASE OV3 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x2000 PHASE OV3 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x4000 PHASE OV3 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x8000 PHASE OV3 CA OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0001 PHASE OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0002 PHASE OV3 OP F001 R 1
Sobretensión Auxiliar - Auxiliary OV
0x023B 0x0004 AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x023B 0x0008 AUXILIARY OV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x023B 0x0010 AUXILIARY OV1 OP F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0020 AUXILIARY OV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0040 AUXILIARY OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0080 AUXILIARY OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0100 AUXILIARY OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0200 AUXILIARY OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0400 AUXILIARY OV3 OP F001 R 1

Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Secuencia Negativa - Negative Sequence TOC

0x024B 0x0800 NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x024B 0x1000 NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x024B 0x2000 NEG SEQ TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0250 0x4000 NEG SEQ TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0250 0x8000 NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0250 0x0001 NEG SEQ TOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x0255 0x0002 NEG SEQ TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0255 0x0004 NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0255 0x0008 NEG SEQ TOC3 OP F001 R 1
Sobrefrecuencia - Overfrequency
0x025A 0x0010 OVERFREQ1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x025A 0x0020 OVERFREQ1 PKP F001 R 1
0x025A 0x0040 OVERFREQ1 OP F001 R 1
0x025F 0x0080 OVERFREQ2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0260 0x0100 OVERFREQ2 PKP F001 R 1 B
0x0260 0x0200 OVERFREQ2 OP F001 R 1
0x0265 0x0400 OVERFREQ3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0265 0x0800 OVERFREQ3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0265 0x1000 OVERFREQ3 OP F001 R 1
Subfrecuencia - Underfrequency
0x026A 0x2000 UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x026A 0x4000 UNDERFREQ1 PKP F001 R 1
0x026A 0x8000 UNDERFREQ1 OP F001 R 1
0x026F 0x0001 UNDERFREQ2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x026F 0x0002 UNDERFREQ2 PKP F001 R 1
0x026F 0x0004 UNDERFREQ2 OP F001 R 1
0x0274 0x0008 UNDERFREQ3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0274 0x0010 UNDERFREQ3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0274 0x0020 UNDERFREQ3 OP F001 R 1
Calibración - Calibration
0x0279 0x0040 FACTORY CALIBRATION F001 R 1
0x0279 0x0080 CALIBRATION ERROR F001 R 1

Estados Oscilografía - Oscillography States

0x027A 0x0100 OSC DIG CHANNEL 1 F001 R 1
B 0x027A
0x027A
0x0040
0x0080
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x027B 0x0100 OSCILLO TRIGGER F001 R 1
Localizador de Faltas - Fault Report
0x0280 0x0200 FAULT REPORT TRIGG F001 R 1
0x0280 0x0400 CLEAR FAULT REPORTS F001 R 1
Agrupamiento de Funciones - Group States
0x028F 0x0400 GROUP 1 ACT ON F001 R 1
0x028F 0x2000 SETT GROUPS BLOCK F001 R 1
0x028F 0x4000 GROUP 1 BLOCKED F001 R 1
Canal por defecto - Default Channel (not used)
0x0294 0x0002 Default Channel F001 R 1
Unidad de Conductor Roto - Broken Conductor
0x0294 0x0004 BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK F001 R 1
0x0294 0x0008 BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0294 0x0010 BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0020 BROKEN CONDUCT2 BLK F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0040 BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0080 BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0100 BROKEN CONDUCT3 BLK F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0200 BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0400 BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP F001 R 1
Energía - Energy
0x02A4 0x0800 FREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
0x02A4 0x1000 UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
0x02A4 0x2000 RESET ENERGY CNT F001 R 1

Unidad de Tierra Aislada - Isolated Ground

0x02B8 0x4000 ISOLATED GND1 BLK F001 R 1
0x02B8 0x8000 ISOLATED GND1 PKP F001 R 1
0x02B8 0x0001 ISOLATED GND1 OP F001 R 1
0x02C7 0x0002 ISOLATED GND2 BLK F001 R 1
0x02C7 0x0004 ISOLATED GND2 PKP F001 R 1
0x02C7 0x0008 ISOLATED GND2 OP F001 R 1
0x02D6 0x0010 ISOLATED GND3 BLK F001 R 1
0x02D6 0x0020 ISOLATED GND3 PKP F001 R 1
0x02D6 0x0040 ISOLATED GND3 OP F001 R 1
Unidad Direccional de Tierra Sensible - Sensitive Ground Directional
0x02E5 0x0080 SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP F001 R 1
0x02E6 0x0100 SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02E6 0x0200 SENS GND DIR1 OP F001 R 1
0x02EB 0x0400 SENS GND DIR2 BLK IP F001 R 1
0x02EB 0x0800 SENS GND DIR2 BLOCK F001 R 1 B
0x02EB 0x1000 SENS GND DIR2 OP F001 R 1
0x02F0 0x2000 SENS GND DIR3 BLK IP F001 R 1
0x02F0 0x4000 SENS GND DIR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02F0 0x8000 SENS GND DIR3 OP F001 R 1
Unidad de Potencia Máxima Directa - Forward Power(32FP)
0x02F5 0x0001 FWD PWR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0002 FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0004 FWD PWR1 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0008 FWD PWR1 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0010 FWD PWR1 STG2 OP F001 R 1
0x02FA 0x0020 FWD PWR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02FA 0x0040 FWD PWR2 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x02FA 0x0080 FWD PWR2 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x02FB 0x0100 FWD PWR2 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x02FB 0x0200 FWD PWR2 STG2 OP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x0400 FWD PWR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0300 0x0800 FWD PWR3 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x1000 FWD PWR3 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x2000 FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x4000 FWD PWR3 STG2 OP F001 R 1
Entradas Demanda - Demand Inputs
0x0305 0x8000 DEMAND TRIGGER INP F001 R 1
0x0305 0x0001 DEMAND RESET INP F001 R 1
Estado Entradas Tarjeta H (32 elementos) - Board H: Contact Input Status
0x0319 0x0002 CONT IP_H_CC1 F001 R 1
0x0319 0x0004 CONT IP_H_CC2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031B 0x0001 CONT IP_H_CC32 F001 R 1

Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Output Operate -logical status-
0x031B 0x0002 CONT OP OPER_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031B 0x0004 CONT OP OPER_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031C 0x0001 CONT OP OPER_H_16 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Output Resets
0x031C 0x0002 CONT OP RESET_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031C 0x0004 CONT OP RESET_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031D 0x0001 CONT OP RESET_H_16 F001 R 1
Estado Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Outputs -physical status-
0x031D 0x0002 CONT OP_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031D 0x0004 CONT OP_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031E 0x0001 CONT OP_H_16 F001 R 1
B Estado Tarjeta H - Board H Status

0x031E 0x0002 BOARD H STATUS F001 R 1
Estado Entradas Tarjeta J (32 elementos) - Board J: Contact Input Status
0x033E 0x0004 CONT IP_J_CC1 F001 R 1
0x033E 0x0008 CONT IP_J_CC2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0340 0x0002 CONT IP_J_CC32 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J: Contact Output Operate -logical status-
0x0340 0x0004 CONT OP OPER_J_01 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J: Contact Output Resets
0x0341 0x0004 CONT OP RESET_J_01 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estado Salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J: Contact Outputs -physical status-
0x0342 0x0004 CONT OP_J_01 F001 R 1
0x0342 0x0008 CONT OP_J_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0343 0x0002 CONT OP_J_16 F001 R 1
Estado Tarjeta J - Board J Status
0x0343 0x0004 BOARD J STATUS F001 R 1

Sobrecorriente Temporizada de Fases Nivel Bajo - Phase TOC Low

0x0363 0x0008 PH TOC1 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0010 PH TOC1 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0020 PH TOC1 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0040 PH TOC1 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0080 PH TOC1 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0100 PH TOC1 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0200 PH TOC1 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0400 PH TOC1 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0800 PH TOC1 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x1000 PH TOC1 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x2000 PH TOC1 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x4000 PH TOC2 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x0369 0x8000 PH TOC2 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0001 PH TOC2 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0002 PH TOC2 LOW A PKP F001 R 1 B
0x0369 0x0004 PH TOC2 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0008 PH TOC2 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0010 PH TOC2 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0020 PH TOC2 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0040 PH TOC2 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0080 PH TOC2 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x036A 0x0100 PH TOC2 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0200 PH TOC3 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0400 PH TOC3 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0800 PH TOC3 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x036F 0x1000 PH TOC3 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x2000 PH TOC3 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x4000 PH TOC3 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x8000 PH TOC3 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0001 PH TOC3 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0002 PH TOC3 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0004 PH TOC3 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0008 PH TOC3 LOW OP F001 R 1
Contactos Configuración Aparamenta (16 elementos) - Switchgear Contact Configuration States
0x0374 0x0010 SWITCH 1 A INPUT F001 R 1
0x0374 0x0020 SWITCH 1 B INPUT F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Estados Contactos Aparamenta (16 elementos) - Switchgear Contact States

0x0376 0x0010 SWITCH 1 A STATUS F001 R 1
0x0376 0x0020 SWITCH 1 B STATUS F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estados Aparamenta (16 elementos) - Switchgear States
0x0378 0x0010 SWITCH 1 OPEN F001 R 1
0x0378 0x0020 SWITCH 1 CLOSED F001 R 1
0x0378 0x0040 SWITCH 1 00_ERROR F001 R 1
0x0378 0x0080 SWITCH 1 11_ERROR F001 R 1
0x0379 0x0100 SWITCH 2 OPEN F001 R 1
0x0379 0x0200 SWITCH 2 CLOSED F001 R 1
B 0x0379
0x0379
0x0400
0x0800
SWITCH 2 00_ERROR
SWITCH 2 11_ERROR
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037C 0x0001 SWITCH 16 OPEN F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0002 SWITCH 16 CLOSED F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0004 SWITCH 16 00_ERROR F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0008 SWITCH 16 11_ERROR F001 R 1
Estados Inicio Apertura y Cierre Aparamenta - Switchgear Open-Close Initializing States
0x037C 0x0010 SWITCH 1 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0020 SWITCH 1 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0040 SWITCH 2 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0080 SWITCH 2 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037E 0x0004 SWITCH 16 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037E 0x0008 SWITCH 16 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
Estados Fallo Apertura y Cierre Aparamenta - Switchgear Fail States
0x037E 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
0x037E 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037F 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
0x037F 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
0x037F 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0380 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1

Estados Interruptor - Breaker States

0x0390 0x0010 KI2t PHASE A ALARM F001 R 1
0x0390 0x0020 KI2t PHASE B ALARM F001 R 1
0x0390 0x0040 KI2t PHASE C ALARM F001 R 1
0x0390 0x0080 BKR OPENINGS ALARM F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0100 BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0200 BREAKER OPEN F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0400 BREAKER CLOSED F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0800 BREAKER UNDEFINED F001 R 1
0x0391 0x1000 RESET KI2t COUNTERS F001 R 1
0x0391 0x2000 RESET BKR COUNTERS F001 R 1
Estado Mapa Usuario - User Map State
0x039B 0x4000 USER MAP STATUS F001 R 1
Estado Curvas Usuario - Flex Curves States
0x039B 0x8000 FLEXCURVE A STATUS F001 R 1
0x03A0 0x0001 FLEXCURVE B STATUS F001 R 1 B
0x03A5 0x0002 FLEXCURVE C STATUS F001 R 1
0x03AA 0x0004 FLEXCURVE D STATUS F001 R 1
Estados Internos Sistema - Internal System States
0x03B1 0x0008 Green Zone F001 R 1
0x03B1 0x0010 Yellow Zone F001 R 1
0x03B1 0x0020 Orange Zone F001 R 1
0x03B1 0x0040 Red Zone F001 R 1
unidad direccional de potencia Grupo - Directional Power(32)
0x03B2 0x8000 DIR PWR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0001 DIR PWR1 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0002 DIR PWR1 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0010 DIR PWR1 STG PKP F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0020 DIR PWR1 STG OP F001 R 1
0x03B7 0x0040 DIR PWR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x03B8 0x0800 DIR PWR2 STG PKP F001 R 1
0x03B8 0x1000 DIR PWR2 STG OP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x2000 DIR PWR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x4000 DIR PWR3 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x8000 DIR PWR3 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0001 DIR PWR3 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0002 DIR PWR3 STG2 OP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0004 DIR PWR3 STG PKP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0008 DIR PWR3 STG OP F001 R 1

Unidad de Rotor Bloqueado - Locked Rotor (48)

0x03C2 0x0010 LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK F001 R 1
0x03C2 0x0020 LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP F001 R 1
0x03C2 0x0040 LOCKED ROTOR1 OP F001 R 1
Medidas en Valores Secundarios - Analog measures in Secondary Values
0x0C00 Phasor Ia F002 1000 R 2
0x0C02 RMS Ia F002 1000 R 2
0x0C04 Ia Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C06 Ia Imag F002 1000 R 2
B 0x0C08
0x0C0A
Phasor Ib
RMS Ib
F002
F002
1000
1000
R
R
2
2
0x0C0C Ib Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C0E Ib Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C10 Phasor Ic F002 1000 R 2
0x0C12 RMS Ic F002 1000 R 2
0x0C14 Ic Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C16 Ic Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C18 Phasor In F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1A In Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1C In Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1E Phasor Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0C20 RMS Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0C22 Ig Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C24 Ig Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C26 Phasor Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0C28 RMS Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2A Isg Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2C Isg Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2E Zero seq I0 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C30 I0 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C32 I0 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C34 Positive Seq I1 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C36 I1 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C38 I1 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3A Negative Seq I2 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3C I2 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3E I2 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C40 Phasor Vab F002 1000 R 2
0x0C42 Vab Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C44 Vab Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C46 Phasor Vbc F002 1000 R 2

Medidas en Valores Secundarios - Analog measures in Secondary Values (cont.)

0x0C48 Vbc Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C4A Vbc Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C4C Phasor Vca F002 1000 R 2
0x0C4E Vca Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C50 Vca Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C52 Phasor Van F002 1000 R 2
0x0C54 Va Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C56 Va Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C58 Phasor Vbn F002 1000 R 2
0x0C5A Vb Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C5C Vb Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C5E Phasor Vcn F002 1000 R 2
0x0C60 Vc Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C62 Vc Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C64 Phasor Vn F002 1000 R 2 B
0x0C66 Vn Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C68 Vn Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C6A Positive Seq V1 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C6C V1 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C6E V1 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C70 Negative Seq V2 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C72 V2 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C74 V2 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C76 Zero Seq V0 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C78 V0 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C7A V0 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C7C Phasor Vx F002 1000 R 2
0x0C7E Vx Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C80 Vx Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C82 Nominal Voltage F002 1000 R 2
0x0C84 VL Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C86 VL Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C88 VBB Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C8A VBB Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C8C Line Voltage F002 1000 R 2
0x0C8E Bus Voltage F002 1000 R 2
0x0C90 Line Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0C92 Bus Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0C94 Phase A Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C96 Phase B Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C98 Phase C Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C9A Phase A Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C9C Phase B Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C9E Phase C Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA0 Phase A Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA2 Phase B Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2

Medidas en Valores Secundarios - Analog measures in Secondary Values (cont.)

0x0CA4 Phase C Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA6 3 Phase Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA8 3 Phase Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CAA 3 Phase Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CAC Phase A Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0CAE Phase B Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB0 Phase C Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB2 3 Phase Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB4 CT Ratio F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB6 CT Ratio Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB8 CT Ratio Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0CBA PT Ratio F002 1000 R 2
Angulos - Angles
0x0CBC Ia Angle F002 1000 R 2
B 0x0CBE
0x0CC0
Ib Angle
Ic Angle
F002
F002
1000
1000
R
R
2
2
0x0CC2 In Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC4 Ig Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC6 Isg Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC8 Va Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCA Vb Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCC Vc Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCE Vn Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD0 Vx Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD2 Vab Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD4 Vbc Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD6 Vca Angle F002 1000 R 2
Valores Imagen Térmica - Thermal Image Values
0x0DD9 THERMAL1 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DDB THERMAL1 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DDD THERMAL1 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
0x0DE4 THERMAL2 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DE6 THERMAL2 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DE8 THERMAL2 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
0x0DEF THERMAL3 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DF1 THERMAL3 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DF3 THERMAL3 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2

Estados Reenganchador (Enumerado) - Autorecloser Status

0x0E36 AR STATUS F012 R 1 0=OUT OF SERVICE
1=READY
2=LOCKOUT
3=BLOCK
4=RECLOSE IN PROGRESS
0x0E37 AR LOCKOUT MODE F012 R 1 0=NONE
1=ANOMALY
2=FAIL TO OPEN
3=FAIL TO CLOSE
4=MANUAL
5=NO CONDITIONS
6=MAX NUMBER OF TRIPS
7=LAST SHOT
0x0E38 AR BLOCK MODE F012 R 1 0=NONE
1=LEVEL B
2=PULSE
3=LEVEL+PULSE
Estados Oscilografía - Oscillography States
0x0EB6 NUMBER OF TRIGGERS F004 1 R 1
0x0EB7 CYCLES PER RECORD F004 1 R 1
0x0EB8 AVAILABLE RECORDS F004 1 R 1
Localizador de Faltas - Fault Report
0x0EBB FAULT DATE F011 R 3
0x0EBE FAULT TYPE F012 R 1 0=GROUND
1=PHASE
2=3 PH
3=AG
4=ABG
5=AB
6=BG
7=BCG
8=BC
9=CG
10=CAG
11=CA
12=NAF
0x0EBF FAULT LOCATION F003 1 R 2
0x0EC1 FAULT REPORT NUMBER F005 1 R 2

Medidas en Valores Primarios - Analog measures in Primary Values

0x0EE2 Phasor Ia Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EE4 Phasor Ib Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EE6 Phasor Ic Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EE8 Phasor Ig Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EEA Phasor Isg Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EEC Phasor In Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EEE RMS Ia Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF0 RMS Ib Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF2 RMS Ic Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF4 RMS Ig Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF6 RMS Isg Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF8 I0 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EFA I1 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EFC I2 Primary F002 1000 R 2
B 0x0EFE
0x0F00
V0 Primary
V1 Primary
F002
F002
1000
1000
R
R
2
2
0x0F02 V2 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F04 Vab Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F06 Vbc Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F08 Vca Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0A Va Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0C Vb Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0E Vc Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F10 Vn Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F12 Vx Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F14 VBB Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F16 VL Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F18 Phase A Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1A Phase A Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1C Phase A Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1E Phase B Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F20 Phase B Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F22 Phase B Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F24 Phase C Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F26 Phase C Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F28 Phase C Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2A 3 Phase Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2C 3 Phase Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2E 3 Phase Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F30 Phase A Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F32 Phase B Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F34 Phase C Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F36 3 Phase Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F38 Line Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0F3A Bus Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0F3C Positive MWatthour F002 1000 R 2

Medidas en Valores Primarios - Analog measures in Primary Values (cont.)

0x0F3E Negative MWatthour F002 1000 R 2
0x0F40 Positive MVarhour F002 1000 R 2
0x0F42 Negative MVarhour F002 1000 R 2
0x0F44 Pos MWatthour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
0x0F46 Neg MWatthour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
0x0F48 Pos MVarhour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
0x0F4A Neg MVarhour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
Medidas Demanda - Demand measures
0x0FAB DEMAND IA F002 1000 R 2
0x0FAD DEMAND IA MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FAF DEMAND IA DATE F011 R 3
0x0FB2 DEMAND IB F002 1000 R 2
0x0FB4 DEMAND IB MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FB6 DEMAND IB DATE F011 R 3
0x0FB9 DEMAND IC F002 1000 R 2 B
0x0FBB DEMAND IC MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FBD DEMAND IC DATE F011 R 3
0x0FC0 DEMAND IG F002 1000 R 2
0x0FC2 DEMAND IG MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FC4 DEMAND IG DATE F011 R 3
0x0FC7 DEMAND ISG F002 1000 R 2
0x0FC9 DEMAND ISG MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FCB DEMAND ISG DATE F011 R 3
0x0FCE DEMAND I2 F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD0 DEMAND I2 MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD2 DEMAND I2 DATE F011 R 3
0x0FD5 DEMAND W F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD7 DEMAND W MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD9 DEMAND W DATE F011 R 3
0x0FDC DEMAND VAR PWR F002 1000 R 2
0x0FDE DEMAND VAR MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FE0 DEMAND VAR DATE F011 R 3
0x0FE3 DEMAND VA PWR F002 1000 R 2
0x0FE5 DEMAND VA MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FE7 DEMAND VA DATE F011 R 3
Contadores de Interruptor - Breaker Counters
0x111D BREAKER OPENINGS F005 1 R 2
0x111F BREAKER CLOSINGS F005 1 R 2
0x1121 KI2t PHASE A F003 1 R 2
0x1123 KI2t PHASE B F003 1 R 2
0x1125 KI2t PHASE C F003 1 R 2
0x1127 BKR OPENING TIME F003 1 R 2
0x1129 BKR CLOSING TIME F003 1 R 2

Registrador de Datos - Data Logger

0x1153 OLDEST SAMPLE TIME F011 R 3
0x1156 NEWEST SAMPLE TIME F011 R 3
0x1159 DATA LOGGER CHANNELS F004 1 R 1
0x115A DATA LOGGER DAYS F003 1 R 2
Estados Internos Sistema - Internal System States
0x1160 Kswapd Time F005 1 R 2
0x1162 mtd2 Time F005 1 R 2
0x1164 mtd3 Time F005 1 R 2
0x1166 CPU Rtai F005 1 R 2
0x1168 CPU Linux F005 1 R 2
0x116A Total RAM F005 1024 R 2
0x116C Used DRAM F005 1024 R 2
0x116E Free RAM F005 1024 R 2
0x1170 Shared RAM F005 1024 R 2
B 0x1172
0x1174
Buffer RAM
Cached RAM
F005
F005
1024
1024
R
R
2
2
0x1176 Green Counter F005 1 R 2
0x1178 Yellow Counter F005 1 R 2
0x117A Orange Counter F005 1 R 2
0x117C Red Counter F005 1 R 2
0x117E UpTime F005 1 R 2
Funciones Protección habilitadas - Protection Summary
0x2204 0x0001 Phase IOC1 High F001 R 1
0x2220 0x0001 Phase IOC2 High F001 R 1
0x223C 0x0001 Phase IOC3 High F001 R 1
0x2258 0x0001 Phase IOC1 Low F001 R 1
0x22AC 0x0001 Neutral IOC1 F001 R 1
0x22C7 0x0001 Neutral IOC2 F001 R 1
0x22E2 0x0001 Neutral IOC3 F001 R 1
0x22FD 0x0001 Ground IOC1 F001 R 1
0x2319 0x0001 Ground IOC2 F001 R 1
0x2335 0x0001 Ground IOC3 F001 R 1
0x2351 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC1 F001 R 1
0x236D 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC2 F001 R 1
0x2389 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC3 F001 R 1
0x23A5 0x0001 Phase TOC1 High F001 R 1
0x23C2 0x0001 Phase TOC2 High F001 R 1
0x23DF 0x0001 Phase TOC3 High F001 R 1
0x23FC 0x0001 Neutral TOC1 F001 R 1
0x2417 0x0001 Neutral TOC2 F001 R 1
0x2432 0x0001 Neutral TOC3 F001 R 1
0x244D 0x0001 Ground TOC1 F001 R 1
0x2469 0x0001 Ground TOC2 F001 R 1
0x2485 0x0001 Ground TOC3 F001 R 1

Funciones Protección habilitadas - Protection Summary (cont.)

0x24A1 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC1 F001 R 1
0x24BD 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC2 F001 R 1
0x24D9 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC3 F001 R 1
0x24F5 0x0001 Phase UV1 F001 R 1
0x2514 0x0001 Phase UV2 F001 R 1
0x2533 0x0001 Phase UV3 F001 R 1
0x2552 0x0001 Negative Sequence OV1 F001 R 1
0x256D 0x0001 Negative Sequence OV2 F001 R 1
0x2588 0x0001 Negative Sequence OV3 F001 R 1
0x25A3 0x0001 Thermal Model1 F001 R 1
0x25C0 0x0001 Thermal Model2 F001 R 1
0x25DD 0x0001 Thermal Model3 F001 R 1
0x25FA 0x0001 Phase Directional1 F001 R 1
0x2615 0x0001 Phase Directional2 F001 R 1
0x2630 0x0001 Phase Directional3 F001 R 1 B
0x264B 0x0001 Neutral Directional1 F001 R 1
0x2667 0x0001 Neutral Directional2 F001 R 1
0x2683 0x0001 Neutral Directional3 F001 R 1
0x269F 0x0001 Ground Directional1 F001 R 1
0x26BB 0x0001 Ground Directional2 F001 R 1
0x26D7 0x0001 Ground Directional3 F001 R 1
0x26F3 0x0001 Breaker Failure F001 R 1
0x271C 0x0001 Fuse Failure F001 R 1
0x2731 0x0001 Synchrocheck F001 R 1
0x2763 0x0001 Recloser F001 R 1
0x278C 0x0001 Neutral OV1 High F001 R 1
0x27A7 0x0001 Neutral OV2 High F001 R 1
0x27C2 0x0001 Neutral OV3 High F001 R 1
0x27DD 0x0001 Neutral OV1 Low F001 R 1
0x27F8 0x0001 Neutral OV2 Low F001 R 1
0x2813 0x0001 Neutral OV3 Low F001 R 1
0x282E 0x0001 Auxiliary UV1 F001 R 1
0x2848 0x0001 Auxiliary UV2 F001 R 1
0x2862 0x0001 Auxiliary UV3 F001 R 1
0x287C 0x0001 Phase OV1 F001 R 1
0x2898 0x0001 Phase OV2 F001 R 1
0x28B4 0x0001 Phase OV3 F001 R 1
0x28D0 0x0001 Auxiliary OV1 F001 R 1
0x28EB 0x0001 Auxiliary OV2 F001 R 1
0x2906 0x0001 Auxiliary OV3 F001 R 1
0x2921 0x0001 I2 TOC1 F001 R 1
0x293C 0x0001 I2 TOC2 F001 R 1
0x2957 0x0001 I2 TOC3 F001 R 1
0x2972 0x0001 Overfrequency1 F001 R 1
0x298F 0x0001 Overfrequency2 F001 R 1
0x29AC 0x0001 Overfrequency3 F001 R 1

Funciones Protección habilitadas - Protection Summary (cont.)

0x24A1 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC1 F001 R 1
0x29C9 0x0001 Underfrequency1 F001 R 1
0x29E6 0x0001 Underfrequency2 F001 R 1
0x2A03 0x0001 Underfrequency3 F001 R 1
0x2A7C 0x0001 Oscillography F001 R 1
0x2A93 0x0001 Fault Report F001 R 1
0x2C08 0x0001 Broken Conductor1 F001 R 1
0x2C21 0x0001 Broken Conductor2 F001 R 1
0x2C3A 0x0001 Broken Conductor3 F001 R 1
0x2DF6 0x0001 Isolated Ground IOC1 F001 R 1
0x2E17 0x0001 Isolated Ground IOC2 F001 R 1
0x2E38 0x0001 Isolated Ground IOC3 F001 R 1
0x2E59 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional1 F001 R 1
0x2E74 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional2 F001 R 1
B 0x2E8F
0x2EAA
0x0001
0x0001
Forward power1
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x2EC9 0x0001 Forward power2 F001 R 1
0x2EE8 0x0001 Forward power3 F001 R 1
0x2F07 0x0001 Demand F001 R 1
0x2F20 0x0001 IEC104 Protocol F001 R 1
0x32A5 0x0001 Phase TOC1 Low F001 R 1
0x32C2 0x0001 Phase TOC2 Low F001 R 1
0x32DF 0x0001 Phase TOC3 Low F001 R 1
0x38D4 0x0001 Data Logger F001 R 1
0x38FA 0x0001 Directional Power1 F001 R 1
0x391D 0x0001 Directional Power2 F001 R 1
0x3940 0x0001 Directional Power3 F001 R 1
0x3963 0x0001 Locked Rotor1 F001 R 1
0x3978 0x0001 Locked Rotor2 F001 R 1
0x398D 0x0001 Locked Rotor3 F001 R 1
Funciones con Eventos habilitados - Snapshot Events Summary
0x1EE5 0x0001 Board F Event F001 R 1
0x208A 0x0001 Board G Event F001 R 1
0x2199 0x0001 General Settings Event F001 R 1
0x220C 0x0001 Phase IOC1 High Event F001 R 1
0x2228 0x0001 Phase IOC2 High Event F001 R 1
0x2244 0x0001 Phase IOC3 High Event F001 R 1
0x2260 0x0001 Phase IOC1 Low Event F001 R 1
0x227C 0x0001 Phase IOC2 Low Event F001 R 1
0x2298 0x0001 Phase IOC3 Low Event F001 R 1
0x22B3 0x0001 Neutral IOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x22CE 0x0001 Neutral IOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x22E9 0x0001 Neutral IOC3 Event F001 R 1
0x2305 0x0001 Ground IOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x2321 0x0001 Ground IOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x233D 0x0001 Ground IOC3 Event F001 R 1

Funciones con Eventos habilitados - Snapshot Events Summary (cont.)

0x2359 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x23AE 0x0001 Phase TOC1 High Event F001 R 1
0x23CB 0x0001 Phase TOC2 High Event F001 R 1
0x23E8 0x0001 Phase TOC3 High Event F001 R 1
0x2403 0x0001 Neutral TOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x241E 0x0001 Neutral TOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x2439 0x0001 Neutral TOC3 Event F001 R 1
0x2455 0x0001 Ground TOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x2471 0x0001 Ground TOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x248D 0x0001 Ground TOC3 Event F001 R 1
0x24A9 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x24C5 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x24E1 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC3 Event F001 R 1 B
0x2500 0x0001 Phase UV1 Event F001 R 1
0x251F 0x0001 Phase UV2 Event F001 R 1
0x253E 0x0001 Phase UV3 Event F001 R 1
0x2559 0x0001 Negative Sequence OV1 Event F001 R 1
0x2574 0x0001 Negative Sequence OV2 Event F001 R 1
0x258F 0x0001 Negative Sequence OV3 Event F001 R 1
0x25AC 0x0001 Thermal Model1 Event F001 R 1
0x25C9 0x0001 Thermal Model2 Event F001 R 1
0x25E6 0x0001 Thermal Model3 Event F001 R 1
0x2601 0x0001 Phase Directional1 Event F001 R 1
0x261C 0x0001 Phase Directional2 Event F001 R 1
0x2637 0x0001 Phase Directional3 Event F001 R 1
0x2653 0x0001 Neutral Directional1 Event F001 R 1
0x266F 0x0001 Neutral Directional2 Event F001 R 1
0x268B 0x0001 Neutral Directional3 Event F001 R 1
0x26A7 0x0001 Ground Directional1 Event F001 R 1
0x26C3 0x0001 Ground Directional2 Event F001 R 1
0x26DF 0x0001 Ground Directional3 Event F001 R 1
0x2708 0x0001 Breaker Failure Event F001 R 1
0x271D 0x0001 Fuse Failure Event F001 R 1
0x2745 0x0001 Synchrocheck Event F001 R 1
0x2774 0x0001 Recloser Event F001 R 1
0x2793 0x0001 Neutral OV1 High Event F001 R 1
0x27AE 0x0001 Neutral OV2 High Event F001 R 1
0x27C9 0x0001 Neutral OV3 High Event F001 R 1
0x27E4 0x0001 Neutral OV1 Low Event F001 R 1
0x27FF 0x0001 Neutral OV2 Low Event F001 R 1
0x281A 0x0001 Neutral OV3 Low Event F001 R 1
0x2834 0x0001 Auxiliary UV1 Event F001 R 1
0x284E 0x0001 Auxiliary UV2 Event F001 R 1
0x2868 0x0001 Auxiliary UV3 Event F001 R 1

Funciones con Eventos habilitados - Snapshot Events Summary (cont.)

0x2884 0x0001 Phase OV1 Event F001 R 1
0x28A0 0x0001 Phase OV2 Event F001 R 1
0x28BC 0x0001 Phase OV3 Event F001 R 1
0x28D7 0x0001 Auxiliary OV1 Event F001 R 1
0x28F2 0x0001 Auxiliary OV2 Event F001 R 1
0x290D 0x0001 Auxiliary OV3 Event F001 R 1
0x2928 0x0001 Negative Sequence TOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x2943 0x0001 Negative Sequence TOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x295E 0x0001 Negative Sequence TOC3 Event F001 R 1
0x297B 0x0001 Overfrequency1 Event F001 R 1
0x2998 0x0001 Overfrequency2 Event F001 R 1
0x29B5 0x0001 Overfrequency3 Event F001 R 1
0x29D2 0x0001 Underfrequency1 Event F001 R 1
0x29EF 0x0001 Underfrequency2 Event F001 R 1
B 0x2A0C
0x2A81
0x0001
0x0001
Oscillography Event
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x2A9F 0x0001 Fault Report Event F001 R 1
0x2C0D 0x0001 Broken Conductor1 Event F001 R 1
0x2C26 0x0001 Broken Conductor2 Event F001 R 1
0x2C3F 0x0001 Broken Conductor3 Event F001 R 1
0x2E03 0x0001 Isolated Ground IOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x2E60 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional1 Event F001 R 1
0x2E7B 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional2 Event F001 R 1
0x2E96 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional3 Event F001 R 1
0x2EB5 0x0001 Forward Power1 Event F001 R 1
0x2ED4 0x0001 Forward Power2 Event F001 R 1
0x2EF3 0x0001 Forward Power3 Event F001 R 1
0x2F0C 0x0001 Demand Event F001 R 1
0x32AE 0x0001 Phase TOC1 Low Event F001 R 1
0x32CB 0x0001 Phase TOC2 Low Event F001 R 1
0x32E8 0x0001 Phase TOC3 Low Event F001 R 1
0x3909 0x0001 Directional Power1 Event F001 R 1
0x392C 0x0001 Directional Power2 Event F001 R 1
0x394F 0x0001 Directional Power3 Event F001 R 1
0x396D 0x0001 Locked Rotor1 Event F001 R 1
0x3982 0x0001 Locked Rotor2 Event F001 R 1
0x3997 0x0001 Locked Rotor3 Event F001 R 1
Mapa de Usuario - User Map
0xF330 Address 00 F004 1 R 1
0xF331 Address 01 F004 1 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0xF42F Address 255 F004 1 R 1

APPENDIX C C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL FOR F650
APPENDIX C C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL FOR F650 C.1.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL SETTINGS
F650 units enable the user to program certain parameters related to DNP3 protocol. These parameters are called DNP3
protocol settings and can be modified from the front panel or from the Level 2 software. The F650 relay supports
communication with multiple masters (3) and maintains three separate groups of DNP3 settings. Each group of DNP3
settings is related to a single logical DNP3 slave device. The F650 relay is able to communicate simultaneously with up to
three different DNP3 master stations. Each master communicates with a different logical DNP3 slave, these logical slaves
appearing as separate physical DNP3 slaves. This is achieved by keeping separate set of settings, event queues and set of
states for each logical device.
Notice that it is necessary to set different DNP Address and TCP/UDP Port for each logical DNP3 slave device.
In the current 1.72 firmware version of the F650 relay only the first logical DNP3 slave can be configured DNP3 over serial
link (COM1 or COM2). Therefore setting the DNP3 Physical Port to COM1 or COM2 for the second or the third logical slave
devices will have no effect. The second and the third logical DNP3 slave devices can only communicate using DNP3 over
TCP/IP.
Time synchronization through DNP protocol is available from all three DNP masters that can communicate with F650.
However the date & time will be taken from only one master at the same moment. It is recommended to use only one
master to do time sync through DNP.
SETTING NO SETTING NAME DEFAULT VALUE RANGE

1 Physical Port NONE NONE, COM1, COM2, NETWORK
2 Address 255 0 to 65534, step 1
3 IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 0 to 255 step 1
5 IP Addr Client1 Oct3 0 0 to 255 step 1 C
23 TCP/UDP Port 20000 1 to 65535, step 1
24 Unsol Resp Function DISABLED DISABLED, ENABLED
25 Unsol Resp TimeOut 5s 0 to 60 sec, step 1
26 Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 1 to 255, step 1
27 Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 0 to 65519, step 1
28 Current Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
29 Voltage Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
30 Power Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
31 Energy Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
32 Other Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
33 Current Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
34 Voltage Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller C-1

C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL FOR F650 APPENDIX C
SETTING NO SETTING NAME DEFAULT VALUE RANGE

35 Power Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
36 Energy Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
37 Other Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
38 Msg Fragment Size 240 30 to 2048, step 1
39 Binary Input Block1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 See the explanation below
47 Binary Input Block9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 See the explanation below
48 Binary Input Block10 SWITCHGEAR 9-16 See the explanation below
1. Physical Port: The F650 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The F650 can be used as a
DNP slave device connected up to three DNP masters (usually RTUs or SCADA master stations).. The Physical
Port setting is used to select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for a specific logical DNP slave
device of F650.. When this setting is set to NETWORK, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/
IP.
2. Address: This setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies de F650 on a DNP communications link.
Each logical DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
C 3-22. IP Addr Client x Oct x: this setting is one of four octets of an IP address. The F650 relay can respond to a
maximum of 5 specific DNP masters (not in the same time). To set the IP address of DNP master it is necessary to
set four octets (e.g. to set the IP address of the first DNP master to 192.168.48.125, you should set IP Addr Client1
Oct1 = 192, IP Addr Client1 Oct2 = 168, IP Addr Client1 Oct3 = 48, IP Addr Client1 Oct4 = 125).
23. TCP/UDP Port: TCP/UDP port number for the case of DNP3 communication being performed through the
Ethernet.
24. Unsol Resp Function: ENABLED, if unsolicited responses are allowed, and DISABLED otherwise.
25. Unsol Resp TimeOut: sets the time the F650 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response.
26. Unsol Resp Max Ret: This setting determines the number of times the F650 will retransmit an unsolicited response
without receiving a confirmation from the master. Once this limit has been exceeded, the unsolicited response will
continue to be sent at larger interval. This interval is called unsolicited offline interval and is fixed at 10 minutes.
27. Unsol Resp Dest Adr: This setting is DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to
which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the F650 from either the current DNP TCP connection or the
most recent UDP message.
28-32. Scale Factor: These settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the F650
Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for
all Analog Input points of that type. For example, if the Voltage Scale Factor is set to a value of 1000, all DNP
Analog Input points that are voltages will be returned with the values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value 72000 V on
the F650 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within
certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be
10 times larger).
33-37. Deadband: These settings are the values used by the F650 to determine when to trigger unsolicited responses
containing Analog Input data. These settings group the F650 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power,
energy, and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For
example, in order to trigger unsolicited responses from the F650 when any current values change by 15 A, the
Current Deadband setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands.
DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP Analog
Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the F650, the default deadbands will be in effect.
C-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

38. Msg Fragment Size: This setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer
confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels
39-48. Binary Input Block x: These settings allow customization and change of the size of DNP Binary Inputs point list.
The default Binary Inputs point list contains 160 points representing binary states that are configured using
“Setpoint->Relay Configuration” menu from the F650PC program. These 160 binary states are grouped in 10
blocks of 16 points each. There are 128 bits (8 blocks of 16) called Control Events and 32 bits (2 blocks of 16)
corresponding to the states of 16 switchgears available in F650 relay. If not all of the 160 points are required in the
DNP master, a custom Binary Inputs point list can be created by selecting up to 10 blocks of 16 points. Each block
represents 16 Binary Input points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0-15, block 2 represents Binary Input
points 16- 31, block 3 represents Binary Input points 32-47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that
can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of the Binary Input Block x settings are set to “NOT USED”, the default list of
160 points will be in effect. The F650 will form the Binary Inputs points list from the Binary Input Block x settings
up to the first occurrence of a setting value “NOT USED”. Permitted values for these settings are: NOT USED, CTL
EVENTS 1-16, CTL EVENTS 17-32, CTL EVENTS 33-48, CTL EVENTS 49-64, CTL EVENTS 65-80, CTL
EVENTS 81-96, CTL EVENTS 97-112, CTL EVENTS 113-128, SWITCHGEAR 1-8, SWITCHGEAR 9-16.

C.1.2 DNP 3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
a) DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (SHEET 2 OF 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: F650 Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests: Level 2 Master
For Responses: Level 2 a Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Inputs Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link String Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
C Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: Configurable up to 2048
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None a None
a Fixed at 2 Configurable
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
a Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable

b) DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (SHEET 2 OF 3)
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Never
Always
a When reporting Event Data
a When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm: None a Fixed at 3 s Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment: a None Fixed at Variable Configurable
Application Confirm: None a Fixed at 4 s Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Response a No0ne Fixed at Variable Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Need Time Delay: 10 min.
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary Input change scanning period: 1 ms
C
Packed binary change process period: 1s
Analog Input change scanning period: 500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 500 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay: Configurable 0 to 60 s
Unsolicited offline interval: 10 min.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs a Never Always Sometimes Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Never a Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never a Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never a Always Sometimes Configurable
Count > 1 a Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse On Never a Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off a Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On a Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off a Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Queue a Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Clear Queue a Never Always Sometimes Configurable

c) DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (SHEET 3 OF 3)
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
variation requested: specific variation requested:
Never Never
a Only time-tagged a Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never a Never
a Configurable When Device Restarts
Only certain objects When Status Flag Change
Sometimes (attach explanation)
a ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function codes No other options permitted
supported
Default CounterObject/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:
a No Counters Reported a No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object: 16 Bits
C Default Variation: 32 Bits
Other Value: ______
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
a Yes
No

C.1.3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table shows objects, variations, function codes and qualifiers supported by F650 units, both in requests and
responses for DNP3 protocol. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07 or 08, will
be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers
17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Text in bold and italic indicates functionality higher than DNP3 implementation level 2.
a) IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (SHEET 1 OUT OF 3)
OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Qualifier Codes
Description Function Codes
No. No. (dec) (hex) (hex)
06 (no range, or all)
Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 00,01 (start-stop)
1 0 request default variation) 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop) 00, 01 (start-stop)
1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 1 Binary Input 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
See Note 2
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 2 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
(default – see Note 1) 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) See Note 2
17,28 (index)
2 0
Binary Input Change - All Variations
See Note 1 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty) C
06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 17, 28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
00,01 (start-stop)
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
Binary Output Status 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 2 1 read 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
See Note 1 07,08 (limited qty) See Note 2
17,28 (index)
3 (select)
4 (operate) 00,01 (start-stop)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) echo of request
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir.op, noack)
1 (select)
7 (freeze)
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 8 (freeze noack) 06 (no range, or all)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz.cl. noack)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01
(for change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded).
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – The F650 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.

b) IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (SHEET 2 OUT OF 3)

Object Variation Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes (hex) Function Codes Qualifier Codes
No. No. (dec) (hex)
21 0 Frozen Counter - All Variations 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Counter Change Event - All 06 (no range, or all)
22 0 1 (read)
Variations 07,08 (limited qty)
1 (read) 00,01 (start-stop)
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
000,01 (start-stop) 00, 01 (start-
32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) stop)
30 1 See Note 1 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
17,28 (index) See Note 2
1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) stop)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
C 32 0 Analog Change Event - All Variations 1 (read) 07,08 (limited qty)
32-Bit Analog Change Event without
06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
32 1 Time 1 (read) 07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol.resp) 17, 28 (index)
See Note 1
16-Bit Analog Change Event without 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
32 2 Time 1 (read) 07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol.resp) 17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
32-Bit Analog Change Event with 06 (no range, or all)
32 3 Time 1 (read) 07,08 (limited qty) 130 17,28 (index)
(unsol.resp)
129 (response)
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 130 17,28 (index)
Time 07,08 (limited qty)
(unsol.resp)
00,01 (start-stop)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
16-Bit Analog Input Reporting 00,01 (start-stop) 00,01 (start-

06 (no range, or all) stop)
34 1 Deadband 1 (read) 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
See Note 1

c) IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (SHEET 3 OUT OF 3)

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Qualifier Codes
No. No. Description (dec) (hex) Function Codes (hex)
32-Bit Analog Input Reporting 00,01 (start-stop)

34 2 Deadband 2 (write) 07,08 (limited qty)
See Note 1 17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop) 00,01 (start-
06 (no range, or all) stop)
50 0 Time and Date - All Variations 1 (read) 129 (response)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 00,01 (start-
Time and Date 1 (read) stop)
50 1 See Note 1 2 (write) 07 (limited qty=1) 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
08 (limited qty)
1 (read)
07 (limited qty)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 2 (write) 129 (response) quantity=1
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 06 (no range, or all)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
60 1 Class 0 Data 06 (no range, or all)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol) 06 (no range, or all)
60 2 Class 1 Data
21 (disable unsol) 07,08 (limited qty)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
C
60 3 Class 2 Data
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
60 4 Class 3 Data
22 (assign class)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)

(index must =7)
No Object (function code only)
See Note 3 13 (cold restart)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)

No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

C.1.4 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The F650 relay has a configurable Map of DNP Binary Input points. This map can be formed by up to 10 blocks of 16 binary
states that are configured using “Setpoint->Relay Configuration” menu from the F650PC program. The minimum number of
DNP Binary Input points is 16 and the maximum number is 160. Within these 160 DNP points, 128 bits (8 blocks of 16) are
mapped to Control Events (Setpoint->Relay Configuration->Control Events) and 32 bits (2 block of 16) are mapped to
contacts A, B of 16 Switchgears (Setpoint->Relay Configuration->Switchgear). Each Switchgear in F650 is mapped into
two DNP Binary Input points. Lets say the setting Binary Input Block1 has been set the value Switchgear 1-8, it means that
DNP Binary Input point 0 = Switchgear 1Contact A, DNP Binary Input point 1 = Switchgear 1 Contact B, DNP Binary Input
point 2 = Switchgear 2 Contact A, etc.
To each Control Event or Switchgear Contact, the user can assign any of the binary states of the F650 relay. These states
are contact inputs and outputs, virtual outputs, protection element states, PLC states, etc. DNP Points that correspond to
Control Events o Switchgear Contacts that are not configured will have a zero value in the response.
Using the PLC-Editor, through the F650PC program, selecting menu: Setpoint->Logic Configuration, it will be possible to
implement complex logic, more than simple OR and NOT previous functions. To perform this, in the menu: Setpoint->Relay
Configuration->Control Events assign a Virtual Output to selected point, after that, implement wished logic with the PLC-
Editor.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
C Static Variation Reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default Class for all points: 1
DEFAULT BINARY INPUT POINTS MAP
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0-127 Control Events 1-128 143 Switchgear 8 Contact B
128 Switchgear 1 Contact A 144 Switchgear 9 Contact A
129 Switchgear 1 Contact B 145 Switchgear 9 Contact B
159 Switchgear 16 Contact B

C.1.5 DNP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES
C.1.5.1 CONFIGURING DNP USER MAP

Imagine that a user wants to configure DNP Binary Inputs Map with 8 Contact Inputs, 8 Protection states, 8 Contact
Outputs and 2 Switchgears. This configuration can be done in two steps. In first step the user selects “Setpoint->Relay
Configuration” from the F650PC program and then configures Control Events bits and Switchgear bits. It is shown in figures
9.1 and 9.2. In the second step the user selects “Setpoint->System Setup->Communication settings->DNP” in order to
change DNP Binary Input Block settings. The user set values of the first three Binary Input blocks, Binary Input Block1 =
CTL EVENTS 1-16, Binary Input Block2 = CTL EVENTS 17-32, Binary Input Block3 = SWITCHGEAR 1-8. It is shown in
Configuration of Control Events bits
Figure C–1: CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL EVENTS BITS
Figure C–2: CONFIGURATION OF SWITCHGEAR

Figure C–3: CONFIGURATION OF DNP BINARY INPUT BLOCKS
In the example presented in this chapter the F650 relay has 48 Binary Input points, as shown in the table below.
C.1.5.2 EXAMPLE OF CUSTOM BINARY INPUT POINTS MAP

C
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
24 Not Configured
0 CONT_IP_F_CC1(CC1)
25 Not Configured
26 Not Configured
27 Not Configured
28 Not Configured
29 Not Configured
30 Not Configured
31 Not Configured
32 CONT_IP_F_CC13 (CC13)
8 PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP
9 PH IOC1 HIGH B PKP
10 PH IOC1 HIGH C PKP
11 PH IOC1 LOW A PKP
36 Not Configured
12 PH IOC1 LOW B PKP
37 Not Configured
13 PH IOC1 LOW C PKP
38 Not Configured
14 GROUND IOC1 PKP
39 Not Configured
15 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
40 Not Configured
16 CONT OP_F_01
41 Not Configured
17 CONT OP_F_02
42 Not Configured
18 CONT OP_F_03
43 Not Configured
19 CONT OP_F_04
44 Not Configured
20 CONT OP_F_05
45 Not Configured
21 CONT OP_F_06
46 Not Configured
22 CONT OP_F_07
47 Not Configured
23 CONT OP_F_08

C.1.5.3 MULTIPLE DNP 3.0 MASTERS COMMUNICATION WITH F650

Typical architecture of multi-master communication using DNP 3.0.
DNP3 Master 1 DNP3 Master 2 DNP3 Master 3

Scada Device Scada Device RTU Device
Hub or
Switch
DNP3 over TCP/IP
DNP3 Slave
F650 Relay
Figure C–4: MULTIPLE DNP3.0 MASTERS COMMUNICATING WITH F650 C

DNP 3.0 Slave – F650 DNP 3.0 Master 1 DNP 3.0 Master 2 DNP 3.0 Master 3
Ethernet Config Ethernet Config Ethernet Config Ethernet Config
IP Addr: 192.168.37.20 IP Addr: 192.168.37.1 IP Addr: 192.168.37.2 IP Addr: 192.168.37.3

Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Netmask: 255.255.255.0
DNP 3.0 slave 1 DNP3 over TCP/IP DNP3 over TCP/IP DNP3 over TCP/IP
Physical Port: Network DNP Addr: 200 DNP Addr: 201 DNP Addr: 202
Address: 255 DNP Dest Addr: 255 DNP Dest Addr: 256 DNP Dest Addr: 257
IP Addr Cli1: 192.168.37.1 IP Dest: 192.168.37.20 IP Dest : 192.168.37.20 IP Dest: 192.168.37.20
TCP/UDP Port : 20000 TCP Dest Port: 20000 TCP Dest Port: 20001 TCP Dest Port: 20002
Unsol Dest Addr: 200
DNP 3.0 slave 2
Physical Port: Network

Address: 256
IP Addr Cli1: 192.168.37.2
TCP/UDP Port : 20001
C Unsol Dest Addr: 201
DNP 3.0 slave 3
Physical Port: Network

Address: 257
IP Addr Cli1: 192.168.37.3
TCP/UDP Port : 20002
Unsol Dest Addr: 202
Figure C–5: SETTINGS FOR DNP3.0 MULTI-MASTER COMMUNICATIONS WITH F650

C.1.6 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On.

The F650 relay provides 24 DNP Binary/Control Output points. These outputs are mapped to the first 24 commands
configured in the F650. Executing a command is equal to activate the PLC equation that was attached to this command.
Thus all of the 24 DNP Binary/Control Output points are pulsed points. It means that only Pulse On flag will be accepted in
DNP control operations on those points. All commands have configurable names. Changing the command’s name can be
done using the F650PC program.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation Reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no ack)
BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUT POINTS BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUT POINTS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX INDEX C
0 OPERATION1 12 OPERATION13
1 OPERATION2 OPERATION_00 13 OPERATION14
8 OPERATION9 OPERATION_00 20 OPERATION21

C.1.7 BINARY COUNTERS
Currently there are no Binary Counters in the F650 relay. Nevertheless F650 accepts requests of DNP objects 20 (Binary
Counters), 21 (Frozen Counters) and 22 (Counter Change Events). Function codes “Immediate Freeze”, “Freeze and
Clear” etc. are accepted and F650 will respond with no objects and the IIN2-1 (Object Unknown) flag set. This behavior is
in conformance with DNP Level 2 Implementation (Document 28528: Level 2 DNP 3.00 Implementation).

C.1.8 ANALOG INPUTS
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.
Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. This is a
DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical
Bulletin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. The scale factors apply also to deadbands. For example if Current
Scale Factor is set to 0.001, and it is desired that a specific Analog Input point (that is of type current) trigger an event when
its value changes by 1 kA, then the deadband for this point should be set to 1000. Relay settings are available to set default
deadband values according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
ANALOG INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation Reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500ms.
Default Class for all points: 1
C
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
Current: kA Apparent Power: MVA

Voltage: kV Energy: MWh, Mvarh
Real Power: MW Frequency: Hz
Reactive Power: Mvar Angle: degrees

a) ANALOG INPUT POINTS
POINT INDEX NAME/DESCRIPTION POINT INDEX NAME/DESCRIPTION

0 Phasor Ia Primary 27 Phase A Apparent Pwr
1 Phasor Ib Primary 28 Phase A Real Pwr
2 Phasor Ic Primary 29 Phase B Reactive Pwr
3 Phasor Ig Primary 30 Phase B Apparent Pwr
4 Phasor Isg Primary 31 Phase B Real Pwr
5 Phasor In Primary 32 Phase C Reactive Pwr
6 RMS Ia Primary 33 Phase C Apparent Pwr
7 RMS Ib Primary 34 Phase C Real Pwr
8 RMS Ic Primary 35 3 Phase Reactive Pwr
9 RMS Ig Primary 36 3 Phase Apparent Pwr
10 RMS Isg Primary 37 3 Phase Real Pwr
11 I0 Primary 38 Phase A Power Factor
12 I1 Primary 39 Phase B Power Factor
13 I2 Primary 40 Phase C Power Factor
14 V0 Primary 41 3 Phase Power Factor
15 V1 Primary 42 Line Frequency Primary
16 V2 Primary 43 Bus Frequency Primary
C 17 Vab Primary 44 Vx Primary
18 Vbc Primary 45 Positive MVarhour
19 Vca Primary 46 Negative MVarhour
20 Vn Primary 47 Positive MWatthour
21 Va Primary 48 Negative MWatthour
22 Vb Primary 49 Pos MVarhour Cnt
23 Vc Primary 50 Neg MVarhour Cnt
24 VL Primary 51 Pos MWatthour Cnt
25 VBB Primary 52 Neg MWatthour Cnt
26 Phase A Reactive Pwr

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX D D.1IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The F650 is an IEC server. Answers to clients request or can send spontaneous Transmission. F650 implementation of
60870-5-104 provides analog meterings and states.
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller D-1

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX D
D.1.2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
ASDU is the information unit used for data transmission. An ASDU may have data inside or not. The ASDU is encapsulated
in another package of the link layer. ASDU address takes up 2 bytes.
Communication frames can be control or data frames. Control strings do not have ASDU inside.
A frame is consist on 3 parts. (2 of them are not always present):
Link data + [ASDU header+ [ASDU data]]
The data between brackets can be omitted
In IEC104 communication is made by TCP/IP protocols. Actually, it is a TCP communication. The default port is the 2404.
The F650 is listening as a server. Only one client is attended at time.
D-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

D.1.3 BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
Cyclic data transmission

2 ASDU for measured values
2 ASDU for single point information (64 states in each ASDU).
1 ASDU for Double point information (16 states for Switchgear).
Spontaneous Transmission:
2 ASDU for measured values (timing is set in Cyclic Meter Period, 0 means no spontaneous transmission).
1 ASDU for single point information in the time the event is produced (128 points in user map).
1 ASDU for Double point information in the time the event is produced (16 Switchgear information).
Clock synchronization:
Command transmission:
Acquisition of transmission delay:

D.1.4 IEC 104 SETTINGS
The Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol are the following:
PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >IEC 870-5-104

NAME VALUE UNITS RANGE
Function DISABLED
TCP Port 2404 [0 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 255 [0 : 65535]
Cyclic Meter Period 0 [0 : 3600]
Synchronization Event 0 [0 : 3600]
Function: Enable or disable the protocol operation.

TCP Port: Listening TCP port in the relay. Default value is 2404.
Common Addr of ASDU: Address in the ASDU header. Default value is 255.
Cyclic Meter Period: Number of seconds for instantaneous meterings. 0 means no spontaneous
meterings.
Synchronization event: Not implemented.
The F650 relay has a custom Binary Inputs points list, called User Map; it is common for any protocol. In the
case of IEC 104 Protocol, those points are GROUP1 and GROUP2.
The IEC 104 User Map can be configured using the EnerVista 650 Setup software in Settings>Relay
Configuration->Control Events. The User Map contains 128 Binary Inputs. To each point of the User Map,
D the user can assign any of the binary states of the F650 relay, also is possible to combine those states using
OR and NOT functions. These states are: contact inputs and outputs, virtual outputs, protection element
states, PLC states, etc. The User Map always has a size of 128 Binary Inputs. Points in the User Map that are
not configured will have a zero value in the answer.
It is possible to implement more complex logic than simple OR and NOT using the PLC Editor tool in
EnerVista 650 Setup in the menu Settings>Logic Configuration. These complex signals (Virtual Outputs)
can be assigned to the binary points in the Control Events configuration for the IEC 104 user map.

D.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST
a) SELECTION OF STANDARD ASDUS:
Process information in monitor direction
<1> Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
<2> Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
<3> Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
Process information in control direction
<46> Single command C_SC_NA_1
System information in control direction
<106> Reset process command C_RP_NA_1

The F650 relay has a custom Binary Inputs points list, called User Map; it is common for any protocol. In the
case of IEC 104 Protocol, those points are GROUP1 and GROUP2.
GROUP 1 STATUS
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ SP_NA_1 Points
1000-1063 CONTROL EVENTS
D
GROUP 2 STATUS
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ SP_NA_1 Points
1064-1127 CONTROL EVENTS
GROUP 3 STATUS
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ DP_NA_1 Points
1500-1515 SWITCHGEAR EVENTS

GROUP 5 METERING GROUP 6 METERING

POINT DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ ME_NC_1 Points M_ ME_NC_1 Points
2000 Phasor Ia Primary 2027 Phase A Apparent Pwr
2001 Phasor Ib Primary 2028 Phase A Real Pwr
2002 Phasor Ic Primary 2029 Phase B Reactive Pwr
2003 Phasor Ig Primary 2030 Phase B Apparent Pwr
2004 Phasor Isg Primary 2031 Phase B Real Pwr
2005 Phasor In Primary 2032 Phase C Reactive Pwr
2006 RMS Ia Primary 2033 Phase C Apparent Pwr
2007 RMS Ib Primary 2034 Phase C Real Pwr
2008 RMS Ic Primary 2035 3 Phase Reactive Pwr
2009 RMS Ig Primary 2036 3 Phase Apparent Pwr
2010 RMS Isg Primary 2037 3 Phase Real Pwr
2011 I0 Primary 2038 Phase A Power Factor
2012 I1 Primary 2039 Phase B Power Factor
2013 I2 Primary 2040 Phase C Power Factor
2014 V0 Primary 2041 3 Phase Power Factor
2015 V1 Primary 2042 Line Frequency Primary
2016 V2 Primary 2043 Bus Frequency Primary
2017 Vab Primary 2044 Vx Primary
2018 Vbc Primary 2045 Positive MVarhour
2019 Vca Primary 2046 Negative MVarhour
2020 Vn Primary 2047 Positive MWatthour
2021 Va Primary 2048 Negative MWatthour
2022 Vb Primary
D 2023 Vc Primary
2024 VL Primary
2025 VBB Primary
2026 Phase A Reactive Pwr
b) OPERATIONS IN IEC 60870-5-104 FOR F650

There are 24 available operation in F650 device, they must be configured using EnerVista 650 Setup in the
menu “Setting > Relay Configuration > Operations”.
ASDU address must start with 3000, the addresses for operation are from 3000 to 3011. The operations go
from 0 to 23. Subtracting 3000 we obtain a number between 0 and 11, this number is multiplied by two, and
plus 1 if the operation is ON.
The date in the answer is the same as the received in the command.
The following ASDUS are answered to:
<45> Single command C_SC_NA_1
<46>Double command C_DC_NA_1
<58> Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1
<59>Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1

Table D–1: OPERATIONS:
OPERATIONS
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_SC_NA_1
3000 – 3011 Command OFF
3000 – 3011 Command ON
Table D–2: CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION:
CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_SC_NA_1
0 Set Date
The relay date is synchronized after performing this command.
Table D–3: RESET OF PROCESS
RESET OF PROCESS
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_RP_NA_1
0 Reset of Process
D
QRP_RESET_GRAL: General reset of process.
Table D–4: ACQUISITION OF TRANSMISSION DELAY:
DELAY ADQUISITION
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_CS_NA_1
0 Delay Acquisition


APPENDIX E E.1 FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC
APPENDIX E E.1FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC E.1.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
GE Power Management F650_F2G1_1_V180.aut (MAIN) EnerVista F650 Setup
LEDS AND OUTPUTS BOOLEANS
PICKUPS
110
PH TOC1 HIGH PKP 46
111 325
VO_053_51P_PKP
PH TOC2 HIGH PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
112 inOR2
PH TOC3 HIGH PKP
322 inOR3
PH TOC1 LOW PKP inOR4
323
PH TOC2 LOW PKP inOR5
324 inOR6
PH TOC3 LOW PKP
107
45
PH IOC1 HIGH PKP 11
VO_051_50PH_PKP
108 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH IOC2 HIGH PKP
inOR2
109
PH IOC3 HIGH PKP inOR3
104 44
PH IOC1 LOW PKP 10
VO_050_50PL_PKP
PH IOC2 LOW PKP
106 inOR2
PH IOC3 LOW PKP inOR3

188 216
THERMAL1 ALARM 191
VO_001_THERMAL_ALARM
OVERCURRENT
PICKUPS THERMAL2 ALARM
inOR2
190
THERMAL3 ALARM inOR3
217 220
VO_050_50PL_PKP 312
VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_051_50PH_PKP
inOR2
219
VO_053_51P_PKP
207
inOR3 E
210
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP 203
VO_005_51N_PKP
NEUTRAL TOC2 PKP
411 inOR2
NEUTRAL TOC3 PKP inOR3

204
209
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP 202
VO_004_50N_PKP
NEUTRAL IOC2 PKP
inOR2
206
NEUTRAL IOC3 PKP inOR3
222 221
VO_005_51N_PKP OR 224
223 VO_008_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_004_50N_PKP
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller E-1

E.1 FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC APPENDIX E
101 43
GROUND TOC1 PKP 1
VO_049_51G_PKP
GROUND TOC2 PKP
inOR2
103
GROUND TOC3 PKP inOR3
98
GROUND IOC1 PKP 42
0
VO_048_50G_PKP
99 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
GROUND IOC2 PKP
inOR2
100
GROUND IOC3 PKP inOR3
226 225
VO_049_51G_PKP OR 227
228 VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_048_50G_PKP
197 201
SENS GND TOC1 PKP 193
VO_003_51SG_PKP
SENS GND TOC2 PKP
inOR2
199
SENS GND TOC3 PKP inOR3
194
200
SENS GND IOC1 PKP 192
VO_002_50SG_PKP
SENS GND IOC2 PKP
inOR2
196
SENS GND IOC3 PKP inOR3
179
ISOLATED GND1 PKP 178
177
VO_043_50IG_PKP
OVERCURRENT 180 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PICKUPS ISOLATED GND2 PKP
181 inOR2
ISOLATED GND3 PKP inOR3

229
233
VO_002_50SG_PKP 232
VO_010_SENSITIVE_GROUND_PKP
VO_003_51SG_PKP
inOR2
231
E VO_043_50IG_PKP
212
inOR3
215
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP 211
VO_006_I2 _TOC_PKP
NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP
inOR2
214
NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP inOR3
235
VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
236 314
VO_008_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
237
inOR2
VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
234
238 inOR3
VO_011_ALL_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_010_SENSITIVE_GROUND_PKP inOR4
239
VO_006_I2_TOC_PKP inOR5
315 inOR6
VO_001_THERMAL_ALARM
E-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

92
40
PHASE UV1 PKP 2
VO_045_27P_PKP
93 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PHASE UV2 PKP
94 inOR2
PHASE UV3 PKP inOR3

95
41
PHASE OV1 PKP 3
VO_046_59P_PKP
96 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PHASE OV2 PKP
inOR2
97
PHASE OV3 PKP inOR3
241
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP 260
240
VO_012_59NH_PKP
NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP
243 inOR2
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP
inOR3
244
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP 261
256
VO_013_59NL_PKP
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP
246 inOR2
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP inOR3

247
262
AUXILIARY UV1 PKP 258
VO_014_27X_PKP
VOLTAGE AUXILIARY UV2 PKP
249 inOR2
PICKUPS
AUXILIARY UV3 PKP inOR3
250
263
AUXILIARY OV1 PKP 257
VO_015_59X_PKP
AUXILIARY OV2 PKP
inOR2
252
AUXILIARY OV3 PKP inOR3
253
264
NEG SEQ OV1 PKP 259
VO_016_V2_OV_PKP
NEG SEQ OV2 PKP
255 inOR2
E
NEG SEQ OV3 PKP inOR3
271
VO_045_27P_PKP
268 265
273
VO_014_27X_PKP VO_017_ALL_VOLTAGE_PKP
In OR1 OR7 OutOR1
272
VO_046_59P_PKP In OR2
266 In OR3
VO_012_59NH_PKP
267 In OR4
VO_013_59NL_PKP In OR5
269
VO_015_59X_PKP In OR6
270 In OR7
VO_016_V2_OV_PKP

113
47
OVERFREQ1 PKP 25
114 VO_054_81O_PKP
inOR1 OR3 outOR1
OVERFREQ2 PKP
inOR2
115
OVERFREQ3 PKP inOR3
116
48
UNDERFREQ1 PKP 26
FREQUENCY VO_055_81U_PKP
PICKUPS 117 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
UNDERFREQ2 PKP
inOR2
118
UNDERFREQ3 PKP inOR3
49 27
VO_054_81O_PKP OR 51
50 VO_056_ALL_FREQUENCY_PKP
VO_055_81U_PKP
276
BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP 279
275
VO_018_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_PKP
BROKEN
BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP
CONDUCTOR inOR2
278
BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP inOR3
349
FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP 355
350 348
VO_023_FORWARD_POWER_PKP
FWD PWR1 STG2 PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
351
inOR2
FWD PWR2 STG1 PKP
FORWARD 352 inOR3
POWER
FWD PWR2 STG2 PKP
inOR4
353
FWD PWR3 STG1 PKP inOR5
354 inOR6
FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP
394
372
DIR PWR1 STG PKP 375
VO_025_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_PKP
DIRECTIONAL
POWER DIR PWR2 STG PKP
374 inOR2
E DIR PWR3 STG PKP

376
inOR3
378
VO_023_FORWARD_POWER_PKP OR 380
POWER 377 VO_026_POWER_PKP
VO_025_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_PKP
397 400
396
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP VO_029_LOCKED_ROTOR_PKP
LOCKED
ROTOR LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP
399 inOR2
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP
inOR3
280 91
409
VO_011_ALL_OVERCURRENT_PKP VO_085_GENERAL_PKP
VO_017_ALL_VOLTAGE_PKP
282 inOR2
VO_056_ALL_FREQUENCY_PKP
283
GENERAL inOR3
PICKUP VO_018_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_PKP
381 inOR4
VO_026_POWER_PKP
410 inOR5
VO_029_LOCKED_ROTOR_PKP
inOR6

TRIPS
119
PH TOC1 HIGH OP 52
120 318
VO_057_51P_TRIP
PH TOC2 HIGH OP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
121
inOR2
PH TOC3 HIGH OP
319 inOR3
PH TOC1 LOW OP inOR4

320
PH TOC2 LOW OP inOR5
321 inOR6
PH TOC3 LOW OP
122
PH IOC1 HIGH OP 53
12
VO_058_50 PH_TRIP
PH IOC2 HIGH OP
inOR2
124
PH IOC3 HIGH OP inOR3
125
54
PH IOC1 LOW OP 32
VO_059_50 PL_TRIP
PH IOC2 LOW OP
inOR2
127
PH IOC3 LOW OP inOR3
131
56
THERMAL1 OP 13
VO_062_THERMAL_TRIP
THERMAL2 OP
inOR2
133
OVERCURRENT THERMAL3 OP inOR3
TRIPS
286
285
VO_057_51P_TRIP 313
VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
VO_058_50 PH_TRIP
inOR2
288
VO_059_50 PL_TRIP inOR3
137
58
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
139 inOR1
8
OR3 outOR1
VO_065_51N_TRIP E
NEUTRAL TOC2 OP
138 inOR2
NEUTRAL TOC3 OP inOR3

134
57
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP 7
VO_064_50N_TRIP
NEUTRAL IOC2 OP
inOR2
136
NEUTRAL IOC3 OP inOR3
60 9
VO_064_50N_TRIP OR 59
61 VO_066_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
VO_065_51N_TRIP
143
GROUND TOC1 OP 62
14
VO_067_51G_TRIP
GROUND TOC2 OP
145 inOR2
GROUND TOC3 OP inOR3

140
63
GROUND IOC1 OP 15
VO_068_50G_TRIP
GROUND IOC2 OP
inOR2
142
GROUND IOC3 OP inOR3
65 16
VO_067_51G_TRIP OR 64
66 VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
VO_068_50G_TRIP
149
SENS GND TOC1 OP 67
18
VO_070_51 SG_TRIP
SENS GND TOC2 OP
inOR2
151
SENS GND TOC3 OP inOR3
146
68
SENS GND IOC1 OP 17
VO_071_50SG_TRIP
SENS GND IOC2 OP
inOR2
148
SENS GND IOC3 OP inOR3
183
186
ISOLATED GND1 OP 182
VO_044_50IG_TRIP
ISOLATED GND2 OP
OVERCURRENT
inOR2
TRIPS 185
ISOLATED GND3 OP inOR3
70
69
VO_070_51SG_TRIP 176
VO_072_SENSITIVE_GROUND_TRIP
71 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
VO_071_50SG_TRIP
inOR2
187
VO_044_50IG_TRIP inOR3
128
55
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP 4
VO_061_I2_TOC_TRIP
NEG SEQ TOC2 OP
inOR2
130
E NEG SEQ TOC3 OP
290
inOR3
VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
291 316
VO_066_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_TRIPinOR1 OR6 outOR1
292
inOR2
VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
293 inOR3
VO_072_SENSITIVE_GROUND_TRIP
inOR4
294
289
VO_061_I2_TOC_TRIP inOR5
VO_020_ALL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
317
inOR6
VO_062_THERMAL_TRIP

152
72
PHASE UV1 OP 5
VO_073_27P_TRIP
PHASE UV2 OP
154 inOR2
PHASE UV3 OP inOR3

155
73
PHASE OV1 OP 6
VO_074_59P_TRIP
PHASE OV2 OP
inOR2
157
PHASE OV3 OP inOR3
158
74
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP 19
VO_075_59 NH_TRIP
NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP
inOR2
160
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP inOR3
161
75
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP 20
VO_076_59 NL_TRIP
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP
inOR2
163
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP inOR3
164
76
AUXILIARY OV1 OP 21
VO_077_59X_TRIP
AUXILIARY OV2 OP
166 inOR2
VOLTAGE
TRIPS AUXILIARY OV3 OP inOR3
167
77
AUXILIARY UV1 OP 22
VO_078_27X_TRIP
AUXILIARY UV2 OP
169 inOR2
AUXILIARY UV3 OP inOR3

296
299
NEG SEQ OV1 OP 295
VO_021_V2_OV_TRIP
NEG SEQ OV2 OP
298 inOR2 E
NEG SEQ OV3 OP inOR3
79
VO_073_27P_TRIP
84 301
VO_078_27X_TRIP InOR1 OR7 OutOR1
80
InOR2
VO_074_59P_TRIP
81 InOR3
VO_075_59 NH_TRIP InOR4
82
InOR5 78
VO_076_59 NL_TRIP
VO_079_ALL_VOLTAGE_TRIP
83 InOR6
VO_077_59X_TRIP
InOR7
300
VO_021_V2_OV_TRIP


170
85
OVERFREQ1 OP 34
VO_080_81O_TRIP
OVERFREQ2 OP
172 inOR2
OVERFREQ3 OP inOR3
173
86
UNDERFREQ1 OP 37
FREQUENCY VO_081_81U_TRIP
TRIPS
UNDERFREQ2 OP
inOR2
175
UNDERFREQ3 OP inOR3
88 38
VO_080_81O_TRIP OR 87
89 VO_082_ALL_FREQUENCY_TRIP
VO_081_81U_TRIP
304
BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP 307
303
VO_022_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP
BROKEN
CONDUCTOR BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP
inOR2
306
BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP inOR3
359
FWD PWR1 STG1 OP 365
360 358
VO_024_FORWARD_POWER_TRIP
FWD PWR1 STG2 OP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
361 inOR2
FWD PWR2 STG1 OP
FORWARD inOR3
362
POWER
FWD PWR2 STG2 OP inOR4
363
inOR5
FWD PWR3 STG1 OP
364 inOR6
FWD PWR3 STG2 OP
383
387
DIR PWR1 STG OP 386
VO_027_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_TRIP
DIRECTIONAL
DIR PWR2 STG OP
POWER inOR2
385
E DIR PWR3 STG OP
389
inOR3
391
VO_024_FORWARD_POWER_TRIP OR 392
POWER
390 VO_028_POWER_TRIP
VO_027_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_TRIP
403 406
402
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TRIP
LOCKED
ROTOR LOCKED ROTOR2 OP
405 inOR2
LOCKED ROTOR3 OP
inOR3
308 90
407
VO_020_ALL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
VO_079_ALL_VOLTAGE_TRIP
311 inOR2
VO_082_ALL_FREQUENCY_TRIP
GENERAL 309 inOR3
TRIP VO_022_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP
393 inOR4
VO_028_POWER_TRIP
408 inOR5
VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TRIP
inOR6

APPENDIX F F.1 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
APPENDIX F F.1FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION F.1.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >SERIAL PORTS
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER

VALUE
Baud rate for COM 1 COM1 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300 : 115200]
Baud rate for COM 2 COM2 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300 : 115200]
Parity for serial COM ports Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >NETWORK (ETHERNET)

NETWORK (ETHERNET)1 > NETWORK (ETHERNET)2

VALUE
1st octec of IP address IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octec of IP address IP Address Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octec of IP address IP Address Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octec of IP address IP Address Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
1st octec of Netmask Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octec of Netmask Netmask Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octec of Netmask Netmask Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octec of Netmask Netmask Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
1st octec of Gateway Gateway IP Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octec of Gateway Gateway IP Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octec of Gateway Gateway IP Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octec of Gateway Gateway IP Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >MODBUS PROTOCOL

USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE VALUE
Modbus Address
Slave address for COM1 COM1 254 N/A [1 : 255]
Modbus Address
Slave address for COM2 254 N/A [1 : 255]
COM2
Modbus port number for Modbus TCP/ Modbus Port Number 502 N/A [0 : 65535]
IP
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller F-1

F.1 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION APPENDIX F
PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >DNP3 SLAVE

USER
Communications port assigned to the
DNP protocol Physical Port NONE N/A [COM1:COM2:NETWORK]
DNP slave address Address 255 N/A [0 : 65534]

1st Octect of IP address of DNP
master 1 IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd Octect of IP address of DNP
IP Addr Client1 Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
master 1
3nd Octect of IP address of DNP IP Addr Client1 Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
master 1
4th Octect of IP address of DNP
master 2
master 2

master 2
1st Octect of IP address of DNP IP Addr Client3 Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
master 3

master 3
4th Octect of IP address of DNP IP Addr Client3 Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
master 3
master 4
master 4
master 4
master 4

master 4
F TCP/UDP port number for DNP over
Ethernet
TCP/UDP Port 20000 N/A [0 : 65535]
Unsolicited responses permission Unsol Resp Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Time out to confirm an unsolicited Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 1s [0 : 60]
response
Number of retransmition of an unsol
resp w/o confirmation Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 N/A [0 : 255]
Address to which all unsolicited

Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 N/A [0 : 65519]
responses are sent
Scale for currents Current Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-

0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Scale for voltages Voltage Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-

0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
F-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >DNP3 SLAVE (CONT.)

USER
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for power Power Scale Factor 1 N/A 0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for energy Energy Scale Factor 1 N/A 0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Other Scale factor Other Scale Factor 1 N/A 0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Default deadband for Current Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Current Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Voltage Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Voltage Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Power Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Power Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Energy Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Energy Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Other Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Other Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Size (in bytes) for message Msg Fragment Size 240 1 byte [30 : 2048]
fragmentation
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 7 CTL EVENTS 97- N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list 112
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 8 CTL EVENTS 113- N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list 128
F
Size customization and change of
DNP Binary Inputs point list Binary Input Block 9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 N/A [See DNP note2]
Size customization and change of SWITCHGEAR 9-

DNP Binary Inputs point list Binary Input Block 10 16 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP NOTES
Note 1: Scale Factor Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times
[NOT USED, CTL EVENTS 1-16, CTL EVENTS 17-32, CTL EVENTS 33-48,CTL EVENTS 49-
Note 2: Binary Input Block Selection: 64, CTL EVENTS 65-80, CTL EVENTS 81-96, CTL EVENTS 97-112, CTL EVENTS 113-128,
SWITCHGEAR 1-8, SWITCHGEAR 9-16]

PRODUCT SETUP>COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >IEC 870-5-104

USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE
Enable or disable the protocol Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
operation
Listening TCP port in the relay TCP Port 2404 N/A [0 : 65535]
Common Addr of
Address in the ASDU header 255 N/A [0 : 65535]
ASDU
Number of seconds for instantaneous Cyclic Meter Period 0 1s [0 : 3600]
meterings
Not implemented Synchronization Event 0 N/A [0 : 3600]
IEC 870-5-104 NOTES

Note 1: Cyclic Meter Period 0 value means no spontaneous meterings
SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > FAULT REPORT

USER
Positive sequence impedance module Pos Seq Module 3.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 250.00]
Positive sequence impedance angle Pos Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Zero sequence impedance module Zero Seq Module 9.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 750.00]
Zero sequence impedance angle Zero Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Line length Line Length 100.0 0.1 [0.0 : 2000.0]
Display fault on HMI Show Fault On HMI DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

PRODUCT SETUP > MODBUS USER MAP

USER
VALUE
Address 00 for Modbus user map Address 00 0 N/A [0000 : FFFF]
... ... ...
SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > OSCILLOGRAPHY

USER
Function Permission Function ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Prefault Trigger Position 30 1% [5 : 95]
Samples per cycle Samples/Cycle 64 N/A [4 – 8 – 16 –32 – 64]
Maximum number of oscillos Max. Number Osc. 4 1 oscillo [1 : 20]
Automatic oscillography overwrite Automatic Overwrite DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > DATA LOGGER

USER
Data logger Rate Data Logger Rate 1s N/A [1 s, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min,
20 min, 30 min, 60 min.]
Data Logger analog channels X Data Logger Chnl X None N/A
SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > DEMAND

USER
Function permission Demand Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
[BLOCK INTERVAL -
CRNT Demand THERMAL ROLLING DEMAND -
Demand method for current values N/A
Method EXPONENTIAL
THERMAL
EXPONENTIAL]
[BLOCK INTERVAL -
Demand method for Power values POWER Demand THERMAL N/A ROLLING DEMAND -
Method EXPONENTIAL
THERMAL
EXPONENTIAL]
Demand interval Demand Interval 5 Minutes N/A [5 – 10 – 15 – 20– 30–60] F
Trigger Enabled Trigger Enabled DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > GENERAL SETTINGS

USER
VALUE
Phase CT ratio Phase CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Ground CT ratio Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Sensitive ground CT ratio Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT ratio Phase VT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT connection Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Rated voltage Nominal Voltage 100.0 0.1 [1.0 : 250.0]
Rated Frequency Nominal Frequency 50 Hz Hz [50-60]
Phase rotation Phase Rotation ABC N/A [ABC – ACB]
Frequency reference Frequency Reference VI N/A [VI-VII-VIII]
Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Voltage VX N/A [VX – VN]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > FLEX CURVES

FLEX CURVES A > FLEX CURVES B> FLEX CURVES C > FLEX CURVES D
USER
VALUE
… … … 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]

SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER > BREAKER SETTINGS

USER
VALUE
Number of Switchgear selected as Number of Switchgear 1 1 [1 : 16]
breaker
0.01(KA)2
Maximum value of KI2t Maximum KI2t 9999.99 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
KI2t integration time KI2t Integ. Time 0.03 0.01s [0.03 : 0.25]
Maximum number of openings Maximum Openings 9999 1 [0 : 9999]
Maximum Openings in one hour Max.Openings 1 hour 40 1 [1 : 60]
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER > BREAKER MAINTENANCE

USER
0.01 (KA)2
KI2t Counter Phase A KI2t BKR Ph A Cnt 0.00 [0.00 : 9999.99]
s
KI2t Counter Phase B KI2t BKR Ph B Cnt 0.00 0.01 (KA)2 [0.00 : 9999.99]
s
0.01 (KA)2
KI2t Counter Phase C KI2t BKR Ph C Cnt 0.00 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
Openings counter BKR Openings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]

Closings counter BKR Closings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHGEAR

USER
VALUE
Snapshot Event generation for Snapshot Events
DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
switchgear #1 SWGR 1
Snapshot Event generation for Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
switchgear #3 SWGR 3 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Snapshot Event generation for
switchgear #9
Snapshot Events
SWGR 9 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED] F



> PHASE TOC HIGH > PHASE TOC HIGH 1> PHASE TOC HIGH 2 > PHASE TOC HIGH 3
> PHASE TOC LOW > PHASE TOC LOW 1 > PHASE TOC LOW 2 > PHASE TOC LOW 3
USER
VALUE
[INSTANTANEOUS –
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A LINEAR]
Voltage Restraint Voltage Restraint DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

> PHASE IOC HIGH > PHASE IOC HIGH 1> PHASE IOC HIGH 2 > PHASE IOC HIGH 3
> PHASE IOC LOW > PHASE IOC LOW 1 > PHASE IOC LOW 2 > PHASE IOC LOW 3
USER
VALUE
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [Phasor – RMS]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > PHASE CURRENT > PHASE DIRECTIONAL >
PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1> PHASE DIRECTIONAL 2 > PHASE DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Block logic Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
F SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > PHASE CURRENT > THERMAL MODEL >
THERMAL MODEL 1> THERMAL MODEL 2 > THERMAL MODEL 3

VALUE
Heating constant Heat Time Constant 6.0 0.1 min [3.0 : 600.0]
0.01 times
Cooling constant Cool Time Constant 2.00 Heat Time [1.00 : 6.00]
Ct.
Alarm level Alarm Level 80.0 0.10% [1.0 : 110.0]

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC 1> NEUTRAL TOC 2 > NEUTRAL TOC 3
USER
[INSTANTANEOUS –
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL IOC
NEUTRAL IOC 1> NEUTRAL IOC 2 > NEUTRAL IOC 3
USER
VALUE
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL >
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1> NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 2 > NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
VALUE
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND TOC
GROUND TOC 1> GROUND TOC 2 > GROUND TOC 3
USER
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED] F
[INSTANTANEOUS –
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A
LINEAR]

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND IOC
GROUND IOC 1> GROUND IOC 2 > GROUND IOC 3
USER
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND DIRECTIONAL >
GROUND DIRECTIONAL 1> GROUND DIRECTIONAL 2 > GROUND DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
VALUE
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND TOC
SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 1> SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 3

VALUE
[INSTANTANEOUS –
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A
LINEAR]

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND IOC
SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 1> SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 3
USER
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > ISOLATED GROUND IOC
ISOLATED GROUND IOC 1> ISOLATED GROUND IOC 2 > ISOLATED GROUND IOC 3
USER
VALUE
Function Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
High Voltage level Vh Level 20 1V [2 : 70]
Low Current level Il LEVEL 0.005 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Low Voltage level Vl LEVEL 2 1V [2 : 70]
High Current level Ih LEVEL 0.025 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Operation time Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Deviation time to instantaneous Time to inst 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL >
SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 1> SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC >
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 1> NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 2 > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 3
USER
VALUE F
[INSTANTANEOUS –

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE UV >
PHASE UV 1> PHASE UV 2 > PHASE UV 3
USER
Input mode Mode PHASE-PHASE N/A [PHASE-PHASE, PHASE-

GROUND]
[DEFINITE TIME –
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A
INVERSE TIME]
Time Dial Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Minimum Voltage Threshold Minimum Voltage 5 1V [0 : 300]
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A [ANY PHASE – TWO

PHASES – ALL PHASES]
Supervision by breaker status Supervised by 52 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE OV >
PHASE OV 1> PHASE OV 2 > PHASE OV 3
USER
VALUE
[ANY PHASE – TWO
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A
PHASES – ALL PHASES]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS >

>NEUTRAL OV HIGH > NEUTRAL OV HIGH 1> NEUTRAL OV HIGH 2 > NEUTRAL OV HIGH 3
>NEUTRAL OV LOW > NEUTRAL OV LOW 1> NEUTRAL OV LOW 2 > NEUTRAL OV LOW 3

VALUE
F

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV >

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV 1> NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV 2 > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV 3
USER
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > AUXILIARY UV >

AUXILIARY UV 1> AUXILIARY UV 2 > AUXILIARY UV 3
USER
[DEFINITE TIME –
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A INVERSE TIME]
Time Dial Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > POWER > FORWARD POWER

FORWARD POWER 1> FORWARD POWER 2 > FORWARD POWER 3
USER
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > POWER > DIRECTIONAL POWER>

DIRECTIONAL POWER 1> DIRECTIONAL POWER 2 > DIRECTIONAL POWER 3
USER
Block from off-line Blk Time After Close 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00] F
Directional Angle for stage 1 Dir Power Angle 1 0.00 1 Deg [0.00 : 359.99]
Directional Angle for stage 2 Dir Power Angle 2 0.00 1 Deg [0.00 : 359.99]

SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP

USER
VALUE
Setting Grouping Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
[GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 –
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A GROUP 3]
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > UNDERFREQUENCY

UNDERFREQUENCY 1 > UNDERFREQUENCY 2 > UNDERFREQUENCY 3
USER
VALUE
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > OVERFREQUENCY

OVERFREQUENCY 1 > OVERFREQUENCY 2 > OVERFREQUENCY 3
USER

SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SYNCHROCHECK

USER
VALUE
Dead bus voltage level Dead Bus Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live bus voltage level Live Bus Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Dead line voltage level Dead Line Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live line voltage level Live Line Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Voltage Difference Max Volt Difference 10.00 0.01 V [2.00 : 300.00]
Angle Difference Max Angle Difference 10.0 0.1 Deg [2.0 : 80.0]
Frequency Slip Max Freq Difference 20 10 mHz [10 : 5000]
Breaker Closing time Time 0.50 0.01 s [0.01 : 600.00]
Dead Line – Dead Bus Function
permission DL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Live Line – Dead Bus Function

LL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
permission
Dead Line – Live Bus Function DL-LB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
permission
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > AUTORECLOSE

VALUE
Maximum Number of shots Max Number Shots 1 N/A [1 : 4]
Reclaim time or reset lockout delay Reclaim Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reclose conditions permission Cond. Permission DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Hold time Hold Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]

USER
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED] F
BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 >BROKEN CONDUCTOR 2 >BROKEN CONDUCTOR 3
USER
VALUE
Tap Level in percentage of I2/I1 Tap 20 0.10% [20.0 : 100.0]
Trip Time Trip Delay 60 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Current Inhibition Level setting Operation Threshold 0.005 0.001 A [0.000 : 1.000]


LOCKED ROTOR 1 >LOCKED ROTOR 2 >LOCKED ROTOR 3
USER
VALUE
Full load current Full Load Current 0.5 KA [0.10 : 10.00]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.01 N/A [1.01 : 109.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0 s [0.00 : 900.00]
SETPOINT > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT I/O >

BOARD F > BOARD G > BOARD H > BOARD J
USER
[NONE,
I/O board type (available only for CIO
I/O Board Type_H NONE N/A 16 INP + 8OUT,
modules)
8 INP + 8OUT + SUPV]
Input activation voltage threshold Voltage Threshold
Group A A_X 80 1V [0 : 255]
Input activation voltage threshold Voltage Threshold

80 1V [0 : 255]
Group B B_X
Debounce time for Group A Debounce Time A_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group B Debounce Time B_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
[POSITIVE-EDGE,
Input Type_X_CCY NEGATIVE-EDGE,
Input type (CCY) POSITIVE N/A
POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE]
Delay Input
Input signal time delay 0 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Time_X_CCY (CCY)
[POSITIVE,
Output logic type Output Logic_X_0Z POSITIVE N/A
NEGATIVE]
[NORMAL,
Output type Output Type_X_0Z NORMAL N/A PULSE,
LATCH]
Pulse Output
Output pulse length Time_X_0Z 10000 1 ms [0 : 60000]

F

NOTE 2: DESCRIPTION OF X, Y AND Z IN INPUT/OUTPUT BOARDS

F, G, H or J, the I/O board name, depending on the Relay model.
X F and G are internal Relay boards, and H and J are additional boards available in CIO
modules (remote Bus CAN I/O module).
I/O BOARD TYPE
ENERVISTA 650
BOARD
ASSOCIATED DIGIT SETUP BOARD TYPE
SETTINGS
For the I/O board selection in the relay
model:
0 NONE None
1 16 INP+ 8OUT Mixed
8 INP +8 OUT Supervisio
2
+SUPV n
Is the name used for inputs in I/O boards

CCY Mixed, 16 digital inputs: CC1….CC16
Supervision: 8 digital inputs: CC1,..., CC8
0Z Is the name used for the different outputs in I/O boards, 8 outputs available for any of
the two types of board (01,…., 08)
LIST OF TIME OVERCURRENT CURVES AVAILABLE IN

F650
IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC Curve A/B/C/Long-Time Inverse/ Short-Time Inverse
IAC extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
User Curve - FlexCurve™ A/B/C/D

F.1.2 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
NOTE:
SOURCE COLUMN:
This columns allow selecting the simple or complex (OR signal or Virtual output) operand that actives the selected
elements on relay configuration
If more than one operands are selected, the relay performs an OR gate with them to activate the selected element.
SIGNAL LOGIC COLUMN:
Refers to each individual signal selected on its left. NOT legend means that the refered signal is inverted
SOURCE LOGIC COLUMN:
Refers to the whole SOURCE signal selected on its left. NOT legend means that SOURCE signal is inverted
If more than one operand were selected, the OR gate output is inverted
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>OUTPUTS
OUTPUT ID OUTPUT NAME SOURCE SIGNAL SOURCE
LOGIC LOGIC
CONT OP OPER_F_01 79 BLOCKED AR BLOCK BY LEVEL

VO_046_59P_PKP
CONT OP OPER_F_02 27/59 PKP
VO_045_27P_PKP
CONT OP OPER_F_03 50/67G PKP VO_048_50G_PKP
CONT OP OPER_F_04 51/67G PKP VO_049_51G_PKP
VO_051_50PH_PKP
CONT OP OPER_F_05 50/67P PKP
VO_050_50PL_PKP
CONT OP OPER_F_06 51/67P PKP VO_053_51P_PKP
OPERATION BIT 1
CONT OP OPER_F_07 RECLOSE
AR CLOSE BREAKER
OPERATION BIT 2
CONT OP OPER_F_08 TRIP
VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
CONT OP OPER_G_01 81U/81O TRIP VO_082_ALL_FREQUENCY_TRIP
CONT OP OPER_G_02 27/59 TRIP VO_079_ALL_OVERVOLTAGE_TRIP
CONT OP OPER_G_03 50/67G TRIP VO_068_50G_TRIP
CONT OP OPER_G_04 51/67G TRIP VO_067_51G_TRIP
VO_059_50PL_TRIP
CONT OP OPER_G_05 50/67P TRIP
VO_058_50PH_TRIP
CONT OP OPER_G_06 51/67P TRIP VO_057_51P_TRIP
CONT OP OPER_G_07 RCLS IN PROG AR RCL IN PROGRESS
CONT OP OPER_G_08 RCLS LOCKOUT AR LOCKOUT
F CONT OP RESET_F_01 Not Configured
CONT OP RESET_F_02 Not Configured
CONT OP RESET_G_01 Not Configured


SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>LEDS
LED ID LED NAME SOURCE SIGNAL SOURCE

LOGIC LOGIC
LED01 TRIP VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
LED02 50/51P TRIP VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
LED03 50/51G TRIP VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
LED04 27 TRIP VO_073_27P_TRIP
LED05 59 TRIP VO_074_59P_TRIP
LED06 PICKUP VO_085_GENERAL_PKP
LED07 50/51P PICKUP VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
LED08 50/51G PICKUP VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
LED09 27 PICKUP VO_045_27P_PKP
LED10 59 PICKUP VO_046_59P_PKP
LED11 79 READY AR READY
LED12 79 IN-PROG AR RCL IN PROGRESS
LED13 79 BLOCK AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
LED14 79 INHIBIT AR CONDS INPUT NOT
LED15 79 LOCKOUT AR LOCKOUT
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>PROTECTION ELEMENTS
PROTECTION ELEMENT SOURCE SIGNAL SOURCE

LOGIC LOGIC
LED RESET INPUT OPERATION BIT 3
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 HIGH C BLK

PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
F
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1

GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
F PH IOC2 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2

GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP NOT
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP NOT
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC5 (50G BLOCK)(CC5)
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK
GROUND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUND IOC2 BLOCK
GROUND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
GROUND IOC3 BLOCK
GROUND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
SENS GND IOC1 BLK SENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5 F
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5

GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP NOT
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP NOT
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK
GROUND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUND TOC2 BLOCK
GROUND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
GROUND TOC3 BLOCK
GROUND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
F GROUP 1 BLOCKED
SENS GND TOC1 BLOCKSENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
PHASE UV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED

NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED

THERMAL1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PHASE DIR1 BLK INP CONT IP_F_CC4 (67P BLOCK)(CC4)
LATCHED VIRT IP 9
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 9
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 9
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK INP GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUND DIR1 BLK INP
LATCHED VIRT IP 10
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUND DIR2 BLK INP
LATCHED VIRT IP 10
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
GROUND DIR3 BLK INP
LATCHED VIRT IP 10
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK
LATCHED VIRT IP 12
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 12
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 12
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PHASE OV1 BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 11
PHASE OV2 BLOCK

GROUP 2 BLOCKED F
LATCHED VIRT IP 11
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PHASE OV3 BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 11
AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
OVERFREQ1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED


UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
SETT GROUPS BLOCK Not Configured
BROKEN CONDUCT1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT2
BLK GROUP 2 BLOCKED
BROKEN CONDUCT3 GROUP 3 BLOCKED
BLK
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
ISOLATED GND1 BLK
SENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
ISOLATED GND2 BLK
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
ISOLATED GND3 BLK
SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP GROUP 1 BLOCKED
FWD PWR1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
F PH TOC2 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6

GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
DIR PWR1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
THERMAL1 A RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL1 B RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL1 C RST OPERATION BIT 4
SYNCROCHECK BLK
Not Configured
INP
CONT IP_F_CC8 (79 BLOCK)(CC8)
AR LEVEL BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 14
AR PULSE BLOCK Not Configured
AR PULSE UNBLOCK Not Configured
VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
AR INITIATE CONT IP_F_CC7 (79 INITIATE)(CC7)
LATCHED VIRT IP 13
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM NOT
AR CONDS INPUT NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 15
BKR FAIL INITIATE Not Configured
RESET KI2t COUNTERS OPERATION BIT 5
RESET BKR COUNTERS OPERATION BIT 5
GROUP 1 ACT ON Not Configured
F
FAULT REPORT TRIGG VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
CLEAR FAULT REPORTSNot Configured
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Not Configured
DEMAND RESET INP OPERATION BIT 7
FREEZE ENERGY CNT Not Configured
UNFREEZE ENERGY
Not Configured
CNT
RESET ENERGY CNT OPERATION BIT 6
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>OSCILLOGRAPHY
DIGITAL CHANNELS NAME SOURCE SIGNAL SOURCE

LOGIC LOGIC

DIG_CHANNEL#1 TRIP VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP

DIG_CHANNEL#2 50/51P TRIP VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#3 50/51G TRIP VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#4 27 TRIP VO_073_27P_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#5 59 TRIP VO_074_59P_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#6 PICKUP VO_085_GENERAL_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#7 50/51P PICKUP VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#8 50/51G PICKUP VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#9 27 PICKUP VO_045_27P_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#10 59 PICKUP VO_046_59P_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#11 79 READY AR READY
DIG_CHANNEL#12 79 IN-PROG AR RCL IN PROGRESS
DIG_CHANNEL#13 79 BLOCK AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
DIG_CHANNEL#14 79 INHIBIT AR CONDS INPUT NOT
DIG_CHANNEL#15 79 LOCKOUT AR LOCKOUT
DIG_CHANNEL#16 Not Configured
OPERATION BIT 8
OSCILLO TRIGGER OSCILLO TRIGGER
VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>OPERATIONS
OPERATION OPERATION TEXT SETTINGS VALUE/SOURCE
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) BREAKER CLOSED
FRONT KEY I Key
Operation1 CLOSE BREAKER INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 1000
CHANNELS ALL
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) Not configured
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) BREAKER OPEN
FRONT KEY O Key
Operation2 OPEN BREAKER INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 1000
CHANNELS ALL
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) Not configured
FRONT KEY Not configured
F Operation3 LEDS RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation4 THERMAL RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL


BRK COUNTERS
Operation5 RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation6 ENERGY RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation7 DEMAND RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation8 TRIGGER OSCILLO INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation9 Not configured INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT Not configured
CHANNELS Not configured
Operation10 Not configured INPUT Not configured F


F Operation17 Not configured INPUT Not configured


Operation24 Not configured INPUT Not configured F
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>CONTROL EVENTS

SIGNAL SOURCE
EVENT NAME SOURCE
LOGIC LOGIC
EV1 Not Configured
EV2 Not Configured
EV3 Not Configured
EV4 Not Configured

EV5 Not Configured

EV6 Not Configured
EV7 Not Configured
EV8 Not Configured
EV9 Not Configured
EV10 Not Configured
EV11 Not Configured
EV12 Not Configured
EV13 Not Configured
EV14 Not Configured
EV15 Not Configured
EV16 Not Configured
EV17 Not Configured
EV18 Not Configured
EV19 Not Configured
EV20 Not Configured
EV21 Not Configured
EV22 Not Configured
EV23 Not Configured
EV24 Not Configured
EV25 Not Configured
EV26 Not Configured
EV27 Not Configured
EV28 Not Configured
EV29 Not Configured
EV30 Not Configured
EV31 Not Configured
EV32 Not Configured
EV33 Not Configured
EV34 Not Configured
EV35 Not Configured
EV36 Not Configured
EV37 Not Configured
EV38 Not Configured
EV39 Not Configured
EV40 Not Configured
EV41 Not Configured
EV42 Not Configured
F EV43 Not Configured
EV44 Not Configured
EV45 Not Configured
EV46 Not Configured
EV47 Not Configured
EV48 Not Configured
EV49 Not Configured
EV50 Not Configured
EV51 Not Configured
EV52 Not Configured
EV53 Not Configured
EV54 Not Configured

EV55 Not Configured

EV56 Not Configured
EV57 Not Configured
EV58 Not Configured
EV59 Not Configured
EV60 Not Configured
EV61 Not Configured
EV62 Not Configured
EV63 Not Configured
EV64 Not Configured
EV65 Not Configured
EV66 Not Configured
EV67 Not Configured
EV68 Not Configured
EV69 Not Configured
EV70 Not Configured
EV71 Not Configured
EV72 Not Configured
EV73 Not Configured
EV74 Not Configured
EV75 Not Configured
EV76 Not Configured
EV77 Not Configured
EV78 Not Configured
EV79 Not Configured
EV80 Not Configured
EV81 Not Configured
EV82 Not Configured
EV83 Not Configured
EV84 Not Configured
EV85 Not Configured
EV86 Not Configured
EV87 Not Configured
EV88 Not Configured
EV89 Not Configured
EV90 Not Configured
EV91 Not Configured
EV92 Not Configured
EV93 Not Configured F
EV94 Not Configured
EV95 Not Configured
EV96 Not Configured
EV97 Not Configured
EV98 Not Configured
EV99 Not Configured
EV100 Not Configured


SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>SWITCHGEAR
SIGNAL SOURCE
SWITCHGEAR SETTING VALUE/SOURCE
LOGIC LOGIC
CONTACTS 52b
OPENING TIME 1000
CLOSING TIME 1000
CONTACT A
SOURCE N/A
CONTACT B CONT IP_F_CC1 (52b)(CC1)
SOURCE
OPEN TEXT 52 OPEN
ALARM NO
SWITCHGEAR 1 CLOSED TEXT 52 CLOSE
ALARM NO
F ERROR 00 TEXT 52 ERROR
ALARM N/A
ERROR 11 TEXT 52 UNDEFINED
ALARM N/A
OPENING INIT OPERATION BIT 2
CLOSING INIT OPERATION BIT 1

CONTACTS Not Configured

OPENING TIME Not Configured
CLOSING TIME Not Configured
CONTACT A
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT B
SOURCE Not Configured
OPEN TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
SWITCHGEAR 2 CLOSED TEXT Not Configured
ERROR 00 TEXT Not Configured
OPENING INIT Not Configured
CLOSING INIT Not Configured
CONTACT A Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT B
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT A
CONTACT B Not Configured
SOURCE
SWITCHGEAR 4
ALARM Not Configured F
CLOSED TEXT Not Configured


CONTACT A
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT B
SOURCE
CONTACT B
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT A
SOURCE
F SWITCHGEAR 7
ALARM
CLOSED TEXT
Not Configured
Not Configured


CONTACT A
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT B
SOURCE
CONTACT B
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT A
SOURCE
SWITCHGEAR 10


CONTACT A
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT B
SOURCE
CONTACT B
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT A
SOURCE
F SWITCHGEAR 13
ALARM
CLOSED TEXT
Not Configured
Not Configured


CONTACT A
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT B
SOURCE
CONTACT B
Not Configured
SOURCE
CONTACT A
SOURCE
SWITCHGEAR 16


APPENDIX G G.1 MISCELLANEOUS
APPENDIX G APPENDIX G. G.1MISCELLANEOUS G.1.1 F650 FIRMWARE REVISION HISTORY
FIRMWARE BOOT CHANGES DESCRIPTION MODELS DATE

VERSION PROGRAM
VERSION
1.00 2.00 First version of the product (Basic Model F1G0) F650BABF1G0HI June 28th
Full protection scheme 2002
1.11 2.00 New model F2G0 (inputs and outputs board type 2) F650BABF2G0HI October 14th
2002
1.13 2.20 Snapshot Events included (New and All) ALL December
Oscillography up to 4 records. Maximum 70 cycles at 64 samples 20th 2002
per cycle, trip programmable via PLC.
Broken Conductor protection function included.
Boot program updated through F650PC program
1.14 2.20 DNP 3.0 Level 2 protocol included, over TCP/IP and UDP/IP ALL January 22nd
IRIG_B synchronization 2003
1.20 2.25 Programmable Graphical display ALL January 28th
Calibration included to improve measurement accuracy 2003
1.30 2.25 Sensitive ground directional unit ALL March 31st
Isolated Ground directional unit (in 5th current transformer) 2003
Energy measurements
1.31 2.25 Enhancements in 60 Hz measurements ALL April 9th 2003
Extended Settings Range in Negative Sequence Overcurrent
function (46)
1.33 2.30 Forward Power function (32FP) ALL May 9th 2003
Demand
1.44 2.30 51PL function included (besides existing 51PH) ALL July 24th 2003
Control Events
Alarms
ModBus over TCP/IP
1.48 2.30 Changes in 67 units in reverse mode ALL September
ModBus TCP/IP enhancement 5th 2003
1.50 2.30 PROTECTION ALL October 31st
The following operation curves have been added to F650 2003
functionality:
IEC Long-Time Inverse
IEC Short-Time Inverse
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normally Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
Rectifier Curve
User Curve A/B/C/D - Flex Curve™
Note: User Curves allow the user to program any non-standard
curve type by selecting, point by point, the Operation time.
HARDWARE
Voltage Range:Voltage Metering Range expanded from (2 to 200
Volts) to (2 to 275V)
CIO Module: For those applications requiring a high number of
inputs and outputs, F650 units can be connected to a CIO module
(Remote CAN Bus I/O module) for using up to 2 additional boards.
COMMUNICATIONS
ModBus Protocol:
ModBus User Map
Virtual Inputs (control over internal logic variables, which can be
used in the configurable logic).
DNP 3.0 Protocol
New Metering scale factors
Switchgear bits mapped to binary points
Possibility of restricting the binary points map by setting
USER INTERFACE
G
HMI Configurable Main Screen:
The main screen offers the possibility to select the initial logo, a
simplified Metering screen showing primary values, or both.
Snapshot Events:
Possibility of viewing snapshot events from the relay display in
models without graphical display.
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller G-1

G.1 MISCELLANEOUS APPENDIX G

VERSION PROGRAM
VERSION
1.61 2.35 COMMUNICATIONS ALL April 30th
Configuration: 2004
LED Reset by communications using the configurable logic
METERING
Monitoring of phasor measurements in module and argument
REGISTER
Snapshot Events:
Possibility of reading the Snapshot events in Binary and ASCII
format via ModBus
Oscillography:
The oscillography function has been improved to offer the
possibility of creating up to a maximum of 20 oscillography records,
with possibility to create concatenated oscillographies.
Oscillography records can be obtained via communications using
serial messaging (ModBus) or Ethernet (TCP/IP or TFTP).
Fault Report:
This version incorporates the tool to visualize and store the
information from the last ten faults produced. This report can be
shown on the relay display. The fault report will be available on the
relay display and via communications, either on ModBus (serial) or
TCP/IP.
Data Logger:
It allows registering 16 channels among all the available analog
measures in the relay. The information provided by the data logger
can be obtained via TCP/IP.
USER INTERFACE
Fault Report screen on HMI:
Fault report information on display, selectable by setting
WEB SERVER
Web server tool has been upgraded to provide visualization of:
Snapshot Events
Control Events
Alarms
Oscillography
Fault report
Data Logger
Metering
1.62 2.35 Internal file management enhancement. ALL June 24th
IP Address maintenance after firmware upgrading. 2004
Latched Virtual Inputs maintenance after powering off and on the
relay.
1.70 2.35 Multilingual relay (French and English available) F650BABF1G0HIF August 5th
F650MFDF2G1LOF 2004
F650MFCF1G1LOF
1.72 2.35 COMMUNICATIONS ALL November
Multimaster DNP (3 masters) 26th 2004
METERING
Measurement enhancement
PROTECTION
Sensitive Directional Power unit is included (32)
REGISTER
Snapshot Events: Possibility to be enabled and disabled by setting.
In previous versions snapshot event generation was enabled by
default and fixed for all elements.
Using the “config file converter” tool the snapshot event settings will
be included but to their default value (disabled), user must set the
snapshot event generation to the desired value. Notice that having
snapshot event to disabled no internal signals will be recorded in
the snapshot event buffer.
USER INTERFACE
HMI
Enhanced HMI meeting EnerVista F650 Setup structure.
Multilingual Option available: The relay can be ordered in
G languages different from English, the relay always has English as
default
Languages Available now:
French/English (F in ordering code request)
English/English (former ordering code)
ENERVISTA F650 SETUP
Multilingual unit (French and English available).
WEB SERVER
Multilingual visualization of snapshot events, control events,
oscillography, fault recorder, data logger, metering.
G-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

APPENDIX G G.1 MISCELLANEOUS

VERSION PROGRAM
VERSION
1.80 2.35 USER INTERFACE ALL March 1st
HMI: 2005
New languages available: Russian and Spanish.
Russian/English (P in ordering code, basic display only)
Spanish/English (S in ordering code)
ENERVISTA F650 SETUP
New languages available: Russian and Spanish.
Passwords included in EnerVista F650 Setup (different from the
HMI ones).
WEB SERVER
Multilingual visualization of snapshot events, control events,
oscillography, fault recorder, data logger, metering. New
languages available: Russian and Spanish.
Visualization Enhancement.
COMMUNICATIONS
Modbus TCP communications enhacement.
External CAN interruptions management enhancement.
METERING
Decimal point included in PT and CT ratios.
Power Factor measurement enhancement.
PROTECTION
Function 48 included.
I2/I1 setting to select the minimum inhibition current level of the
unit .
TOC operation level at 1.03 times the pickup (1.05 in previous
releases).
Neutral units measures management enhancement.
Startup Enhancement.
REGISTER
Time Stamp for switchgear control events enhancement.
1.82 4.00 File system management enhancement in boot code 4.00 ALL October 17th
Measurements enhancement in 1.82 firmware version 2005
Versions 1.8X can not be upgraded to 2.XX firmware version
without hardware change.
2.20 4.00 USER INTERFACE All models, November
ENERVISTA F650 SETUP· excepting Options 4 25th 2005
- Data Logger visualization changes.· and 5 for I/O boards.
- File name available in "Config file converter" tool. Option 6 for IEC
COMMUNICATIONS· 61850 protocol
- DNP Scale factor correction.·
- IRIGB synchronization:
- Date and time synchronization available.
- 980 ms delay correction.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS·
- Inputs Activation/Deactivation correction.·
- Voltage threshold setting range from 20 to 230 Vdc.·
- Debounce time settings:
- Timestamp before debounce time
- Setting range from 1 to 50 ms.
METERING·
- Power calculations using ARON method.·
- New measurements provided when using Delta connection
and VN as auxiliary voltage input:
- Neutral voltage available.
- Phase to ground voltages available.
- Single phase power measurements available.
PROTECTION·
- Neutral, ground and sensitive ground directional units
available with delta connection and VN as auxiliary voltage
input.·
- Minor changes in Forward Power elements.
REGISTER·
- Ground current available in Fault report.·
- Corrected 150 ms delay in Snapshot events measurements.
G
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller G-3

G.1 MISCELLANEOUS APPENDIX G
G.1.2 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY
GE Power Management, S.A. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from
factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing
the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an
authorized service center or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay, which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident, incorrect
installation, or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin
authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses
sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions
of Sale.
G-4 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Multilin f650

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Multilin f650

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

g GE Consumer & Industrial

Firmware version: 2.20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW

3. HARDWARE 3.1 MODULE DESCRIPTION

GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4. HUMAN INTERFACES, 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.5.5 AUTORECLOSE (79)....................................................................................... 5-87

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 FRONT PANEL

GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8. SECURITY 8.1 ADDING USERS

9. BOOTCODE AND 9.1 INTRODUCTION

10. COMMISSIONING 10.1 VISUAL INSPECTION

4 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10.9 CONNECTIONS FOR TESTING PROTECTION ELEMENTS

11. APPLICATION EXAMPLES 11.1 EXAMPLE1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS

12. FREQUENTLY ASKED 12.1 COMMUNICATIONS

GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

B. MODBUS PROTOCOL B.1 ACCESS TO F650 DATA

C. DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL FOR C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL SETTINGS

6 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

D. IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1 INTRODUCTION

E. FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC E.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

F. FACTORY DEFAULT F.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

G. MISCELLANEOUS G.1 F650 FIRMWARE REVISION HISTORY

GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES 1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

Figure 1–1: FRONT VIEW OF F650 UNITS

a) COMMUNICATION BOARDS WITHDRAWAL / INSERTION

GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Figure 1–2: MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION

1-2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

b) MAGNETIC MODULE TERMINALS

Figure 1–3: REAR VIEW OF F650 UNIT

GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Figure 1–4: IDENTIFICATION LABEL (A4455P6)

1-4 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AMERICA, ASIA AND AUSTRALIA:

GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller 1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.1.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Figure 1–5: LOCATION OF GROUNDING SCREW

1-6 F650 Digital Bay Controller GE Multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.2OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO 650 FAMILY OF RELAYS

1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE